 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| hitachi single-chip microcomputer h8/3048 series h8/3048 hd64f3048, hd6473048, hd6433048 h8/3047 hd6433047 h8/3045 hd6433045 h8/3044 hd6433044 hardware manual ade-602-073b
preface the h8/3048 series is a series of high-performance microcontrollers that integrate system supporting functions together with an h8/300h cpu core. the h8/300h cpu has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. it can address a 16-mbyte linear address space. the on-chip supporting functions include rom, ram, a 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu), a programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), a watchdog timer (wdt), a serial communication interface (sci), an a/d converter, a d/a converter, i/o ports, a direct memory access controller (dmac), a refresh controller, and other facilities. of the two sci channels, one has been expanded to support the iso/iec7816-3 smart card interface. functions have also been added to reduce power consumption in battery-powered applications: individual modules can be placed in standby, and the frequency of the system clock supplied to the chip can be divided down under software control. the address space is divided into eight areas. the data bus width and access cycle length can be selected independently in each area, simplifying the connection of different types of memory. seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7) are provided, offering a choice of data bus width and address space size. with these features, the h8/3048 series can be used to implement compact, high-performance systems easily. in addition to its masked-rom versions, the h8/3048 series has a ztat * 1 version with user- programmable on-chip prom and an f-ztat * 2 version with on-chip flash memory that can be programmed on-board. these versions enable users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications. this manual describes the h8/3048 series hardware. for details of the instruction set, refer to the h8/300h series programming manual. notes: 1. ztat (zero turn-around-time) is a trademark of hitachi, ltd. 2. f-ztat (flexible ztat) is a trademark of hitachi, ltd. contents section 1 overview ...................................................................................................... 1 1.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 1 1.2 block diagram............................................................................................................... .5 1.3 pin description ............................................................................................................. .. 6 1.3.1 pin arrangement............................................................................................. 6 1.3.2 pin assignments in each mode...................................................................... 7 1.3.3 pin functions .................................................................................................. 10 section 2 cpu ............................................................................................................... 15 2.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 15 2.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 15 2.1.2 differences from h8/300 cpu ....................................................................... 16 2.2 cpu operating modes.................................................................................................... 17 2.3 address space............................................................................................................... .. 18 2.4 register configuration.................................................................................................... 19 2.4.1 overview......................................................................................................... 19 2.4.2 general registers............................................................................................ 20 2.4.3 control registers ............................................................................................ 21 2.4.4 initial cpu register values ............................................................................ 22 2.5 data formats................................................................................................................ ... 23 2.5.1 general register data formats....................................................................... 23 2.5.2 memory data formats .................................................................................... 25 2.6 instruction set............................................................................................................. .... 26 2.6.1 instruction set overview ................................................................................ 26 2.6.2 instructions and addressing modes................................................................ 27 2.6.3 tables of instructions classified by function................................................. 28 2.6.4 basic instruction formats ............................................................................... 38 2.6.5 notes on use of bit manipulation instructions .............................................. 39 2.7 addressing modes and effective address calculation .................................................. 39 2.7.1 addressing modes .......................................................................................... 39 2.7.2 effective address calculation ........................................................................ 42 2.8 processing states ........................................................................................................... .46 2.8.1 overview......................................................................................................... 46 2.8.2 program execution state ................................................................................ 47 2.8.3 exception-handling state............................................................................... 47 2.8.4 exception-handling sequences ...................................................................... 49 2.8.5 bus-released state ......................................................................................... 50 2.8.6 reset state ...................................................................................................... 50 2.8.7 power-down state .......................................................................................... 50 2.9 basic operational timing ............................................................................................... 51 2.9.1 overview......................................................................................................... 51 2.9.2 on-chip memory access timing................................................................... 51 2.9.3 on-chip supporting module access timing ................................................. 53 2.9.4 access to external address space.................................................................. 54 section 3 mcu operating modes ........................................................................... 55 3.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 55 3.1.1 operating mode selection .............................................................................. 55 3.1.2 register configuration.................................................................................... 56 3.2 mode control register (mdcr) .................................................................................... 57 3.3 system control register (syscr)................................................................................. 58 3.4 operating mode descriptions......................................................................................... 60 3.4.1 mode 1 ............................................................................................................ 60 3.4.2 mode 2 ............................................................................................................ 60 3.4.3 mode 3 ............................................................................................................ 60 3.4.4 mode 4 ............................................................................................................ 60 3.4.5 mode 5 ............................................................................................................ 60 3.4.6 mode 6 ........................................................................................................... 60 3.4.7 mode 7 ........................................................................................................... 61 3.5 pin functions in each operating mode.......................................................................... 61 3.6 memory map in each operating mode.......................................................................... 61 section 4 exception handling .................................................................................. 71 4.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 71 4.1.1 exception handling types and priority.......................................................... 71 4.1.2 exception handling operation ....................................................................... 71 4.1.3 exception vector table................................................................................... 72 4.2 reset ....................................................................................................................... ........ 73 4.2.1 overview......................................................................................................... 73 4.2.2 reset sequence ............................................................................................... 73 4.2.3 interrupts after reset....................................................................................... 76 4.3 interrupts.................................................................................................................. ....... 77 4.4 trap instruction............................................................................................................ ... 78 4.5 stack status after exception handling ........................................................................... 79 4.6 notes on stack usage ..................................................................................................... 80 section 5 interrupt controller ................................................................................... 81 5.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 81 5.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 81 5.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 82 5.1.3 pin configuration............................................................................................ 83 5.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 83 5.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 8 4 5.2.1 system control register (syscr)................................................................. 84 5.2.2 interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra, iprb) ....................................... 85 5.2.3 irq status register (isr) .............................................................................. 92 5.2.4 irq enable register (ier) ............................................................................. 93 5.2.5 irq sense control register (iscr) ............................................................... 94 5.3 interrupt sources........................................................................................................... .. 95 5.3.1 external interrupts .......................................................................................... 95 5.3.2 internal interrupts ........................................................................................... 96 5.3.3 interrupt vector table ..................................................................................... 96 5.4 interrupt operation ......................................................................................................... 100 5.4.1 interrupt handling process ............................................................................. 100 5.4.2 interrupt sequence .......................................................................................... 105 5.4.3 interrupt response time................................................................................. 106 5.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ... 107 5.5.1 contention between interrupt and interrupt-disabling instruction ................ 107 5.5.2 instructions that inhibit interrupts .................................................................. 108 5.5.3 interrupts during eepmov instruction execution......................................... 108 5.5.4 notes on external interrup to during use....................................................... 108 section 6 bus controller ............................................................................................ 111 6.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 111 6.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 111 6.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 112 6.1.3 input/output pins............................................................................................ 113 6.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 113 6.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 1 14 6.2.1 bus width control register (abwcr) ......................................................... 114 6.2.2 access state control register (astcr) ........................................................ 115 6.2.3 wait control register (wcr)......................................................................... 116 6.2.4 wait state controller enable register (wcer)............................................. 117 6.2.5 bus release control register (brcr)........................................................... 118 6.2.6 chip select control register (cscr) ............................................................ 119 6.3 operation ................................................................................................................... ..... 121 6.3.1 area division.................................................................................................. 121 6.3.2 chip select signals ......................................................................................... 123 6.3.3 data bus.......................................................................................................... 124 6.3.4 bus control signal timing ............................................................................. 125 6.3.5 wait modes ..................................................................................................... 133 6.3.6 interconnections with memory (example)..................................................... 139 6.3.7 bus arbiter operation..................................................................................... 141 6.4 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ... 144 6.4.1 connection to dynamic ram and pseudo-static ram ................................ 144 6.4.2 register write timing .................................................................................... 144 6.4.3 breq input timing........................................................................................ 144 6.4.4 transition to software standby mode ............................................................ 146 section 7 refresh controller .................................................................................... 147 7.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 147 7.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 147 7.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 148 7.1.3 input/output pins............................................................................................ 149 7.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 149 7.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 1 50 7.2.1 refresh control register (rfshcr) ............................................................. 150 7.2.2 refresh timer control/status register (rtmcsr) ....................................... 153 7.2.3 refresh timer counter (rtcnt)................................................................... 155 7.2.4 refresh time constant register (rtcor) .................................................... 155 7.3 operation ................................................................................................................... ..... 156 7.3.1 overview......................................................................................................... 156 7.3.2 dram refresh control.................................................................................. 157 7.3.3 pseudo-static ram refresh control.............................................................. 172 7.3.4 interval timing ............................................................................................... 177 7.4 interrupt source ............................................................................................................ .. 183 7.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ... 183 section 8 dma controller ........................................................................................ 185 8.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 185 8.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 185 8.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 186 8.1.3 functional overview....................................................................................... 187 8.1.4 input/output pins............................................................................................ 188 8.1.5 register configuration.................................................................................... 188 8.2 register descriptions (short address mode) ................................................................. 190 8.2.1 memory address registers (mar)................................................................ 190 8.2.2 i/o address registers (ioar)........................................................................ 191 8.2.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr)..................................................... 191 8.2.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) ....................................................... 193 8.3 register descriptions (full address mode) ................................................................... 196 8.3.1 memory address registers (mar)................................................................ 196 8.3.2 i/o address registers (ioar)........................................................................ 196 8.3.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr)..................................................... 197 8.3.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) ....................................................... 199 8.4 operation ................................................................................................................... ..... 205 8.4.1 overview......................................................................................................... 205 8.4.2 i/o mode......................................................................................................... 207 8.4.3 idle mode........................................................................................................ 209 8.4.4 repeat mode................................................................................................... 212 8.4.5 normal mode.................................................................................................. 215 8.4.6 block transfer mode ...................................................................................... 218 8.4.7 dmac activation........................................................................................... 223 8.4.8 dmac bus cycle ........................................................................................... 225 8.4.9 multiple-channel operation........................................................................... 231 8.4.10 external bus requests, refresh controller, and dmac................................ 232 8.4.11 nmi interrupts and dmac ............................................................................ 233 8.4.12 aborting a dma transfer .............................................................................. 234 8.4.13 exiting full address mode............................................................................. 235 8.4.14 dmac states in reset state, standby modes, and sleep mode .................... 236 8.5 interrupts.................................................................................................................. ....... 237 8.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................. ... 238 8.6.1 note on word data transfer........................................................................... 238 8.6.2 dmac self-access ........................................................................................ 238 8.6.3 longword access to memory address registers........................................... 238 8.6.4 note on full address mode setup.................................................................. 238 8.6.5 note on activating dmac by internal interrupts .......................................... 239 8.6.6 nmi interrupts and block transfer mode ...................................................... 240 8.6.7 memory and i/o address register values ..................................................... 240 8.6.8 bus cycle when transfer is aborted .............................................................. 241 section 9 i/o ports ....................................................................................................... 243 9.1 overview.................................................................................................................... ..... 243 9.2 port 1...................................................................................................................... ......... 246 9.2.1 overview......................................................................................................... 246 9.2.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 247 9.3 port 2...................................................................................................................... ......... 249 9.3.1 overview......................................................................................................... 249 9.3.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 250 9.4 port 3...................................................................................................................... ......... 253 9.4.1 overview......................................................................................................... 253 9.4.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 253 9.5 port 4...................................................................................................................... ......... 255 9.5.1 overview......................................................................................................... 255 9.5.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 256 9.6 port 5...................................................................................................................... ......... 259 9.6.1 overview......................................................................................................... 259 9.6.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 259 9.7 port 6...................................................................................................................... ......... 262 9.7.1 overview......................................................................................................... 262 9.7.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 262 9.8 port 7...................................................................................................................... ......... 265 9.8.1 overview......................................................................................................... 265 9.8.2 register description ....................................................................................... 266 9.9 port 8...................................................................................................................... ......... 267 9.9.1 overview......................................................................................................... 267 9.9.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 268 9.10 port 9..................................................................................................................... .......... 272 9.10.1 overview......................................................................................................... 272 9.10.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 272 9.11 port a..................................................................................................................... ......... 276 9.11.1 overview......................................................................................................... 276 9.11.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 278 9.11.3 pin functions .................................................................................................. 279 9.12 port b ..................................................................................................................... ......... 284 9.12.1 overview......................................................................................................... 284 9.12.2 register descriptions...................................................................................... 286 9.12.3 pin functions .................................................................................................. 288 section 10 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) ..................................................... 295 10.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 295 10.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 295 10.1.2 block diagrams .............................................................................................. 298 10.1.3 input/output pins............................................................................................ 303 10.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 304 10.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 307 10.2.1 timer start register (tstr) .......................................................................... 307 10.2.2 timer synchro register (tsnc) .................................................................... 308 10.2.3 timer mode register (tmdr)....................................................................... 310 10.2.4 timer function control register (tfcr) ...................................................... 313 10.2.5 timer output master enable register (toer) .............................................. 315 10.2.6 timer output control register (tocr)......................................................... 318 10.2.7 timer counters (tcnt) ................................................................................. 319 10.2.8 general registers (gra, grb) ..................................................................... 320 10.2.9 buffer registers (bra, brb) ........................................................................ 321 10.2.10 timer control registers (tcr) ...................................................................... 322 10.2.11 timer i/o control register (tior)................................................................ 324 10.2.12 timer status register (tsr)........................................................................... 326 10.2.13 timer interrupt enable register (tier)......................................................... 329 10.3 cpu interface .............................................................................................................. ... 331 10.3.1 16-bit accessible registers ............................................................................ 331 10.3.2 8-bit accessible registers .............................................................................. 333 10.4 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 335 10.4.1 overview......................................................................................................... 335 10.4.2 basic functions............................................................................................... 336 10.4.3 synchronization .............................................................................................. 346 10.4.4 pwm mode .................................................................................................... 348 10.4.5 reset-synchronized pwm mode ................................................................... 352 10.4.6 complementary pwm mode.......................................................................... 355 10.4.7 phase counting mode..................................................................................... 365 10.4.8 buffering......................................................................................................... 367 10.4.9 itu output timing......................................................................................... 374 10.5 interrupts................................................................................................................. ........ 376 10.5.1 setting of status flags .................................................................................... 376 10.5.2 clearing of status flags.................................................................................. 378 10.5.3 interrupt sources and dma controller activation ........................................ 379 10.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 380 section 11 programmable timing pattern controller ......................................... 395 11.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 395 11.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 395 11.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 396 11.1.3 tpc pins ......................................................................................................... 397 11.1.4 registers ......................................................................................................... 398 11.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 399 11.2.1 port a data direction register (paddr) ...................................................... 399 11.2.2 port a data register (padr) ......................................................................... 399 11.2.3 port b data direction register (pbddr) ...................................................... 400 11.2.4 port b data register (pbdr) ......................................................................... 400 11.2.5 next data register a (ndra)....................................................................... 401 11.2.6 next data register b (ndrb) ....................................................................... 403 11.2.7 next data enable register a (ndera) ........................................................ 405 11.2.8 next data enable register b (nderb)......................................................... 406 11.2.9 tpc output control register (tpcr)............................................................ 407 11.2.10 tpc output mode register (tpmr).............................................................. 410 11.3 operation ................................................................................................................ ........... 412 11.3.1 overview......................................................................................................... 412 11.3.2 output timing................................................................................................. 413 11.3.3 normal tpc output........................................................................................ 414 11.3.4 non-overlapping tpc output........................................................................ 416 11.3.5 tpc output triggering by input capture....................................................... 418 11.4 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 419 11.4.1 operation of tpc output pins........................................................................ 419 11.4.2 note on non-overlapping output .................................................................. 419 section 12 watchdog timer ........................................................................................ 421 12.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 421 12.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 421 12.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 422 12.1.3 pin configuration............................................................................................ 422 12.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 423 12.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 424 12.2.1 timer counter (tcnt)................................................................................... 424 12.2.2 timer control/status register (tcsr)........................................................... 425 12.2.3 reset control/status register (rstcsr) ...................................................... 427 12.2.4 notes on register access ............................................................................... 429 12.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 431 12.3.1 watchdog timer operation............................................................................. 431 12.3.2 interval timer operation ................................................................................ 432 12.3.3 timing of setting of overflow flag (ovf) .................................................... 433 12.3.4 timing of setting of watchdog timer reset bit (wrst) ............................. 434 12.4 interrupts................................................................................................................. ........ 435 12.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 435 section 13 serial communication interface ........................................................... 437 13.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 437 13.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 437 13.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 439 13.1.3 input/output pins............................................................................................ 440 13.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 440 13.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 441 13.2.1 receive shift register (rsr) ......................................................................... 441 13.2.2 receive data register (rdr)......................................................................... 441 13.2.3 transmit shift register (tsr) ........................................................................ 442 13.2.4 transmit data register (tdr)........................................................................ 442 13.2.5 serial mode register (smr) .......................................................................... 443 13.2.6 serial control register (scr) ........................................................................ 447 13.2.7 serial status register (ssr) ........................................................................... 451 13.2.8 bit rate register (brr) ................................................................................. 455 13.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 464 13.3.1 overview......................................................................................................... 464 13.3.2 operation in asynchronous mode.................................................................. 466 13.3.3 multiprocessor communication ..................................................................... 475 13.3.4 synchronous operation .................................................................................. 482 13.4 sci interrupts............................................................................................................. ..... 491 13.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 492 section 14 smart card interface ................................................................................ 497 14.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 497 14.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 497 14.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 498 14.1.3 input/output pins............................................................................................ 499 14.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 499 14.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 500 14.2.1 smart card mode register (scmr)............................................................... 500 14.2.2 serial status register (ssr) ........................................................................... 501 14.2.3 serial mode register (smr) .......................................................................... 503 14.2.4 serial control register (scr) ........................................................................ 504 14.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 505 14.3.1 overview......................................................................................................... 505 14.3.2 pin connections .............................................................................................. 505 14.3.3 data format .................................................................................................... 506 14.3.4 register settings ............................................................................................. 508 14.3.5 clock............................................................................................................... 510 14.3.6 transmitting and receiving data ................................................................... 512 14.4 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 519 section 15 a/d converter ............................................................................................ 523 15.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 523 15.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 523 15.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 524 15.1.3 input pins ........................................................................................................ 525 15.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 526 15.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 527 15.2.1 a/d data registers a to d (addra to addrd) ........................................ 527 15.2.2 a/d control/status register (adcsr) .......................................................... 528 15.2.3 a/d control register (adcr) ....................................................................... 531 15.3 cpu interface .............................................................................................................. ... 532 15.4 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 533 15.4.1 single mode (scan = 0) ............................................................................... 533 15.4.2 scan mode (scan = 1).................................................................................. 535 15.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time .................................................... 537 15.4.4 external trigger input timing........................................................................ 538 15.5 interrupts................................................................................................................. ........ 539 15.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 539 section 16 d/a converter ............................................................................................ 545 16.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 545 16.1.1 features........................................................................................................... 545 16.1.2 block diagram................................................................................................ 545 16.1.3 input/output pins............................................................................................ 546 16.1.4 register configuration.................................................................................... 546 16.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... 547 16.2.1 d/a data registers 0 and 1 (dadr0/1) ........................................................ 547 16.2.2 d/a control register (dacr) ....................................................................... 547 16.2.3 d/a standby control register (dastcr)..................................................... 549 16.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 550 16.4 d/a output control ........................................................................................................ 5 51 16.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................ .... 551 section 17 ram ............................................................................................................. 553 17.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 553 17.1.1 block diagram................................................................................................ 553 17.1.2 register configuration.................................................................................... 554 17.2 system control register (syscr)................................................................................. 555 17.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ...... 556 section 18 rom .............................................................................................................. 557 18.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 557 18.1.1 block diagram................................................................................................ 558 18.2 prom mode.................................................................................................................. . 559 18.2.1 prom mode setting ...................................................................................... 559 18.2.2 socket adapter and memory map.................................................................. 559 18.3 prom programming ...................................................................................................... 562 18.3.1 programming and verification........................................................................ 562 18.3.2 programming precautions............................................................................... 567 18.3.3 reliability of programmed data..................................................................... 568 18.4 flash memory overview ................................................................................................ 569 18.4.1 flash memory operation................................................................................ 569 18.4.2 mode programming and flash memory address space ................................ 570 18.4.3 features........................................................................................................... 570 18.4.4 block diagram................................................................................................ 572 18.4.5 input/output pins............................................................................................ 573 18.4.6 register configuration.................................................................................... 573 18.5 flash memory register descriptions ............................................................................. 574 18.5.1 flash memory control register ..................................................................... 574 18.5.2 erase block register 1.................................................................................... 577 18.5.3 erase block register 2.................................................................................... 578 18.5.4 ram control register (ramcr).................................................................. 580 18.6 on-board programming modes ..................................................................................... 582 18.6.1 boot mode ...................................................................................................... 582 18.6.2 user program mode........................................................................................ 587 18.7 programming and erasing flash memory...................................................................... 589 18.7.1 program mode ................................................................................................ 590 18.7.2 program-verify mode..................................................................................... 590 18.7.3 programming flowchart and sample program............................................... 591 18.7.4 erase mode ..................................................................................................... 593 18.7.5 erase-verify mode.......................................................................................... 594 18.7.6 erasing flowchart and sample program ........................................................ 595 18.7.7 prewrite-verify mode ..................................................................................... 607 18.7.8 protect modes ................................................................................................. 607 18.7.9 nmi input masking ........................................................................................ 610 18.8 flash memory emulation by ram ................................................................................ 611 18.9 prom mode.................................................................................................................. . 613 18.9.1 prom mode setting ...................................................................................... 613 18.9.2 socket adapter and memory map.................................................................. 614 18.9.3 operation in prom mode.............................................................................. 616 18.10 flash memory programming and erasing precautions .................................................. 624 section 19 clock pulse generator ............................................................................. 633 19.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 633 19.1.1 block diagram................................................................................................ 633 19.2 oscillator circuit ......................................................................................................... ... 634 19.2.1 connecting a crystal resonator ..................................................................... 634 19.2.2 external clock input....................................................................................... 636 19.3 duty adjustment circuit................................................................................................. 639 19.4 prescalers ................................................................................................................. ....... 639 19.5 frequency divider .......................................................................................................... 639 19.5.1 register configuration.................................................................................... 639 19.5.2 division control register (divcr) ............................................................... 639 19.5.3 usage notes .................................................................................................... 640 section 20 power-down state .................................................................................... 641 20.1 overview................................................................................................................... ...... 641 20.2 register configuration.................................................................................................... 6 43 20.2.1 system control register (syscr)................................................................. 643 20.2.2 module standby control register (mstcr) ................................................. 645 20.3 sleep mode ................................................................................................................. .... 647 20.3.1 transition to sleep mode................................................................................ 647 20.3.2 exit from sleep mode..................................................................................... 647 20.4 software standby mode ................................................................................................. 648 20.4.1 transition to software standby mode ............................................................ 648 20.4.2 exit from software standby mode ................................................................. 648 20.4.3 selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode ................ 649 20.4.4 sample application of software standby mode ............................................ 650 20.4.5 note................................................................................................................. 650 20.5 hardware standby mode ................................................................................................ 651 20.5.1 transition to hardware standby mode........................................................... 651 20.5.2 exit from hardware standby mode................................................................ 651 20.5.3 timing for hardware standby mode.............................................................. 651 20.6 module standby function............................................................................................... 652 20.6.1 module standby timing ................................................................................. 652 20.6.2 read/write in module standby ...................................................................... 652 20.6.3 usage notes .................................................................................................... 652 20.7 system clock output disabling function ...................................................................... 653 section 21 electrical characteristics ........................................................................ 649 21.1 absolute maximum ratings ........................................................................................... 649 21.2 electrical characteristics of masked rom and prom versions................................... 650 21.2.1 dc characteristics .......................................................................................... 650 21.2.2 ac characteristics .......................................................................................... 658 21.2.3 a/d conversion characteristics ..................................................................... 666 21.2.4 d/a conversion characteristics ..................................................................... 667 21.3 electrical characteristics of flash memory version ...................................................... 668 21.3.1 dc characteristics .......................................................................................... 668 21.3.2 ac characteristics .......................................................................................... 677 21.3.3 a/d conversion characteristics ..................................................................... 683 21.3.4 d/a conversion characteristics ..................................................................... 684 21.3.5 flash memory characteristics ........................................................................ 685 21.4 operational timing......................................................................................................... 686 14 21.4.1 bus timing ..................................................................................................... 686 21.4.2 refresh controller bus timing....................................................................... 690 21.4.3 control signal timing .................................................................................... 695 21.4.4 clock timing .................................................................................................. 697 21.4.5 tpc and i/o port timing................................................................................ 697 21.4.6 itu timing ..................................................................................................... 698 21.4.7 sci input/output timing................................................................................ 699 21.4.8 dmac timing................................................................................................ 700 appendix a instruction set ............................................................................................ 703 a.1 instruction list............................................................................................................ .... 703 a.2 operation code map....................................................................................................... 718 a.3 number of states required for execution...................................................................... 721 appendix b internal i/o register ................................................................................. 730 b.1 addresses................................................................................................................... ..... 730 b.2 function .................................................................................................................... ...... 738 appendix c i/o port block diagrams ........................................................................ 818 c.1 port 1 block diagram ..................................................................................................... 818 c.2 port 2 block diagram ..................................................................................................... 819 c.3 port 3 block diagram ..................................................................................................... 820 c.4 port 4 block diagram ..................................................................................................... 821 c.5 port 5 block diagram ..................................................................................................... 822 c.6 port 6 block diagrams.................................................................................................... 823 c.7 port 7 block diagrams.................................................................................................... 827 c.8 port 8 block diagrams.................................................................................................... 828 c.9 port 9 block diagrams.................................................................................................... 831 c.10 port a block diagrams................................................................................................... 835 c.11 port b block diagrams................................................................................................... 839 appendix d pin states ..................................................................................................... 843 d.1 port states in each mode................................................................................................ 843 d.2 pin states at reset......................................................................................................... .. 846 appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode .... 849 appendix f product code lineup ............................................................................... 850 appendix g package dimensions ................................................................................ 852 section 1 overview 1.1 overview the h8/3048 series is a series of microcontrollers (mcus) that integrate system supporting functions together with an h8/300h cpu core having an original hitachi architecture. the h8/300h cpu has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. it can address a 16-mbyte linear address space. its instruction set is upward-compatible at the object-code level with the h8/300 cpu, enabling easy porting of software from the h8/300 series. the on-chip system supporting functions include rom, ram, a 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu), a programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), a watchdog timer (wdt), a serial communication interface (sci), an a/d converter, a d/a converter, i/o ports, a direct memory access controller (dmac), a refresh controller, and other facilities. the four members of the h8/3048 series are the h8/3048, the h8/3047, h8/3045, and the h8/3044. the h8/3048 has 128 kbytes of rom and 4 kbytes of ram. the h8/3047 has 96 kbytes of rom and 4 kbytes of ram. the h8/3045 has 64 kbytes of rom and 2 kbytes of ram. the h8/3044 has 32 kbytes of rom and 2 kbytes of ram. seven mcu operating modes offer a choice of data bus width and address space size. the modes (modes 1 to 7) include one single-chip mode and six expanded modes. in addition to the masked-rom versions of the h8/3048 series, the h8/3048 has a ztat * 1 version with user-programmable on-chip prom and an f-ztat * 2 version with on-chip flash memory that can be programmed on-board. these versions enable users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications, growing production volumes, and other conditions. table 1-1 summarizes the features of the h8/3048 series. notes: 1. ztat (zero turn-around time) is a trademark of hitachi, ltd. 2. f-ztat (flexible ztat) is a trademark of hitachi, ltd. 1 table 1-1 features feature description cpu upward-compatible with the h8/300 cpu at the object-code level general-register machine sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as + eight 16-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) high-speed operation (flash memory version) maximum clock rate: 16 mhz add/subtract: 125 ns multiply/divide: 875 ns high-speed operation (masked rom and prom versions) maximum clock rate: 18 mhz add/subtract: 111 ns multiply/divide: 778 ns 16-mbyte address space instruction features 8/16/32-bit data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions signed and unsigned multiply instructions (8 bits 8 bits, 16 bits 16 bits) signed and unsigned divide instructions (16 bits ? 8 bits, 32 bits ? 16 bits) bit accumulator function bit manipulation instructions with register-indirect specification of bit positions memory h8/3048 rom: 128 kbytes ram: 4 kbytes h8/3047 rom: 96 kbytes ram: 4 kbytes h8/3045 rom: 64 kbytes ram: 2 kbytes h8/3044 rom: 32 kbytes ram: 2 kbytes interrupt seven external interrupt pins: nmi, irq 0 to irq 5 controller 30 internal interrupts three selectable interrupt priority levels bus controller address space can be partitioned into eight areas, with independent bus specifications in each area chip select output available for areas 0 to 7 8-bit access or 16-bit access selectable for each area two-state or three-state access selectable for each area selection of four wait modes bus arbitration function 2 table 1-1 features (cont) feature description refresh dram refresh controller directly connectable to 16-bit-wide dram cas-before-ras refresh self-refresh mode selectable pseudo-static ram refresh self-refresh mode selectable usable as an interval timer dma controller short address mode (dmac) maximum four channels available selection of i/o mode, idle mode, or repeat mode can be activated by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, or external requests full address mode maximum two channels available selection of normal mode or block transfer mode can be activated by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3, external requests, or auto-request 16-bit integrated five 16-bit timer channels, capable of processing up to 12 pulse outputs or 10 timer unit (itu) pulse inputs 16-bit timer counter (channels 0 to 4) two multiplexed output compare/input capture pins (channels 0 to 4) operation can be synchronized (channels 0 to 4) pwm mode available (channels 0 to 4) phase counting mode available (channel 2) buffering available (channels 3 and 4) reset-synchronized pwm mode available (channels 3 and 4) complementary pwm mode available (channels 3 and 4) dmac can be activated by compare match/input capture a interrupts (channels 0 to 3) programmable maximum 16-bit pulse output, using itu as time base timing pattern up to four 4-bit pulse output groups (or one 16-bit group, or two 8-bit groups) controller (tpc) non-overlap mode available output data can be transferred by dmac watchdog reset signal can be generated by overflow timer (wdt), reset signal can be output externally 1 channel usable as an interval timer serial selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode communication full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously interface (sci), on-chip baud-rate generator 2 channels smart card interface functions added (sci0 only) 3 table 1-1 features (cont) feature description a/d converter resolution: 10 bits eight channels, with selection of single or scan mode variable analog conversion voltage range sample-and-hold function a/d conversion can be externally triggered d/a converter resolution: 8 bits two channels d/a outputs can be sustained in software standby mode i/o ports 70 input/output pins 8 input-only pins operating modes seven mcu operating modes mode address space address pins initial bus width max. bus width mode 1 1 mbyte a 19 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 2 1 mbyte a 19 to a 0 16 bits 16 bits mode 3 16 mbytes a 23 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 4 16 mbytes a 23 to a 0 16 bits 16 bits mode 5 1 mbyte a 19 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 6 16 mbytes a 23 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 7 1 mbyte on-chip rom is disabled in modes 1 to 4 power-down sleep mode state software standby mode hardware standby mode module standby function programmable system clock frequency division other features on-chip clock pulse generator product lineup model (5-v) model (3-v) package rom hd64f3048tf hd64f3048vtf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) flash memory hd64f3048f hd64f3048vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6473048tf hd6473048vtf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) prom hd6473048f hd6473048vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433048tf hd6433048vtf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) masked rom hd6433048f hd6433048vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433047tf hd6433047vtf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) masked rom hd6433047f hd6433047vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433045tf hd6433045vtf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) masked rom hd6433045f hd6433045vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433044tf hd6433044vtf 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) masked rom hd6433044f hd6433044vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 4 1.2 block diagram figure 1-1 shows an internal block diagram. figure 1-1 block diagram v v v v v v v v v cc cc cc ss ss ss ss ss ss p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 3 port 4 port 5 port 9 p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a 3 2 1 0 19 18 17 16 p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p9 /sck /irq p9 /sck /irq p9 /rxd p9 /rxd p9 /txd p9 /txd 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 5 4 p7 /an /da p7 /an /da p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 7 v av av ref cc ss pa 7 /tp 7 /tiocb 2 /a 20 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 /a 21 /cs 4 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 /a 22 /cs 5 pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 /a 23 /cs 6 pa /tp /tiocb /tclkd pa /tp /tioca /tclkc pa /tp /tend /tclkb pa /tp /tend /tclka port a 3 2 0 0 3 2 1 0 1 0 pb /tp /dreq /adtrg pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 /cs 7 pb /tp /tocxb pb /tp /tocxa pb /tp /tiocb pb /tp /tioca pb /tp /tiocb pb /tp /tioca 15 1 7 4 4 4 4 3 3 5 4 13 12 3 2 11 10 1 0 9 8 port 8 p8 /cs p8 /cs /irq p8 /cs /irq p8 /cs /irq p8 /rfsh/irq 40 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 3 2 1 0 md md md extal xtal stby res v /reso nmi 2 1 0 h8/300h cpu clock pulse generator interrupt controller rom (masked rom, prom, or flash memory) dma controller (dmac) serial communication interface (sci) 2 channels watchdog timer (wdt) refresh controller 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 address bus data bus (upper) data bus (lower) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 port 2 p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 1 0 p6 /lwr p6 /hwr p6 /rd p6 /as p6 /back p6 /breq p6 /wait 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ram 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) a/d converter d/a converter port 6 bus controller programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) port b pp * note: * v function is provided only for the flash memory version. pp 5 1.3 pin description 1.3.1 pin arrangement figure 1-2 shows the pin arrangement of the h8/3048 series. figure 1-2 pin arrangement (fp-100b or tfp-100b, top view) v tioca /tp /pb tiocb /tp /pb tioca /tp /pb tiocb /tp /pb tocxa /tp /pb tocxb /tp /pb cs 7 /dreq /tp /pb adtrg/dreq /tp /pb v /reso v txd /p9 txd /p9 rxd /p9 rxd /p9 irq /sck /p9 irq /sck /p9 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 v d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 md md md p6 /lwr p6 /hwr p6 /rd p6 /as v xtal extal v nmi res stby p6 /back p6 /breq p6 /wait v p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a p2 /a p2 /a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 cc 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ss 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 ss 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 5 2 1 0 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 7 6 pa /tp /tiocb /a pa /tp /tioca /a /cs 4 pa /tp /tiocb /a /cs 5 pa /tp /tioca /a /cs 6 pa /tp /tiocb /tclkd pa /tp /tioca /tclkc pa /tp /tend /tclkb pa /tp /tend /tclka v p8 /cs p8 /cs /irq p8 /cs /irq p8 /cs /irq p8 /rfsh/irq 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 av p7 /an /da p7 /an /da p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an p7 /an v av 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 1 0 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 d /p4 d /p3 d /p3 d /p3 d /p3 d /p3 d /p3 d /p3 d /p3 v a /p1 a /p1 a /p1 a /p1 a /p1 a /p1 a /p1 a /p1 v a /p2 a /p2 a /p2 a /p2 a /p2 a /p2 7 8 9 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 cc 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ss 0 1 2 3 4 5 top view (fp-100b, tfp-100b) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 6 5 4 3 cc ss ss 19 18 17 16 15 14 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 20 21 22 23 ss ss ref cc 0 1 0 3 3 4 4 4 4 2 2 1 1 0 0 pp * note: * v function is provided only for the flash memory version. pp 6 1.3.2 pin assignments in each mode table 1-2 lists the pin assignments in each mode. table 1-2 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b) pin name prom mode mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 eprom flash 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 notes: 1. in modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 the p4 0 to p4 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 2. in modes 2 and 4 the d 0 to d 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 3. pins marked nc should be left unconnected. 4. for details about prom mode see section 18, rom. v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 /d 0 * 1 p4 1 /d 1 * 1 p4 2 /d 2 * 1 p4 3 /d 3 * 1 v ss p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 d 8 d 9 d 10 d 11 d 12 d 13 d 14 v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 /d 0 * 2 p4 1 /d 1 * 2 p4 2 /d 2 * 2 p4 3 /d 3 * 2 v ss p4 4 /d 4 * 2 p4 5 /d 5 * 2 p4 6 /d 6 * 2 p4 7 /d 7 * 2 d 8 d 9 d 10 d 11 d 12 d 13 d 14 v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 /d 0 * 1 p4 1 /d 1 * 1 p4 2 /d 2 * 1 p4 3 /d 3 * 1 v ss p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 d 8 d 9 d 10 d 11 d 12 d 13 d 14 v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 /d 0 * 2 p4 1 /d 1 * 2 p4 2 /d 2 * 2 p4 3 /d 3 * 2 v ss p4 4 /d 4 * 2 p4 5 /d 5 * 2 p4 6 /d 6 * 2 p4 7 /d 7 * 2 d 8 d 9 d 10 d 11 d 12 d 13 d 14 v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 /d 0 * 1 p4 1 /d 1 * 1 p4 2 /d 2 * 1 p4 3 /d 3 * 1 v ss p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 d 8 d 9 d 10 d 11 d 12 d 13 d 14 v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 /d 0 * 1 p4 1 /d 1 * 1 p4 2 /d 2 * 1 p4 3 /d 3 * 1 v ss p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 d 8 d 9 d 10 d 11 d 12 d 13 d 14 v cc pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 / adtrg reso v ss p9 0 /txd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 p4 0 p4 1 p4 2 p4 3 v ss p4 4 p4 5 p4 6 p4 7 p3 0 p3 1 p3 2 p3 3 p3 4 p3 5 p3 6 v cc v cc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc v pp v pp v ss v ss nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc v ss v ss nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc eo 0 i/o 0 eo 1 i/o 1 eo 2 i/o 2 eo 3 i/o 3 eo 4 i/o 4 eo 5 i/o 5 eo 6 i/o 6 pin no. 7 table 1-2 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b) (cont) pin name prom mode mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 eprom flash 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 notes: 1. in modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 the p4 0 to p4 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 2. in modes 2 and 4 the d 0 to d 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 3. pins marked nc should be left unconnected. 4. for details about prom mode see section 18, rom. d 15 v cc a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 v ss a 8 a 9 a 10 a 11 a 12 a 13 a 14 a 15 a 16 a 17 a 18 a 19 v ss p6 0 /wait p6 1 /breq p6 2 /back stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc as rd d 15 v cc a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 v ss a 8 a 9 a 10 a 11 a 12 a 13 a 14 a 15 a 16 a 17 a 18 a 19 v ss p6 0 /wait p6 1 /breq p6 2 /back stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc as rd d 15 v cc a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 v ss a 8 a 9 a 10 a 11 a 12 a 13 a 14 a 15 a 16 a 17 a 18 a 19 v ss p6 0 /wait p6 1 /breq p6 2 /back stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc as rd d 15 v cc a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 v ss a 8 a 9 a 10 a 11 a 12 a 13 a 14 a 15 a 16 a 17 a 18 a 19 v ss p6 0 /wait p6 1 /breq p6 2 /back stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc as rd d 15 v cc p1 0 /a 0 p1 1 /a 1 p1 2 /a 2 p1 3 /a 3 p1 4 /a 4 p1 5 /a 5 p1 6 /a 6 p1 7 /a 7 v ss p2 0 /a 8 p2 1 /a 9 p2 2 /a 10 p2 3 /a 11 p2 4 /a 12 p2 5 /a 13 p2 6 /a 14 p2 7 /a 15 p5 0 /a 16 p5 1 /a 17 p5 2 /a 18 p5 3 /a 19 v ss p6 0 /wait p6 1 /breq p6 2 /back stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc as rd d 15 v cc p1 0 /a 0 p1 1 /a 1 p1 2 /a 2 p1 3 /a 3 p1 4 /a 4 p1 5 /a 5 p1 6 /a 6 p1 7 /a 7 v ss p2 0 /a 8 p2 1 /a 9 p2 2 /a 10 p2 3 /a 11 p2 4 /a 12 p2 5 /a 13 p2 6 /a 14 p2 7 /a 15 p5 0 /a 16 p5 1 /a 17 p5 2 /a 18 p5 3 /a 19 v ss p6 0 /wait p6 1 /breq p6 2 /back stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc as rd p3 7 v cc p1 0 p1 1 p1 2 p1 3 p1 4 p1 5 p1 6 p1 7 v ss p2 0 p2 1 p2 2 p2 3 p2 4 p2 5 p2 6 p2 7 p5 0 p5 1 p5 2 p5 3 v ss p6 0 p6 1 p6 2 stby res nmi v ss extal xtal v cc p6 3 p6 4 eo 7 i/o 7 v cc v cc ea 0 a 0 ea 1 a 1 ea 2 a 2 ea 3 a 3 ea 4 a 4 ea 5 a 5 ea 6 a 6 ea 7 a 7 v ss v ss ea 8 a 8 oe oe ea 10 a 10 ea 11 a 11 ea 12 a 12 ea 13 a 13 ea 14 a 14 ce ce v cc v cc v cc v cc nc nc nc nc v ss v ss ea 15 a 15 nc nc nc nc nc nc v ss v cc nc res ea 9 a 9 v ss v ss nc extal nc xtal v cc v cc nc a 16 nc nc pin no. 8 table 1-2 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b) (cont) pin name prom mode mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 eprom flash 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 notes: 1. in modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 the p4 0 to p4 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 2. in modes 2 and 4 the d 0 to d 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 3. pins marked nc should be left unconnected. 4. for details about prom mode see section 18, rom. nc v cc nc nc v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v cc v cc v cc v cc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc v ss v ss ea 16 nc pgm nc nc v cc nc we nc nc v ss v ss nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc nc pin no. 9 hwr lwr md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 p8 4 /cs 0 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 / cs 6 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 / cs 5 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 / cs 4 pa 7 /tp 7 /tiocb 2 hwr lwr md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 p8 4 /cs 0 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 / cs 6 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 / cs 5 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 / cs 4 pa 7 /tp 7 /tiocb 2 hwr lwr md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 p8 4 /cs 0 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 / cs 6 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 / cs 5 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 / cs 4 a 20 hwr lwr md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 p8 4 /cs 0 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 / cs 6 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 / cs 5 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 / cs 4 a 20 hwr lwr md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 p8 4 /cs 0 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 / cs 6 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 / cs 5 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 / cs 4 pa 7 /tp 7 /tiocb 2 hwr lwr md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 p8 4 /cs 0 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 / a 23 /cs 6 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 / a 22 /cs 5 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 / a 21 /cs 4 a 20 p6 5 p6 6 md 0 md 1 md 2 av cc v ref p7 0 /an 0 p7 1 /an 1 p7 2 /an 2 p7 3 /an 3 p7 4 /an 4 p7 5 /an 5 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 av ss p8 0 /irq 0 p8 1 /irq 1 p8 2 /irq 2 p8 3 /irq 3 p8 4 v ss pa 0 /tp 0 /tend 0 / tclka pa 1 /tp 1 /tend 1 / tclkb pa 2 /tp 2 /tioca 0 / tclkc pa 3 /tp 3 /tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 pa 7 /tp 7 /tiocb 2 1.3.3 pin functions table 1-3 summarizes the pin functions. table 1-3 pin functions type symbol pin no. i/o name and function power v cc 1, 35, 68 input power: for connection to the power supply. connect all v cc pins to the system power supply. v ss 11, 22, 44, input ground: for connection to ground (0 v). 57, 65, 92 connect all v ss pins to the 0-v system power supply. clock xtal 67 input for connection to a crystal resonator. for examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 19, clock pulse generator. extal 66 input for connection to a crystal resonator or input of an external clock signal. for examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 19, clock pulse generator. 61 output system clock: supplies the system clock to external devices. operating md 2 to md 0 75 to 73 input mode 2 to mode 0: for setting the operating mode control mode, as follows. inputs at these pins must not be changed during operation. md 2 md 1 md 0 operating mode 000 0 0 1 mode 1 0 1 0 mode 2 0 1 1 mode 3 1 0 0 mode 4 1 0 1 mode 5 1 1 0 mode 6 1 1 1 mode 7 10 table 1-3 pin functions (cont) type symbol pin no. i/o name and function system control res 63 input reset input: when driven low, this pin resets the chip reso 10 output reset output: outputs a reset signal to external devices (reso/v pp ) also used as a power supply for on-board programming of the flash memory version. stby 62 input standby: when driven low, this pin forces a transition to hardware standby mode breq 59 input bus request: used by an external bus master to request the bus right back 60 output bus request acknowledge: indicates that the bus has been granted to an external bus master interrupts nmi 64 input nonmaskable interrupt: requests a nonmaskable interrupt irq 5 to 17, 16, input interrupt request 5 to 0: maskable interrupt irq 0 90 to 87 request pins address bus a 23 to a 0 97 to 100, output address bus: outputs address signals 56 to 45, 43 to 36 data bus d 15 to d 0 34 to 23, input/ data bus: bidirectional data bus 21 to 18 output bus control cs 7 to cs 0 8, 97 to 99, output chip select: select signals for areas 7 to 0 88 to 91 as 69 output address strobe: goes low to indicate valid address output on the address bus rd 70 output read: goes low to indicate reading from the external address space hwr 71 output high write: goes low to indicate writing to the external address space; indicates valid data on the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ). lwr 72 output low write: goes low to indicate writing to the external address space; indicates valid data on the lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ). wait 58 input wait: requests insertion of wait states in bus cycles during access to the external address space 11 table 1-3 pin functions (cont) type symbol pin no. i/o name and function refresh rfsh 87 output refresh: indicates a refresh cycle controller cs 3 88 output row address strobe ras : row address strobe signal for dram connected to area 3 rd 70 output column address strobe cas : column address strobe signal for dram connected to area 3; used with 2 we dram. write enable we : write enable signal for dram connected to area 3; used with 2 cas dram. hwr 71 output upper write uw : write enable signal for dram connected to area 3; used with 2 we dram. upper column address strobe ucas : column address strobe signal for dram connected to area 3; used with 2 cas dram. lwr 72 output lower write lw : write enable signal for dram connected to area 3; used with 2 we dram. lower column address strobe lcas : column address strobe signal for dram connected to area 3; used with 2 cas dram. dreq 1 , 9, 8 input dma request 1 and 0: dmac activation dreq 0 requests tend 1 , 94, 93 output transfer end 1 and 0: these signals indicate tend 0 that the dmac has ended a data transfer tclkd to 96 to 93 input clock input d to a: external clock inputs tclka tioca 4 to 4, 2, 99, input/ input capture/output compare a4 to a0: tioca 0 97, 95 output gra4 to gra0 output compare or input capture, or pwm output tiocb 4 to 5, 3, 100, input/ input capture/output compare b4 to b0: tiocb 0 98, 96 output grb4 to grb0 output compare or input capture, or pwm output tocxa 4 6 output output compare xa4: pwm output tocxb 4 7 output output compare xb4: pwm output dma controller (dmac) 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) 12 table 1-3 pin functions (cont) type symbol pin no. i/o name and function programmable tp 15 to 9 to 2, output tpc output 15 to 0: pulse output timing pattern tp 0 100 to 93 controller (tpc) txd 1 , 13, 12 output transmit data (channels 0 and 1): sci data txd 0 output rxd 1 , 15, 14 input receive data (channels 0 and 1): sci data rxd 0 input sck 1 , 17, 16 input/ serial clock (channels 0 and 1): sci clock sck 0 output input/output a/d converter an 7 to an 0 85 to 78 input analog 7 to 0: analog input pins adtrg 9 input a/d trigger: external trigger input for starting a/d conversion d/a converter da 1 , da 0 85, 84 output analog output: analog output from the d/a converter a/d and d/a av cc 76 input power supply pin for the a/d and converters d/a converters. connect to the system power supply (+5 v) when not using the a/d and d/a converters. av ss 86 input ground pin for the a/d and d/a converters. connect to system ground (0 v). v ref 77 input reference voltage input pin for the a/d and d/a converters. connect to the system power supply (+5 v) when not using the a/d and d/a converters. i/o ports p1 7 to p1 0 43 to 36 input/ port 1: eight input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port 1 data direction register (p1ddr). p2 7 to p2 0 52 to 45 input/ port 2: eight input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port 2 data direction register (p2ddr). p3 7 to p3 0 34 to 27 input/ port 3: eight input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port 3 data direction register (p3ddr). p4 7 to p4 0 26 to 23, input/ port 4: eight input/output pins. the 21 to 18 output direction of each pin can be selected in the port 4 data direction register (p4ddr). serial com- munication interface (sci) 13 table 1-3 pin functions (cont) type symbol pin no. i/o name and function i/o ports p5 3 to p5 0 56 to 53 input/ port 5: four input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (p5ddr). p6 6 to p6 0 72 to 69, input/ port 6: seven input/output pins. the direction 60 to 58 output of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (p6ddr). p7 7 to p7 0 85 to 78 input port 7: eight input pins p8 4 to p8 0 91 to 87 input/ port 8: five input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port 8 data direction register (p8ddr). p9 5 to p9 0 17 to 12 input/ port 9: six input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port 9 data direction register (p9ddr). pa 7 to pa 0 100 to 93 input/ port a: eight input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port a data direction register (paddr). pb 7 to pb 0 9 to 2 input/ port b: eight input/output pins. the direction of output each pin can be selected in the port b data direction register (pbddr). 14 section 2 cpu 2.1 overview the h8/300h cpu is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the h8/300 cpu. the h8/300h cpu has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 features the h8/300h cpu has the following features. upward compatibility with h8/300 cpu can execute h8/300 series object programs general-register architecture sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) sixty-two basic instructions 8/16/32-bit data transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions multiply and divide instructions powerful bit-manipulation instructions eight addressing modes register direct [rn] register indirect [@ern] register indirect with displacement [@(d:16, ern) or @(d:24, ern)] register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ern+ or @?rn] absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24] immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] program-counter relative [@(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc)] memory indirect [@@aa:8] 16-mbyte linear address space 15 high-speed operation ? all frequently-used instructions execute in two to four states ? maximum clock frequency: 18 mhz/16 mhz (flash memory version) ? 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 111 ns/125 ns (flash memory version) ?8 8-bit register-register multiply: 778 ns/875 ns (flash memory version) ? 16 ? 8-bit register-register divide: 778 ns/875 ns (flash memory version) ? 16 16-bit register-register multiply: 1.221 ns/1.375 ns (flash memory version) ? 32 ? 16-bit register-register divide: 1.221 ns/1.375 ns (flash memory version) two cpu operating modes ? normal mode (not available in the h8/3048 series) ? advanced mode low-power mode transition to power-down state by sleep instruction 2.1.2 differences from h8/300 cpu in comparison to the h8/300 cpu, the h8/300h has the following enhancements. more general registers eight 16-bit registers have been added. expanded address space advanced mode supports a maximum 16-mbyte address space. normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the h8/300 cpu. (normal mode is not available in the h8/3048 series.) enhanced addressing the addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-mbyte address space. enhanced instructions data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions can operate on 32-bit data. signed multiply/divide instructions and other instructions have been added. 16 2.2 cpu operating modes the h8/300h cpu has two operating modes: normal and advanced. normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. advanced mode supports up to 16 mbytes. see figure 2-1. the h8/3048 series can be used only in advanced mode. (information from this point on will apply to advanced mode unless otherwise stated.) figure 2-1 cpu operating modes cpu operating modes normal mode advanced mode maximum 64 kbytes, program and data areas combined maximum 16 mbytes, program and data areas combined 17 2.3 address space the maximum address space of the h8/300h cpu is 16 mbytes. the h8/3048 series has various operating modes (mcu modes), some providing a 1-mbyte address space, the others supporting the full 16 mbytes. figure 2-2 shows the address ranges of the h8/3048 series. for further details see section 3.6, memory map in each operating mode. the 1-mbyte operating modes use 20-bit addressing. the upper 4 bits of effective addresses are ignored. figure 2-2 memory map h'00000 h'fffff h'000000 h'ffffff a. 1-mbyte modes b. 16-mbyte modes 18 2.4 register configuration 2.4.1 overview the h8/300h cpu has the internal registers shown in figure 2-3. there are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. figure 2-3 cpu internal registers er0 er1 er2 er3 er4 er5 er6 er7 e0 e1 e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 r0h r1h r2h r3h r4h r5h r6h r7h r0l r1l r2l r3l r4l r5l r6l r7l 0 7 0 7 0 15 (sp) 23 0 pc 7 ccr 6543210 iuihunzvc general registers (ern) control registers (cr) legend sp: pc: ccr: i: ui: h: u: n: z: v: c: stack pointer program counter condition code register interrupt mask bit user bit or interrupt mask bit half-carry flag user bit negative flag zero flag overflow flag carry flag 19 2.4.2 general registers the h8/300h cpu has eight 32-bit general registers. these general registers are all functionally alike and can be used without distinction between data registers and address registers. when a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. when the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or as address registers, they are designated by the letters er (er0 to er7). the er registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters e (e0 to e7) and r (r0 to r7). these registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. the e registers (e0 to e7) are also referred to as extended registers. the r registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters rh (r0h to r7h) and rl (r0l to r7l). these registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. figure 2-4 illustrates the usage of the general registers. the usage of each register can be selected independently. figure 2-4 usage of general registers ? address registers ? 32-bit registers ? 16-bit registers ? 8-bit registers er registers er0 to er7 e registers (extended registers) e0 to e7 r registers r0 to r7 rh registers r0h to r7h rl registers r0l to r7l 20 general register er7 has the function of stack pointer (sp) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. figure 2-5 shows the stack. figure 2-5 stack 2.4.3 control registers the control registers are the 24-bit program counter (pc) and the 8-bit condition code register (ccr). program counter (pc): this 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the cpu will execute. the length of all cpu instructions is 2 bytes (one word) or a multiple of 2 bytes, so the least significant pc bit is ignored. when an instruction is fetched, the least significant pc bit is regarded as 0. condition code register (ccr): this 8-bit register contains internal cpu status information, including the interrupt mask bit (i) and half-carry (h), negative (n), zero (z), overflow (v), and carry (c) flags. bit 7?nterrupt mask bit (i): masks interrupts other than nmi when set to 1. nmi is accepted regardless of the i bit setting. the i bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. bit 6?ser bit or interrupt mask bit (ui): can be written and read by software using the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. this bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. for details see section 5, interrupt controller. free area stack area sp (er7) 21 bit 5?alf-carry flag (h): when the add.b, addx.b, sub.b, subx.b, cmp.b, or neg.b instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. when the add.w, sub.w, cmp.w, or neg.w instruction is executed, the h flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. when the add.l, sub.l, cmp.l, or neg.l instruction is executed, the h flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. bit 4?ser bit (u): can be written and read by software using the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. bit 3?egative flag (n): indicates the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. bit 2?ero flag (z): set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. bit 1?verflow flag (v): set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. bit 0?arry flag (c): set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. used by: add instructions, to indicate a carry subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit the carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. operations can be performed on ccr by the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. the n, z, v, and c flags are used by conditional branch (bcc) instructions. for the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix a.1, instruction list. for the i and ui bits, see section 5, interrupt controller. 2.4.4 initial cpu register values in reset exception handling, pc is initialized to a value loaded from the vector table, and the i bit in ccr is set to 1. the other ccr bits and the general registers are not initialized. in particular, the stack pointer (er7) is not initialized. the stack pointer must therefore be initialized by an mov.l instruction executed immediately after a reset. 22 2.5 data formats the h8/300h cpu can process 1-bit, 4-bit (bcd), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ? 7) of byte operand data. the daa and das decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit bcd data. 2.5.1 general register data formats figures 2-6 and 2-7 show the data formats in general registers. figure 2-6 general register data formats (1) 7 rnh rnl rnh rnl rnh rnl 1-bit data 1-bit data 4-bit bcd data 4-bit bcd data byte data byte data 6543210 70 don? care 76543210 70 don? care don? care 70 43 lower digit upper digit 7 43 lower digit upper digit don? care 0 70 don? care msb lsb don? care 70 msb lsb data type data format general register 23 figure 2-7 general register data formats (2) rn en ern word data word data longword data 15 0 msb lsb general register data type data format 15 0 msb lsb 31 16 msb 15 0 lsb legend ern: en: rn: rnh: rnl: msb: lsb: general register general register e general register r general register rh general register rl most significant bit least significant bit 24 2.5.2 memory data formats figure 2-8 shows the data formats on memory. the h8/300h cpu can access word data and longword data on memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. if an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. this also applies to instruction fetches. figure 2-8 memory data formats when er7 (sp) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. 76543210 address l address l lsb msb msb lsb 70 msb lsb 1-bit data byte data word data longword data address data type data format address 2m address 2m + 1 address 2n address 2n + 1 address 2n + 2 address 2n + 3 25 2.6 instruction set 2.6.1 instruction set overview the h8/300h cpu has 62 types of instructions, which are classified in table 2-1. table 2-1 instruction classification function instruction types data transfer mov, push * 1 , pop * 1 , movtpe * 2 , movfpe * 2 3 arithmetic operations add, sub, addx, subx, inc, dec, adds, subs, daa, das, 18 mulxu, mulxs, divxu, divxs, cmp, neg, exts, extu logic operations and, or, xor, not 4 shift operations shal, shar, shll, shlr, rotl, rotr, rotxl, rotxr 8 bit manipulation bset, bclr, bnot, btst, band, biand, bor, bior, bxor, 14 bixor, bld, bild, bst, bist branch bcc * 3 , jmp, bsr, jsr, rts 5 system control trapa, rte, sleep, ldc, stc, andc, orc, xorc, nop 9 block data transfer eepmov 1 total 62 types notes: 1. pop.w rn is identical to mov.w @sp+, rn. push.w rn is identical to mov.w rn, @?p. pop.l ern is identical to mov.l @sp+, rn. push.l ern is identical to mov.l rn, @?p. 2. not available in the h8/3048 series. 3. bcc is a generic branching instruction. 26 2.6.2 instructions and addressing modes table 2-2 indicates the instructions available in the h8/300h cpu. table 2-2 instructions and addressing modes addressing modes @@ @@ (d:16, (d:24, @ern+/ @ @ @ (d:8, (d:16, @@ function instruction #xx rn @ern ern) ern) @?rn aa:8 aa:16 aa:24 pc) pc) aa:8 mov bwl bwl bwl bwl bwl bwl b bwl bwl pop, push wl movfpe, b movtpe add, cmp bwl bwl sub wl bwl addx, subx b b adds, subs l inc, dec bwl daa, das b mulxu, bw mulxs, divxu, divxs neg bwl extu, exts wl logic and, or, bwl bwl operations xor not bwl shift instructions bwl bit manipulation b b b branch bcc, bsr oo ?? jmp, jsr ? ? o ??? ?? o ?? o ? rts ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? o trapa ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? o rte ??? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? o sleep ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? o ldc b b w w w w ? w w ? ? ? ? stc ? b w w w w ? w w ? ? ? ? andc, orc, b ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? xorc nop ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? o block data transfer ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? bw legend b: byte w: word l: longword data transfer arithmetic operations system control 27 2.6.3 tables of instructions classified by function tables 2-3 to 2-10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. the operation notation used in these tables is defined next. operation notation rd general register (destination) * rs general register (source) * rn general register * ern general register (32-bit register or address register) (ead) destination operand (eas) source operand ccr condition code register n n (negative) flag of ccr z z (zero) flag of ccr v v (overflow) flag of ccr c c (carry) flag of ccr pc program counter sp stack pointer #imm immediate data disp displacement + addition subtraction multiplication ? division and logical or logical ? exclusive or logical ? move a not (logical complement) :3/:8/:16/:24 3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length note: * general registers include 8-bit registers (r0h to r7h, r0l to r7l), 16-bit registers (r0 to r7, e0 to e7), and 32-bit data or address registers (er0 to er7). 28 table 2-3 data transfer instructions instruction size * function mov b/w/l (eas) ? rd, rs ? (ead) moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. movfpe b (eas) ? rd cannot be used in the h8/3048 series. movtpe b rs ? (eas) cannot be used in the h8/3048 series. pop w/l @sp+ ? rn pops a general register from the stack. pop.w rn is identical to mov.w @sp+, rn. similarly, pop.l ern is identical to mov.l @sp+, ern. push w/l rn ? @esp pushes a general register onto the stack. push.w rn is identical to mov.w rn, @esp. similarly, push.l ern is identical to mov.l ern, @esp. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword 29 table 2-4 arithmetic operation instructions instruction size * function b/w/l rd rs ? rd, rd #imm ? rd performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. use the subx or add instruction.) b rd rs c ? rd, rd #imm c ? rd performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. b/w/l rd 1 ? rd, rd 2 ? rd increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) l rd 1 ? rd, rd 2 ? rd, rd 4 ? rd adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. b rd decimal adjust ? rd decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to ccr to produce 4-bit bcd data. mulxu b/w rd rs ? rd performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits 8 bits ? 16 bits or 16 bits 16 bits ? 32 bits. mulxs b/w rd rs ? rd performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits 8 bits ? 16 bits or 16 bits 16 bits ? 32 bits. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword addx, subx inc, dec add, sub adds, subs daa, das 30 table 2-4 arithmetic operation instructions (cont) instruction size * function divxu b/w rd rs ? rd performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ? 8 bits ? 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ? 16 bits ? 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. divxs b/w rd ? rs ? rd performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ? 8 bits ? 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits ? 16 bits ? 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder. cmp b/w/l rd e rs, rd e #imm compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets ccr according to the result. neg b/w/l 0 e rd ? rd takes the two?s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. exts w/l rd (sign extension) ? rd extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by extending the sign bit. extu w/l rd (zero extension) ? rd extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by padding with zeros. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword 31 table 2-5 logic operation instructions instruction size * function and b/w/l rd rs ? rd, rd #imm ? rd performs a logical and operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. or b/w/l rd rs ? rd, rd #imm ? rd performs a logical or operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. xor b/w/l rd ? rs ? rd, rd ? #imm ? rd performs a logical exclusive or operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. not b/w/l a rd ? rd takes the one?s complement of general register contents. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword table 2-6 shift instructions instruction size * function b/w/l rd (shift) ? rd performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. b/w/l rd (shift) ? rd performs a logical shift on general register contents. b/w/l rd (rotate) ? rd rotates general register contents. b/w/l rd (rotate) ? rd rotates general register contents through the carry bit. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword shal, shar shll, shlr rotl, rotr rotxl, rotxr 32 table 2-7 bit manipulation instructions instruction size * function bset b 1 ? ( table 2-7 bit manipulation instructions (cont) instruction size * function bor b c ( table 2-8 branching instructions instruction size function bcc branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. the branching conditions are listed below. mnemonic description condition bra (bt) always (true) always brn (bf) never (false) never bhi high c z = 0 bls low or same c z = 1 bcc (bhs) carry clear (high or same) c = 0 bcs (blo) carry set (low) c = 1 bne not equal z = 0 beq equal z = 1 bvc overflow clear v = 0 bvs overflow set v = 1 bpl plus n = 0 bmi minus n = 1 bge greater or equal n ? v = 0 blt less than n ? v = 1 bgt greater than z (n ? v) = 0 ble less or equal z (n ? v) = 1 jmp ? branches unconditionally to a specified address bsr ? branches to a subroutine at a specified address jsr ? branches to a subroutine at a specified address rts ? returns from a subroutine 35 table 2-9 system control instructions instruction size * function trapa starts trap-instruction exception handling rte returns from an exception-handling routine sleep causes a transition to the power-down state ldc b/w (eas) ? ccr moves the source operand contents to the condition code register. the condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access. stc b/w ccr ? (ead) transfers the ccr contents to a destination location. the condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by word access. andc b ccr #imm ? ccr logically ands the condition code register with immediate data. orc b ccr #imm ? ccr logically ors the condition code register with immediate data. xorc b ccr ? #imm ? ccr logically exclusive-ors the condition code register with immediate data. nop ? pc + 2 ? pc only increments the program counter. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word 36 table 2-10 block transfer instruction instruction size function eepmov.b if r4l 0 then repeat @er5+ ? @er6+, r4l e 1 ? r4l until r4l = 0 else next; eepmov.w ? if r4 0 then repeat @er5+ ? @er6+, r4 e 1 ? r4 until r4 = 0 else next; transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers r4l or r4, er5, and er6. r4l or r4: size of block (bytes) er5: starting source address er6: starting destination address execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. 37 2.6.4 basic instruction formats the h8/300h instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. an instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (ea field), and a condition field (cc). operation field: indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. the operation field always includes the first 4 bits of the instruction. some instructions have two operation fields. register field: specifies a general register. address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. some instructions have two register fields. some have no register field. effective address extension: eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. a 24-bit address or displacement is treated as 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (h'00). condition field: specifies the branching condition of bcc instructions. figure 2-9 shows examples of instruction formats. figure 2-9 instruction formats op nop, rts, etc. op rn rm op rn rm ea (disp) operation field only add.b rn, rm, etc. operation field and register fields mov.b @(d:16, rn), rm operation field, register fields, and effective address extension bra d:8 operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc ea (disp) 38 2.6.5 notes on use of bit manipulation instructions the bset, bclr, bnot, bst, and bist instructions read a byte of data, modify a bit in the byte, then write the byte back. care is required when these instructions are used to access registers with write-only bits, or to access ports. the bclr instruction can be used to clear flags in the on-chip registers. in an interrupt-handling routine, for example, if it is known that the flag is set to 1, it is not necessary to read the flag ahead of time. 2.7 addressing modes and effective address calculation 2.7.1 addressing modes the h8/300h cpu supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2-11. each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program- counter relative and memory indirect. bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute (@aa:8) addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (bset, bclr, bnot, and btst instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. table 2-11 addressing modes no. addressing mode symbol 1 register direct rn 2 register indirect @ern 3 register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ern)/@(d:24, ern) 4 register indirect with post-increment @ern+ register indirect with pre-decrement @?rn 5 absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24 6 immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 7 program-counter relative @(d:8, pc)/@(d:16, pc) 8 memory indirect @@aa:8 39 1 register direct?n: the register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit register containing the operand. r0h to r7h and r0l to r7l can be specified as 8-bit registers. r0 to r7 and e0 to e7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. er0 to er7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2 register indirect?ern: the register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ern), the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of the operand. 3 register indirect with displacement?(d:16, ern) or @(d:24, ern): a 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is added to the contents of an address register (ern) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum specify the address of a memory operand. a 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. 4 register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement?ern+ or @?rn: register indirect with post-increment?ern+ the register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ern) the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of a memory operand. after the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register. the value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. for word or longword access, the register value should be even. register indirect with pre-decrement??rn the value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ern) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result become the address of a memory operand. the result is also stored in the address register. the value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. for word or longword access, the resulting register value should be even. 5 absolute address?aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24: the instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. the absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), or 24 bits long (@aa:24). for an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (h'ffff). for a 16-bit absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. a 24-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. table 2-12 indicates the accessible address ranges. 40 table 2-12 absolute address access ranges absolute address 1-mbyte modes 16-mbyte modes 8 bits (@aa:8) h'fff00 to h'fffff h'ffff00 to h'ffffff (1048320 to 1048575) (16776960 to 16777215) 16 bits (@aa:16) h'00000 to h'07fff, h'000000 to h'007fff, h'f8000 to h'fffff h'ff8000 to h'ffffff (0 to 32767, 1015808 to 1048575) (0 to 32767, 16744448 to 16777215) 24 bits (@aa:24) h'00000 to h'fffff h'000000 to h'ffffff (0 to 1048575) (0 to 16777215) 6 immediate?xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: the instruction code contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. the instruction codes of the adds, subs, inc, and dec instructions contain immediate data implicitly. the instruction codes of some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data specifying a bit number. the trapa instruction code contains 2-bit immediate data specifying a vector address. 7 program-counter relative?(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc): this mode is used in the bcc and bsr instructions. an 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is sign- extended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit pc contents to generate a 24-bit branch address. the pc value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is ?26 to +128 bytes (?3 to +64 words) or ?2766 to +32768 bytes (?6383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. the resulting value should be an even number. 8 memory indirect?@aa:8: this mode can be used by the jmp and jsr instructions. the instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. this memory operand contains a branch address. the memory operand is accessed by longword access. the first byte of the memory operand is ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. see figure 2-10. the upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are assumed to be 0 (h'0000), so the address range is 0 to 255 (h'000000 to h'0000ff). note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector area. for further details see section 5, interrupt controller. 41 figure 2-10 memory-indirect branch address specification when a word-size or longword-size memory operand is specified, or when a branch address is specified, if the specified memory address is odd, the least significant bit is regarded as 0. the accessed data or instruction code therefore begins at the preceding address. see section 2.5.2, memory data formats. 2.7.2 effective address calculation table 2-13 explains how an effective address is calculated in each addressing mode. in the 1-mbyte operating modes the upper 4 bits of the calculated address are ignored in order to generate a 20-bit effective address. specified by @aa:8 reserved branch address 42 table 2-13 effective address calculation addressing mode and instruction format no. effective address calculation effective address register direct (rn) 1 operand is general register contents op rm rn register indirect (@ern) 2 op r general register contents 31 0 23 0 register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ern)/@(d:24, ern) 3 op r general register contents 31 0 23 0 disp sign extension disp register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement 4 general register contents 31 0 23 0 1, 2, or 4 op r general register contents 31 0 23 0 1, 2, or 4 op r 1 for a byte operand, 2 for a word operand, 4 for a longword operand register indirect with post-increment @ern+ register indirect with pre-decrement @?rn 43 table 2-13 effective address calculation (cont) addressing mode and instruction format no. effective address calculation effective address absolute address @aa:8 5 op program-counter relative @(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc) 7 0 23 0 abs 23 0 87 @aa:16 op abs 23 0 16 15 h'ffff sign extension @aa:24 op 23 0 abs immediate #xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 6 operand is immediate data op disp 23 0 pc contents disp op imm sign extension 44 table 2-13 effective address calculation (cont) addressing mode and instruction format no. effective address calculation effective address 8 legend r, rm, rn: op: disp: imm: abs: register field operation field displacement immediate data absolute address memory indirect @@aa:8 8 op 23 0 abs 23 0 87 h'0000 0 abs 31 memory contents 45 2.8 processing states 2.8.1 overview the h8/300h cpu has five processing states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, power-down state, reset state, and bus-released state. the power-down state includes sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. figure 2-11 classifies the processing states. figure 2-13 indicates the state transitions. figure 2-11 processing states processing states program execution state bus-released state reset state power-down state the cpu executes program instructions in sequence a transient state in which the cpu executes a hardware sequence (saving pc and ccr, fetching a vector, etc.) in response to a reset, interrupt, or other exception the external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the cpu the cpu and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and halted the cpu is halted to conserve power sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode exception-handling state 46 2.8.2 program execution state in this state the cpu executes program instructions in normal sequence. 2.8.3 exception-handling state the exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the cpu alters the normal program flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. the cpu fetches a starting address from the exception vector table and branches to that address. in interrupt and trap exception handling the cpu references the stack pointer (er7) and saves the program counter and condition code register. types of exception handling and their priority: exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. table 2-14 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. table 2-14 exception handling types and priority priority type of exception detection timing start of exception handling high reset synchronized with clock exception handling starts immediately when res changes from low to high interrupt end of instruction when an interrupt is requested, execution or end of exception handling starts at the end of exception handling * the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence trap instruction when trapa instruction exception handling starts when a trap low is executed (trapa) instruction is executed note: * interrupts are not detected at the end of the andc, orc, xorc, and ldc instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. figure 2-12 classifies the exception sources. for further details about exception sources, vector numbers, and vector addresses, see section 4, exception handling, and section 5, interrupt controller. 47 figure 2-12 classification of exception sources figure 2-13 state transitions exception sources reset interrupt trap instruction external interrupts internal interrupts (from on-chip supporting modules) bus-released state exception-handling state reset state program execution state sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode power-down state end of bus release bus request end of bus release bus request end of exception handling exception interrupt sleep instruction with ssby = 0 sleep instruction with ssby = 1 nmi, irq , irq , or irq interrupt stby res = 1, = 0 res = 1 01 2 * 1 * 2 notes: 1. 2. from any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever goes low. from any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when goes low. res stby 48 2.8.4 exception-handling sequences reset exception handling: reset exception handling has the highest priority. the reset state is entered when the res signal goes low. reset exception handling starts after that, when res changes from low to high. when reset exception handling starts the cpu fetches a start address from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. all interrupts, including nmi, are disabled during the reset exception-handling sequence and immediately after it ends. interrupt exception handling and trap instruction exception handling: when these exception-handling sequences begin, the cpu references the stack pointer (er7) and pushes the program counter and condition code register on the stack. next, if the ue bit in the system control register (syscr) is set to 1, the cpu sets the i bit in the condition code register to 1. if the ue bit is cleared to 0, the cpu sets both the i bit and the ui bit in the condition code register to 1. then the cpu fetches a start address from the exception vector table and execution branches to that address. figure 2-14 shows the stack after the exception-handling sequence. figure 2-14 stack structure after exception handling sp? sp? sp? sp? sp (er7) before exception handling starts sp (er7) sp+1 sp+2 sp+3 sp+4 after exception handling ends stack area ccr pc even address pushed on stack legend ccr: sp: condition code register stack pointer notes: 1. 2. pc is the address of the first instruction executed after the return from the exception-handling routine. registers must be saved and restored by word access or longword access, starting at an even address. 49 2.8.5 bus-released state in this state the bus is released to a bus master other than the cpu, in response to a bus request. the bus masters other than the cpu are the dma controller, the refresh controller, and an external bus master. while the bus is released, the cpu halts except for internal operations. interrupt requests are not accepted. for details see section 6.3.7, bus arbiter operation. 2.8.6 reset state when the res input goes low all current processing stops and the cpu enters the reset state. the i bit in the condition code register is set to 1 by a reset. all interrupts are masked in the reset state. reset exception handling starts when the res signal changes from low to high. the reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. for details see section 12, watchdog timer. 2.8.7 power-down state in the power-down state the cpu stops operating to conserve power. there are three modes: sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. sleep mode: a transition to sleep mode is made if the sleep instruction is executed while the ssby bit is cleared to 0 in the system control register (syscr). cpu operations stop immediately after execution of the sleep instruction, but the contents of cpu registers are retained. software standby mode: a transition to software standby mode is made if the sleep instruction is executed while the ssby bit is set to 1 in syscr. the cpu and clock halt and all on-chip supporting modules stop operating. the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied the contents of cpu registers and on-chip ram are retained. the i/o ports also remain in their existing states. hardware standby mode: a transition to hardware standby mode is made when the stby input goes low. as in software standby mode, the cpu and all clocks halt and the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip ram contents are retained. for further information see section 20, power-down state. 50 2.9 basic operational timing 2.9.1 overview the h8/300h cpu operates according to the system clock (?. the interval from one rise of the system clock to the next rise is referred to as a ?tate.? a memory cycle or bus cycle consists of two or three states. the cpu uses different methods to access on-chip memory, the on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. access to the external address space can be controlled by the bus controller. 2.9.2 on-chip memory access timing on-chip memory is accessed in two states. the data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word access. figure 2-15 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. figure 2-16 indicates the pin states. figure 2-15 on-chip memory access cycle t state bus cycle internal address bus internal read signal internal data bus (read access) internal write signal internal data bus (write access) 1 t state 2 read data address write data 51 figure 2-16 pin states during on-chip memory access t , , , as ? 1 t 2 address bus d to d 15 0 rd hwr lwr high address high impedance 52 2.9.3 on-chip supporting module access timing the on-chip supporting modules are accessed in three states. the data bus is 8 or 16 bits wide, depending on the register being accessed. figure 2-17 shows the on-chip supporting module access timing. figure 2-18 indicates the pin states. figure 2-17 access cycle for on-chip supporting modules address bus internal read signal internal data bus internal write signal address internal data bus t state bus cycle 1 t state 2 t state 3 read access write access write data read data 53 figure 2-18 pin states during access to on-chip supporting modules 2.9.4 access to external address space the external address space is divided into eight areas (areas 0 to 7). bus-controller settings determine whether each area is accessed via an 8-bit or 16-bit bus, and whether it is accessed in two or three states. for details see section 6, bus controller. t , , , as ? 1 t 2 address bus d to d 15 0 rd hwr lwr high high impedance t 3 address 54 section 3 mcu operating modes 3.1 overview 3.1.1 operating mode selection the h8/3048 series has seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7) that are selected by the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) as indicated in table 3-1. the input at these pins determines the size of the address space and the initial bus mode. table 3-1 operating mode selection description operating initial bus on-chip on-chip mode md 2 md 1 md 0 address space mode * 1 rom ram 000 mode 1 0 0 1 expanded mode 8 bits disabled enabled * 2 mode 2 0 1 0 expanded mode 16 bits disabled enabled * 2 mode 3 0 1 1 expanded mode 8 bits disabled enabled * 2 mode 4 1 0 0 expanded mode 16 bits disabled enabled * 2 mode 5 1 0 1 expanded mode 8 bits enabled enabled * 2 mode 6 1 1 0 expanded mode 8 bits enabled enabled * 2 mode 7 1 1 1 single-chip advanced enabled enabled mode notes: 1. in modes 1 to 6, an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus can be selected on a per-area basis by settings made in the area bus width control register (abwcr). for details see section 6, bus controller. 2. if the rame bit in syscr is cleared to 0, these addresses become external addresses. for the address space size there are two choices: 1 mbyte or 16 mbytes. the external data bus is either 8 or 16 bits wide depending on abwcr settings. if 8-bit access is selected for all areas, the external data bus is 8 bits wide. for details see section 6, bus controller. modes 1 to 4 are externally expanded modes that enable access to external memory and peripheral devices and disable access to the on-chip rom. modes 1 and 2 support a maximum address space of 1 mbyte. modes 3 and 4 support a maximum address space of 16 mbytes. mode pins md 2 md 1 md 0 55 modes 5 and 6 are externally expanded modes that enable access to external memory and peripheral devices and also enable access to the on-chip rom. mode 5 supports a maximum address space of 1 mbyte. mode 6 supports a maximum address space of 16 mbytes. mode 7 is a single-chip mode that operates using the on-chip rom, ram, and registers, and makes all i/o ports available. mode 7 supports a 1-mbyte address space. the h8/3048 series can be used only in modes 1 to 7. the inputs at the mode pins must select one of these seven modes. the inputs at the mode pins must not be changed during operation. 3.1.2 register configuration the h8/3048 series has a mode control register (mdcr) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ), and a system control register (syscr). table 3-2 summarizes these registers. table 3-2 registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fff1 mode control register mdcr r undetermined h'fff2 system control register syscr r/w h'0b note: * the lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 56 3.2 mode control register (mdcr) mdcr is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the h8/3048 series. bits 7 and 6?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bits 5 to 3?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bits 2 to 0?ode select 2 to 0 (mds2 to mds0): these bits indicate the logic levels at pins md 2 to md 0 (the current operating mode). mds2 to mds0 correspond to md 2 to md 0 . mds2 to mds0 are read-only bits. the mode pin (md 2 to md 0 ) levels are latched into these bits when mdcr is read. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 0 4 0 3 0 0 mds0 ? r * 2 mds2 ? r 1 mds1 ? r ** reserved bits mode select 2 to 0 bits indicating the current operating mode reserved bits note: determined by pins md to md . * 20 57 3.3 system control register (syscr) syscr is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the h8/3048 series. bit 7?oftware standby (ssby): enables transition to software standby mode. (for further information about software standby mode see section 20, power-down state.) when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1. to clear this bit, write 0. bit 7 ssby description 0 sleep instruction causes transition to sleep mode (initial value) 1 sleep instruction causes transition to software standby mode bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 1 software standby enables transition to software standby mode user bit enable selects whether to use the ui bit in ccr as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit nmi edge select selects the valid edge of the nmi input reserved bit ram enable enables or disables on-chip ram standby timer select 2 to 0 these bits select the waiting time at recovery from software standby mode 58 bits 6 to 4?tandby timer select (sts2 to sts0): these bits select the length of time the cpu and on-chip supporting modules wait for the internal clock oscillator to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. when using a crystal oscillator, set these bits so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms at the system clock rate. for further information about waiting time selection, see section 20.4.3, selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 sts2 sts1 sts0 description 000w aiting time = 8,192 states (initial value) 001w aiting time = 16,384 states 010w aiting time = 32,768 states 011w aiting time = 65,536 states 100w aiting time = 131,072 states 101w aiting time = 1,024 states 1 1 illegal setting bit 3?ser bit enable (ue): selects whether to use the ui bit in the condition code register as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. bit 3 ue description 0 ui bit in ccr is used as an interrupt mask bit 1 ui bit in ccr is used as a user bit (initial value) bit 2?mi edge select (nmieg): selects the valid edge of the nmi input. bit 2 nmieg description 0 an interrupt is requested at the falling edge of nmi (initial value) 1 an interrupt is requested at the rising edge of nmi bit 1?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 0?am enable (rame): enables or disables the on-chip ram. the rame bit is initialized by the rising edge of the res signal. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0 rame description 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled (initial value) 59 3.4 operating mode descriptions 3.4.1 mode 1 ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins a 19 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 1-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 3.4.2 mode 2 ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins a 19 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 1-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. if all areas are designated for 8-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. 3.4.3 mode 3 ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port a function as address pins a 23 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 16-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. a 23 to a 21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of the bus release control register (brcr). (in this mode a 20 is always used for address output.) 3.4.4 mode 4 ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port a function as address pins a 23 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 16-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. if all areas are designated for 8-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. a 23 to a 21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of brcr. (in this mode a 20 is always used for address output.) 3.4.5 mode 5 ports 1, 2, and 5 can function as address pins a 19 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 1-mbyte address space, but following a reset they are input ports. to use ports 1, 2, and 5 as an address bus, the corresponding bits in their data direction registers (p1ddr, p2ddr, and p5ddr) must be set to 1. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 3.4.6 mode 6 ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port a function as address pins a 23 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 16-mbyte address space, but following a reset they are input ports. to use ports 1, 2, and 5 as an address bus, the corresponding bits in their data direction registers (p1ddr, p2ddr, and p5ddr) must be set to 1. for a 23 to a 21 output, clear bits 7 to 5 of brcr to 0. (in this mode a 20 is always used for address output.) the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 60 3.4.7 mode 7 this mode operates using the on-chip rom, ram, and registers. all i/o ports are available. mode 7 supports a 1-mbyte address space. 3.5 pin functions in each operating mode the pin functions of ports 1 to 5 and port a vary depending on the operating mode. table 3-3 indicates their functions in each operating mode. table 3-3 pin functions in each mode port mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port 1 a 7 to a 0 a 7 to a 0 a 7 to a 0 a 7 to a 0 p1 7 to p1 0 * 2 p1 7 to p1 0 * 2 p1 7 to p1 0 port 2 a 15 to a 8 a 15 to a 8 a 15 to a 8 a 15 to a 8 p2 7 to p2 0 * 2 p2 7 to p2 0 * 2 p2 7 to p2 0 port 3 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 p3 7 to p3 0 port 4 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 d 7 to d 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 d 7 to d 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 port 5 a 19 to a 16 a 19 to a 16 a 19 to a 16 a 19 to a 16 p5 3 to p5 0 * 2 p5 3 to p5 0 * 2 p5 3 to p5 0 port a pa 7 to pa 4 pa 7 to pa 4 pa 7 to pa 5 * 3 , a 20 pa 7 to pa 5 * 3 , a 20 pa 7 to pa 4 pa 7 to pa 5 , a 20 * 3 pa 7 to pa 4 notes: 1. initial state. the bus mode can be switched by settings in abwcr. these pins function as p4 7 to p4 0 in 8-bit bus mode, and as d 7 to d 0 in 16-bit bus mode. 2. initial state. these pins become address output pins when the corresponding bits in the data direction registers (p1ddr, p2ddr, p5ddr) are set to 1. 3. initial state. a 20 is always an address output pin. pa 7 to pa 5 are switched over to a 23 to a 21 output by writing 0 in bits 7 to 5 of brcr. 3.6 memory map in each operating mode figure 3-1 shows a memory map of the h8/3048. figure 3-2 shows a memory map of the h8/3047. figure 3-3 shows a memory map of the h8/3044. figure 3-4 shows a memory map of the h8/3045. the address space is divided into eight areas. the initial bus mode differs between modes 1 and 2, and also between modes 3 and 4. the address locations of the on-chip ram and on-chip registers differ between the 1-mbyte modes (modes 1, 2, 5, and 7) and 16-mbyte modes (modes 3, 4, and 6). the address range specifiable by the cpu in the 8- and 16-bit absolute addressing modes (@aa:8 and @aa:16) also differs. 61 figure 3-1 h8/3048 memory map in each operating mode h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef0f h'fef10 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff note: external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. * modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef0f h'ffef10 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 62 figure 3-1 h8/3048 memory map in each operating mode (cont) h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram * external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef0f h'fef10 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'fef10 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff1c h'fffff h'1ffff h'f8000 note: external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. * on-chip rom h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 7 external address space vector area external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'01ffff h'020000 h'ffef0f h'ffef10 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 on-chip ram * area 6 h'ff8000 63 figure 3-2 h8/3047 memory map in each operating mode h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef0f h'fef10 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff note: external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. * modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef0f h'ffef10 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 64 figure 3-2 h8/3047 memory map in each operating mode (cont) h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff h'17fff h'18000 memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef0f h'fef10 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip rom reserved * 1 on-chip ram on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'fef10 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff1c h'fffff h'17fff h'f8000 notes: h'1ffff h'20000 reserved * 1 * 2 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * 2 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'01ffff h'020000 h'ffef0f h'ffef10 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'017fff h'018000 h'ff8000 area 6 65 figure 3-3 h8/3044 memory map in each operating mode h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef10 h'ff70f h'ff710 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef10 h'fff70f h'fff710 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 notes: 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. 66 figure 3-3 h8/3044 memory map in each operating mode (cont) h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff h'08000 memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'dffff h'e0000 h'fef10 h'ff70f h'ff710 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff h'00000 h'000ff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff710 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff1c h'fffff h'07fff h'f8000 notes: reserved * 1 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff h'008000 h'01ffff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ffef10 h'fff70f h'fff710 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 on-chip rom reserved * 1 h'ff8000 67 figure 3-4 h8/3045 memory map in each operating mode 68 h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef10 h'ff70f h'ff710 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef10 h'fff70f h'fff710 h'ffff00 h'ffff0f h'ffff10 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 notes: 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. figure 3-4 h8/3045 memory map in each operating mode (cont) 69 h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff h'0ffff h'10000 memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'dffff h'e0000 h'fef10 h'ff70f h'ff710 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff10 h'fff1b h'fff1c h'fffff h'00000 h'000ff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff710 h'fff00 h'fff0f h'fff1c h'fffff h'07fff h'0ffff h'f8000 notes: reserved * 1 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff h'00ffff h'010000 h'01ffff h'020000 memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area external address space on-chip registers 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ffef10 h'fff70f h'fff710 h'ffff1b h'ffff1c h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 on-chip ram * 2 reserved * 1 on-chip rom reserved * 1 h'ff8000 section 4 exception handling 4.1 overview 4.1.1 exception handling types and priority as table 4-1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4-1. if two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in priority order. trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. table 4-1 exception types and priority priority exception type start of exception handling high reset starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the res pin interrupt interrupt requests are handled when execution of the current instruction or handling of the current exception is completed low trap instruction (trapa) started by execution of a trap instruction (trapa) 4.1.2 exception handling operation exceptions originate from various sources. trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows. 1. the program counter (pc) and condition code register (ccr) are pushed onto the stack. 2. the ccr interrupt mask bit is set to 1. 3. a vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from the address indicated in that address. for a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 71 4.1.3 exception vector table the exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4-1. different vectors are assigned to different exception sources. table 4-2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. figure 4-1 exception sources table 4-2 exception vector table exception source vector number vector address * 1 reset 0 h'0000 to h'0003 reserved for system use 1 h'0004 to h'0007 2 h'0008 to h'000b 3 h'000c to h'000f 4 h'0010 to h'0013 5 h'0014 to h'0017 6 h'0018 to h'001b external interrupt (nmi) 7 h'001c to h'001f trap instruction (4 sources) 8 h'0020 to h'0023 9 h'0024 to h'0027 10 h'0028 to h'002b 11 h'002c to h'002f external interrupt irq 0 12 h'0030 to h'0033 external interrupt irq 1 13 h'0034 to h'0037 external interrupt irq 2 14 h'0038 to h'003b external interrupt irq 3 15 h'003c to h'003f external interrupt irq 4 16 h'0040 to h'0043 external interrupt irq 5 17 h'0044 to h'0047 reserved for system use 18 h'0048 to h'004b 19 h'004c to h'004f internal interrupts * 2 20 h'0050 to h'0053 to to 60 h'00f0 to h'00f3 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. for the internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, interrupt vector table. exception sources ? reset ? interrupts ? trap instruction external interrupts: internal interrupts: nmi, irq to irq 30 interrupts from on-chip supporting modules 0 5 72 4.2 reset 4.2.1 overview a reset is the highest-priority exception. when the res pin goes low, all processing halts and the chip enters the reset state. a reset initializes the internal state of the cpu and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules. reset exception handling begins when the res pin changes from low to high. the chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. for details see section 12, watchdog timer. 4.2.2 reset sequence the chip enters the reset state when the res pin goes low. to ensure that the chip is reset, hold the res pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. to reset the chip during operation, hold the res pin low for at least 10 system clock (? cycles. see appendix d.2, pin states at reset, for the states of the pins in the reset state. when the res pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset exception handling as follows. the internal state of the cpu and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the i bit is set to 1 in ccr. the contents of the reset vector address (h'0000 to h'0003) are read, and program execution starts from the address indicated in the vector address. figure 4-2 shows the reset sequence in modes 1 and 3. figure 4-3 shows the reset sequence in modes 2 and 4. figure 4-4 shows the reset sequence in mode 6. 73 figure 4-2 reset sequence (modes 1 and 3) address bus res rd hwr d to d 15 8 vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction (1), (3), (5), (7) (2), (4), (6), (8) (9) (10) note: after a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. address of reset vector: (1) = h'00000, (3) = h'00001, (5) = h'00002, (7) = h'00003 start address (contents of reset vector) start address first instruction of program high (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) lwr , 74 figure 4-3 reset sequence (modes 2 and 4) address bus res rd hwr d to d 15 0 vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction (1), (3) (2), (4) (5) (6) note: after a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. high lwr , address of reset vector: (1) = h'000000, (3) = h'000002 start address (contents of reset vector) start address first instruction of program (2) (4) (3) (1) (5) (6) 75 figure 4-4 reset sequence (mode 5, 6 and 7) 4.2.3 interrupts after reset if an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (sp) is initialized, pc and ccr will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. to prevent this, all interrupt requests, including nmi, are disabled immediately after a reset. the first instruction of the program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends. this instruction should initialize the stack pointer (example: mov.l #xx:32, sp). vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction internal address bus res internal read signal internal write signal internal data bus (16 bits wide) (1) (3) (5) (2) (4) (6) (1), (3) (2), (4) (5) (6) address of reset vector ((1) = h'000000, (2) = h'000002) start address (contents of reset vector) start address first instruction of program 76 4.3 interrupts interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (nmi, irq 0 to irq 5 ) and 30 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. figure 4-5 classifies the interrupt sources and indicates the number of interrupts of each type. the on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts are the watchdog timer (wdt), refresh controller, 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu), dma controller (dmac), serial communication interface (sci), and a/d converter. each interrupt source has a separate vector address. nmi is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted. interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. the interrupt controller can assign interrupts other than nmi to two priority levels, and arbitrate between simultaneous interrupts. interrupt priorities are assigned in interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra and iprb) in the interrupt controller. for details on interrupts see section 5, interrupt controller. figure 4-5 interrupt sources and number of interrupts interrupts external interrupts internal interrupts nmi (1) irq to irq (6) wdt (1) refresh controller (1) itu (15) dmac (4) sci (8) a/d converter (1) * 1 * 2 notes: numbers in parentheses are the number of interrupt sources. 1. 2. when the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at every counter overflow. when the refresh controller is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at compare match. 0 5 77 4.4 trap instruction trap instruction exception handling starts when a trapa instruction is executed. if the ue bit is set to 1 in the system control register (syscr), the exception handling sequence sets the i bit to 1 in ccr. if the ue bit is 0, the i and ui bits are both set to 1. the trapa instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, which is specified in the instruction code. 78 4.5 stack status after exception handling figure 4-6 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. figure 4-6 stack after completion of exception handling sp-4 sp-3 sp-2 sp-1 sp (er7) ? sp (er7) sp+1 sp+2 sp+3 sp+4 ? before exception handling after exception handling stack area ccr pc pc pc e h l even address pushed on stack legend pce: pch: pcl: ccr: sp: notes: pc indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after return. registers must be saved in word or longword size at even addresses. 1. 2. bits 23 to 16 of program counter (pc) bits 15 to 8 of program counter (pc) bits 7 to 0 of program counter (pc) condition code register stack pointer 79 4.6 notes on stack usage when accessing word data or longword data, the h8/3048 series regards the lowest address bit as 0. the stack should always be accessed by word access or longword access, and the value of the stack pointer (sp, er7) should always be kept even. use the following instructions to save registers: push.w rn (or mov.w rn, @?p) push.l ern (or mov.l ern, @?p) use the following instructions to restore registers: pop.w rn (or mov.w @sp+, rn) pop.l ern (or mov.l @sp+, ern) setting sp to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. figure 4-7 shows an example of what happens when the sp value is odd. figure 4-7 operation when sp value is odd trapa instruction executed ccr legend ccr: pc: r1l: sp: sp pc r1l pc sp sp mov. b r1l, @-er7 sp set to h'fffeff data saved above sp ccr contents lost condition code register program counter general register r1l stack pointer note: the diagram illustrates modes 3 and 4. h'fffefa h'fffefb h'fffefc h'fffefd h'fffeff 80 section 5 interrupt controller 5.1 overview 5.1.1 features the interrupt controller has the following features: interrupt priority registers (iprs) for setting interrupt priorities interrupts other than nmi can be assigned to two priority levels on a module-by-module basis in interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra and iprb). three-level masking by the i and ui bits in the cpu condition code register (ccr) independent vector addresses all interrupts are independently vectored; the interrupt service routine does not have to identify the interrupt source. seven external interrupt pins nmi has the highest priority and is always accepted; either the rising or falling edge can be selected. for each of irq 0 to irq 5 , sensing of the falling edge or level sensing can be selected independently. 81 5.1.2 block diagram figure 5-1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller. figure 5-1 interrupt controller block diagram iscr ier ipra, iprb . . . ovf tme adi adie . . . . . . . cpu ccr i ui ue syscr iscr: ier: isr: ipra: iprb: syscr: nmi input irq input irq input section isr interrupt controller priority decision logic interrupt request vector number irq sense control register irq enable register irq status register interrupt priority register a interrupt priority register b system control register legend 82 5.1.3 pin configuration table 5-1 lists the interrupt pins. table 5-1 interrupt pins name abbreviation i/o function nonmaskable interrupt nmi input nonmaskable interrupt, rising edge or falling edge selectable external interrupt request 5 to 0 irq 5 to irq 0 input maskable interrupts, falling edge or level sensing selectable 5.1.4 register configuration table 5-2 lists the registers of the interrupt controller. table 5-2 interrupt controller registers address * 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fff2 system control register syscr r/w h'0b h'fff4 irq sense control register iscr r/w h'00 h'fff5 irq enable register ier r/w h'00 h'fff6 irq status register isr r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'fff8 interrupt priority register a ipra r/w h'00 h'fff9 interrupt priority register b iprb r/w h'00 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 83 5.2 register descriptions 5.2.1 system control register (syscr) syscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls software standby mode, selects the action of the ui bit in ccr, selects the nmi edge, and enables or disables the on-chip ram. only bits 3 and 2 are described here. for the other bits, see section 3.3, system control register (syscr). syscr is initialized to h'0b by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 1 software standby standby timer select 2 to 0 user bit enable selects whether to use the ui bit in ccr as a user bit or interrupt mask bit nmi edge select selects the nmi input edge reserved bit ram enable 84 bit 3?ser bit enable (ue): selects whether to use the ui bit in ccr as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. bit 3 ue description 0 ui bit in ccr is used as interrupt mask bit 1 ui bit in ccr is used as user bit (initial value) bit 2?mi edge select (nmieg): selects the nmi input edge. bit 2 nmieg description 0 interrupt is requested at falling edge of nmi input (initial value) 1 interrupt is requested at rising edge of nmi input 5.2.2 interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra, iprb) ipra and iprb are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control interrupt priority. 85 interrupt priority register a (ipra): ipra is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. ipra is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 ipra7 0 r/w 6 ipra6 0 r/w 5 ipra5 0 r/w 4 ipra4 0 r/w 3 ipra3 0 r/w 0 ipra0 0 r/w 2 ipra2 0 r/w 1 ipra1 0 r/w priority level a7 selects the priority level of irq interrupt requests priority level a3 selects the priority level of wdt and refresh controller interrupt requests priority level a2 selects the priority level of itu channel 0 interrupt requests priority level a1 selects the priority level of itu channel 1 interrupt requests priority level a0 selects the priority level of itu channel 2 interrupt requests selects the priority level of irq interrupt requests priority level a6 selects the priority level of irq and irq interrupt requests priority level a5 selects the priority level of irq and irq interrupt requests priority level a4 0 1 23 45 86 bit 7?riority level a7 (ipra7): selects the priority level of irq 0 interrupt requests. bit 7 ipra7 description 0 irq 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 6?riority level a6 (ipra6): selects the priority level of irq 1 interrupt requests. bit 6 ipra6 description 0 irq 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 5?riority level a5 (ipra5): selects the priority level of irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests. bit 5 ipra5 description 0 irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 4?riority level a4 (ipra4): selects the priority level of irq 4 and irq 5 interrupt requests. bit 4 ipra4 description 0 irq 4 and irq 5 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 4 and irq 5 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) 87 bit 3?riority level a3 (ipra3): selects the priority level of wdt and refresh controller interrupt requests. bit 3 ipra3 description 0 wdt and refresh controller interrupt requests have priority level 0 (initial value) (low priority) 1 wdt and refresh controller interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 2?riority level a2 (ipra2): selects the priority level of itu channel 0 interrupt requests. bit 2 ipra2 description 0 itu channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 itu channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 1?riority level a1 (ipra1): selects the priority level of itu channel 1 interrupt requests. bit 1 ipra1 description 0 itu channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 itu channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 0?riority level a0 (ipra0): selects the priority level of itu channel 2 interrupt requests. bit 0 ipra0 description 0 itu channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 itu channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) 88 interrupt priority register b (iprb): iprb is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. iprb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 iprb7 0 r/w 6 iprb6 0 r/w 5 iprb5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 iprb3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 iprb2 0 r/w 1 iprb1 0 r/w priority level b7 selects the priority level of itu channel 3 interrupt requests priority level b3 selects the priority level of sci channel 0 interrupt requests priority level b2 selects the priority level of sci channel 1 interrupt requests priority level b1 selects the priority level of a/d converter interrupt request reserved bit selects the priority level of itu channel 4 interrupt requests priority level b6 selects the priority level of dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) priority level b5 reserved bit 89 bit 7?riority level b7 (iprb7): selects the priority level of itu channel 3 interrupt requests. bit 7 iprb7 description 0 itu channel 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 itu channel 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 6?riority level b6 (iprb6): selects the priority level of itu channel 4 interrupt requests. bit 6 iprb6 description 0 itu channel 4 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 itu channel 4 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 5?riority level b5 (iprb5): selects the priority level of dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1). bit 5 iprb5 description 0 dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 0 (initial value) (low priority) 1 dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 4?eserved: this bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. 90 bit 3?riority level b3 (iprb3): selects the priority level of sci channel 0 interrupt requests. bit 3 iprb3 description 0 sci0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 sci0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 2?riority level b2 (iprb2): selects the priority level of sci channel 1 interrupt requests. bit 2 iprb2 description 0 sci1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 sci1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 1?riority level b1 (iprb1): selects the priority level of a/d converter interrupt requests. bit 1 iprb1 description 0 a/d converter interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 a/d converter interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 0?eserved: this bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. 91 5.2.3 irq status register (isr) isr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of irq 0 to irq 5 interrupt requests. isr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bits 5 to 0?rq 5 to irq 0 flags (irq 5 f to irq 0 f): these bits indicate the status of irq 5 to irq 0 interrupt requests. bits 5 to 0 irq5f to irq0f description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) 0 is written in irqnf after reading the irqnf flag when irqnf = 1. irqnsc = 0, irqn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is carried out. irqnsc = 1 and irqn interrupt exception handling is carried out. 1 [setting conditions] irqnsc = 0 and irqn input is low. irqnsc = 1 and irqn input changes from high to low. note: n = 5 to 0 bit initial value read/write 7 0 ? these bits indicate irq to irq interrupt request status note: only 0 can be written, to clear flags. * 6 0 5 irq5f 0 r/(w) * 4 irq4f 0 r/(w) * 3 irq3f 0 r/(w) * 2 irq2f 0 r/(w) * 1 irq1f 0 r/(w) * 0 irq0f 0 r/(w) * 50 irq to irq flags 50 reserved bits 92 5.2.4 irq enable register (ier) ier is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables irq 0 to irq 5 interrupt requests. ier is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits can be written and read, but they do not enable or disable interrupts. bits 5 to 0?rq 5 to irq 0 enable (irq5e to irq0e): these bits enable or disable irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts. bits 5 to 0 irq5e to irq0e description 0 irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts are disabled (initial value) 1 irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts are enabled bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w these bits enable or disable irq to irq interrupts 6 0 r/w 5 irq5e 0 r/w 4 irq4e 0 r/w 3 irq3e 0 r/w 2 irq2e 0 r/w 1 irq1e 0 r/w 0 irq0e 0 r/w 50 irq to irq enable 50 reserved bits 93 5.2.5 irq sense control register (iscr) iscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects level sensing or falling-edge sensing of the inputs at pins irq 5 to irq 0 . iscr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits can be written and read, but they do not select level or falling-edge sensing. bits 5 to 0?rq 5 to irq 0 sense control (irq5sc to irq0sc): these bits select whether interrupts irq 5 to irq 0 are requested by level sensing of pins irq 5 to irq 0 , or by falling-edge sensing. bits 5 to 0 irq5sc to irq0sc description 0 interrupts are requested when irq 5 to irq 0 inputs are low (initial value) 1 interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at irq 5 to irq 0 bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w these bits select level sensing or falling-edge sensing for irq to irq interrupts 6 0 r/w 5 irq5sc 0 r/w 4 irq4sc 0 r/w 3 irq3sc 0 r/w 2 irq2sc 0 r/w 1 irq1sc 0 r/w 0 irq0sc 0 r/w 50 irq to irq sense control 50 reserved bits 94 5.3 interrupt sources the interrupt sources include external interrupts (nmi, irq 0 to irq 5 ) and 30 internal interrupts. 5.3.1 external interrupts there are seven external interrupts: nmi, and irq 0 to irq 5 . of these, nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , and irq 2 can be used to exit software standby mode. nmi: nmi is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted, regardless of the states of the i and ui bits in ccr. the nmieg bit in syscr selects whether an interrupt is requested by the rising or falling edge of the input at the nmi pin. nmi interrupt exception handling has vector number 7. irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts: these interrupts are requested by input signals at pins irq 0 to irq 5 . the irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts have the following features. iscr settings can select whether an interrupt is requested by the low level of the input at pins irq 0 to irq 5 , or by the falling edge. ier settings can enable or disable the irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts. interrupt priority levels can be assigned by four bits in ipra (ipra7 to ipra4). the status of irq 0 to irq 5 interrupt requests is indicated in isr. the isr flags can be cleared to 0 by software. figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 . figure 5-2 block diagram of interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 input edge/level sense circuit irqnsc irqnf s r q irqne irqn interrupt request clear signal irqn note: n = 5 to 0 95 figure 5-3 shows the timing of the setting of the interrupt flags (irqnf). figure 5-3 timing of setting of irqnf interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 have vector numbers 12 to 17. these interrupts are detected regardless of whether the corresponding pin is set for input or output. when using a pin for external interrupt input, clear its ddr bit to 0 and do not use the pin for chip select output, refresh output, or sci input or output. 5.3.2 internal interrupts thirty internal interrupts are requested from the on-chip supporting modules. each on-chip supporting module has status flags for indicating interrupt status, and enable bits for enabling or disabling interrupts. interrupt priority levels can be assigned in ipra and iprb. itu and sci interrupt requests can activate the dmac, in which case no interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller, and the i and ui bits are disregarded. 5.3.3 interrupt vector table table 5-3 lists the interrupt sources, their vector addresses, and their default priority order. in the default priority order, smaller vector numbers have higher priority. the priority of interrupts other than nmi can be changed in ipra and iprb. the priority order after a reset is the default order shown in table 5-3. irqn irqnf input pin note: n = 5 to 0 96 table 5-3 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and priority vector interrupt source origin number vector address * ipr priority nmi external pins 7 h'001c to h'001f high irq 0 12 h'0030 to h'0033 ipra7 irq 1 13 h'0034 to h0037 ipra6 irq 2 14 h'0038 to h'003b ipra5 irq 3 15 h'003c to h'003f irq 4 16 h'0040 to h'0043 ipra4 irq 5 17 h'0044 to h'0047 reserved 18 h'0048 to h'004b 19 h'004c to h'004f wovi watchdog 20 h'0050 to h'0053 ipra3 (interval timer) timer cmi refresh 21 h'0054 to h'0057 (compare match) controller reserved 22 h'0058 to h'005b 23 h'005c to h'005f imia0 itu channel 0 24 h'0060 to h'0063 ipra2 (compare match/ input capture a0) imib0 25 h'0064 to h'0067 (compare match/ input capture b0) ovi0 (overflow 0) 26 h'0068 to h'006b reserved 27 h'006c to h'006f imia1 itu channel 1 28 h'0070 to h'0073 ipra1 (compare match/ input capture a1) imib1 29 h'0074 to h'0077 (compare match/ input capture b1) ovi1 (overflow 1) 30 h'0078 to h'007b reserved 31 h'007c to h'007f low note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 97 table 5-3 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and priority (cont) vector interrupt source origin number vector address * ipr priority imia2 itu channel 2 32 h'0080 to h'0083 ipra0 high (compare match/ input capture a2) imib2 33 h'0084 to h'0087 (compare match/ input capture b2) ovi2 (overflow 2) 34 h'0088 to h'008b reserved 35 h'008c to h'008f imia3 itu channel 3 36 h'0090 to h'0093 iprb7 (compare match/ input capture a3) imib3 37 h'0094 to h'0097 (compare match/ input capture b3) ovi3 (overflow 3) 38 h'0098 to h'009b reserved 39 h'009c to h'009f imia4 itu channel 4 40 h'00a0 to h'00a3 iprb6 (compare match/ input capture a4) imib4 41 h'00a4 to h'00a7 (compare match/ input capture b4) ovi4 (overflow 4) 42 h'00a8 to h'00ab reserved 43 h'00ac to h'00af dend0a dmac 44 h'00b0 to h'00b3 iprb5 dend0b 45 h'00b4 to h'00b7 dend1a 46 h'00b8 to h'00bb dend1b 47 h'00bc to h'00bf reserved 48 h'00c0 to h'00c3 49 h'00c4 to h'00c7 50 h'00c8 to h'00cb 51 h'00cc to h'00cf low note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 98 table 5-3 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and priority (cont) vector interrupt source origin number vector address * ipr priority eri0 (receive error 0) sci channel 0 52 h'00d0 to h'00d3 iprb3 high rxi0 (receive 53 h'00d4 to h'00d7 data full 0) txi0 (transmit 54 h'00d8 to h'00db data empty 0) tei0 (transmit end 0) 55 h'00dc to h'00df eri1 (receive error 1) sci channel 1 56 h'00e0 to h'00e3 iprb2 rxi1 (receive 57 h'00e4 to h'00e7 data full 1) txi1 (transmit 58 h'00e8 to h'00eb data empty 1) tei1 (transmit end 1) 59 h'00ec to h'00ef adi (a/d end) a/d 60 h'00f0 to h'00f3 iprb1 low note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 99 5.4 interrupt operation 5.4.1 interrupt handling process the h8/3048 series handles interrupts differently depending on the setting of the ue bit. when ue = 1, interrupts are controlled by the i bit. when ue = 0, interrupts are controlled by the i and ui bits. table 5-4 indicates how interrupts are handled for all setting combinations of the ue, i, and ui bits. nmi interrupts are always accepted except in the reset and hardware standby states. irq interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules have their own enable bits. interrupt requests are ignored when the enable bits are cleared to 0. table 5-4 ue, i, and ui bit settings and interrupt handling syscr ccr ue i ui description 1 0 all interrupts are accepted. interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. 1 no interrupts are accepted except nmi. 0 0 all interrupts are accepted. interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. 1 0 nmi and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted. 1 no interrupts are accepted except nmi. ue = 1: interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules can all be masked by the i bit in the cpu s ccr. interrupts are masked when the i bit is set to 1, and unmasked when the i bit is cleared to 0. interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. figure 5-4 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when ue = 1. 100 figure 5-4 process up to interrupt acceptance when ue = 1 program execution state interrupt requested? nmi no yes no yes no priority level 1? no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes adi yes no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes adi yes no i = 0 yes save pc and ccr i 1 branch to interrupt service routine ? pending yes read vector address 101 if an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. when the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highest- priority request, following the ipr interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. if two or more interrupts with the same ipr setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5-3. the interrupt controller checks the i bit. if the i bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted. if the i bit is set to 1, only nmi is accepted; other interrupt requests are held pending. when an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. in interrupt exception handling, pc and ccr are saved to the stack area. the pc value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. next the i bit is set to 1 in ccr, masking all interrupts except nmi. the vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. ue = 0: the i and ui bits in the cpu s ccr and the ipr bits enable three-level masking of irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules. interrupt requests with priority level 0 are masked when the i bit is set to 1, and are unmasked when the i bit is cleared to 0. interrupt requests with priority level 1 are masked when the i and ui bits are both set to 1, and are unmasked when either the i bit or the ui bit is cleared to 0. for example, if the interrupt enable bits of all interrupt requests are set to 1, ipra is set to h'20, and iprb is set to h'00 (giving irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests priority over other interrupts), interrupts are masked as follows: a. if i = 0, all interrupts are unmasked (priority order: nmi > irq 2 > irq 3 >irq 0 ?. b. if i = 1 and ui = 0, only nmi, irq 2 , and irq 3 are unmasked. c. if i = 1 and ui = 1, all interrupts are masked except nmi. 102 figure 5-5 shows the transitions among the above states. figure 5-5 interrupt masking state transitions (example) figure 5-6 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when ue = 0. if an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. when the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highest- priority request, following the ipr interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. if two or more interrupts with the same ipr setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5-3. the interrupt controller checks the i bit. if the i bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted regardless of its ipr setting, and regardless of the ui bit. if the i bit is set to 1 and the ui bit is cleared to 0, only nmi and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted; interrupt requests with priority level 0 are held pending. if the i bit and ui bit are both set to 1, only nmi is accepted; all other interrupt requests are held pending. when an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. in interrupt exception handling, pc and ccr are saved to the stack area. the pc value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. the i and ui bits are set to 1 in ccr, masking all interrupts except nmi. the vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. all interrupts are unmasked only nmi, irq , and irq are unmasked exception handling, or i 1, ui 1 a. b. 2 3 all interrupts are masked except nmi c. ui 0 i 0 exception handling, or ui 1 i 0 i 1, ui 0 ?? ? ? ? ? ?? 103 figure 5-6 process up to interrupt acceptance when ue = 0 program execution state interrupt requested? nmi no yes no yes no priority level 1? no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes adi yes no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes adi yes no i = 0 yes no i = 0 yes ui = 0 yes no save pc and ccr i 1, ui 1 ? pending branch to interrupt service routine yes ? read vector address 104 5.4.2 interrupt sequence figure 5-7 shows the interrupt sequence in mode 2 when the program code and stack are in an external memory area accessed in two states via a 16-bit bus. figure 5-7 interrupt sequence (mode 2, two-state access, stack in external memory) address bus interrupt request signal rd hwr d to d 15 0 (1) (2), (4) (3) (5) (7) note: mode 2, with program code and stack in external memory area accessed in two states via 16-bit bus. lwr , interrupt level decision and wait for end of instruction interrupt accepted instruction prefetch internal processing stack vector fetch internal processing prefetch of interrupt service routine instruction high instruction prefetch address (not executed; return address, same as pc contents) instruction code (not executed) instruction prefetch address (not executed) sp ?2 sp ?4 (6), (8) (9), (11) (10), (12) (13) (14) pc and ccr saved to stack vector address starting address of interrupt service routine (contents of vector address) starting address of interrupt service routine; (13) = (10), (12) first instruction of interrupt service routine (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) 105 5.4.3 interrupt response time table 5-5 indicates the interrupt response time from the occurrence of an interrupt request until the first instruction of the interrupt service routine is executed. table 5-5 interrupt response time external memory 8-bit bus 16-bit bus no. item 2 states 3 states 2 states 3 states 1 interrupt priority 2 * 1 2 * 1 2 * 1 2 * 1 2 * 1 decision 2 maximum number 1 to 23 1 to 27 1 to 31 * 4 1 to 23 1 to 25 * 4 of states until end of current instruction 3 saving pc and ccr 4 8 12 * 4 46 * 4 to stack 4 vector fetch 4 8 12 * 4 46 * 4 5 instruction prefetch * 2 48 12 * 4 46 * 4 6 internal processing * 3 44 4 4 4 total 19 to 41 31 to 57 43 to 73 19 to 41 25 to 49 notes: 1. 1 state for internal interrupts. 2. prefetch after the interrupt is accepted and prefetch of the first instruction in the interrupt service routine. 3. internal processing after the interrupt is accepted and internal processing after prefetch. 4. the number of states increases if wait states are inserted in external memory access. on-chip memory 106 5.5 usage notes 5.5.1 contention between interrupt and interrupt-disabling instruction when an instruction clears an interrupt enable bit to 0 to disable the interrupt, the interrupt is not disabled until after execution of the instruction is completed. if an interrupt occurs while a bclr, mov, or other instruction is being executed to clear its interrupt enable bit to 0, at the instant when execution of the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so its interrupt exception handling is carried out. if a higher-priority interrupt is also requested, however, interrupt exception handling for the higher-priority interrupt is carried out, and the lower-priority interrupt is ignored. this also applies to the clearing of an interrupt flag. figure 5-8 shows an example in which an imiea bit is cleared to 0 in tier of the itu. figure 5-8 contention between interrupt and interrupt-disabling instruction this type of contention will not occur if the interrupt is masked when the interrupt enable bit or flag is cleared to 0. imia exception handling tier write cycle by cpu tier address internal address bus internal write signal imiea imia imfa interrupt signal 107 5.5.2 instructions that inhibit interrupts the ldc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions inhibit interrupts. when an interrupt occurs, after determining the interrupt priority, the interrupt controller requests a cpu interrupt. if the cpu is currently executing one of these interrupt-inhibiting instructions, however, when the instruction is completed the cpu always continues by executing the next instruction. 5.5.3 interrupts during eepmov instruction execution the eepmov.b and eepmov.w instructions differ in their reaction to interrupt requests. when the eepmov.b instruction is executing a transfer, no interrupts are accepted until the transfer is completed, not even nmi. when the eepmov.w instruction is executing a transfer, interrupt requests other than nmi are not accepted until the transfer is completed. if nmi is requested, nmi exception handling starts at a transfer cycle boundary. the pc value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction. programs should be coded as follows to allow for nmi interrupts during eepmov.w execution: l1: eepmov.w mov.w r4,r4 bne l1 5.5.4 notes on external interrupts during use if the irqnf flag is at irqnf = 1, after reading the irqnf flag if the irqnf flag writes 0 clear status is reached. however, there are times when clear status occurs in error and interrupt processing is not executed when the irqnf flag is at 0 although irqnf = 1 was not attained. this occurs in when the following conditions are fulfilled. setting conditions 1. when using multiple external interrupts (irqa, irqb) 2. irqaf flag clears because 0 is written, and irqbf flag clears by the hardware. 3. irqaf flag clears and bit operation command is being used for the irq status resistor (isr) or the isr is being read in bytes; irqaf flag's bits clear and other bit values read in bits are written in bytes. occurrence conditions 1. when irqaf = 1, for the irqaf flag to clear, isr resistor read is executed. thereafter interrupt processing is carried out and irqbf flag clears. 108 2. irqaf flag clear and irqbf flag generation compete (irqaf flag setting). (the isr read needed for irqaf flag clear was at irqbf = 0 but in the time taken for isr write, irqbf = 1 was reached.) in all of the setting conditions 1 to 3 and occurrence conditions 1 and 2 are generated, irqbf clears in error during isr write for occurrence condition 2 and interrupt processing is not carried out. however, if irqbf flag reaches 0 between occurrence conditions 1 and 2, irqbf flag does not clear in error. figure 5-9 irqnf flag when interrupt processing is not conducted in this situation, conduct one of the following countermeasures. countermeasure 1 when irqaf flag clears, do not use the bit computation command, read the isr in bytes. when irqaf only is 0 write all other bits as 1 in bytes. for example, if a = 0 mov.b @isr,r0l mov.b #hfe,r0l read 1 write 0 read 1 write 1 irqb execution read 1 write 0 read 0 write 0 clear in error occurrence condition 1 irqaf irqbf occurrence condition 2 109 mov.b r0l,@isr countermeasure 2 during irqb interrupt processing, carry out irqb fflag clear dummy processing. for example, if b = 1 irqb mov.b #hfd,r0l mov.b r0l,@isr 110 section 6 bus controller 6.1 overview the h8/3048 series has an on-chip bus controller that divides the address space into eight areas and can assign different bus specifications to each. this enables different types of memory to be connected easily. a bus arbitration function of the bus controller controls the operation of the dma controller (dmac) and refresh controller. the bus controller can also release the bus to an external device. 6.1.1 features features of the bus controller are listed below. independent settings for address areas 0 to 7 128-kbyte areas in 1-mbyte modes; 2-mbyte areas in 16-mbyte modes. chip select signals (cs 0 to cs 7 ) can be output for areas 0 to 7. areas can be designated for 8-bit or 16-bit access. areas can be designated for two-state or three-state access. four wait modes programmable wait mode, pin auto-wait mode, and pin wait modes 0 and 1 can be selected. zero to three wait states can be inserted automatically. bus arbitration function a built-in bus arbiter grants the bus right to the cpu, dmac, refresh controller, or an external bus master. 111 6.1.2 block diagram figure 6-1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. figure 6-1 block diagram of bus controller 0 cs to cs abwcr astcr wcer cscr chip select control signals back breq wait internal address bus area decoder bus control circuit wait-state controller internal data bus legend abwcr: astcr: wcer: wcr: brcr: cscr: bus width control register access state control register wait state controller enable register wait control register bus release control register chip select control register cpu bus request signal dmac bus request signal refresh controller bus request signal cpu bus acknowledge signal dmac bus acknowledge signal refresh controller bus acknowledge signal internal signals wcr brcr bus arbiter 7 bus mode control signal bus size control signal access state control signal wait request signal internal signals 112 6.1.3 input/output pins table 6-1 summarizes the bus controller s input/output pins. table 6-1 bus controller pins name abbreviation i/o function chip select 0 to 7 cs 0 to cs 7 output strobe signals selecting areas 0 to 7 address strobe as output strobe signal indicating valid address output on the address bus read rd output strobe signal indicating reading from the external address space high write hwr output strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) low write lwr output strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) wait wait input wait request signal for access to external three- state-access areas bus request breq input request signal for releasing the bus to an external device bus acknowledge back output acknowledge signal indicating the bus is released to an external device 6.1.4 register configuration table 6-2 summarizes the bus controller s registers. table 6-2 bus controller registers initial value address * name r/w modes 1, 3, 5, 6 modes 2, 4, 7 h'ffec bus width control register abwcr r/w h'ff h'00 h'ffed access state control register astcr r/w h'ff h'ff h'ffee wait control register wcr r/w h'f3 h'f3 h'ffef wait state controller enable wcer r/w h'ff h'ff register h'fff3 bus release control register brcr r/w h'fe h'fe h'ff5f chip select control register cscr r/w h'0f h'0f note: * lower 16 bits of the address. abbrevi- ation 113 6.2 register descriptions 6.2.1 bus width control register (abwcr) abwcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects 8-bit or 16-bit access for each area. when abwcr contains h'ff (selecting 8-bit access for all areas), the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode: the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is valid, and port 4 is an input/output port. when at least one bit is cleared to 0 in abwcr, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode with a 16-bit data bus (d 15 to d 0 ). in modes 1, 3, 5, and 6 abwcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in modes 2, 4, and 7 abwcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. abwcr is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?rea 7 to 0 bus width control (abw7 to abw0): these bits select 8-bit access or 16-bit access to the corresponding address areas. bits 7 to 0 abw7 to abw0 description 0 areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas 1 areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas abwcr specifies the bus width of external memory areas. the bus width of on-chip memory and registers is fixed and does not depend on abwcr settings. these settings are therefore meaningless in single-chip mode (mode 7). bit read/write 7 abw7 1 0 r/w 6 abw6 1 0 r/w 5 abw5 1 0 r/w 4 abw4 1 0 r/w 3 abw3 1 0 r/w 0 abw0 1 0 r/w 2 abw2 1 0 r/w 1 abw1 1 0 r/w bits selecting bus width for each area initial value mode 1, 3, 5, 6 mode 2, 4, 7 114 6.2.2 access state control register (astcr) astcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether each area is accessed in two states or three states. astcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?rea 7 to 0 access state control (ast7 to ast0): these bits select whether the corresponding area is accessed in two or three states. bits 7 to 0 ast7 to ast0 description 0 areas 7 to 0 are accessed in two states 1 areas 7 to 0 are accessed in three states (initial value) astcr specifies the number of states in which external areas are accessed. on-chip memory and registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on astcr settings. these settings are therefore meaningless in single-chip mode (mode 7). bit initial value read/write 7 ast7 1 r/w 6 ast6 1 r/w 5 ast5 1 r/w 4 ast4 1 r/w 3 ast3 1 r/w 0 ast0 1 r/w 2 ast2 1 r/w 1 ast1 1 r/w bits selecting number of states for access to each area 115 6.2.3 wait control register (wcr) wcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the wait mode for the wait-state controller (wsc) and specifies the number of wait states. wcr is initialized to h'f3 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 4?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bits 3 and 2?ait mode select 1 and 0 (wms1/0): these bits select the wait mode. bit 3 bit 2 wms1 wms0 description 0 0 programmable wait mode (initial value) 1 no wait states inserted by wait-state controller 1 0 pin wait mode 1 1 pin auto-wait mode bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 wms1 0 r/w 0 wc0 1 r/w 2 wms0 0 r/w 1 wc1 1 r/w wait count 1/0 these bits select the number of wait states inserted reserved bits wait mode select 1/0 these bits select the wait mode 116 bits 1 and 0?ait count 1 and 0 (wc1/0): these bits select the number of wait states inserted in access to external three-state-access areas. bit 1 bit 0 wc1 wc0 description 0 0 no wait states inserted by wait-state controller 1 1 state inserted 1 0 2 states inserted 1 3 states inserted (initial value) 6.2.4 wait state controller enable register (wcer) wcer is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables wait-state control of external three-state-access areas by the wait-state controller. wcer is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?ait-state controller enable 7 to 0 (wce7 to wce0): these bits enable or disable wait-state control of external three-state-access areas. bits 7 to 0 wce7 to wce0 description 0 wait-state control disabled (pin wait mode 0) 1 wait-state control enabled (initial value) since wcer enables or disables wait-state control of external three-state-access areas, these settings are meaningless in single-chip mode (mode 7). bit initial value read/write 7 wce7 1 r/w 6 wce6 1 r/w 5 wce5 1 r/w 4 wce4 1 r/w 3 wce3 1 r/w 0 wce0 1 r/w 2 wce2 1 r/w 1 wce1 1 r/w wait-state controller enable 7 to 0 these bits enable or disable wait-state control 117 6.2.5 bus release control register (brcr) brcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables address output on bus lines a 23 to a 21 and enables or disables release of the bus to an external device. brcr is initialized to h'fe by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7?ddress 23 enable (a23e): enables pa 4 to be used as the a 23 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 23 address output from pa 4 . in modes other than 3, 4, and 6 this bit cannot be modified and pa 4 has its ordinary input/output functions. bit 7 a23e description 0pa 4 is the a 23 address output pin 1pa 4 is the pa 4 /tp 4 /tioca 1 input/output pin (initial value) bit 6?ddress 22 enable (a22e): enables pa 5 to be used as the a 22 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 22 address output from pa 5 . in modes other than 3, 4, and 6 this bit cannot be modified and pa 5 has its ordinary input/output functions. bit 6 a22e description 0pa 5 is the a 22 address output pin 1pa 5 is the pa 5 /tp 5 /tiocb 1 input/output pin (initial value) bit initial value 7 a23e 1 r/w 6 a22e 1 r/w 5 a21e 1 r/w 4 1 3 1 0 brle 0 r/w r/w 2 1 1 1 bus release enable enables or disables release of the bus to an external device reserved bits address 23 to 21 enable these bits enable pa to pa to be used for a to a address output 6 4 21 23 read/ write mode 1, 2, 5, 7 mode 3, 4, 6 118 bit 5?ddress 21 enable (a21e): enables pa 6 to be used as the a 21 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 21 address output from pa 6 . in modes other than 3, 4, and 6 this bit cannot be modified and pa 6 has its ordinary input/output functions. bit 5 a21e description 0pa 6 is the a 21 address output pin 1pa 6 is the pa 6 /tp 6 /tioca 2 input/output pin (initial value) bits 4 to 1?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 0?us release enable (brle): enables or disables release of the bus to an external device. bit 0 brle description 0 the bus cannot be released to an external device; breq and back (initial value) can be used as input/output pins 1 the bus can be released to an external device 6.2.6 chip select control register (cscr) cscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output of chip select signals (cs 7 to cs 4 ). if a chip select signal (cs 7 to cs 4 ) output is selected in this register, the corresponding pin functions as a chip select signal (cs 7 to cs 4 ) output, this function taking priority over other functions. cscr cannot be modified in single-chip mode. cscr is initialized to h'0f by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 cs7e 0 r/w 6 cs6e 0 r/w 5 cs5e 0 r/w 4 cs4e 0 r/w 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 chip select 7 to 4 enable these bits enable or disable chip select signal output reserved bits 119 bits 7 to 4?hip select 7 to 4 enable (cs7e to cs4e): these bits enable or disable output of the corresponding chip select signal. bit n csne description 0 output of chip select signal cs n is disabled (initial value) 1 output of chip select signal cs n is enabled note: n = 7 to 4 bits 3 to 0?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. 120 6.3 operation 6.3.1 area division the external address space is divided into areas 0 to 7. each area has a size of 128 kbytes in the 1-mbyte modes, or 2 mbytes in the 16-mbyte modes. figure 6-2 shows a general view of the memory map. figure 6-2 access area map for modes 1 to 6 h'00000 area 0 (128 kbytes) area 1 (128 kbytes) area 2 (128 kbytes) area 3 (128 kbytes) area 4 (128 kbytes) area 5 (128 kbytes) area 6 (128 kbytes) area 7 (128 kbytes) on-chip ram external address space on-chip registers * * 1, 2 * 1 a. notes: the on-chip rom, on-chip ram, and on-chip registers have a fixed bus width and are accessed in a fixed number of states. when the rame bit is cleared to 0 in syscr, this area conforms to the specifications of area 7. this external address area conforms to the specifications of area 7. 1. 2. 3. * 3 h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 h'fffff b. h'000000 area 0 (2 mbytes) area 1 (2 mbytes) area 2 (2 mbytes) area 3 (2 mbytes) area 4 (2 mbytes) area 5 (2 mbytes) area 6 (2 mbytes) area 7 (2 mbytes) on-chip ram external address space on-chip registers * * 1, 2 * 1 * 3 h'1fffff h'200000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'ffffff h'000000 h'1fffff h'200000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'ffffff h'00000 area 1 (128 kbytes) area 2 (128 kbytes) area 3 (128 kbytes) area 4 (128 kbytes) area 5 (128 kbytes) area 6 (128 kbytes) * * 1, 2 h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 h'fffff 1-mbyte modes with on-chip rom disabled (modes 1 and 2) 16-mbyte modes with on-chip rom disabled (modes 3 and 4) c. 1-mbyte mode with on-chip rom enabled (mode 5) area 7 (128 kbytes) on-chip ram external address space * 3 on-chip registers * 1 on-chip rom area 0 (128 kbytes) * 1 area 1 (2 mbytes) area 2 (2 mbytes) area 3 (2 mbytes) area 4 (2 mbytes) area 5 (2 mbytes) area 6 (2 mbytes) * * 1, 2 d. 16-mbyte mode with on-chip rom enabled (mode 6) area 7 (2 mbytes) on-chip ram external address space * 3 on-chip registers * 1 on-chip rom area 0 (2 mbytes) * 1 121 chip select signals (cs 0 to cs 7 ) can be output for areas 0 to 7. the bus specifications for each area can be selected in abwcr, astcr, wcer, and wcr as shown in table 6-3. table 6-3 bus specifications abwcr astcr wcer wcr bus specifications bus access abwn astn wcen wms1 wms0 width states wait mode 0 0 ?62 disabled 1 0 16 3 pin wait mode 0 100163 programmable wait mode 1 16 3 disabled 1 0 16 3 pin wait mode 1 1 16 3 pin auto-wait mode 1 0 8 2 disabled 1 0 8 3 pin wait mode 0 10083 programmable wait mode 1 8 3 disabled 1083 pin wait mode 1 1 8 3 pin auto-wait mode note: n = 0 to 7 122 6.3.2 chip select signals for each of areas 0 to 7, the h8/3048 series can output a chip select signal (cs 0 to cs 7 ) that goes low to indicate when the area is selected. figure 6-3 shows the output timing of a cs n signal (n = 0 to 7). output of cs 0 to cs 3 : output of cs 0 to cs 3 is enabled or disabled in the data direction register (ddr) of the corresponding port. in the expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled, a reset leaves pin cs 0 in the output state and pins cs 1 to cs 3 in the input state. to output chip select signals cs 1 to cs 3 , the corresponding ddr bits must be set to 1. in the expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled, a reset leaves pins cs 0 to cs 3 in the input state. to output chip select signals cs 0 to cs 3 , the corresponding ddr bits must be set to 1. for details see section 9, i/o ports. output of cs 4 to cs 7 : output of cs 4 to cs 7 is enabled or disabled in the chip select control register (cscr). a reset leaves pins cs 4 to cs 7 in the input state. to output chip select signals cs 4 to cs 7 , the corresponding cscr bits must be set to 1. for details see section 9, i/o ports. figure 6-3 cs n output timing (n = 0 to 7) when the on-chip rom, on-chip ram, and on-chip registers are accessed, cs 0 and cs 7 remain high. the cs n signals are decoded from the address signals. they can be used as chip select signals for sram and other devices. address bus n external address in area n cs 123 6.3.3 data bus the h8/3048 series allows either 8-bit access or 16-bit access to be designated for each of areas 0 to 7. an 8-bit-access area uses the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ). a 16-bit-access area uses both the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) and lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ). in read access the rd signal applies without distinction to both the upper and lower data bus. in write access the hwr signal applies to the upper data bus, and the lwr signal applies to the lower data bus. table 6-4 indicates how the two parts of the data bus are used under different access conditions. table 6-4 access conditions and data bus usage access read/ valid upper data bus lower data bus area size write address strobe (d 15 to d 8 )(d 7 to d 0 ) read rd valid invalid write hwr undetermined data byte read even rd valid invalid odd invalid valid write even hwr valid undetermined data odd lwr undetermined data valid word read rd valid valid write hwr , lwr valid valid note: undetermined data means that unpredictable data is output. invalid means that the bus is in the input state and the input is ignored. 8-bit-access area 16-bit-access area 124 6.3.4 bus control signal timing 8-bit, three-state-access areas: figure 6-4 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, three-state-access area. the upper address bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used to access these areas. the lwr pin is always high. wait states can be inserted. figure 6-4 bus control signal timing for 8-bit, three-state-access area address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d n 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 t 1 t 2 t 3 read access write access bus cycle external address in area n valid invalid high valid undetermined data note: n = 7 to 0 125 8-bit, two-state-access areas: figure 6-5 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, two-state-access area. the upper address bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used to access these areas. the lwr pin is always high. wait states cannot be inserted. figure 6-5 bus control signal timing for 8-bit, two-state-access area address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 n t 1 t 2 read access write access high bus cycle external address in area n valid invalid valid undetermined data note: n = 7 to 0 126 16-bit, three-state-access areas: figures 6-6 to 6-8 show the timing of bus control signals for a 16-bit, three-state-access area. in these areas, the upper address bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used to access even addresses and the lower address bus (d 7 to d 0 ) is used to access odd addresses. wait states can be inserted. figure 6-6 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, three-state-access area (1) (byte access to even address) address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d n 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 t 1 t 2 t 3 read access write access bus cycle even external address in area n valid invalid valid undetermined data high note: n = 7 to 0 127 figure 6-7 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, three-state-access area (2) (byte access to odd address) address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d n 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 t 1 t 2 t 3 read access write access bus cycle odd external address in area n invalid valid undetermined data valid high note: n = 7 to 0 128 figure 6-8 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, three-state-access area (3) (word access) address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d n 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 t 1 t 2 t 3 read access bus cycle external address in area n valid valid valid valid write access note: n = 7 to 0 129 16-bit, two-state-access areas: figures 6-9 to 6-11 show the timing of bus control signals for a 16-bit, two-state-access area. in these areas, the upper address bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used to access even addresses and the lower address bus (d 7 to d 0 ) is used to access odd addresses. wait states cannot be inserted. figure 6-9 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, two-state-access area (1) (byte access to even address) address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 n t 1 t 2 read access write access valid undetermined data high valid invalid bus cycle even external address in area n note: n = 7 to 0 130 figure 6-10 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, two-state-access area (2) (byte access to odd address) address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 n t 1 t 2 read access invalid valid high bus cycle odd external address in area n write access undetermined data valid note: n = 7 to 0 131 figure 6-11 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, two-state-access area (3) (word access) address bus cs as rd d to d d to d hwr lwr d to d d to d 15 8 7 0 15 8 7 0 n t 1 t 2 read access write access valid valid valid valid bus cycle external address in area n note: n = 7 to 0 132 6.3.5 wait modes four wait modes can be selected as shown in table 6-5. table 6-5 wait mode selection astcr wcer wcr astn bit wcen bit wms1 bit wms0 bit wsc control wait mode 0 disabled no wait states 1 0 disabled pin wait mode 0 1 0 0 enabled programmable wait mode 1 enabled no wait states 1 0 enabled pin wait mode 1 1 enabled pin auto-wait mode note: n = 7 to 0 133 wait mode in areas where wait-state controller is disabled external three-state access areas in which the wait-state controller is disabled (astn = 1, wcen = 0) operate in pin wait mode 0. the other wait modes are unavailable. the settings of bits wms1 and wms0 are ignored in these areas. pin wait mode 0: wait states can only be inserted by wait pin control. during access to an external three-state-access area, if the wait pin is low at the fall of the system clock (? in the t 2 state, a wait state (t w ) is inserted. if the wait pin remains low, wait states continue to be inserted until the wait signal goes high. figure 6-12 shows the timing. figure 6-12 pin wait mode 0 pin address bus data bus as rd hwr data bus , lwr t 1 t 2 t w t w t 3 inserted by signal write data ** read data read access write access external address wait wait note: arrows indicate time of sampling of the pin. * wait * 134 wait modes in areas where wait-state controller is enabled external three-state access areas in which the wait-state controller is enabled (astn = 1, wcen = 1) can operate in pin wait mode 1, pin auto-wait mode, or programmable wait mode, as selected by bits wms1 and wms0. bits wms1 and wms0 apply to all areas, so all areas in which the wait-state controller is enabled operate in the same wait mode. pin wait mode 1: in all accesses to external three-state-access areas, the number of wait states (t w ) selected by bits wc1 and wc0 are inserted. if the wait pin is low at the fall of the system clock (? in the last of these wait states, an additional wait state is inserted. if the wait pin remains low, wait states continue to be inserted until the wait signal goes high. pin wait mode 1 is useful for inserting four or more wait states, or for inserting different numbers of wait states for different external devices. if the wait count is 0, this mode operates in the same way as pin wait mode 0. figure 6-13 shows the timing when the wait count is 1 (wc1 = 0, wc0 = 1) and one additional wait state is inserted by wait input. figure 6-13 pin wait mode 1 address bus data bus as rd hwr , lwr t 1 t 2 t w t w t 3 write data * read data * read access write access note: arrows indicate time of sampling of the pin. * wait pin wait data bus external address write data inserted by wait count inserted by signal wait 135 pin auto-wait mode: if the wait pin is low, the number of wait states (t w ) selected by bits wc1 and wc0 are inserted. in pin auto-wait mode, if the wait pin is low at the fall of the system clock (? in the t 2 state, the number of wait states (t w ) selected by bits wc1 and wc0 are inserted. no additional wait states are inserted even if the wait pin remains low. pin auto-wait mode can be used for an easy interface to low-speed memory, simply by routing the chip select signal to the wait pin. figure 6-14 shows the timing when the wait count is 1. figure 6-14 pin auto-wait mode address bus data bus as rd hwr data bus , lwr t 1 t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 t w t 3 * * read data read data write data write data read access write access note: arrows indicate time of sampling of the pin. * wait external address external address wait 136 programmable wait mode: the number of wait states (t w ) selected by bits wc1 and wc0 are inserted in all accesses to external three-state-access areas. figure 6-15 shows the timing when the wait count is 1 (wc1 = 0, wc0 = 1). figure 6-15 programmable wait mode t 1 t 2 t w t 3 address bus as rd hwr , data bus data bus external address read data write data read access write access lwr 137 example of wait state control settings: a reset initializes astcr and wcer to h'ff and wcr to h'f3, selecting programmable wait mode and three wait states for all areas. software can select other wait modes for individual areas by modifying the astcr, wcer, and wcr settings. figure 6-16 shows an example of wait mode settings. figure 6-16 wait mode settings (example) 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 bit: astcr h'0f: wcer h'33: wcr h'f3: area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 3-state-access area, programmable wait mode (3 states inserted) 3-state-access area, programmable wait mode (3 states inserted) 3-state-access area, pin wait mode 0 3-state-access area, pin wait mode 0 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted 2-state-access area, no wait states inserted note: wait states cannot be inserted in areas designated for two-state access by astcr. 138 6.3.6 interconnections with memory (example) for each area, the bus controller can select two- or three-state access and an 8- or 16-bit data bus width. in three-state-access areas, wait states can be inserted in a variety of modes, simplifying the connection of both high-speed and low-speed devices. figure 6-18 shows an example of interconnections between the h8/3048 series and memory. figure 6-17 shows a memory map for this example. a 256-kword 16-bit eprom is connected to area 0. this device is accessed in three states via a 16-bit bus. two 32-kword 8-bit sram devices (sram1 and sram2) are connected to area 1. these devices are accessed in two states via a 16-bit bus. one 32-kword 8-bit sram (sram3) is connected to area 2. this device is accessed via an 8-bit bus, using three-state access with an additional wait state inserted in pin auto-wait mode. figure 6-17 memory map (example) h'000000 h'07ffff h'1fffff h'200000 h'20ffff h'210000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'ffffff on-chip ram on-chip registers eprom not used sram 1, 2 not used sram 3 area 0 16-bit, three-state-access area area 1 16-bit, two-state-access area area 2 8-bit, three-state-access area (one auto-wait state) h'407fff h'5fffff not used 139 figure 6-18 interconnections with memory (example) eprom a to a i/o to i/o i/o to i/o ce oe 17 15 7 0 8 0 a to a 18 1 sram1 (even addresses) a to a i/o to i/o cs oe we 14 7 0 0 a to a 15 1 sram2 (odd addresses) a to a i/o to i/o cs oe we 14 7 0 0 a to a 15 1 sram3 a to a i/o to i/o cs oe we 14 7 0 0 a to a 14 0 h8/3048 series cs cs cs 0 1 2 wait rd hwr lwr a to a 23 0 d to d d to d 15 8 7 0 140 6.3.7 bus arbiter operation the bus controller has a built-in bus arbiter that arbitrates between different bus masters. there are four bus masters: the cpu, dma controller (dmac), refresh controller, and an external bus master. when a bus master has the bus right it can carry out read, write, or refresh access. each bus master uses a bus request signal to request the bus right. at fixed times the bus arbiter determines priority and uses a bus acknowledge signal to grant the bus to a bus master, which can then operate using the bus. the bus arbiter checks whether the bus request signal from a bus master is active or inactive, and returns an acknowledge signal to the bus master if the bus request signal is active. when two or more bus masters request the bus, the highest-priority bus master receives an acknowledge signal. the bus master that receives an acknowledge signal can continue to use the bus until the acknowledge signal is deactivated. the bus master priority order is: (high) external bus master > refresh controller > dmac > cpu (low) the bus arbiter samples the bus request signals and determines priority at all times, but it does not always grant the bus immediately, even when it receives a bus request from a bus master with higher priority than the current bus master. each bus master has certain times at which it can release the bus to a higher-priority bus master. cpu: the cpu is the lowest-priority bus master. if the dmac, refresh controller, or an external bus master requests the bus while the cpu has the bus right, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right to the bus master that requested it. the bus right is transferred at the following times: the bus right is transferred at the boundary of a bus cycle. if word data is accessed by two consecutive byte accesses, however, the bus right is not transferred between the two byte accesses. if another bus master requests the bus while the cpu is performing internal operations, such as executing a multiply or divide instruction, the bus right is transferred immediately. the cpu continues its internal operations. if another bus master requests the bus while the cpu is in sleep mode, the bus right is transferred immediately. 141 dmac: when the dmac receives an activation request, it requests the bus right from the bus arbiter. if the dmac is bus master and the refresh controller or an external bus master requests the bus, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right from the dmac to the bus master that requested the bus. the bus right is transferred at the following times. the bus right is transferred when the dmac finishes transferring 1 byte or 1 word. a dmac transfer cycle consists of a read cycle and a write cycle. the bus right is not transferred between the read cycle and the write cycle. there is a priority order among the dmac channels. for details see section 8.4.9, multiple- channel operation. refresh controller: when a refresh cycle is requested, the refresh controller requests the bus right from the bus arbiter. when the refresh cycle is completed, the refresh controller releases the bus. for details see section 7, refresh controller. external bus master: when the brle bit is set to 1 in brcr, the bus can be released to an external bus master. the external bus master has highest priority, and requests the bus right from the bus arbiter by driving the breq signal low. once the external bus master gets the bus, it keeps the bus right until the breq signal goes high. while the bus is released to an external bus master, the h8/3048 series holds the address bus and data bus control signals ( as , rd , hwr , and lwr ) in the high-impedance state, holds the chip select signals high ( cs n : n = 7 to 0), and holds the back pin in the low output state. the bus arbiter samples the breq pin at the rise of the system clock (?. if breq is low, the bus is released to the external bus master at the appropriate opportunity. the breq signal should be held low until the back signal goes low. when the breq pin is high in two consecutive samples, the back signal is driven high to end the bus-release cycle. 142 figure 6-19 shows the timing when the bus right is requested by an external bus master during a read cycle in a two-state-access area. there is a minimum interval of two states from when the breq signal goes low until the bus is released. figure 6-19 external-bus-released state (two-state-access area, during read cycle) data bus as hwr breq back rd , lwr , t 1 t 2 address 2 1 3456 high cpu cycles external bus released cpu cycles minimum 2 cycles high-impedance high-impedance high-impedance high-impedance 1 2 3 4, 5 6 low signal is sampled at rise of t state. signal goes low at end of cpu read cycle, releasing bus right to external bus master. pin continues to be sampled while bus is released to external bus master. high signal is sampled twice consecutively. signal goes high, ending bus-release cycle. breq breq breq breq back 1 address bus cs n high level n = 7 to 0 143 6.4 usage notes 6.4.1 connection to dynamic ram and pseudo-static ram a different bus control signal timing applies when dynamic ram or pseudo-static ram is connected to area 3. for details see section 7, refresh controller. 6.4.2 register write timing abwcr, astcr, and wcer write timing: data written to abwcr, astcr, or wcer takes effect starting from the next bus cycle. figure 6-20 shows the timing when an instruction fetched from area 0 changes area 0 from three-state access to two-state access. figure 6-20 astcr write timing t 1 t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 astcr address 3-state access to area 0 2-state access to area 0 address bus 144 ddr write timing: data written to a data direction register (ddr) to change a cs n pin from cs n output to generic input, or vice versa, takes effect starting from the t 3 state of the ddr write cycle. figure 6-21 shows the timing when the cs 1 pin is changed from generic input to cs 1 output. figure 6-21 ddr write timing brcr write timing: data written to switch between a 23 , a 22 , or a 21 output and generic input or output takes effect starting from the t 3 state of the brcr write cycle. figure 6-22 shows the timing when a pin is changed from generic input to a 23 , a 22 , or a 21 output. figure 6-22 brcr write timing cs 1 t 1 t 2 t 3 p8ddr address high impedance address bus a to a 23 t 1 t 2 t 3 brcr address high impedance address bus 21 145 6.4.3 breq input timing after driving the breq pin low, hold it low until back goes low. if breq returns to the high level before back goes low, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly. to terminate the external-bus-released state, hold the breq signal high for at least three states. if breq is high for too short an interval, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly. 6.4.4 transition to software standby mode if contention occurs between a transition to software standby mode and a bus request from an external bus master, the bus may be released for one state just before the transition to software standby mode (see figure 6-23). when using software standby mode, clear the brle bit to 0 in brcr before executing the sleep instruction. figure 6-23 contention between bus-released state and software standby mode 146 address bus strobe breq back bus-released state software standby mode section 7 refresh controller 7.1 overview the h8/3048 series has an on-chip refresh controller that enables direct connection of 16-bit-wide dram or pseudo-static ram (psram). dram or pseudo-static ram can be directly connected to area 3 of the external address space. a maximum 128 kbytes can be connected in modes 1, 2 and 5 (1-mbyte modes). a maximum 2 mbytes can be connected in modes 3, 4, and 6 (16-mbyte modes). systems that do not need to refresh dram or pseudo-static ram can use the refresh controller as an 8-bit interval timer. when the refresh controller is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. 7.1.1 features the refresh controller can be used for one of three functions: dram refresh control, pseudo-static ram refresh control, or 8-bit interval timing. features of the refresh controller are listed below. features as a dram refresh controller enables direct connection of 16-bit-wide dram selection of 2 cas or 2 we mode selection of 8-bit or 9-bit column address multiplexing for dram address input examples: 1-mbit dram: 8-bit row address 8-bit column address 4-mbit dram: 9-bit row address 9-bit column address 4-mbit dram: 10-bit row address 8-bit column address cas -before- ras refresh control software-selectable refresh interval software-selectable self-refresh mode wait states can be inserted features as a pseudo-static ram refresh controller rfsh signal output for refresh control software-selectable refresh interval software-selectable self-refresh mode wait states can be inserted 147 features as an interval timer refresh timer counter (rtcnt) can be used as an 8-bit up-counter selection of seven counter clock sources: ?2, ?8, ?32, ?128, ?512, ?2048, ?4096 interrupts can be generated by compare match between rtcnt and the refresh time constant register (rtcor) 7.1.2 block diagram figure 7-1 shows a block diagram of the refresh controller. figure 7-1 block diagram of refresh controller ?2, ?8, ?32, ?128, ?512, ?2048, ?4096 rtcnt rtcor rtmcsr rfshcr legend rtcnt: rtcor: rtmcsr: rfshcr: refresh signal clock selector comparator cmi interrupt bus interface internal data bus module data bus refresh timer counter refresh time constant register refresh timer control/status register refresh control register control logic 148 7.1.3 input/output pins table 7-1 summarizes the refresh controller s input/output pins. table 7-1 refresh controller pins signal pin name abbr. i/o function rfsh refresh rfsh output goes low during refresh cycles; used to refresh dram and psram hwr upper write/upper column uw / ucas output connects to the uw pin of 2 we address strobe dram or ucas pin of 2 cas dram lwr lower write/lower column lw / lcas output connects to the lw pin of 2 we dram address strobe or lcas pin of 2 cas dram rd column address strobe/ cas / we output connects to the cas pin of 2 we write enable dram or we pin of 2 cas dram cs 3 row address strobe ras output connects to the ras pin of dram 7.1.4 register configuration table 7-2 summarizes the refresh controller s registers. table 7-2 refresh controller registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffac refresh control register rfshcr r/w h'02 h'ffad refresh timer control/status register rtmcsr r/w h'07 h'ffae refresh timer counter rtcnt r/w h'00 h'ffaf refresh time constant register rtcor r/w h'ff note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 149 7.2 register descriptions 7.2.1 refresh control register (rfshcr) rfshcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the operating mode of the refresh controller. rfshcr is initialized to h'02 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 srfmd 0 r/w 6 psrame 0 r/w 5 drame 0 r/w 4 cas/we 0 r/w 3 m9/m8 0 r/w 0 rcyce 0 r/w 2 rfshe 0 r/w 1 1 self-refresh mode selects self-refresh mode psram enable and dram enable these bits enable or disable connection of pseudo-static ram and dram strobe mode select selects 2cas or 2we strobing of dram address multiplex mode select selects the number of column address bits refresh pin enable enables refresh signal output from the refresh pin refresh cycle enable enables or disables insertion of refresh cycles reserved bit 150 bit 7?elf-refresh mode (srfmd): specifies dram or pseudo-static ram self-refresh during software standby mode. when psrame = 1 and drame = 0, after the srfmd bit is set to 1, pseudo-static ram can be self-refreshed when the h8/3048 series enters software standby mode. when psrame = 0 and drame = 1, after the srfmd bit is set to 1, dram can be self- refreshed when the h8/3048 series enters software standby mode. in either case, the normal access state resumes on exit from software standby mode. bit 7 srfmd description 0 dram or psram self-refresh is disabled in software standby mode (initial value) 1 dram or psram self-refresh is enabled in software standby mode bit 6?sram enable (psrame) and bit 5?ram enable (drame): these bits enable or disable connection of pseudo-static ram and dram to area 3 of the external address space. when dram or pseudo-static ram is connected, the bus cycle and refresh cycle of area 3 consist of three states, regardless of the setting in the access state control register (astcr). if ast3 = 0 in astcr, wait states cannot be inserted. when the psrame or drame bit is set to 1, bits 0, 2, 3, and 4 in rfshcr and registers rtmcsr, rtcnt, and rtcor are write-disabled, except that the cmf flag in rtmcsr can be cleared by writing 0. bit 6 bit 5 psrame drame description 0 0 can be used as an interval timer (initial value) (dram and psram cannot be directly connected) 1 dram can be directly connected 1 0 psram can be directly connected 1 illegal setting 151 bit 4?trobe mode select (cas/ we ): selects 2 cas or 2 we mode. the setting of this bit is valid when psrame = 0 and drame = 1. this bit is write-disabled when the psrame or drame bit is set to 1. bit 4 cas/ we description 02 we mode (initial value) 12 cas mode bit 3?ddress multiplex mode select (m9/m8): selects 8-bit or 9-bit column addressing. the setting of this bit is valid when psrame = 0 and drame = 1. this bit is write-disabled when the psrame or drame bit is set to 1. bit 3 m9/ m8 description 0 8-bit column address mode (initial value) 1 9-bit column address mode bit 2?efresh pin enable (rfshe): enables or disables refresh signal output from the rfsh pin. this bit is write-disabled when the psrame or drame bit is set to 1. bit 2 rfshe description 0 refresh signal output at the rfsh pin is disabled (initial value) (the rfsh pin can be used as a generic input/output port) 1 refresh signal output at the rfsh pin is enabled bit 1?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 0?efresh cycle enable (rcyce): enables or disables insertion of refresh cycles. the setting of this bit is valid when psrame = 1 or drame = 1. when psrame = 0 and drame = 0, refresh cycles are not inserted regardless of the setting of this bit. bit 0 rcyce description 0 refresh cycles are disabled (initial value) 1 refresh cycles are enabled for area 3 152 7.2.2 refresh timer control/status register (rtmcsr) rtmcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the clock source for rtcnt. it also enables or disables interrupt requests when the refresh controller is used as an interval timer. bits 7 and 6 are initialized by a reset and in standby mode. bits 5 to 3 are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode, but retain their previous values on transition to software standby mode. bit 7?ompare match flag (cmf): this status flag indicates that the rtcnt and rtcor values have matched. bit 7 cmf description 0 [clearing condition] cleared by reading cmf when cmf = 1, then writing 0 in cmf 1 [setting condition] when rtcnt = rtcor bit initial value read/write 7 cmf 0 r/(w) 6 cmie 0 r/w 5 cks2 0 r/w 4 cks1 0 r/w 3 cks0 0 r/w 0 1 2 1 1 1 compare match flag status flag indicating that rtcnt has matched rtcor reserved bits clock select 2 to 0 these bits select an internal clock source for input to rtcnt note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * * compare match interrupt enable enables or disables the cmi interrupt requested by cmf 153 bit 6?ompare match interrupt enable (cmie): enables or disables the cmi interrupt requested when the cmf flag is set to 1 in rtmcsr. the cmie bit is always cleared to 0 when psrame = 1 or drame = 1. bit 6 cmie description 0 the cmi interrupt requested by cmf is disabled (initial value) 1 the cmi interrupt requested by cmf is enabled bits 5 to 3?lock select 2 to 0 (cks2 to cks0): these bits select an internal clock source for input to rtcnt. when used for refresh control, the refresh controller outputs a refresh request at periodic intervals determined by compare match between rtcnt and rtcor. when used as an interval timer, the refresh controller generates cmi interrupts at periodic intervals determined by compare match. these bits are write-disabled when the psrame bit or drame bit is set to 1. bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 cks2 cks1 cks0 description 0 0 0 clock input is disabled (initial value) 1 ?2 clock source 1 0 ?8 clock source 1 ?32 clock source 1 0 0 ?128 clock source 1 ?512 clock source 1 0 ?2048 clock source 1 ?4096 clock source bits 2 to 0?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. 154 7.2.3 refresh timer counter (rtcnt) rtcnt is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. rtcnt is an up-counter that is incremented by an internal clock selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr. when rtcnt matches rtcor (compare match), the cmf flag is set to 1 and rtcnt is cleared to h'00. rtcnt is write-disabled when the psrame bit or drame bit is set to 1. rtcnt is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 7.2.4 refresh time constant register (rtcor) rtcor is an 8-bit readable/writable register that determines the interval at which rtcnt is compare matched. rtcor and rtcnt are constantly compared. when their values match, the cmf flag is set to 1 in rtmcsr, and rtcnt is simultaneously cleared to h'00. rtcor is write-disabled when the psrame bit or drame bit is set to 1. rtcor is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous value. bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 155 7.3 operation 7.3.1 overview one of three functions can be selected for the h8/3048 series refresh controller: interfacing to dram connected to area 3, interfacing to pseudo-static ram connected to area 3, or interval timing. table 7-3 summarizes the register settings when these three functions are used. table 7-3 refresh controller settings usage register settings dram interface psram interface interval timer rfshcr srfmd selects self-refresh mode cleared to 0 psrame cleared to 0 set to 1 cleared to 0 drame set to 1 cleared to 0 cleared to 0 cas/ we selects 2 cas or 2 we mode m9/ m8 selects column addressing mode rfshe selects rfsh signal output cleared to 0 rcyce selects insertion of refresh cycles rtcor refresh interval setting interrupt interval setting rtmcsr cks2 to cks0 cmf set to 1 when rtcnt = rtcor cmie cleared to 0 enables or disables interrupt requests p8ddr p8 1 ddr set to 1 (cs 3 output) set to 0 or 1 abwcr abw3 cleared to 0 dram interface: to set up area 3 for connection to 16-bit-wide dram, initialize rtcor, rtmcsr, and rfshcr in that order, clearing bit psrame to 0 and setting bit drame to 1. set bit p8 1 ddr to 1 in the port 8 data direction register (p8ddr) to enable cs 3 output. in abwcr, make area 3 a 16-bit-access area. pseudo-static ram interface: to set up area 3 for connection to pseudo-static ram, initialize rtcor, rtmcsr, and rfshcr in that order, setting bit psrame to 1 and clearing bit drame to 0. set bit p8 1 ddr to 1 in p8ddr to enable cs 3 output. 156 interval timer: when psrame = 0 and drame = 0, the refresh controller operates as an interval timer. after setting rtcor, select an input clock in rtmcsr and set the cmie bit to 1. cmi interrupts will be requested at compare match intervals determined by rtcor and bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr. when setting rtcor, rtmcsr, and rfshcr, make sure that psrame = 0 and drame = 0. writing is disabled when either of these bits is set to 1. 7.3.2 dram refresh control refresh request interval and refresh cycle execution: the refresh request interval is determined by the settings of rtcor and bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr. figure 7-2 illustrates the refresh request interval. figure 7-2 refresh request interval (rcyce = 1) refresh requests are generated at regular intervals as shown in figure 7-2, but the refresh cycle is not actually executed until the refresh controller gets the bus right. table 7-4 summarizes the relationship among area 3 settings, dram read/write cycles, and refresh cycles. rtcor h'00 rtcnt refresh request 157 table 7-4 area 3 settings, dram access cycles, and refresh cycles area 3 settings read/write cycle by cpu or dmac refresh cycle 2-state-access area 3 states 3 states (ast3 = 0) wait states cannot be inserted wait states cannot be inserted 3-state-access area 3 states 3 states (ast3 = 1) wait states can be inserted wait states can be inserted to insert refresh cycles, set the rcyce bit to 1 in rfshcr. figure 7-3 shows the state transitions for execution of refresh cycles. when the first refresh request occurs after exit from the reset state or standby mode, the refresh controller does not execute a refresh cycle, but goes into the refresh request pending state. note this point when using a dram that requires a refresh cycle for initialization. when a refresh request occurs in the refresh request pending state, the refresh controller acquires the bus right, then executes a refresh cycle. if another refresh request occurs during execution of the refresh cycle, it is ignored. figure 7-3 state transitions for refresh cycle execution refresh request * refresh request * exit from reset or standby mode refresh request pending state requesting bus right executing refresh cycle refresh request refresh request bus granted end of refresh cycle note: a refresh request is ignored if it occurs while the refresh controller is requesting the bus right or executing a refresh cycle. * * 158 address multiplexing: address multiplexing depends on the setting of the m9/ m8 bit in rfshcr, as described in table 7-5. figure 7-4 shows the address output timing. address output is multiplexed only in area 3. table 7-5 address multiplexing address pins a 23 to a 10 a 9 a 8 a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 address signals during row a 23 to a 10 a 9 a 8 a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 address output m9/ m8 = 0 a 23 to a 10 a 9 a 9 a 16 a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 0 m9/ m8 = 1 a 23 to a 10 a 18 a 17 a 16 a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 0 figure 7-4 multiplexed address output (example without wait states) address signals during column address output a to a , a a to a 23 9 0 8 1 t 1 t 2 t 3 a to a row address 8 1 a to a column address 16 9 a to a , a 23 9 0 address bus a to a , a a to a 23 10 0 9 1 t 1 t 2 t 3 a to a row address 9 1 a to a column address 18 10 a to a , a 23 10 0 address bus a. m9/ = 0 m8 b. m9/ = 1 m8 159 2 cas and 2 we modes: the cas/ we bit in rfshcr can select two control modes for 16-bit- wide dram: one using ucas and lcas ; the other using uw and lw . these dram pins correspond to h8/3048 series pins as shown in table 7-6. table 7-6 dram pins and h8/3048 series pins dram pin h8/3048 series pin cas/ we = 0 (2 we mode) cas/ we = 1 (2 cas mode) hwr uw ucas lwr lw lcas rd cas we cs 3 ras ras figure 7-5 (1) shows the interface timing for 2 we dram. figure 7-5 (2) shows the interface timing for 2 cas dram. figure 7-5 dram control signal output timing (1) (2 we mode) ( ) cs ras 3 ( ) rd cas ( ) hwr uw ( ) lwr lw rfsh as read cycle write cycle refresh cycle * row column row column area 3 top address note: 16-bit access * address bus 160 figure 7-5 dram control signal output timing (2) (2cas mode) refresh cycle priority order: when there are simultaneous bus requests, the priority order is: (high) external bus master > refresh controller > dma controller > cpu (low) for details see section 6.3.7, bus arbiter operation. wait state insertion: when bit ast3 is set to 1 in astcr, bus controller settings can cause wait states to be inserted into bus cycles and refresh cycles. for details see section 6.3.5, wait modes. ( ) cs ras 3 ( ) hwr ucas ( ) lwr lcas ( ) rd we rfsh as read cycle write cycle refresh cycle * row column row column area 3 top address note: 16-bit access * address bus 161 self-refresh mode: some dram devices have a self-refresh function. after the srfmd bit is set to 1 in rfshcr, when a transition to software standby mode occurs, the cas and ras outputs go low in that order so that the dram self-refresh function can be used. on exit from software standby mode, the cas and ras outputs both go high. table 7-7 shows the pin states in software standby mode. figure 7-6 shows the signal output timing. table 7-7 pin states in software standby mode (1) (psrame = 0, drame = 1) software standby mode srfmd = 0 srfmd = 1 (self-refresh mode) signal cas/ we = 0 cas/ we = 1 cas/ we = 0 cas/ we = 1 hwr high-impedance high-impedance high low lwr high-impedance high-impedance high low rd high-impedance high-impedance low high cs 3 high high low low rfsh high high low low 162 figure 7-6 signal output timing in self-refresh mode (psrame = 0, drame = 1) cs (ras) rd (cas) hwr (uw) lwr (lw) rfsh 3 high high cs (ras) rd (we) rfsh 3 software standby mode high-impedance oscillator settling time a. 2 mode (srfmd = 1) b. 2 mode (srfmd = 1) software standby mode high-impedance oscillator settling time we cas address bus address bus hwr (ucas) lwr (lcas) 163 operation in power-down state: the refresh controller operates in sleep mode. it does not operate in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode rtcnt is initialized, but rfshcr, rtmcsr bits 5 to 3, and rtcor retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby mode. example 1: connection to 2 we 1-mbit dram (1-mbyte mode): figure 7-7 shows typical interconnections to a 2 we 1-mbit dram, and the corresponding address map. figure 7-8 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example. after power-up the dram must be refreshed to initialize its internal state. initialization takes a certain length of time, which can be measured by using an interrupt from another timer module, or by counting the number of times rtmcsr bit 7 (cmf) is set. note that no refresh cycle is executed for the first refresh request after exit from the reset state or standby mode (the first time the cmf flag is set; see figure 7-3). when using this example, check the dram device characteristics carefully and use a procedure that fits them. figure 7-7 interconnections and address map for 2 we 1-mbit dram (example) h8/3048 series a a a a a a a a 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cs rd hwr lwr 3 d to d 0 15 a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ras cas uw lw oe i/o to i/o 15 0 h'60000 h'7ffff a. interconnections (example) dram area area 3 (1-mbyte mode) b. address map 2 1-mbit dram with 16-bit organization we 164 figure 7-8 setup procedure for 2 we 1-mbit dram (1-mbyte mode) set area 3 for 16-bit access set p8 ddr to 1 for output set rtcor set bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr write h'23 in rfshcr wait for dram to be initialized dram can be accessed cs 13 165 example 2: connection to 2 we 4-mbit dram (16-mbyte mode): figure 7-9 shows typical interconnections to a single 2 we 4-mbit dram, and the corresponding address map. figure 7-10 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example. the dram in this example has 10-bit row addresses and 8-bit column addresses. its address area is h'600000 to h'67ffff. figure 7-9 interconnections and address map for 2 we 4-mbit dram (example) a a a a a a a a 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cs rd hwr lwr 3 d to d 0 15 a a a a a a a a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ras cas uw lw oe i/o to i/o 15 0 a a 18 17 a a 9 8 h'600000 h'67ffff h'680000 h'7fffff h8/3048 series 2 4-mbit dram with 10-bit row address, 8-bit column address, and 16-bit organization a. interconnections (example) b. address map dram area not used area 3 (16-mbyte mode) we 166 figure 7-10 setup procedure for 2we 4-mbit dram with 10-bit row address and 8-bit column address (16-mbyte mode) set area 3 for 16-bit access set p8 ddr to 1 for output set rtcor set bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr write h'23 in rfshcr wait for dram to be initialized dram can be accessed cs 13 167 example 3: connection to 2 cas 4-mbit dram (16-mbyte mode): figure 7-11 shows typical interconnections to a single 2 cas 4-mbit dram, and the corresponding address map. figure 7-12 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example. the dram in this example has 9-bit row addresses and 9-bit column addresses. its address area is h'600000 to h'67ffff. figure 7-11 interconnections and address map for 2 cas 4-mbit dram (example) a a a a a a a a a 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 cs hwr lwr rd 3 d to d 0 a a a a a a a a a 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ras ucas lcas we oe i/o to i/o 15 0 15 h'600000 h'67ffff h'680000 h'7fffff h8/3048 series 2 4-mbit dram with 9-bit row address, 9-bit column address, and 16-bit organization cas a. interconnections (example) b. address map dram area not used area 3 (16-mbyte mode) 168 figure 7-12 setup procedure for 2 cas 4-mbit dram with 9-bit row address and 9-bit column address (16-mbyte mode) set area 3 for 16-bit access set p8 ddr to 1 for output set rtcor set bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr write h'3b in rfshcr wait for dram to be initialized dram can be accessed cs 13 169 example 4: connection to multiple 4-mbit dram chips (16-mbyte mode): figure 7-13 shows an example of interconnections to two 2 cas 4-mbit dram chips, and the corresponding address map. up to four dram chips can be connected to area 3 by decoding upper address bits a 19 and a 20 . figure 7-14 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program for this example. the dram in this example has 9-bit row addresses and 9-bit column addresses. both chips must be refreshed simultaneously, so the rfsh pin must be used. figure 7-13 interconnections and address map for multiple 2 cas 4-mbit dram chips (example) h'600000 h'67ffff h'680000 h'6fffff h'700000 h'7fffff a to a ras ucas lcas we oe i/o to i/o 15 0 80 no. 1 a to a ras ucas lcas i/o to i/o 15 0 80 no. 2 we oe a a to a 19 9 1 cs hwr lwr rd rfsh 3 d to d 15 0 h8/3048 series 2 4-mbit dram with 9-bit row address, 9-bit column address, and 16-bit organization a. interconnections (example) b. address map no. 1 dram area no. 2 dram area not used area 3 (16-mbyte mode) cas 170 figure 7-14 setup procedure for multiple 2cas 4-mbit dram chips with 9-bit row address and 9-bit column address (16-mbyte mode) set area 3 for 16-bit access set p8 ddr to 1 for cs output 13 set rtcor set bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr write h'3f in rfshcr wait for dram to be initialized dram can be accessed 171 7.3.3 pseudo-static ram refresh control refresh request interval and refresh cycle execution: the refresh request interval is determined as in a dram interface, by the settings of rtcor and bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr. the numbers of states required for pseudo-static ram read/write cycles and refresh cycles are the same as for dram (see table 7-4). the state transitions are as shown in figure 7-3. pseudo-static ram control signals: figure 7-15 shows the control signals for pseudo-static ram read, write, and refresh cycles. figure 7-15 pseudo-static ram control signal output timing cs rd hwr lwr rfsh as 3 read cycle write cycle * refresh cycle area 3 top address note: 16-bit access * address bus 172 refresh cycle priority order: when there are simultaneous bus requests, the priority order is: (high) external bus master > refresh controller > dma controller > cpu (low) for details see section 6.3.7, bus arbiter operation. wait state insertion: when bit ast3 is set to 1 in astcr, the wait state controller (wsc) can insert wait states into bus cycles and refresh cycles. for details see section 6.3.5, wait modes. self-refresh mode: some pseudo-static ram devices have a self-refresh function. after the srfmd bit is set to 1 in rfshcr, when a transition to software standby mode occurs, the h8/3048 series?cs 3 output goes high and its rfsh output goes low so that the pseudo-static ram self-refresh function can be used. on exit from software standby mode, the rfsh output goes high. table 7-8 shows the pin states in software standby mode. figure 7-16 shows the signal output timing. table 7-8 pin states in software standby mode (2) (psrame = 1, drame = 0) software standby mode signal srfmd = 0 srfmd = 1 (self-refresh mode) cs 3 high high rd high-impedance high-impedance hwr high-impedance high-impedance lwr high-impedance high-impedance rfsh high low 173 figure 7-16 signal output timing in self-refresh mode (psrame = 1, drame = 0) operation in power-down state: the refresh controller operates in sleep mode. it does not operate in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode rtcnt is initialized, but rfshcr, rtmcsr bits 5 to 3, and rtcor retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby mode. cs rd hwr lwr rfsh 3 high software standby mode oscillator settling time high-impedance high-impedance high-impedance high-impedance address bus 174 example: pseudo-static ram may have separate oe and rfsh pins, or these may be combined into a single oe / rfsh pin. figure 7-17 shows an example of a circuit for generating an oe / rfsh signal. check the device characteristics carefully, and design a circuit that fits them. figure 7-18 shows a setup procedure to be followed by a program. figure 7-17 interconnection to pseudo-static ram with oe/rfsh signal (example) h8/3048 series psram rd rfsh oe rfsh / 175 figure 7-18 setup procedure for pseudo-static ram set p8 ddr to 1 for cs output 13 set rtcor set bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr write h'47 in rfshcr wait for psram to be initialized psram can be accessed 176 7.3.4 interval timing to use the refresh controller as an interval timer, clear the psrame and drame both to 0. after setting rtcor, select a clock source with bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr, and set the cmie bit to 1. timing of setting of compare match flag and clearing by compare match: the cmf flag in rtcsr is set to 1 by a compare match signal output when the rtcor and rtcnt values match. the compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when rtcnt is updated from the matching value to a new value). accordingly, when rtcnt and rtcor match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. figure 7-19 shows the timing. figure 7-19 timing of setting of cmf flag operation in power-down state: the interval timer function operates in sleep mode. it does not operate in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode rtcnt and rtmcsr bits 7 and 6 are initialized, but rtmcsr bits 5 to 3 and rtcor retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby mode. rtcnt rtcor cmf flag n h'00 n compare match signal 177 contention between rtcnt write and counter clear: if a counter clear signal occurs in the t 3 state of an rtcnt write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. see figure 7-20. figure 7-20 contention between rtcnt write and clear address bus rtcnt t 1 t 2 t 3 rtcnt address n h'00 rtcnt write cycle by cpu internal write signal counter clear signal 178 contention between rtcnt write and increment: if an increment pulse occurs in the t 3 state of an rtcnt write cycle, writing takes priority and rtcnt is not incremented. see figure 7-21. figure 7-21 contention between rtcnt write and increment t 1 t 2 t 3 rtcnt address nm address bus rtcnt rtcnt write cycle by cpu internal write signal rtcnt input clock counter write data 179 contention between rtcor write and compare match: if a compare match occurs in the t 3 state of an rtcor write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. see figure 7-22. figure 7-22 contention between rtcor write and compare match rtcnt operation at internal clock source switchover: switching internal clock sources may cause rtcnt to increment, depending on the switchover timing. table 7-9 shows the relation between the time of the switchover (by writing to bits cks2 to cks0) and the operation of rtcnt. the rtcnt input clock is generated from the internal clock source by detecting the falling edge of the internal clock. if a switchover is made from a high clock source to a low clock source, as in case no. 3 in table 7-9, the switchover will be regarded as a falling edge, an rtcnt clock pulse will be generated, and rtcnt will be incremented. t 1 t 2 t 3 rtcnt address nm n n + 1 address bus rtcnt rtcor rtcor write cycle by cpu internal write signal compare match signal inhibited rtcor write data 180 table 7-9 internal clock switchover and rtcnt operation cks2 to cks0 no. write timing rtcnt operation 1 low low switchover * 1 2 low high switchover * 2 notes: 1. including switchovers from a low clock source to the halted state, and from the halted state to a low clock source. 2. including switchover from the halted state to a high clock source. old clock source new clock source rtcnt n n + 1 cks bits rewritten rtcnt clock old clock source new clock source rtcnt n n + 1 cks bits rewritten n + 2 rtcnt clock 181 table 7-9 internal clock switchover and rtcnt operation (cont) cks2 to cks0 no. write timing rtcnt operation 3 high low switchover * 1 4 high high switchover notes: 1. including switchover from a high clock source to the halted state. 2. the switchover is regarded as a falling edge, causing rtcnt to increment. old clock source new clock source rtcnt clock rtcnt n n + 1 cks bits rewritten n + 2 2 * old clock source new clock source rtcnt clock rtcnt n n + 1 cks bits rewritten n + 2 182 7.4 interrupt source compare match interrupts (cmi) can be generated when the refresh controller is used as an interval timer. compare match interrupt requests are masked/unmasked with the cmie bit of rtmcsr. 7.5 usage notes when using the dram or pseudo-static ram refresh function, note the following points: with the refresh controller, if directly connected dram or psram is disconnected*, the p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 pin and the p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 pin may both become low-level outputs simultaneously. note: * when the dram enable bit (drame) or psram enable bit (psrame) in the refresh control register (rfshcr) is cleared to 0 after being set to 1. figure 7-23 operation when dram/psram connection is switched refresh cycles are not executed while the bus is released, during software standby mode, and when a bus cycle is greatly prolonged by insertion of wait states. when these conditions occur, other means of refreshing are required. if refresh requests occur while the bus is released, the first request is held and one refresh cycle is executed after the bus-released state ends. figure 7-24 shows the bus cycles in this case. address bus area 3 start address p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 183 figure 7-24 refresh cycles when bus is released if a bus cycle is prolonged by insertion of wait states, the first refresh request is held, as in the bus-released state. if there is contention with a bus request from an external bus master when making a transition to software standby mode, a one-state bus-released state may occur immediately before the transition to software standby mode (see figure 7-25). when using software standby mode, clear the brle bit to 0 in brcr before executing the sleep instruction. when making a transition to self-refresh mode, the strobe waveform output may not be guaranteed due to the same kind of contention. this, too, can be prevented by clearing the brle bit to 0 in brcr. figure 7-25 contention between bus-released state and software standby mode 184 rfsh back refresh request bus-released state refresh cycle cpu cycle refresh cycle address bus external bus released state software standby mode strobe breq back section 8 dma controller 8.1 overview the h8/3048 series has an on-chip dma controller (dmac) that can transfer data on up to four channels. when the dma controller is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. 8.1.1 features dmac features are listed below. selection of short address mode or full address mode short address mode 8-bit source address and 24-bit destination address, or vice versa maximum four channels available selection of i/o mode, idle mode, or repeat mode full address mode 24-bit source and destination addresses maximum two channels available selection of normal mode or block transfer mode directly addressable 16-mbyte address space selection of byte or word transfer activation by internal interrupts, external requests, or auto-request (depending on transfer mode) 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) compare match/input capture interrupts (four) serial communication interface (sci channel 0) transmit-data-empty/receive-data-full interrupts external requests auto-request 185 8.1.2 block diagram figure 8-1 shows a dmac block diagram. figure 8-1 block diagram of dmac imia0 imia1 imia2 imia3 txi0 rxi0 dreq0 dreq1 tend0 tend1 dend0a dend0b dend1a dend1b dtcr0a dtcr0b dtcr1a dtcr1b control logic data buffer address buffer arithmetic-logic unit mar0a mar0b mar1a mar1b ioar0a ioar0b ioar1a ioar1b etcr0a etcr0b etcr1a etcr1b internal address bus internal interrupts interrupt signals internal data bus module data bus legend dtcr: mar: ioar: etcr: data transfer control register memory address register i/o address register execute transfer count register channel 0a channel 0b channel 1a channel 1b channel 0 channel 1 186 8.1.3 functional overview table 8-1 gives an overview of the dmac functions. table 8-1 dmac functional overview address reg. length destina- transfer mode activation source tion compare match/input 24 8 capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3 transmit-data-empty interrupt from sci channel 0 receive-data-full 8 24 interrupt from sci channel 0 external request 24 8 auto-request 24 24 external request compare match/ 24 24 input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3 external request i/o mode transfers one byte or one word per request increments or decrements the memory address by 1 or 2 executes 1 to 65,536 transfers idle mode transfers one byte or one word per request holds the memory address fixed executes 1 to 65,536 transfers repeat mode transfers one byte or one word per request increments or decrements the memory address by 1 or 2 executes a specified number (1 to 255) of transfers, then returns to the initial state and continues normal mode auto-request retains the transfer request internally executes a specified number (1 to 65,536) of transfers continuously selection of burst mode or cycle-steal mode external request transfers one byte or one word per request executes 1 to 65,536 transfers block transfer transfers one block of a specified size per request executes 1 to 65,536 transfers allows either the source or destination to be a fixed block area block size can be 1 to 255 bytes or words short address mode full address mode 187 8.1.4 input/output pins table 8-2 lists the dmac pins. table 8-2 dmac pins abbrevia- input/ channel name tion output function 0 dma request 0 dreq 0 input external request for dmac channel 0 transfer end 0 tend 0 output transfer end on dmac channel 0 1 dma request 1 dreq 1 input external request for dmac channel 1 transfer end 1 tend 1 output transfer end on dmac channel 1 note: external requests cannot be made to channel a in short address mode. 8.1.5 register configuration table 8-3 lists the dmac registers. 188 table 8-3 dmac registers channel address * name abbreviation r/w initial value 0 h'ff20 memory address register 0ar mar0ar r/w undetermined h'ff21 memory address register 0ae mar0ae r/w undetermined h'ff22 memory address register 0ah mar0ah r/w undetermined h'ff23 memory address register 0al mar0al r/w undetermined h'ff26 i/o address register 0a ioar0a r/w undetermined h'ff24 execute transfer count register 0ah etcr0ah r/w undetermined h'ff25 execute transfer count register 0al etcr0al r/w undetermined h'ff27 data transfer control register 0a dtcr0a r/w h'00 h'ff28 memory address register 0br mar0br r/w undetermined h'ff29 memory address register 0be mar0be r/w undetermined h'ff2a memory address register 0bh mar0bh r/w undetermined h'ff2b memory address register 0bl mar0bl r/w undetermined h'ff2e i/o address register 0b ioar0b r/w undetermined h'ff2c execute transfer count register 0bh etcr0bh r/w undetermined h'ff2d execute transfer count register 0bl etcr0bl r/w undetermined h'ff2f data transfer control register 0b dtcr0b r/w h'00 1 h'ff30 memory address register 1ar mar1ar r/w undetermined h'ff31 memory address register 1ae mar1ae r/w undetermined h'ff32 memory address register 1ah mar1ah r/w undetermined h'ff33 memory address register 1al mar1al r/w undetermined h'ff36 i/o address register 1a ioar1a r/w undetermined h'ff34 execute transfer count register 1ah etcr1ah r/w undetermined h'ff35 execute transfer count register 1al etcr1al r/w undetermined h'ff37 data transfer control register 1a dtcr1a r/w h'00 h'ff38 memory address register 1br mar1br r/w undetermined h'ff39 memory address register 1be mar1be r/w undetermined h'ff3a memory address register 1bh mar1bh r/w undetermined h'ff3b memory address register 1bl mar1bl r/w undetermined h'ff3e i/o address register 1b ioar1b r/w undetermined h'ff3c execute transfer count register 1bh etcr1bh r/w undetermined h'ff3d execute transfer count register 1bl etcr1bl r/w undetermined h'ff3f data transfer control register 1b dtcr1b r/w h'00 note: * the lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 189 8.2 register descriptions (short address mode) in short address mode, transfers can be carried out independently on channels a and b. short address mode is selected by bits dts2a and dts1a in data transfer control register a (dtcra) as indicated in table 8-4. table 8-4 selection of short and full address modes bit 2 bit 1 channel dts2a dts1a description 0 1 1 dmac channel 0 operates as one channel in full address mode other than above dmac channels 0a and 0b operate as two independent channels in short address mode 1 1 1 dmac channel 1 operates as one channel in full address mode other than above dmac channels 1a and 1b operate as two independent channels in short address mode 8.2.1 memory address registers (mar) a memory address register (mar) is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or destination address. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. an mar consists of four 8-bit registers designated marr, mare, marh, and marl. all bits of marr are reserved: they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. an mar functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the dmac is activated: as a destination address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from the serial communication interface (sci) (channel 0), and as a source address register otherwise. the mar value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred, automatically updating the source or destination memory address. for details, see section 8.2.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). the mars are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 31 1 source or destination address 30 1 29 1 28 1 27 1 26 1 25 1 24 1 23 r/w 22 r/w 21 r/w 20 r/w 19 r/w 18 r/w 17 r/w 16 r/w 15 r/w 14 r/w 13 r/w 12 r/w 11 r/w 10 r/w 9 r/w 8 r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 r/w marr mare marh marl undetermined 190 8.2.2 i/o address registers (ioar) an i/o address register (ioar) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or destination address. the ioar value is the lower 8 bits of the address. the upper 16 address bits are all 1 (h'ffff). an ioar functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the dmac is activated: as a source address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from the sci (channel 0), and as a destination address register otherwise. the ioar value is held fixed. it is not incremented or decremented when a transfer is executed. the ioars are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 8.2.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr) an execute transfer count register (etcr) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers to be executed. these registers function in one way in i/o mode and idle mode, and another way in repeat mode. i/o mode and idle mode in i/o mode and idle mode, etcr functions as a 16-bit counter. the count is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. the transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w source or destination address undetermined bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w 191 repeat mode in repeat mode, etcrh functions as an 8-bit transfer counter and etcrl holds the initial transfer count. etcrh is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. when etcrh reaches h'00, the value in etcrl is reloaded into etcrh and the same operation is repeated. the etcrs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined transfer counter etcrh bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial count etcrl 192 8.2.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) a data transfer control register (dtcr) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of one dmac channel. the dtcrs are initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ata transfer enable (dte): enables or disables data transfer on a channel. when the dte bit is set to 1, the channel waits for a transfer to be requested, and executes the transfer when activated as specified by bits dts2 to dts0. when dte is 0, the channel is disabled and does not accept transfer requests. dte is set to 1 by reading the register when dte is 0, then writing 1. bit 7 dte description 0 data transfer is disabled. in i/o mode or idle mode, dte is cleared to 0 (initial value) when the specified number of transfers have been completed. 1 data transfer is enabled if dtie is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested when dte is cleared to 0. bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w data transfer enable enables or disables data transfer data transfer interrupt enable enables or disables the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer data transfer select these bits select the data transfer activation source data transfer size selects byte or word size data transfer increment/decrement selects whether to increment or decrement the memory address register repeat enable selects repeat mode 193 bit 6?ata transfer size (dtsz): selects the data size of each transfer. bit 6 dtsz description 0 byte-size transfer (initial value) 1 word-size transfer bit 5?ata transfer increment/decrement (dtid): selects whether to increment or decrement the memory address register (mar) after a data transfer in i/o mode or repeat mode. bit 5 dtid description 0 mar is incremented after each data transfer if dtsz = 0, mar is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is incremented by 2 after each transfer 1 mar is decremented after each data transfer if dtsz = 0, mar is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is decremented by 2 after each transfer mar is not incremented or decremented in idle mode. bit 4?epeat enable (rpe): selects whether to transfer data in i/o mode, idle mode, or repeat mode. bit 4 bit 3 rpe dtie description 0 0 i/o mode (initial value) 1 1 0 repeat mode 1 idle mode operations in these modes are described in sections 8.4.2, i/o mode, 8.4.3, idle mode, and 8.4.4, repeat mode. 194 bit 3?ata transfer interrupt enable (dtie): enables or disables the cpu interrupt (dend) requested when the dte bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 dtie description 0 the dend interrupt requested by dte is disabled (initial value) 1 the dend interrupt requested by dte is enabled bits 2 to 0?ata transfer select (dts2, dts1, dts0): these bits select the data transfer activation source. some of the selectable sources differ between channels a and b.* note: * refer to 8-3-4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 dts2 dts1 dts0 description 0 0 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu (initial value) channel 0 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 1 1 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 2 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 3 100t ransmit-data-empty interrupt from sci channel 0 1 receive-data-full interrupt from sci channel 0 1 0 falling edge of dreq input (channel b) transfer in full address mode (channel a) 1 low level of dreq input (channel b) transfer in full address mode (channel a) the same internal interrupt can be selected as an activation source for two or more channels at once. in that case the channels are activated in a priority order, highest-priority channel first. for the priority order, see section 8.4.9, multiple-channel operation. when a channel is enabled (dte = 1), its selected dmac activation source cannot generate a cpu interrupt. 195 8.3 register descriptions (full address mode) in full address mode the a and b channels operate together. full address mode is selected as indicated in table 8-4. 8.3.1 memory address registers (mar) a memory address register (mar) is a 32-bit readable/writable register. mara functions as the source address register of the transfer, and marb as the destination address register. an mar consists of four 8-bit registers designated marr, mare, marh, and marl. all bits of marr are reserved: they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. the mar value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred, automatically updating the source or destination memory address. for details, see section 8.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). the mars are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 8.3.2 i/o address registers (ioar) the i/o address registers (ioars) are not used in full address mode. bit initial value read/write 31 1 source or destination address 30 1 29 1 28 1 27 1 26 1 25 1 24 1 23 r/w 22 r/w 21 r/w 20 r/w 19 r/w 18 r/w 17 r/w 16 r/w 15 r/w 14 r/w 13 r/w 12 r/w 11 r/w 10 r/w 9 r/w 8 r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 r/w marr mare marh marl undetermined 196 8.3.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr) an execute transfer count register (etcr) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers to be executed. the functions of these registers differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. normal mode etcra etcrb: is not used in normal mode. in normal mode etcra functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. the count is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. the transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. etcrb is not used. bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w 197 block transfer mode etcra etcrb in block transfer mode, etcrah functions as an 8-bit block size counter. etcral holds the initial block size. etcrah is decremented by 1 each time one byte or word is transferred. when the count reaches h'00, etcrah is reloaded from etcral. blocks consisting of an arbitrary number of bytes or words can be transferred repeatedly by setting the same initial block size value in etcrah and etcral. in block transfer mode etcrb functions as a 16-bit block transfer counter. etcrb is decremented by 1 each time one block is transferred. the transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. the etcrs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined block size counter etcrah bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial block size etcral bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w block transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w 198 8.3.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) the data transfer control registers (dtcrs) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the operation of the dmac channels. a channel operates in full address mode when bits dts2a and dts1a are both set to 1 in dtcra. dtcra and dtcrb have different functions in full address mode. dtcra dtcra is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 said 0 r/w 4 saide 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0a 0 r/w 2 dts2a 0 r/w 1 dts1a 0 r/w data transfer enable enables or disables data transfer enables or disables the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer data transfer size selects byte or word size source address increment/decrement data transfer select 2a and 1a these bits must both be set to 1 data transfer interrupt enable source address increment/ decrement enable these bits select whether the source address register (mara) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer selects block transfer mode data transfer select 0a 199 bit 7?ata transfer enable (dte): together with the dtme bit in dtcrb, this bit enables or disables data transfer on the channel. when the dtme and dte bits are both set to 1, the channel is enabled. if auto-request is specified, data transfer begins immediately. otherwise, the channel waits for transfers to be requested. when the specified number of transfers have been completed, the dte bit is automatically cleared to 0. when dte is 0, the channel is disabled and does not accept transfer requests. dte is set to 1 by reading the register when dte is 0, then writing 1. bit 7 dte description 0 data transfer is disabled (dte is cleared to 0 when the specified number (initial value) of transfers have been completed) 1 data transfer is enabled if dtie is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested when dte is cleared to 0. bit 6?ata transfer size (dtsz): selects the data size of each transfer. bit 6 dtsz description 0 byte-size transfer (initial value) 1 word-size transfer bit 5?ource address increment/decrement (said) and bit 4?ource address increment/decrement enable (saide): these bits select whether the source address register (mara) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer. bit 5 bit 4 said saide description 0 0 mara is held fixed (initial value) 1 mara is incremented after each data transfer if dtsz = 0, mara is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mara is incremented by 2 after each transfer 1 0 mara is held fixed 1 mara is decremented after each data transfer if dtsz = 0, mara is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mara is decremented by 2 after each transfer 200 bit 3?ata transfer interrupt enable (dtie): enables or disables the cpu interrupt (dend) requested when the dte bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 dtie description 0 the dend interrupt requested by dte is disabled (initial value) 1 the dend interrupt requested by dte is enabled bits 2 and 1?ata transfer select 2a and 1a (dts2a, dts1a): a channel operates in full address mode when dts2a and dts1a are both set to 1. bit 0?ata transfer select 0a (dts0a): selects normal mode or block transfer mode. bit 0 dts0a description 0 normal mode (initial value) 1 block transfer mode operations in these modes are described in sections 8.4.5, normal mode, and 8.4.6, block transfer mode. 201 dtcrb dtcrb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ata transfer master enable (dtme): together with the dte bit in dtcra, this bit enables or disables data transfer. when the dtme and dte bits are both set to 1, the channel is enabled. when an nmi interrupt occurs dtme is cleared to 0, suspending the transfer so that the cpu can use the bus. the suspended transfer resumes when dtme is set to 1 again. for further information on operation in block transfer mode, see section 8.6.6, nmi interrupts and block transfer mode. dtme is set to 1 by reading the register while dtme = 0, then writing 1. bit 7 dtme description 0 data transfer is disabled (dtme is cleared to 0 when an nmi interrupt (initial value) occurs) 1 data transfer is enabled bit initial value read/write 7 dtme 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 daid 0 r/w 4 daide 0 r/w 3 tms 0 r/w 0 dts0b 0 r/w 2 dts2b 0 r/w 1 dts1b 0 r/w data transfer master enable enables or disables data transfer, together with the dte bit, and is cleared to 0 by an interrupt reserved bit destination address increment/decrement data transfer select 2b to 0b these bits select the data transfer activation source transfer mode select destination address increment/decrement enable these bits select whether the destination address register (marb) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer selects whether the block area is the source or destination in block transfer mode 202 bit 6?eserved: although reserved, this bit can be written and read. bit 5?estination address increment/decrement (daid) and bit 4?estination address increment/decrement enable (daide): these bits select whether the destination address register (marb) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer. bit 5 bit 4 daid daide description 0 0 marb is held fixed (initial value) 1 marb is incremented after each data transfer if dtsz = 0, marb is incremented by 1 after each data transfer if dtsz = 1, marb is incremented by 2 after each data transfer 1 0 marb is held fixed 1 marb is decremented after each data transfer if dtsz = 0, marb is decremented by 1 after each data transfer if dtsz = 1, marb is decremented by 2 after each data transfer bit 3?ransfer mode select (tms): selects whether the source or destination is the block area in block transfer mode. bit 3 tms description 0 destination is the block area in block transfer mode (initial value) 1 source is the block area in block transfer mode 203 bits 2 to 0?ata transfer select 2b to 0b (dts2b, dts1b, dts0b): these bits select the data transfer activation source. the selectable activation sources differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. normal mode bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 dts2b dts1b dts0b description 0 0 0 auto-request (burst mode) (initial value) 1 cannot be used 1 0 auto-request (cycle-steal mode) 1 cannot be used 1 0 0 cannot be used 1 cannot be used 1 0 falling edge of dreq 1 low level input at dreq block transfer mode bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 dts2b dts1b dts0b description 0 0 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 0 (initial value) 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 1 1 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 2 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 3 10 0 cannot be used 1 cannot be used 1 0 falling edge of dreq 1 cannot be used the same internal interrupt can be selected to activate two or more channels. the channels are activated in a priority order, highest priority first. for the priority order, see section 8.4.9, dmac multiple-channel operation. 204 8.4 operation 8.4.1 overview table 8-5 summarizes the dmac modes. table 8-5 dmac modes transfer mode activation notes short address compare match/input mode capture a interrupt from itu channels 0 to 3 transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0 external request normal mode auto-request external request block transfer mode compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channels 0 to 3 external request a summary of operations in these modes follows. i/o mode: one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. one 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. idle mode: one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. one 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. the addresses are held fixed. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. repeat mode: one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. when the designated number of transfers are completed, the initial address and counter value are restored and operation continues. no cpu interrupt is requested. one 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. full address mode up to four channels can operate independently only the b channels support external requests a and b channels are paired; up to two channels are available burst mode or cycle- steal mode can be selected for auto- requests i/o mode idle mode repeat mode 205 normal mode auto-request the dmac is activated by register setup alone, and continues executing transfers until the designated number of transfers have been completed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the transfers. both addresses are 24-bit addresses. cycle-steal mode the bus is released to another bus master after each byte or word is transferred. burst mode unless requested by a higher-priority bus master, the bus is not released until the designated number of transfers have been completed. external request one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. both addresses are 24-bit addresses. block transfer mode: one block of a specified size is transferred per request. a designated number of block transfers are executed. at the end of each block transfer, one address is restored to its initial value. when the designated number of blocks have been transferred, a cpu interrupt can be requested. both addresses are 24-bit addresses. 206 8.4.2 i/o mode i/o mode can be selected independently for each channel. one byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in i/o mode. a designated number of these transfers are executed. one address is specified in the memory address register (mar), the other in the i/o address register (ioar). the direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. the transfer is from the address specified in ioar to the address specified in mar if activated by an sci channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the address specified in mar to the address specified in ioar otherwise. table 8-6 indicates the register functions in i/o mode. table 8-6 register functions in i/o mode function activated by sci 0 receive- data-full other register interrupt activation initial setting operation destination source destination or incremented or address address source address decremented register register once per transfer source destination source or held fixed address address destination register register address transfer counter number of decremented transfers once per transfer until h'0000 is reached and transfer ends legend mar: memory address register ioar: i/o address register etcr: execute transfer count register mar and ioar specify the source and destination addresses. mar specifies a 24-bit source or destination address, which is incremented or decremented as each byte or word is transferred. ioar specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. the upper 16 bits are all 1s. ioar is not incremented or decremented. figure 8-2 illustrates how i/o mode operates. 23 0 mar all 1s ioar 23 0 15 0 etcr 7 207 figure 8-2 operation in i/o mode the transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in etcr. the etcr value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. when the etcr value reaches h'0000, the dte bit is cleared and the transfer ends. if the dtie bit is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. the maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting etcr to h'0000. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, and external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 8.2.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). address t address b transfer legend l = initial setting of mar n = initial setting of etcr address t = l address b = l + (?) ?(2 ?n ?1) dtid ioar 1 byte or word is transferred per request dtsz 208 figure 8-3 shows a sample setup procedure for i/o mode. figure 8-3 i/o mode setup procedure (example) 8.4.3 idle mode idle mode can be selected independently for each channel. one byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in idle mode. a designated number of these transfers are executed. one address is specified in the memory address register (mar), the other in the i/o address register (ioar). the direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. the transfer is from the address specified in ioar to the address specified in mar if activated by an sci channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the address specified in mar to the address specified in ioar otherwise. table 8-7 indicates the register functions in idle mode. set source and destination addresses set transfer count read dtcr set dtcr i/o mode i/o mode setup 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. set the source and destination addresses in mar and ioar. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. set the transfer count in etcr. read dtcr while the dte bit is cleared to 0. set the dtcr bits as follows. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2 to dts0. set or clear the dtie bit to enable or disable the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer. clear the rpe bit to 0 to select i/o mode. select mar increment or decrement with the dtid bit. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the dte bit to 1 to enable the transfer. 209 table 8-7 register functions in idle mode function activated by sci 0 receive- data-full other register interrupt activation initial setting operation destination source destination or held fixed address address source address register register source destination source or held fixed address address destination register register address transfer counter number of decremented transfers once per transfer until h'0000 is reached and transfer ends legend mar: memory address register ioar: i/o address register etcr: execute transfer count register mar and ioar specify the source and destination addresses. mar specifies a 24-bit source or destination address. ioar specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. the upper 16 bits are all 1s. mar and ioar are not incremented or decremented. figure 8-4 illustrates how idle mode operates. figure 8-4 operation in idle mode 23 0 mar all 1s ioar 23 0 15 0 etcr 7 transfer 1 byte or word is transferred per request ioar mar 210 the transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in etcr. the etcr value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. when the etcr value reaches h'0000, the dte bit is cleared, the transfer ends, and a cpu interrupt is requested. the maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting etcr to h'0000. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, and external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 8.2.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). figure 8-5 shows a sample setup procedure for idle mode. figure 8-5 idle mode setup procedure (example) set source and destination addresses set transfer count read dtcr set dtcr idle mode idle mode setup 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. set the source and destination addresses in mar and ioar. the transfer direction is deter- mined automatically from the activation source. set the transfer count in etcr. read dtcr while the dte bit is cleared to 0. set the dtcr bits as follows. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2 to dts0. set the dtie and rpe bits to 1 to select idle mode. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the dte bit to 1 to enable the transfer. 211 8.4.4 repeat mode repeat mode is useful for cyclically transferring a bit pattern from a table to the programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) in synchronization, for example, with itu compare match. repeat mode can be selected for each channel independently. one byte or word is transferred per request in repeat mode, as in i/o mode. a designated number of these transfers are executed. one address is specified in the memory address register (mar), the other in the i/o address register (ioar). at the end of the designated number of transfers, mar and etcr are restored to their original values and operation continues. the direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. the transfer is from the address specified in ioar to the address specified in mar if activated by an sci channel 0 receive-data- full interrupt, and from the address specified in mar to the address specified in ioar otherwise. table 8-8 indicates the register functions in repeat mode. table 8-8 register functions in repeat mode function activated by sci 0 receive- data-full other register interrupt activation initial setting operation destination source destination or incremented or address address source address decremented at register register each transfer until etcrh reaches h'0000, then restored to initial value source destination source or held fixed address address destination register register address transfer counter number of decremented once transfers per transfer until h'0000 is reached, then reloaded from etcrl initial transfer count number of held fixed transfers legend mar: memory address register ioar: i/o address register etcr: execute transfer count register 23 0 mar all 1s ioar 23 0 70 etcrh 7 70 etcrl 212 in repeat mode etcrh is used as the transfer counter while etcrl holds the initial transfer count. etcrh is decremented by 1 at each transfer until it reaches h'00, then is reloaded from etcrl. mar is also restored to its initial value, which is calculated from the dtsz and dtid bits in dtcr. specifically, mar is restored as follows: mar ? mar ?(?) dtid ?2 dtsz ?etcrl etcrh and etcrl should be initially set to the same value. in repeat mode transfers continue until the cpu clears the dte bit to 0. after dte is cleared to 0, if the cpu sets dte to 1 again, transfers resume from the state at which dte was cleared. no cpu interrupt is requested. as in i/o mode, mar and ioar specify the source and destination addresses. mar specifies a 24-bit source or destination address. ioar specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. the upper 16 bits are all 1s. ioar is not incremented or decremented. figure 8-6 illustrates how repeat mode operates. figure 8-6 operation in repeat mode address t address b transfer 1 byte or word is transferred per request legend l = initial setting of mar n = initial setting of etcrh and etcrl address t = l address b = l + (?) ?(2 ?n ?1) dtid dtsz ioar 213 the transfer count is specified as an 8-bit value in etcrh and etcrl. the maximum transfer count is 255, obtained by setting both etcrh and etcrl to h'ff. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, and external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 8.2.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). figure 8-7 shows a sample setup procedure for repeat mode. figure 8-7 repeat mode setup procedure (example) set source and destination addresses set transfer count read dtcr set dtcr repeat mode repeat mode 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. set the source and destination addresses in mar and ioar. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. set the transfer count in both etcrh and etcrl. read dtcr while the dte bit is cleared to 0. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the dte bit to 1 to enable the transfer. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2 to dts0. clear the dtie bit to 0 and set the rpe bit to 1 to select repeat mode. select mar increment or decrement with the dtid bit. set the dtcr bits as follows. 214 8.4.5 normal mode in normal mode the a and b channels are combined. one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. addresses are specified in mara and marb. table 8-9 indicates the register functions in i/o mode. table 8-9 register functions in normal mode register function initial setting operation source address source address incremented or register decremented once per transfer, or held fixed destination destination incremented or address register address decremented once per transfer, or held fixed transfer counter number of decremented once per transfers transfer legend mara: memory address register a marb: memory address register b etcra: execute transfer count register a the source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. mara specifies the source address. marb specifies the destination address. mara and marb can be independently incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. the transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in etcra. the etcra value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. when the etcra value reaches h'0000, the dte bit is cleared and the transfer ends. if the dtie bit is set, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. the maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting etcra to h'0000. figure 8-8 illustrates how normal mode operates. 23 0 mara 15 0 etcra 23 0 marb 215 figure 8-8 operation in normal mode transfers can be requested (activated) by an external request or auto-request. an auto-requested transfer is activated by the register settings alone. the designated number of transfers are executed automatically. either cycle-steal or burst mode can be selected. in cycle-steal mode the dmac releases the bus temporarily after each transfer. in burst mode the dmac keeps the bus until the transfers are completed, unless there is a bus request from a higher-priority bus master. for the detailed settings see section 8.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). address t address b transfer legend l l n t b t b said daid address t address b a b a a b b = initial setting of mara = initial setting of marb = initial setting of etcra = l = l + saide ?(?) ?(2 ?n ?1) = l = l + daide ?(?) (2 ?n ?1) a a b b dtsz dtsz a a b b 216 figure 8-9 shows a sample setup procedure for normal mode. figure 8-9 normal mode setup procedure (example) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. set the initial source address in mara. set the initial destination address in marb. set the transfer count in etcra. set the dtcrb bits as follows. set the dtcra bits as follows. read dtcrb with dtme cleared to 0. normal mode normal mode set initial source address set initial destination address set transfer count set dtcrb (1) set dtcra (1) read dtcrb set dtcrb (2) read dtcra set dtcra (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 clear the dtme bit to 0. set the daid and daide bits to select whether marb is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2b to dts0b. clear the dte bit to 0. select byte or word size with the dtsz bit. set the said and saide bits to select whether mara is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. set or clear the dtie bit to enable or disable the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer. clear the dts0a bit to 0 and set the dts2a and dts1a bits to 1 to select normal mode. set the dtme bit to 1 in dtcrb. read dtcra with dte cleared to 0. set the dte bit to 1 in dtcra to enable the transfer. note: carry out settings 1 to 9 with the dend interrupt masked in the cpu. if an nmi interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the dtme bit to 0, in 217 8.4.6 block transfer mode in block transfer mode the a and b channels are combined. one block of a specified size is transferred per request. a designated number of block transfers are executed. addresses are specified in mara and marb. the block area address can be either held fixed or cycled. table 8-10 indicates the register functions in block transfer mode. table 8-10 register functions in block transfer mode register function initial setting operation source address source address incremented or register decremented once per transfer, or held fixed destination destination incremented or address register address decremented once per transfer, or held fixed block size counter block size decremented once per transfer until h'00 is reached, then reloaded from etcral initial block size block size held fixed block transfer number of block decremented once per counter transfers block transfer until h'0000 is reached and the transfer ends legend mara: memory address register a marb: memory address register b etcra: execute transfer count register a etcrb: execute transfer count register b the source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. mara specifies the source address. marb specifies the destination address. mara and marb can be independently incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. one of these registers operates as a block area register: even if it is incremented or decremented, it is restored to its initial value at the end of each block transfer. the tms bit in dtcrb selects whether the block area is the source or destination. 23 0 mara 70 etcrah 70 etcral 23 0 marb 15 0 etcrb 218 if m (1 to 255) is the size of the block transferred at each request and n (1 to 65,536) is the number of blocks to be transferred, then etcrah and etcral should initially be set to m and etcrb should initially be set to n. figure 8-10 illustrates how block transfer mode operates. in this figure, bit tms is cleared to 0, meaning the block area is the destination. figure 8-10 operation in block transfer mode t b transfer legend l l m n t b t b address t m bytes or words are transferred per request address b a a block 1 block n b b block area block 2 = initial setting of mara = initial setting of marb = initial setting of etcrah and etcral = initial setting of etcrb = l = l + saide ?(?) ?(2 ?m ?1) = l = l + daide ?(?) ?(2 ?m ?1) a a b b a b a a b b said daid dtsz dtsz 219 when activated by a transfer request, the dmac executes a burst transfer. during the transfer mara and marb are updated according to the dtcr settings, and etcrah is decremented. when etcrah reaches h'00, it is reloaded from etcral to restore the initial value. the memory address register of the block area is also restored to its initial value, and etcrb is decremented. if etcrb is not h'0000, the dmac then waits for the next transfer request. etcrah and etcral should be initially set to the same value. the above operation is repeated until etcrb reaches h'0000, at which point the dte bit is cleared to 0 and the transfer ends. if the dtie bit is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. figure 8-11 shows examples of a block transfer with byte data size when the block area is the destination. in (a) the block area address is cycled. in (b) the block area address is held fixed. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 3, and by external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 8.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). 220 figure 8-11 block transfer mode flowcharts (examples) start (dte = dtme = 1) transfer requested? get bus mara = mara + 1 read from mara address write to marb address marb = marb + 1 etcrah = etcrah 1 etcrah = h'00 release bus clear dte to 0 and end transfer etcrah = etcral marb = marb etcral etcrb = etcrb 1 etcrb = h'0000 start (dte = dtme = 1) transfer requested? get bus mara = mara + 1 read from mara address write to marb address etcrah = etcrah 1 etcrah = h'00 release bus clear dte to 0 and end transfer etcrb = etcrb 1 etcrb = h'0000 etcrah = etcral no no no yes yes yes no no no yes yes yes a. dtsz = tms = 0 said = daid = 0 saide = daide = 1 b. dtsz = tms = 0 said = 0 saide = 1 daide = 0 221 figure 8-12 shows a sample setup procedure for block transfer mode. figure 8-12 block transfer mode setup procedure (example) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. block transfer mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 set source address set destination address set block transfer count set block size set dtcrb (1) set dtcra (1) read dtcrb set dtcrb (2) read dtcra set dtcra (2) block transfer mode set the source address in mara. set the destination address in marb. set the block transfer count in etcrb. set the block size (number of bytes or words) in both etcrah and etcral. set the dtcrb bits as follows. set the dtcra bits as follows. clear the dtme bit to 0. set the daid and daide bits to select whether marb is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. set or clear the tms bit to make the block area the source or destination. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2b to dts0b. clear the dte to 0. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the said and saide bits to select whether mara is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. set or clear the dtie bit to enable or disable the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer. set bits dts2a to dts0a all to 1 to select block transfer mode. read dtcrb with dtme cleared to 0. set the dtme bit to 1 in dtcrb. read dtcra with dte cleared to 0. set the dte bit to 1 in dtcra to enable the transfer. note: carry out settings 1 to 10 with the dend interrupt masked in the cpu. if an nmi interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the dtme bit to 0, in which case the transfer will not start. 222 8.4.7 dmac activation the dmac can be activated by an internal interrupt, external request, or auto-request. the available activation sources differ depending on the transfer mode and channel as indicated in table 8-11. table 8-11 dmac activation sources short address mode channels channels activation source 0a and 1a 0b and 1b normal block imia0 oo o imia1 oo o imia2 oo o imia3 oo o txi0 oo rxi0 oo external falling edge ooo requests of dreq low input at oo dreq auto-request o activation by internal interrupts: when an interrupt request is selected as a dmac activation source and the dte bit is set to 1, that interrupt request is not sent to the cpu. it is not possible for an interrupt request to activate the dmac and simultaneously generate a cpu interrupt. when the dmac is activated by an interrupt request, the interrupt request flag is cleared automatically. if the same interrupt is selected to activate two or more channels, the interrupt request flag is cleared when the highest-priority channel is activated, but the transfer request is held pending on the other channels in the dmac, which are activated in their priority order. full address mode internal interrupts 223 activation by external request: if an external request ( dreq pin) is selected as an activation source, the dreq pin becomes an input pin and the corresponding tend pin becomes an output pin, regardless of the port data direction register (ddr) settings. the dreq input can be level- sensitive or edge-sensitive. in short address mode and normal mode, an external request operates as follows. if edge sensing is selected, one byte or word is transferred each time a high-to-low transition of the dreq input is detected. if the next edge is input before the transfer is completed, the next transfer may not be executed. if level sensing is selected, the transfer continues while dreq is low, until the transfer is completed. the bus is released temporarily after each byte or word has been transferred, however. if the dreq input goes high during a transfer, the transfer is suspended after the current byte or word has been transferred. when dreq goes low, the request is held internally until one byte or word has been transferred. the tend signal goes low during the last write cycle. in block transfer mode, an external request operates as follows. only edge-sensitive transfer requests are possible in block transfer mode. each time a high-to-low transition of the dreq input is detected, a block of the specified size is transferred. the tend signal goes low during the last write cycle in each block. activation by auto-request: the transfer starts as soon as enabled by register setup, and continues until completed. cycle-steal mode or burst mode can be selected. in cycle-steal mode the dmac releases the bus temporarily after transferring each byte or word. normally, dmac cycles alternate with cpu cycles. in burst mode the dmac keeps the bus until the transfer is completed, unless there is a higher- priority bus request. if there is a higher-priority bus request, the bus is released after the current byte or word has been transferred. 224 8.4.8 dmac bus cycle figure 8-13 shows an example of the timing of the basic dmac bus cycle. this example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to an 8-bit three-state access area. when the dmac gets the bus from the cpu, after one dead cycle (t d ), it reads from the source address and writes to the destination address. during these read and write operations the bus is not released even if there is another bus request. dmac cycles comply with bus controller settings in the same way as cpu cycles. figure 8-13 dma transfer bus timing (example) rd hwr lwr t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 t 3 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 cpu cycle dmac cycle (word transfer) cpu cycle source address destination address address bus 225 figure 8-14 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by low input at a dreq pin. this example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area. the dmac continues the transfer while the dreq pin is held low. figure 8-14 bus timing of dma transfer requested by low dreq input dreq rd hwr tend t 1 t 2 t 3 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 lwr , cpu cycle dmac cycle cpu cycle dmac cycle (last transfer cycle) cpu cycle source address destination address source address destination address address bus 226 figure 8-15 shows an auto-requested burst-mode transfer. this example shows a transfer of three words from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area. figure 8-15 burst dma bus timing when the dmac is activated from a dreq pin there is a minimum interval of four states from when the transfer is requested until the dmac starts operating. the dreq pin is not sampled during the time between the transfer request and the start of the transfer. in short address mode and normal mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of the read cycle. in block transfer mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of one block transfer. t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 rd , cpu cycle dmac cycle source address destination address cpu cyc t d address bus hwr lwr 227 figure 8-16 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by the falling edge of dreq in normal mode. figure 8-16 timing of dmac activation by falling edge of dreq in normal mode dreq rd hwr t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 lwr , cpu cycle dmac cycle cpu cycle dmac cycle minimum 4 states next sampling point address bus 228 figure 8-17 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by level-sensitive low dreq input in normal mode. figure 8-17 timing of dmac activation by low dreq level in normal mode dreq rd hwr lwr , t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 cpu cycle dmac cycle cpu cycle minimum 4 states next sampling point address bus 229 figure 8-18 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by the falling edge of dreq in block transfer mode. figure 8-18 timing of dmac activation by falling edge of dreq in block transfer mode dreq rd hwr tend t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 dmac cycle dmac cycle cpu cycle next sampling minimum 4 states end of 1 block transfer lwr , address bus 230 8.4.9 dmac multiple-channel operation the dmac channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1 and channel a > channel b. table 8-12 shows the complete priority order. table 8-12 channel priority order short address mode full address mode priority channel 0a channel 0 high channel 0b channel 1a channel 1 channel 1b low if transfers are requested on two or more channels simultaneously, or if a transfer on one channel is requested during a transfer on another channel, the dmac operates as follows. 1. when a transfer is requested, the dmac requests the bus right. when it gets the bus right, it starts a transfer on the highest-priority channel at that time. 2. once a transfer starts on one channel, requests to other channels are held pending until that channel releases the bus. 3. after each transfer in short address mode, and each externally-requested or cycle-steal transfer in normal mode, the dmac releases the bus and returns to step 1. after releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the dmac requests the bus again. 4. after completion of a burst-mode transfer, or after transfer of one block in block transfer mode, the dmac releases the bus and returns to step 1. if there is a transfer request for a higher-priority channel or a bus request from a higher-priority bus master, however, the dmac releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. after releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the dmac requests the bus again. figure 8-19 shows the timing when channel 0a is set up for i/o mode and channel 1 for burst mode, and a transfer request for channel 0a is received while channel 1 is active. 231 figure 8-19 timing of multiple-channel operations 8.4.10 external bus requests, refresh controller, and dmac during a dma transfer, if the bus right is requested by an external bus request signal ( breq ) or by the refresh controller, the dmac releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. if there is a transfer request at this point, the dmac requests the bus right again. figure 8-20 shows an example of the timing of insertion of a refresh cycle during a burst transfer on channel 0. figure 8-20 bus timing of refresh controller and dmac rd t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 , dmac cycle (channel 1) cpu cycle dmac cycle (channel 0a) cpu cycle dmac cycle (channel 1) address bus hwr lwr rd hwr lwr , t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 dmac cycle (channel 0) dmac cycle (channel 0) refresh cycle address bus 232 8.4.11 nmi interrupts and dmac nmi interrupts do not affect dmac operations in short address mode. if an nmi interrupt occurs during a transfer in full address mode, the dmac suspends operations. in full address mode, a channel is enabled when its dte and dtme bits are both set to 1. nmi input clears the dtme bit to 0. after transferring the current byte or word, the dmac releases the bus to the cpu. in normal mode, the suspended transfer resumes when the cpu sets the dtme bit to 1 again. check that the dte bit is set to 1 and the dtme bit is cleared to 0 before setting the dtme bit to 1. figure 8-21 shows the procedure for resuming a dma transfer in normal mode on channel 0 after the transfer was halted by nmi input. figure 8-21 procedure for resuming a dma transfer halted by nmi (example) for information about nmi interrupts in block transfer mode, see section 8.6.6, nmi interrupts and block transfer mode. resuming dma transfer in normal mode dte = 1 dtme = 0 set dtme to 1 dma transfer continues end 1. 2. check that dte = 1 and dtme = 0. read dtcrb while dtme = 0, then write 1 in the dtme bit. 2 no yes 1 233 8.4.12 aborting a dma transfer when the dte bit in an active channel is cleared to 0, the dmac halts after transferring the current byte or word. the dmac starts again when the dte bit is set to 1. in full address mode, the dtme bit can be used for the same purpose. figure 8-22 shows the procedure for aborting a dma transfer by software. figure 8-22 procedure for aborting a dma transfer dma transfer abort set dtcr dma transfer aborted 1 1. clear the dte bit to 0 in dtcr. to avoid generating an interrupt when aborting a dma transfer, clear the dtie bit to 0 simultaneously. 234 8.4.13 exiting full address mode figure 8-23 shows the procedure for exiting full address mode and initializing the pair of channels. to set the channels up in another mode after exiting full address mode, follow the setup procedure for the relevant mode. figure 8-23 procedure for exiting full address mode (example) exiting full address mode halt the channel initialize dtcrb initialize dtcra initialized and halted 1 2 3 1. 2. 3. clear the dte bit to 0 in dtcra, or wait for the transfer to end and the dte bit to be cleared to 0. clear all dtcrb bits to 0. clear all dtcra bits to 0. 235 8.4.14 dmac states in reset state, standby modes, and sleep mode when the chip is reset or enters hardware or software standby mode, the dmac is initialized and halts. dmac operations continue in sleep mode. figure 8-24 shows the timing of a cycle-steal transfer in sleep mode. figure 8-24 timing of cycle-steal transfer in sleep mode address bus rd hwr lwr , 2 t d t t 2 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t cpu cycle dmac cycle dmac cycle sleep mode d t 236 8.5 interrupts the dmac generates only dma-end interrupts. table 8-13 lists the interrupts and their priority. table 8-13 dmac interrupts description interrupt short address mode full address mode interrupt priority dend0a end of transfer on channel 0a end of transfer on channel 0 high dend0b end of transfer on channel 0b dend1a end of transfer on channel 1a end of transfer on channel 1 dend1b end of transfer on channel 1b low each interrupt is enabled or disabled by the dtie bit in the corresponding data transfer control register (dtcr). separate interrupt signals are sent to the interrupt controller. the interrupt priority order among channels is channel 0 > channel 1 and channel a > channel b. figure 8-25 shows the dma-end interrupt logic. an interrupt is requested whenever dte = 0 and dtie = 1. figure 8-25 dma-end interrupt logic the dma-end interrupt for the b channels (dendb) is unavailable in full address mode. the dtme bit does not affect interrupt operations. dte dtie dma-end interrupt 237 8.6 usage notes 8.6.1 note on word data transfer word data cannot be accessed starting at an odd address. when word-size transfer is selected, set even values in the memory and i/o address registers (mar and ioar). 8.6.2 dmac self-access the dmac itself cannot be accessed during a dmac cycle. dmac registers cannot be specified as source or destination addresses. 8.6.3 longword access to memory address registers a memory address register can be accessed as longword data at the marr address. example mov.l #lbl, er0 mov.l er0, @marr four byte accesses are performed. note that the cpu may release the bus between the second byte (mare) and third byte (marh). memory address registers should be written and read only when the dmac is halted. 8.6.4 note on full address mode setup full address mode is controlled by two registers: dtcra and dtcrb. care must be taken to prevent the b channel from operating in short address mode during the register setup. the enable bits (dte and dtme) should not be set to 1 until the end of the setup procedure. 238 8.6.5 note on activating dmac by internal interrupts when using an internal interrupt to activate the dmac, make sure that the interrupt selected as the activating source does not occur during the interval after it has been selected but before the dmac has been enabled. the on-chip supporting module that will generate the interrupt should not be activated until the dmac has been enabled. if the dmac must be enabled while the on- chip supporting module is active, follow the procedure in figure 8-26. figure 8-26 procedure for enabling dmac while on-chip supporting module is operating (example) if the dte bit is set to 1 but the dtme bit is cleared to 0, the dmac is halted and the selected activating source cannot generate a cpu interrupt. if the dmac is halted by an nmi interrupt, for example, the selected activating source cannot generate cpu interrupts. to terminate dmac operations in this state, clear the dte bit to 0 to allow cpu interrupts to be requested. to continue dmac operations, carry out steps 2 and 4 in figure 8-26 before and after setting the dtme bit to 1. enabling of dmac selected interrupt requested? interrupt hand- ling by cpu clear selected interrupt? enable bit to 0 enable dmac set selected interrupt? enable bit to 1 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. while the dte bit is cleared to 0, interrupt requests are sent to the cpu. clear the interrupt enable bit to 0 in the interrupt-generating on-chip supporting module. enable the dmac. enable the dmac-activating interrupt. dmac operates yes no 239 when an itu interrupt activates the dmac, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before the dma transfer ends. if one itu interrupt activates two or more channels, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before the dma transfers end on all the activated channels. if the next interrupt occurs before a transfer ends, the channel or channels for which that interrupt was selected may fail to accept further activation requests. 8.6.6 nmi interrupts and block transfer mode if an nmi interrupt occurs in block transfer mode, the dmac operates as follows. when the nmi interrupt occurs, the dmac finishes transferring the current byte or word, then clears the dtme bit to 0 and halts. the halt may occur in the middle of a block. it is possible to find whether a transfer was halted in the middle of a block by checking the block size counter. if the block size counter does not have its initial value, the transfer was halted in the middle of a block. if the transfer is halted in the middle of a block, the activating interrupt flag is cleared to 0. the activation request is not held pending. while the dte bit is set to 1 and the dtme bit is cleared to 0, the dmac is halted and does not accept activating interrupt requests. if an activating interrupt occurs in this state, the dmac does not operate and does not hold the transfer request pending internally. neither is a cpu interrupt requested. for this reason, before setting the dtme bit to 1, first clear the enable bit of the activating interrupt to 0. then, after setting the dtme bit to 1, set the interrupt enable bit to 1 again. see section 8.6.5, note on activating dmac by internal interrupts. when the dtme bit is set to 1, the dmac waits for the next transfer request. if it was halted in the middle of a block transfer, the rest of the block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs. otherwise, the next block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs. 8.6.7 memory and i/o address register values table 8-14 indicates the address ranges that can be specified in the memory and i/o address registers (mar and ioar). 240 table 8-14 address ranges specifiable in mar and ioar 1-mbyte mode 16-mbyte mode mar h'00000 to h'fffff h'000000 to h'ffffff (0 to 1048575) (0 to 16777215) ioar h'fff00 to h'fffff h'ffff00 to h'ffffff (1048320 to 1048575) (16776960 to 16777215) mar bits 23 to 20 are ignored in 1-mbyte mode. 8.6.8 bus cycle when transfer is aborted when a transfer is aborted by clearing the dte bit or suspended by an nmi that clears the dtme bit, if this halts a channel for which the dmac has a transfer request pending internally, a dead cycle may occur. this dead cycle does not update the halted channel s address register or counter value. figure 8-27 shows an example in which an auto-requested transfer in cycle-steal mode on channel 0 is aborted by clearing the dte bit in channel 0. figure 8-27 bus timing at abort of dma transfer in cycle-steal mode address bus rd hwr , lwr cpu cycle dmac cycle cpu cycle dmac cycle cpu cycle dte bit is cleared t 1 t 2 t d t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 3 t d t d t 1 t 2 241 section 9 i/o ports 9.1 overview the h8/3048 series has 10 input/output ports (ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, a, and b) and one input port (port 7). table 9-1 summarizes the port functions. the pins in each port are multiplexed as shown in table 9-1. each port has a data direction register (ddr) for selecting input or output, and a data register (dr) for storing output data. in addition to these registers, ports 2, 4, and 5 have an input pull-up mos control register (pcr) for switching input pull-up mos transistors on and off. ports 1 to 6 and port 8 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. ports 9, a, and b can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. ports 1 to 6 and 8 to b can drive a darlington pair. ports 1, 2, 5, and b can drive leds (with 10-ma current sink). pins p8 2 to p8 0 , pa 7 to pa 0 , and pb 3 to pb 0 have schmitt-trigger input circuits. for block diagrams of the ports see appendix c, i/o port block diagrams. 243 table 9-1 port functions port description pins mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port 1 8-bit i/o port p1 7 to p1 0 / address output pins (a 7 to a 0 ) address output (a 7 to generic can drive leds a 7 to a 0 a 0 ) and generic input input/ ddr = 0: output generic input ddr = 1: address output port 2 8-bit i/o port p2 7 to p2 0 / address output pins (a 15 to a 8 ) address output (a 15 to generic input pull-up a 15 to a 8 a 8 ) and generic input input/ mos ddr = 0: output can drive leds generic input ddr = 1: address output port 3 8-bit i/o port p3 7 to p3 0 / data input/output (d 15 to d 8 ) generic d 15 to d 8 input/ output port 4 8-bit i/o port p4 7 to p4 0 / data input/output (d 7 to d 0 ) and 8-bit generic input/output generic input pull-up d 7 to d 0 8-bit bus mode: generic input/output input/ mos 16-bit bus mode: data input/output output port 5 4-bit i/o port p5 3 to p5 0 / address output (a 19 to a 16 ) address output (a 19 to generic input pull-up a 19 to a 16 a 16 ) and 4-bit generic input/ mos input ddr = 0: output can drive leds generic input ddr = 1: address output port 6 7-bit i/o port p6 6 / lwr , bus control signal output ( lwr , hwr , rd , as ) generic p6 5 / hwr , input/ p6 4 / rd , output p6 3 / as p6 2 / back , bus control signal input/output ( back , breq , wait ) and p6 1 / breq , 3-bit generic input/output p6 0 / wait port 7 8-bit i/o port p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 , analog input (an 7 , an 6 ) to a/d converter, analog output (da 1 , da 0 ) p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 from d/a converter, and generic input p7 5 to p7 0 / analog input (an 5 to an 0 ) to a/d converter, and generic input an 5 to an 0 port 8 5-bit i/o port p8 4 /cs 0 ddr = 0: generic input generic ?8 2 to p8 0 have ddr = 1 (reset value): cs 0 output input/ schmitt inputs output p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 , irq 3 to irq 1 input, cs 1 to cs 3 output, and generic input p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 , ddr = 0 (reset value): generic input p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 ddr = 1: cs 1 to cs 3 output p8 0 /rfsh/irq 0 irq 0 input, rfsh output, and generic input/output irq 3 to irq 0 input and generic input/ output 244 245 table 9-1 port functions (cont) port description pins mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port 9 6-bit i/o port p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 , input and output (sck 1 , sck 0 , rxd 1 , rxd 0 , txd 1 , txd 0 ) for serial p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 , communication interfaces 1 and 0 (sci1/0), irq 5 and irq 4 input, and p9 3 /rxd 1 , 6-bit generic input/output p9 2 /rxd 0 , p9 1 /txd 1 , p9 0 /txd 0 port a 8-bit i/o port pa 7 /tp 7 / output (tp 7 ) address output tpc output address tpc schmitt inputs tiocb 2 /a 20 from pro- (a 20 ) (tp 7 ), itu output output grammable input or (a 20 ) (tp 7 ), timing pattern output itu input controller (tpc), (tiocb 2 ), or output input or output and generic (tiocb 2 ), (tiocb 2 ) for input/output and 16-bit integrated generic timer unit input/ (itu), and output generic input/ output pa 6 /tp 6 / tpc output tpc output tpc output tpc output tpc tioca 2 /a 21 /cs 4 (tp 6 to tp 4 ), (tp 6 to tp 4 ), (tp 6 to tp 4 ), (tp 6 to tp 4 ), output pa 5 /tp 5 / itu input and itu input and itu input itu input (tp 6 to tiocb 1 /a 22 /cs 5 output (tioca 2 , output (tioca 2 , and output and output tp 4 ), itu pa 4 /tp 4 / tiocb 1 , tiocb 1 , (tioca 2 , (tioca 2 , input and tioca 1 /a 23 /cs 6 tioca 1 ), cs 4 to tioca 1 ), tiocb 1 , tiocb 1 , output cs 6 output, and address output tioca 1 ), tioca 1 ), (tioca 2 , generic input/ (a 23 to a 21 ), cs 4 to cs 6 address tiocb 1 , output cs 4 to cs 6 output, and output tioca 1 ), output, generic (a 23 to a 21 ), and and generic input/output cs 4 to cs 6 generic input/output output, and input/ generic output input/output pa 3 /tp 3 / tpc output (tp 3 to tp 0 ), output (tend 1 , tend 0 ) from dma controller tiocb 0 /tclkd, (dmac), itu input and output (tclkd, tclkc, tclkb, tclka, pa 2 /tp 2 / tiocb 0 , tioca 0 ), and generic input/output tioca 0 /tclkc, pa 1 /tp 1 / tend 1 /tclkb, pa 0 /tp 0 / tend 0 /tclka port b pb 7 /tp 15 / tpc output (tp 15 ), dmac input (dreq 1 ), trigger input (adtrg) to a/d dreq 1 /adtrg, converter, and generic input/output pb 6 /tp 14 / tpc output (tp 14 ), dmac input (dreq 0 ), cs 7 output, tpc output dreq 0 ,/cs 7 and generic input/output (tp 14 ), dmac input (dreq 0 ), and generic input/ output 8-bit i/o port can drive leds ?b 3 to pb 0 have schmitt inputs table 9-1 port functions (cont) port description pins mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port b pb 5 /tp 13 / tpc output (tp 13 to tp 8 ), itu input and output (tocxb 4 , tocxa 4 , tocxb 4 , tiocb 4 , tioca 4 , tiocb 3 , tioca 3 ), and generic input/output pb 4 /tp 12 / tocxa 4 , pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 , pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 , pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 , pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 9.2 port 1 9.2.1 overview port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-1. the pin functions differ between the expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled, expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled, and single-chip mode. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), they are address bus output pins (a 7 to a 0 ). in modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), settings in the port 1 data direction register (p1ddr) can designate pins for address bus output (a 7 to a 0 ) or generic input. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 1 is a generic input/output port. when dram is connected to area 3, a 7 to a 0 output row and column addresses in read and write cycles. for details see section 7, refresh controller. pins in port 1 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-1 port 1 pin configuration port 1 p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 1 pins mode 7 modes 1 to 4 p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 modes 5 and 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8-bit i/o port can drive leds ?b 3 to pb 0 have schmitt inputs 246 9.2.2 register descriptions table 9-2 summarizes the registers of port 1. table 9-2 port 1 registers initial value address * name abbreviation r/w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 h'ffc0 port 1 data direction register p1ddr w h'ff h'00 h'ffc2 port 1 data register p1dr r/w h'00 h'00 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 1 data direction register (p1ddr): p1ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 1. modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled): p1ddr values are fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. port 1 functions as an address bus. modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled): a pin in port 1 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding p1ddr bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 1 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 1 becomes an output pin if the corresponding p1ddr bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 p1 ddr 1 0 w 7 6 p1 ddr 1 0 w 6 5 p1 ddr 1 0 w 5 4 p1 ddr 1 0 w 4 3 p1 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p1 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p1 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p1 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 1 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 1 pins 247 in modes 5 to 7, p1ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p1ddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a p1ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 1 data register (p1dr): p1dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores port 1 output data. when this register is read, the pin logic level of a pin is read for bits for which the p1ddr setting is 0, and the p1dr value is read for bits for which the p1ddr setting is 1. p1dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 p1 0 r/w port 1 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 1 pins 7 6 p1 0 r/w 6 5 p1 0 r/w 5 4 p1 0 r/w 4 3 p1 0 r/w 3 2 p1 0 r/w 2 1 p1 0 r/w 1 0 p1 0 r/w 0 248 9.3 port 2 9.3.1 overview port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-2. the pin functions differ according to the operating mode. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), port 2 consists of address bus output pins (a 15 to a 8 ). in modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), settings in the port 2 data direction register (p2ddr) can designate pins for address bus output (a 15 to a 8 ) or generic input. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 2 is a generic input/output port. when dram is connected to area 3, a 9 and a 8 output row and column addresses in read and write cycles. for details see section 7, refresh controller. port 2 has software-programmable built-in pull-up mos. pins in port 2 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-2 port 2 pin configuration port 2 p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 port 2 pins mode 7 modes 1 to 4 p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 modes 5 and 6 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 249 9.3.2 register descriptions table 9-3 summarizes the registers of port 2. table 9-3 port 2 registers initial value address * name abbreviation r/w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 h'ffc1 port 2 data direction register p2ddr w h'ff h'00 h'ffc3 port 2 data register p2dr r/w h'00 h'00 h'ffd8 port 2 input pull-up mos p2pcr r/w h'00 h'00 control register note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 2 data direction register (p2ddr): p2ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 2. modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled): p2ddr values are fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. port 2 functions as an address bus. modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled): following a reset, port 2 is an input port. a pin in port 2 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding p2ddr bit is set to 1, and a generic input port if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 2 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 2 becomes an output port if the corresponding p2ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 p2 ddr 1 0 w 7 6 p2 ddr 1 0 w 6 5 p2 ddr 1 0 w 5 4 p2 ddr 1 0 w 4 3 p2 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p2 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p2 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p2 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 2 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 2 pins 250 in modes 5 to 7, p2ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p2ddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a p2ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 2 data register (p2dr): p2dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p2 7 to p2 0 . when a bit in p2ddr is set to 1, if port 2 is read the value of the corresponding p2dr bit is returned. when a bit in p2ddr is cleared to 0, if port 2 is read the corresponding pin level is read. p2dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. port 2 input pull-up mos control register (p2pcr): p2pcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up transistors in port 2. in modes 5 to 7, when a p2ddr bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit from p2 7 pcr to p2 0 pcr is set to 1, the input pull-up mos is turned on. p2pcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 p2 0 r/w port 2 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 2 pins 7 6 p2 0 r/w 6 5 p2 0 r/w 5 4 p2 0 r/w 4 3 p2 0 r/w 3 2 p2 0 r/w 2 1 p2 0 r/w 1 0 p2 0 r/w 0 bit initial value read/write 7 p2 pcr 0 r/w port 2 input pull-up mos control 7 to 0 these bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 2 7 6 p2 pcr 0 r/w 6 5 p2 pcr 0 r/w 5 4 p2 pcr 0 r/w 4 3 p2 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p2 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p2 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p2 pcr 0 r/w 0 251 table 9-4 summarizes the states of the input pull-up transistors. table 9-4 input pull-up mos states (port 2) mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode other modes 1 off off off off 2 3 4 5 off off on/off on/off 6 7 legend off: the input pull-up mos is always off. on/off: the input pull-up mos is on if p2pcr = 1 and p2ddr = 0. otherwise, it is off. 252 9.4 port 3 9.4.1 overview port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-3. port 3 is a data bus in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes) and a generic input/output port in mode 7 (single-chip mode). pins in port 3 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-3 port 3 pin configuration 9.4.2 register descriptions table 9-5 summarizes the registers of port 3. table 9-5 port 3 registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffc4 port 3 data direction register p3ddr w h'00 h'ffc6 port 3 data register p3dr r/w h'00 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 3 p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 port 3 pins mode 7 modes 1 to 6 253 port 3 data direction register (p3ddr): p3ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 3. modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes): port 3 functions as a data bus. p3ddr is ignored. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 3 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 3 becomes an output port if the corresponding p3ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p3ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p3ddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a p3ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 3 data register (p3dr): p3dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p3 7 to p3 0 . when a bit in p3ddr is set to 1, if port 3 is read the value of the corresponding p3dr bit is returned. when a bit in p3ddr is cleared to 0, if port 3 is read the corresponding pin level is read. p3dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 p3 ddr 0 w port 3 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 3 pins 7 6 p3 ddr 0 w 6 5 p3 ddr 0 w 5 4 p3 ddr 0 w 4 3 p3 ddr 0 w 3 2 p3 ddr 0 w 2 1 p3 ddr 0 w 1 0 p3 ddr 0 w 0 bit initial value read/write 7 p3 0 r/w port 3 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 3 pins 7 6 p3 0 r/w 6 5 p3 0 r/w 5 4 p3 0 r/w 4 3 p3 0 r/w 3 2 p3 0 r/w 2 1 p3 0 r/w 1 0 p3 0 r/w 0 254 9.5 port 4 9.5.1 overview port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-4. the pin functions differ according to the operating mode. in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), when the bus width control register (abwcr) designates areas 0 to 7 all as 8-bit-access areas, the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode and port 4 is a generic input/output port. when at least one of areas 0 to 7 is designated as a 16-bit-access area, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode and port 4 becomes part of the data bus. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 4 is a generic input/output port. port 4 has software-programmable built-in pull-up mos. pins in port 4 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-4 port 4 pin configuration port 4 p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p4 (input/output)/d 7 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 6 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 5 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 4 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 3 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 2 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 1 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 0 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 4 pins modes 1 to 6 p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mode 7 255 9.5.2 register descriptions table 9-6 summarizes the registers of port 4. table 9-6 port 4 registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffc5 port 4 data direction register p4ddr w h'00 h'ffc7 port 4 data register p4dr r/w h'00 h'ffda port 4 input pull-up mos p4pcr r/w h'00 control register note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 4 data direction register (p4ddr): p4ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 4. modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes): when all areas are designated as 8-bit-access areas, selecting 8-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as a generic input/output port. a pin in port 4 becomes an output port if the corresponding p4ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. when at least one area is designated as a 16-bit-access area, selecting 16-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as part of the data bus. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 4 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 4 becomes an output port if the corresponding p4ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p4ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p4ddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 p4 ddr 0 w port 4 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 4 pins 7 6 p4 ddr 0 w 6 5 p4 ddr 0 w 5 4 p4 ddr 0 w 4 3 p4 ddr 0 w 3 2 p4 ddr 0 w 2 1 p4 ddr 0 w 1 0 p4 ddr 0 w 0 256 abwcr and p4ddr are not initialized in software standby mode. when port 4 functions as a generic input/output port, if a p4ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 4 data register (p4dr): p4dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p4 7 to p4 0 . when a bit in p4ddr is set to 1, if port 4 is read the value of the corresponding p4dr bit is returned. when a bit in p4ddr is cleared to 0, if port 4 is read the corresponding pin level is read. p4dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. port 4 input pull-up mos control register (p4pcr): p4pcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up transistors in port 4. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), and in 8-bit bus mode in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), when a p4ddr bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding p4pcr bit is set to 1, the input pull-up mos transistor is turned on. p4pcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 p4 0 r/w port 4 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 4 pins 7 6 p4 0 r/w 6 5 p4 0 r/w 5 4 p4 0 r/w 4 3 p4 0 r/w 3 2 p4 0 r/w 2 1 p4 0 r/w 1 0 p4 0 r/w 0 bit initial value read/write 7 p4 pcr 0 r/w port 4 input pull-up mos control 7 to 0 these bits control input pull-up mos transistors built into port 4 7 6 p4 pcr 0 r/w 6 5 p4 pcr 0 r/w 5 4 p4 pcr 0 r/w 4 3 p4 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p4 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p4 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p4 pcr 0 r/w 0 257 table 9-7 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups mos in the 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes. table 9-7 input pull-up mos transistor states (port 4) hardware software mode reset standby mode standby mode other modes 1 to 6 8-bit bus mode off off on/off on/off 16-bit bus mode off off 7 on/off on/off legend off: the input pull-up mos transistor is always off. on/off: the input pull-up mos transistor is on if p4pcr = 1 and p4ddr = 0. otherwise, it is off. 258 9.6 port 5 9.6.1 overview port 5 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 9-5. the pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), port 5 consists of address output pins (a 19 to a 16 ). in modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), settings in the port 5 data direction register (p5ddr) designate pins for address bus output (a 19 to a 16 ) or generic input. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 5 is a generic input/output port. port 5 has software-programmable built-in pull-up mos transistors. pins in port 5 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive an led or a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-5 port 5 pin configuration 9.6.2 register descriptions table 9-8 summarizes the registers of port 5. table 9-8 port 5 registers initial value address * name abbreviation r/w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 h'ffc8 port 5 data direction register p5ddr w h'ff h'f0 h'ffca port 5 data register p5dr r/w h'f0 h'f0 h'ffdb port 5 input pull-up mos p5pcr r/w h'f0 h'f0 control register note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 5 p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a 3 2 1 0 19 18 17 16 a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) 19 18 17 16 p5 (input)/a (output) p5 (input)/a (output) p5 (input)/a (output) p5 (input)/a (output) 3 2 1 0 port 5 pins modes 1 to 4 modes 5 and 6 p5 (input/output) p5 (input/output) p5 (input/output) p5 (input/output) 3 2 1 0 mode 7 19 18 17 16 259 port 5 data direction register (p5ddr): p5ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 5. modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled): p5ddr values are fixed at 1 and cannot be modified. port 5 functions as an address bus. the reserved bits (bits 7 to 4) are also fixed at 1. modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled): following a reset, port 5 is an input port. a pin in port 5 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding p5ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 5 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 5 becomes an output port if the corresponding p5ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p5ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p5ddr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting, so if a p5ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 5 data register (p5dr): p5dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p5 3 to p5 0 . when a bit in p5ddr is set to 1, if port 5 is read the value of the corresponding p5dr bit is returned. when a bit in p5ddr is cleared to 0, if port 5 is read the corresponding pin level is read. bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 p5 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p5 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p5 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p5 ddr 1 0 w 0 reserved bits port 5 data direction 3 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 5 pins bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 p5 0 r/w 3 2 p5 0 r/w 2 1 p5 0 r/w 1 0 p5 0 r/w 0 reserved bits these bits store data for port 5 pins port 5 data 3 to 0 260 bits 7 to 4 are reserved. they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. p5dr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. port 5 input pull-up mos control register (p5pcr): p5pcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up mos transistors in port 5. in modes 5 to 7, when a p5ddr bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit from p5 3 pcr to p5 0 pcr is set to 1, the input pull-up mos transistor is turned on. p5pcr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. table 9-9 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups mos in each mode. table 9-9 input pull-up mos transistor states (port 5) mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode other modes 1 off off off off 2 3 4 5 off off on/off on/off 6 7 legend off: the input pull-up mos transistor is always off. on/off: the input pull-up mos transistor is on if p5pcr = 1 and p5ddr = 0. otherwise, it is off. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 p5 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p5 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p5 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p5 pcr 0 r/w 0 reserved bits these bits control input pull-up mos transistors built into port 5 port 5 input pull-up mos control 3 to 0 261 9.7 port 6 9.7.1 overview port 6 is a 7-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output of bus control signals ( lwr , hwr , rd , as , back , breq , and wait ). when dram is connected to area 3, lwr , hwr , and rd also function as lw , uw , and cas , or lcas , ucas , and we , respectively. for details see section 7, refresh controller. figure 9-6 shows the pin configuration of port 6. in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes) the pin functions are lwr , hwr , rd , as , p6 2 / back , p6 1 / breq , and p6 0 / wait . see table 9-11 for the method of selecting the pin states. in mode 7 (single-chip mode) port 6 is a generic input/output port. pins in port 6 can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-6 port 6 pin configuration 9.7.2 register descriptions table 9-10 summarizes the registers of port 6. table 9-10 port 6 registers initial value address * name abbreviation r/w mode 1 to 5 mode 6, 7 h'ffc9 port 6 data direction register p6ddr w h?8 h'80 h'ffcb port 6 data register p6dr r/w h?0 h'80 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 6 p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lwr hwr rd as back breq wait port 6 pins p6 p6 p6 2 1 0 lwr hwr rd as back breq wait modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (input) (input) p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mode 7 (single-chip mode) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output)/ (input/output)/ (input/output)/ 262 port 6 data direction register (p6ddr): p6ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 6. modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes): p6 6 to p6 3 function as bus control output pins ( lwr , hwr , rd , as ). p6 2 to p6 0 are generic input/output pins, functioning as output port when bits p6 2 ddr to p6 0 ddr are set to 1 and input port when these bits are cleared to 0. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 6 is a generic input/output port. a pin in port 6 becomes an output port if the corresponding p6ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. bit 7 is reserved. p6ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p6ddr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a p6ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 6 data register (p6dr): p6dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p6 6 to p6 0 . when a bit in p6ddr is set to 1, if port 6 is read the value of the corresponding p6dr bit is returned. when a bit in p6ddr is cleared to 0, if port 6 is read the corresponding pin level is read. bit 7 is reserved, cannot be modified, and always read as 1. p6dr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 p6 ddr 0 w 6 5 p6 ddr 0 w 5 4 p6 ddr 0 w 4 3 p6 ddr 0 w 3 2 p6 ddr 0 w 2 1 p6 ddr 0 w 1 0 p6 ddr 0 w 0 port 6 data direction 6 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 6 pins reserved bit bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 p6 0 r/w 6 5 p6 0 r/w 5 4 p6 0 r/w 4 3 p6 0 r/w 3 2 p6 0 r/w 2 1 p6 0 r/w 1 0 p6 0 r/w 0 reserved bit port 6 data 6 to 0 these bits store data for port 6 pins 263 table 9-11 port 6 pin functions in modes 1 to 6 pin pin functions and selection method p6 6 / lwr functions as follows regardless of p6 6 ddr p6 6 ddr 0 1 pin function lwr output p6 5 / hwr functions as follows regardless of p6 5 ddr p6 5 ddr 0 1 pin function hwr output p6 4 / rd functions as follows regardless of p6 4 ddr p6 4 ddr 0 1 pin function rd output p6 3 / as functions as follows regardless of p6 3 ddr p6 3 ddr 0 1 pin function as output p6 2 / back bit brle in brcr and bit p6 2 ddr select the pin function as follows brle 0 1 p6 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p6 2 input p6 2 output back output p6 1 / breq bit brle in brcr and bit p6 1 ddr select the pin function as follows brle 0 1 p6 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p6 1 input p6 1 output breq input p6 0 / wait bits wce7 to wce0 in wcer, bit wms1 in wcr, and bit p6 0 ddr select the pin function as follows wcer all 1s not all 1s wms1 0 1 p6 0 ddr 0 1 0 * 0 * pin function p6 0 input p6 0 output wait input note: * do not set bit p6 0 ddr to 1. 264 9.8 port 7 9.8.1 overview port 7 is an 8-bit input port that is also used for analog input to the a/d converter and analog output from the d/a converter. the pin functions are the same in all operating modes. figure 9-7 shows the pin configuration of port 7. figure 9-7 port 7 pin configuration port 7 p7 (input)/an (input)/da (output) p7 (input)/an (input)/da (output) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 7 pins 1 0 265 9.8.2 register description table 9-12 summarizes the port 7 register. port 7 is an input-only port, so it has no data direction register. table 9-12 port 7 data register address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffce port 7 data register p7dr r undetermined note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 7 data register (p7dr) when port 7 is read, the pin levels are always read. bit initial value read/write 0 p7 ? r * note: * 0 1 p7 ? r * 1 2 p7 ? r * 2 3 p7 ? r * 3 4 p7 ? r * 4 5 p7 ? r * 5 6 p7 ? r * 6 7 p7 ? r * 7 70 determined by pins p7 to p7 . 266 9.9 port 8 9.9.1 overview port 8 is a 5-bit input/output port that is also used for cs 3 to cs 0 output, rfsh output, and irq 3 to irq 0 input. figure 9-8 shows the pin configuration of port 8. in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), port 8 can provide cs 3 to cs 0 output, rfsh output, and irq 3 to irq 0 input. see table 9-14 for the selection of pin functions in expanded modes. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), port 8 can provide irq 3 to irq 0 input. see table 9-15 for the selection of pin functions in single-chip mode. the irq 3 to irq 0 functions are selected by ier settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for input or output. for details see section 5, interrupt controller. pins in port 8 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. pins p8 2 to p8 0 have schmitt-trigger inputs. figure 9-8 port 8 pin configuration port 8 p8 / p8 / / p8 / / p8 / / p8 / / 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 port 8 pins cs cs cs cs rfsh 3 2 1 irq irq irq irq 0 p8 (input)/ (output) p8 (input)/ (output)/ (input) p8 (input)/ (output)/ (input) p8 (input)/ (output)/ (input) p8 (input/output)/ (output)/ (input) 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes) 0 1 2 3 cs cs cs cs rfsh 3 2 1 irq irq irq irq 0 p8 /(input/output) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in mode 7 (single-chip mode) irq irq irq irq 3 2 1 0 267 9.9.2 register descriptions table 9-13 summarizes the registers of port 8. table 9-13 port 8 registers initial value address * name abbreviation r/w mode 1 to 4 mode 5 to 7 h'ffcd port 8 data direction p8ddr w h'f0 h'e0 register h'ffcf port 8 data register p8dr r/w h'e0 h'e0 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 8 data direction register (p8ddr): p8ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 8. modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes): when bits in p8ddr bit are set to 1, p8 4 to p8 1 become cs 0 to cs 3 output pins. when bits in p8ddr are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input ports. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), following a reset only cs 0 is output. the other three pins are input ports. in modes 5 and 6 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), following a reset all four pins are input ports. when the refresh controller is enabled, p8 0 is used unconditionally for rfsh output. when the refresh controller is disabled, p8 0 becomes a generic input/output port according to the p8ddr setting. for details see table 9-15. mode 7 (single-chip mode): port 8 is a generic input/output port. a pin in port 8 becomes an output port if the corresponding p8ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p8ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 p8 ddr 1 w 0 w 4 3 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 3 2 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 2 1 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 1 0 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 0 reserved bits port 8 data direction 4 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 8 pins bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 268 p8ddr is initialized to h'e0 or h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. the reset value depends on the operating mode. in software standby mode p8ddr retains its previous setting. if a p8ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 8 data register (p8dr): p8dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p8 4 to p8 0 . when a bit in p8ddr is set to 1, if port 8 is read the value of the corresponding p8dr bit is returned. when a bit in p8ddr is cleared to 0, if port 8 is read the corresponding pin level is read. bits 7 to 5 are reserved. they cannot be modified and always are read as 1. p8dr is initialized to h'e0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 p8 0 r/w 4 3 p8 0 r/w 3 2 p8 0 r/w 2 1 p8 0 r/w 1 0 p8 0 r/w 0 reserved bits port 8 data 4 to 0 these bits store data for port 8 pins 269 table 9-14 port 8 pin functions in modes 1 to 6 pin pin functions and selection method p8 4 /cs 0 bit p8 4 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 4 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 4 input cs 0 output p8 3 /cs 1 /irq 3 bit p8 3 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 3 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 3 input cs 1 output irq 3 input p8 2 /cs 2 /irq 2 bit p8 2 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 2 input cs 2 output irq 2 input p8 1 /cs 3 /irq 1 bit p8 1 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 1 input cs 3 output irq 1 input p8 0 / rfsh /irq 0 bit rfshe in rfshcr and bit p8 0 ddr select the pin function as follows rfshe 0 1 p8 0 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 0 input p8 0 output rfsh output irq 0 input 270 table 9-15 port 8 pin functions in mode 7 pin pin functions and selection method p8 4 bit p8 4 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 4 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 4 input p8 4 output p8 3 /irq 3 bit p8 3 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 3 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 3 input p8 3 output irq 3 input p8 2 /irq 2 bit p8 2 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 2 input p8 2 output irq 2 input p8 1 /irq 1 bit p8 1 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 1 input p8 1 output irq 1 input p8 0 /irq 0 bit p8 0 ddr select the pin function as follows p8 0 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 0 input p8 0 output irq 0 input 271 9.10 port 9 9.10.1 overview port 9 is a 6-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output (txd 0 , txd 1 , rxd 0 , rxd 1 , sck 0 , sck 1 ) by serial communication interface channels 0 and 1 (sci0 and sci1), and for irq 5 and irq 4 input. see table 9-17 for the selection of pin functions. the irq 5 and irq 4 functions are selected by ier settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for input or output. for details see section 5, interrupt controller. port 9 has the same set of pin functions in all operating modes. figure 9-9 shows the pin configuration of port 9. pins in port 9 can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. figure 9-9 port 9 pin configuration 9.10.2 register descriptions table 9-16 summarizes the registers of port 9. table 9-16 port 9 registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffd0 port 9 data direction register p9ddr w h'c0 h'ffd2 port 9 data register p9dr r/w h'c0 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port 9 p9 (input/output)/sck p9 (input/output)/sck p9 (input/output)/rxd (input) p9 (input/output)/rxd (input) p9 (input/output)/txd (output) p9 (input/output)/txd (output) 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 9 pins 1 0 (input/output)/irq (input) (input/output)/irq (input) 5 4 1 0 1 0 272 port 9 data direction register (p9ddr): p9ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 9. a pin in port 9 becomes an output port if the corresponding p9ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p9ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p9ddr is initialized to h'c0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a p9ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. port 9 data register (p9dr): p9dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins p9 5 to p9 0 . when a bit in p9ddr is set to 1, if port 9 is read the value of the corresponding p9dr bit is returned. when a bit in p9ddr is cleared to 0, if port 9 is read the corresponding pin level is read. bits 7 and 6 are reserved. they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. p9dr is initialized to h'c0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 p9 ddr 0 w 5 4 p9 ddr 0 w 4 3 p9 ddr 0 w 3 2 p9 ddr 0 w 2 1 p9 ddr 0 w 1 0 p9 ddr 0 w 0 reserved bits port 9 data direction 5 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 9 pins bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 p9 0 r/w 4 p9 0 r/w 4 3 p9 0 r/w 3 2 p9 0 r/w 2 1 p9 0 r/w 1 0 p9 0 r/w 0 reserved bits port 9 data 5 to 0 these bits store data for port 9 pins 5 273 table 9-17 port 9 pin functions pin pin functions and selection method p9 5 /sck 1 /irq 5 bit c/ a in smr of sci1, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr of sci1, and bit p9 5 ddr select the pin function as follows cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 cke0 0 1 p9 5 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 5 p9 5 sck 1 output sck 1 output sck 1 input input output irq 5 input p9 4 /sck 0 /irq 4 bit c/ a in smr of sci0, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr of sci0, and bit p9 4 ddr select the pin function as follows cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 cke0 0 1 p9 4 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 4 p9 4 sck 0 output sck 0 output sck 0 input input output irq 4 input p9 3 /rxd 1 bit re in scr of sci1 and bit p9 3 ddr select the pin function as follows re 0 1 p9 3 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 3 input p9 3 output rxd 1 input p9 2 /rxd 0 bit re in scr of sci0, bit smif in scmr, and bit p9 2 ddr select the pin function as follows smif 0 1 re 0 1 p9 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 2 input p9 2 output rxd 0 input rxd 0 input 274 table 9-17 port 9 pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method p9 1 /txd 1 bit te in scr of sci1 and bit p9 1 ddr select the pin function as follows te 0 1 p9 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 1 input p9 1 output txd 1 output p9 0 /txd 0 bit te in scr of sci0, bit smif in scmr, and bit p9 0 ddr select the pin function as follows smif 0 1 te 0 1 p9 0 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 0 input p9 0 output txd 0 output txd 0 output * note: * functions as the txd 0 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high- impedance. 275 9.11 port a 9.11.1 overview port a is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (tp 7 to tp 0 ) from the programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), input and output (tiocb 2 , tioca 2 , tiocb 1 , tioca 1 , tiocb 0 , tioca 0 , tclkd, tclkc, tclkb, tclka) by the 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu), output (tend 1 , tend 0 ) from the dma controller (dmac), cs 4 to cs 6 output, and address output (a 23 to a 20 ). a reset or hardware standby leaves port a as an input port, except that in modes 3, 4, and 6, one pin is always used for a 20 output. usage of pins for tpc, itu, and dmac input and output is described in the sections on those modules. for output of address bits a 23 to a 21 in modes 3, 4, and 6, see section 6.2.5, bus release control register (brcr). for output of cs 4 to cs 6 in modes 1 to 6, see section 6.3.2, chip select signals. pins not assigned to any of these functions are available for generic input/output. figure 9-10 shows the pin configuration of port a. pins in port a can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. port a has schmitt-trigger inputs. 276 figure 9-10 port a pin configuration port a pa /tp /tiocb /a pa /tp /tioca /a 21 /cs 4 (output) pa /tp /tiocb /a 22 /cs 5 (output) pa /tp /tioca /a 23 /cs 6 (output) pa /tp /tiocb /tclkd pa /tp /tioca /tclkc pa /tp /tend /tclkb pa /tp /tend /tclka 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port a pins 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/cs 4 (output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/cs 5 (output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/cs 6 (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in modes 1, 2, and 5 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/tclkd (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/tclkc (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tend (output)/tclkb (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tend (output)/tclka (input) pin functions in mode 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 2 1 1 0 0 1 0 a 20 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/a (output)/cs 4 (output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/a (output)/cs 5 (output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/a (output)/cs 6 (output) 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in modes 3, 4, and 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 1 1 0 0 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tend (output)/tclka (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/tclkd (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/tclkc (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tend (output)/tclkb (input) pa 7 (input/output)/tp 7 (output)/tiocb 2 (input/output) pa 6 (input/output)/tp 6 (output)/tioca 2 (input/output) pa 5 (input/output)/tp 5 (output)/tiocb 1 (input/output) pa 4 (input/output)/tp 4 (output)/tioca 1 (input/output) pa 3 (input/output)/tp 3 (output)/tiocb 0 (input/output)/tclkd (input) pa 2 (input/output)/tp 2 (output)/tioca 0 (input/output)/tclkc (input) pa 1 (input/output)/tp 1 (output)/tend 1 (output)/tclkb (input) pa 0 (input/output)/tp 0 (output)/tend 0 (output)/tclka (input) 1 0 20 21 22 23 277 9.11.2 register descriptions table 9-18 summarizes the registers of port a. table 9-18 port a registers initial value address * name r/w modes 1, 2, 5 and 7 modes 3, 4, and 6 h'ffd1 port a data direction paddr w h'00 h'80 register h'ffd3 port a data register padr r/w h'00 h'00 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port a data direction register (paddr): paddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port a. when pins are used for tpc output, the corresponding paddr bits must also be set. a pin in port a becomes an output pin if the corresponding paddr bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. in modes 3, 4, and 6, pa 7 ddr is fixed at 1 and pa 7 functions as an address output pin. paddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. paddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7. it is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 3, 4, and 6. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a paddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. abbre- viation 7 pa ddr 1 0 w port a data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port a pins 7 6 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 6 5 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 5 4 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 4 3 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 3 2 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 2 1 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 1 0 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 0 bit modes 3, 4, and 6 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 1, 2, 5, and 7 278 port a data register (padr): padr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins pa 7 to pa 0 . when a bit in paddr is set to 1, if port a is read the value of the corresponding padr bit is returned. when a bit in paddr is cleared to 0, if port a is read the corresponding pin level is read. padr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 9.11.3 pin functions table 9-19 describes the selection of pin functions. table 9-19 port a pin functions pin pin functions and selection method pa 7 /tp 7 / the mode setting, itu channel 2 settings (bit pwm2 in tmdr and bits iob2 to tiocb 2 /a 20 iob0 in tior2), bit nder7 in ndera, and bit pa 7 ddr in paddr select the pin function as follows mode 1, 2, 5, 7 3, 4, 6 itu channel 2 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 7 ddr 0 1 1 nder7 0 1 pin function tiocb 2 output pa 7 pa 7 tp 7 a 20 input output output output tiocb 2 input * note: * tiocb 2 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm2 = 0. itu channel 2 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 bit initial value read/write 0 pa 0 r/w 0 1 pa 0 r/w 1 2 pa 0 r/w 2 3 pa 0 r/w 3 4 pa 0 r/w 4 5 pa 0 r/w 5 6 pa 0 r/w 6 7 pa 0 r/w 7 port a data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port a pins 279 table 9-19 port a pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 6 /tp 6 / the mode setting, bit a 21 e in brcr, bit cs4e in cscr, itu channel 2 settings (bit tioca 2 / pwm2 in tmdr and bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior2), bit nder6 in ndera, and bit a 21 / cs 4 pa 6 ddr in paddr select the pin function as follows mode 1, 2, 5 3, 4, 6 7 cs4e 0 1 0 1 a 21 e 10 itu (1) in (2) in table (1) in (2) in table (1) in (2) in table channel 2 table below table below table below settings below below below pa 6 ddr 011 011 011 nder 6 01 01 01 pin tioca 2 pa 6 pa 6 tp 6 cs 4 tioca 2 pa 6 pa 6 tp 6 a 21 cs 4 tioca 2 pa 6 pa 6 tp 6 function output input output output output output input output output output output output input output output tioca 2 input * tioca 2 input * tioca 2 input * note: * tioca 2 input when ioa2 = 1. itu channel 2 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm2 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 pa 5 /tp 5 / the mode setting, bit a 22 e in brcr, bit cs5e in cscr, itu channel 1 settings (bit tiocb 1 / pwm1 in tmdr and bits iob2 to iob0 in tior1), bit nder5 in ndera, and bit a 22 / cs 5 pa 5 ddr in paddr select the pin function as follows mode 1, 2, 5 3, 4, 6 7 cs5e 0 1 0 1 a 22 e 10 itu (1) in (2) in table (1) in (2) in table (1) in (2) in table channel 1 table below table below table below settings below below below pa 5 ddr 011 011 011 nder 5 01 01 01 pin tiocb 1 pa 5 pa 5 tp 5 cs 5 tiocb 1 pa 5 pa 5 tp 5 a 22 cs 5 tiocb 1 pa 5 pa 5 tp 5 function output input output output output output input output output output output output input output output tiocb 1 input * tiocb 1 input * tiocb 1 input * note: * tiocb 1 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm1 = 0. itu channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 280 table 9-19 port a pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 4 /tp 4 / the mode setting, bit a 23 e in brcr, bit cs6e in cscr, itu channel 1 settings (bit tioca 1 / pwm1 in tmdr and bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior1), bit nder4 in ndera, and bit a 23 / cs 6 pa 4 ddr in paddr select the pin function as follows mode 1, 2, 5 3, 4, 6 7 cs6e 0 1 0 1 a 23 e 10 itu (1) in (2) in table (1) in (2) in table (1) in (2) in table channel 2 table below table below table below settings below below below pa 4 ddr 011 011 011 nder 4 01 01 01 pin tioca 1 pa 4 pa 4 tp 4 cs 6 tioca 1 pa 4 pa 4 tp 4 a 23 cs 6 tioca 1 pa 4 pa 4 tp 4 function output input output output output output input output output output output output input output output tioca 1 input * tioca 1 input * tioca 1 input * note: * tioca1 input when ioa2 = 1. itu channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm1 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 pa 3 /tp 3 / itu channel 0 settings (bit pwm0 in tmdr and bits iob2 to iob0 in tior0), bits tiocb 0 / tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr4 to tcr0, bit nder3 in ndera, and bit pa 3 ddr in paddr tclkd select the pin function as follows itu channel 0 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 3 ddr 0 1 1 nder3 0 1 pin function tiocb 0 output pa 3 input pa 3 output tp 3 output tiocb 0 input * 1 tclkd input * 2 notes: 1. tiocb 0 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm0 = 0. 2. tclkd input when tpsc2 = tpsc1 = tpsc0 = 1 in any of tcr4 to tcr0. itu channel 0 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 281 table 9-19 port a pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 2 /tp 2 / itu channel 0 settings (bit pwm0 in tmdr and bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior0), bits tioca 0 / tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr4 to tcr0, bit nder2 in ndera, and bit pa 2 ddr in paddr tclkc select the pin function as follows itu channel 0 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 2 ddr 0 1 1 nder2 0 1 pin function tioca 0 output pa 2 input pa 2 output tp 2 output tioca 0 input * 1 tclkc input * 2 notes: 1. tioca 0 input when ioa2 = 1. 2. tclkc input when tpsc2 = tpsc1 = 1 and tpsc0 = 0 in any of tcr4 to tcr0. itu channel 0 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm0 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 282 table 9-19 port a pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 1 /tp 1 / dmac channel 1 settings (bits dts2/1/0a and dts2/1/0b in dtcr1a and dtcr1b), tclkb/ bit nder1 in ndera, and bit pa 1 ddr in paddr select the pin function as follows tend 1 dmac channel 1 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 1 ddr 0 1 1 nder1 0 1 pin function tend 1 output pa 1 input pa 1 output tp 1 output tclkb input * note: * tclkb input when mdf = 1 in tmdr, or when tpsc2 = 1, tpsc1 = 0, and tpsc0 = 1 in any of tcr4 to tcr0. dmac channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) dts2a, dts1a not both 1 both 1 dts0a 0 0 1 1 1 dts2b 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 dts1b 0 1 0 1 pa 0 /tp 0 / dmac channel 0 settings (bits dts2/1/0a and dts2/1/0b in dtcr0a and dtcr0b), tclka/ bit nder0 in ndera, and bit pa 0 ddr in paddr select the pin function as follows tend 0 dmac channel 0 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 0 ddr 0 1 1 nder0 0 1 pin function tend 0 output pa 0 input pa 0 output tp 0 output tclka input * note: * tclka input when mdf = 1 in tmdr, or when tpsc2 = 1 and tpsc1 = 0 in any of tcr4 to tcr0. dmac channel 0 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) dts2a, dts1a not both 1 both 1 dts0a 0 0 1 1 1 dts2b 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 dts1b 0 1 0 1 283 9.12 port b 9.12.1 overview port b is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (tp 15 to tp 8 ) from the programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), input/output (tiocb 4 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tioca 3 ) and output (tocxb 4 , tocxa 4 ) by the 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu), input ( dreq 1 , dreq 0 ) to the dma controller (dmac), adtrg input to the a/d converter, and cs 7 output. a reset or hardware standby leaves port b as an input port. usage of pins for tpc, itu, dmac, and a/d converter input and output is described in the sections on those modules. for output of cs 7 in modes 1 to 6, see section 6.3.2, chip select signals. pins not assigned to any of these functions are available for generic input/output. figure 9-11 shows the pin configuration of port b. pins in port b can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive an led or darlington transistor pair. pins pb 3 to pb 0 have schmitt-trigger inputs. 284 figure 9-11 port b pin configuration port b pb 7 /tp 15 /dreq 1 /adtrg pb 6 /tp 14 /dreq 0 /cs 7 pb 5 /tp 13 /tocxb 4 pb 4 /tp 12 /tocxa 4 pb 3 /tp 11 /tiocb 4 pb 2 /tp 10 /tioca 4 pb 1 /tp 9 /tiocb 3 pb 0 /tp 8 /tioca 3 port b pins pb 7 (input/output)/tp 15 (output)/dreq 1 (input)/adtrg (input) pb 6 (input/output)/tp 14 (output)/dreq 0 (input)/cs 7 (output) pb 5 (input/output)/tp 13 (output)/tocxb 4 (output) pb 4 (input/output)/tp 12 (output)/tocxa 4 (output) pb 3 (input/output)/tp 11 (output)/tiocb 4 (input/output) pb 2 (input/output)/tp 10 (output)/tioca 4 (input/output) pb 1 (input/output)/tp 9 (output)/tiocb 3 (input/output) pb 0 (input/output)/tp 8 (output)/tioca 3 (input/output) pin functions in modes 1 to 6 pb 7 (input/output)/tp 15 (output)/dreq 1 (input)/adtrg (input) pb 6 (input/output)/tp 14 (output)/dreq 0 (input) pb 5 (input/output)/tp 13 (output)/tocxb 4 (output) pb 4 (input/output)/tp 12 (output)/tocxa 4 (output) pb 3 (input/output)/tp 11 (output)/tiocb 4 (input/output) pb 2 (input/output)/tp 10 (output)/tioca 4 (input/output) pb 1 (input/output)/tp 9 (output)/tiocb 3 (input/output) pb 0 (input/output)/tp 8 (output)/tioca 3 (input/output) pin functions in mode 7 285 9.12.2 register descriptions table 9-20 summarizes the registers of port b. table 9-20 port b registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffd4 port b data direction register pbddr w h'00 h'ffd6 port b data register pbdr r/w h'00 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. port b data direction register (pbddr): pbddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port b. when pins are used for tpc output, the corresponding pbddr bits must also be set. a pin in port b becomes an output pin if the corresponding pbddr bit is set to 1, and an input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. pbddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. pbddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. if a pbddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state in software standby mode. 286 bit initial value read/write 7 pb ddr 0 w port b data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port b pins 7 6 pb ddr 0 w 6 5 pb ddr 0 w 5 4 pb ddr 0 w 4 3 pb ddr 0 w 3 2 pb ddr 0 w 2 1 pb ddr 0 w 1 0 pb ddr 0 w 0 port b data register (pbdr): pbdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins pb7 to pb0. when a bit in pbddr is set to 1, if port b is read the value of the corresponding pbdr bit is returned. when a bit in pbddr is cleared to 0, if port b is read the corresponding pin level is read. pbdr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 287 bit initial value read/write 0 pb 0 r/w 0 1 pb 0 r/w 1 2 pb 0 r/w 2 3 pb 0 r/w 3 4 pb 0 r/w 4 5 pb 0 r/w 5 6 pb 0 r/w 6 7 pb 0 r/w 7 port b data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port b pins 9.12.3 pin functions table 9-21 describes the selection of pin functions. table 9-21 port b pin functions pin pin functions and selection method dmac channel 1 settings (bits dts2/1/0a and dts2/1/0b in dtcr1a and dtcr1b), bit trge in adcr, bit nder15 in nderb, and bit pb 7 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows pb 7 ddr 0 1 1 nder15 0 1 pin function pb 7 input pb 7 output tp 15 output dreq 1 input * 1 adtrg input * 2 notes: 1. dreq 1 input under dmac channel 1 settings (1) in the table below. 2. adtrg input when trge = 1. dmac channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) dts2a, dts1a not both 1 both 1 dts0a 00111 dts2b 01101011 dts1b 0 1 0 1 288 pb 7 / tp 15 / dreq 1 / adtrg table 9-21 port b pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method bit cs7e in cscr, dmac channel 0 settings (bits dts2/1/0a and dts2/1/0b in dtcr0a and dtcr0b), bit nder14 in nderb, and bit pb 6 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows pb 6 ddr 0 1 1 cs7e 0 0 0 1 nder14 0 1 pin function pb 6 input pb 6 output tp 14 output dreq 0 input * cs 7 output note: * dreq 0 input under dmac channel 0 settings (1) in the table below. dmac channel 0 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) (2) (1) dts2a, dts1a not both 1 both 1 dts0a 00111 dts2b 01101011 dts1b 0 1 0 1 itu channel 4 settings (bit cmd1 in tfcr and bit exb4 in toer), bit nder13 in nderb, and bit pb 5 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows exb4, cmd1 not both 1 both 1 pb 5 ddr 0 1 1 nder13 0 1 pin function pb 5 input pb 5 output tp 13 output tocxb 4 output itu channel 4 settings (bit cmd1 in tfcr and bit exa4 in toer), bit nder12 in nderb, and bit pb 4 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows exa4, cmd1 not both 1 both 1 pb 4 ddr 0 1 1 nder12 0 1 pin function pb 4 input pb 4 output tp 12 output tocxa 4 output pb 6 / tp 14 / dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 5 / tp 13 / tocxb 4 pb 4 / tp 12 / tocxa 4 289 table 9-21 port b pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method itu channel 4 settings (bit pwm4 in tmdr, bit cmd1 in tfcr, bit eb4 in toer, and bits iob2 to iob0 in tior4), bit nder11 in nderb, and bit pb 3 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows itu channel 4 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pb 3 ddr 0 1 1 nder11 0 1 pin function tiocb 4 output pb 3 input pb 3 output tp 11 output tiocb 4 input * note: * tiocb 4 input when cmd1 = pwm4 = 0 and iob2 = 1. itu channel 4 settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1) eb4 0 1 cmd1 0 1 iob2 0001 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 pb 3 / tp 11 / tiocb 4 290 table 9-21 port b pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method itu channel 4 settings (bit cmd1 in tfcr, bit ea4 in toer, bit pwm4 in tmdr, and bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior4), bit nder10 in nderb, and bit pb 2 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows itu channel 4 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pb 2 ddr 0 1 1 nder10 0 1 pin function tioca 4 output pb 2 input pb 2 output tp 10 output tioca 4 input * note: * tioca 4 input when cmd1 = pwm4 = 0 and ioa2 = 1. itu channel 4 settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1) ea4 0 1 cmd1 0 1 pwm4 0 1 ioa2 0001 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 pb 2 / tp 10 / tioca 4 291 table 9-21 port b pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method itu channel 3 settings (bit pwm3 in tmdr, bit cmd1 in tfcr, bit eb3 in toer, and bits iob2 to iob0 in tior3), bit nder9 in nderb, and bit pb 1 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows itu channel 3 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pb 1 ddr 0 1 1 nder9 0 1 pin function tiocb 3 output pb 1 input pb 1 output tp 9 output tiocb 3 input * note: * tiocb 3 input when cmd1 = pwm3 = 0 and iob2 = 1. itu channel 3 settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1) eb3 0 1 cmd1 0 1 iob2 0001 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 pb 1 /tp 9 / tiocb 3 292 table 9-21 port b pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method itu channel 3 settings (bit cmd1 in tfcr, bit ea3 in toer, bit pwm3 in tmdr, and bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior3), bit nder8 in nderb, and bit pb 0 ddr in pbddr select the pin function as follows itu channel 3 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pb 0 ddr 0 1 1 nder8 0 1 pin function tioca 3 output pb 0 input pb 0 output tp 8 output tioca 3 input * note: * tioca 3 input when cmd1 = pwm3 = 0 and ioa2 = 1. itu channel 3 settings (2) (2) (1) (2) (1) ea3 0 1 cmd1 0 1 pwm3 0 1 ioa2 0001 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 pb 0 /tp 8 / tioca 3 293 section 10 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) 10.1 overview the h8/3048 series has a built-in 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) with five 16-bit timer channels. when the itu is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. 10.1.1 features itu features are listed below. capability to process up to 12 pulse outputs or 10 pulse inputs ten general registers (grs, two per channel) with independently-assignable output compare or input capture functions selection of eight counter clock sources for each channel: internal clocks: ? ?2, ?4, ?8 external clocks: tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd five operating modes selectable in all channels: waveform output by compare match selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output (only 0 or 1 output in channel 2) input capture function rising edge, falling edge, or both edges (selectable) counter clearing function counters can be cleared by compare match or input capture synchronization two or more timer counters (tcnts) can be preset simultaneously, or cleared simultaneously by compare match or input capture. counter synchronization enables synchronous register input and output. 295 pwm mode pwm output can be provided with an arbitrary duty cycle. with synchronization, up to five-phase pwm output is possible phase counting mode selectable in channel 2 two-phase encoder output can be counted automatically. three additional modes selectable in channels 3 and 4 reset-synchronized pwm mode if channels 3 and 4 are combined, three-phase pwm output is possible with three pairs of complementary waveforms. complementary pwm mode if channels 3 and 4 are combined, three-phase pwm output is possible with three pairs of non-overlapping complementary waveforms. buffering input capture registers can be double-buffered. output compare registers can be updated automatically. high-speed access via internal 16-bit bus the 16-bit timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers can be accessed at high speed via a 16-bit bus. fifteen interrupt sources each channel has two compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt. all interrupts can be requested independently. activation of dma controller (dmac) four of the compare match/input capture interrupts from channels 0 to 3 can start the dmac. output triggering of programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) compare match/input capture signals from channels 0 to 3 can be used as tpc output triggers. 296 table 10-1 summarizes the itu functions. table 10-1 itu functions item channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 clock sources internal clocks: ? ?2, ?4, ?8 external clocks: tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd, selectable independently general registers gra0, grb0 gra1, grb1 gra2, grb2 gra3, grb3 gra4, grb4 (output compare/input capture registers) buffer registers bra3, brb3 bra4, brb4 input/output pins tioca 0 , tioca 1 , tioca 2 , tioca 3 , tioca 4 , tiocb 0 tiocb 1 tiocb 2 tiocb 3 tiocb 4 output pins t ocxa 4 , tocxb 4 counter clearing function gra0/grb0 gra1/grb1 gra2/grb2 gra3/grb3 gra4/grb4 compare compare compare compare compare match or match or match or match or match or input capture input capture input capture input capture input capture 0 ooooo 1 ooooo toggle oo oo input capture function ooooo synchronization ooooo pwm mode ooooo reset-synchronized oo pwm mode complementary pwm oo mode phase counting mode o buffering oo dmac activation gra0 compare gra1 compare gra2 compare gra3 compare match or match or match or match or input capture input capture input capture input capture interrupt sources three sources three sources three sources three sources three sources compare compare compare compare compare match/input match/input match/input match/input match/input capture a0 capture a1 capture a2 capture a3 capture a4 compare compare compare compare compare match/input match/input match/input match/input match/input capture b0 capture b1 capture b2 capture b3 capture b4 overflow overflow overflow overflow overflow legend o : available ? not available compare match output 297 10.1.2 block diagrams itu block diagram (overall): figure 10-1 is a block diagram of the itu. figure 10-1 itu block diagram (overall) 16-bit timer channel 4 16-bit timer channel 3 16-bit timer channel 2 16-bit timer channel 1 16-bit timer channel 0 module data bus bus interface on-chip data bus imia0 to imia4 imib0 to imib4 ovi0 to ovi4 tclka to tclkd ? ?2, ?4, ?8 tocxa 4 , tocxb 4 clock selector control logic tioca 0 to tioca 4 tiocb 0 to tiocb 4 toer tocr tstr tsnc tmdr tfcr toer: tocr: tstr: tsnc: tmdr: legend timer output master enable register (8 bits) timer output control register (8 bits) timer start register (8 bits) timer synchro register (8 bits) timer mode register (8 bits) 298 block diagram of channels 0 and 1: itu channels 0 and 1 are functionally identical. both have the structure shown in figure 10-2. figure 10-2 block diagram of channels 0 and 1 (for channel 0) clock selector comparator control logic tclka to tclkd ? ?2, ?4, ?8 tioca 0 tiocb 0 imia0 imib0 ovi0 tcnt gra grb tcr tior tier tsr module data bus legend tcnt: gra, grb: timer counter (16 bits) general registers a and b (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2) 299 block diagram of channel 2: figure 10-3 is a block diagram of channel 2. this is the channel that provides only 0 output and 1 output. figure 10-3 block diagram of channel 2 clock selector comparator control logic tclka to tclkd ? ?2, ?4, ?8 tioca 2 tiocb 2 imia2 imib2 ovi2 tcnt2 gra2 grb2 tcr2 tior2 tier2 tsr2 module data bus legend tcnt2: gra2, grb2: timer counter 2 (16 bits) general registers a2 and b2 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2) 300 block diagrams of channels 3 and 4: figure 10-4 is a block diagram of channel 3. figure 10-5 is a block diagram of channel 4. figure 10-4 block diagram of channel 3 tcnt3 bra3 legend tcnt3: gra3, grb3: bra3, brb3: timer counter 3 (16 bits) general registers a3 and b3 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2) buffer registers a3 and b3 (input capture/output compare buffer registers) clock selector comparator control logic gra3 brb3 grb3 tcr3 tior3 tier3 tsr3 tclka to tclkd ? ?2, ?4, ?8 tioca 3 tiocb 3 module data bus imia3 imib3 ovi3 301 figure 10-5 block diagram of channel 4 tcnt4 bra4 legend tcnt4: gra4, grb4: bra4, brb4: timer counter 4 (16 bits) general registers a4 and b4 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2) buffer registers a4 and b4 (input capture/output compare buffer registers) clock selector comparator control logic gra4 brb4 grb4 tcr4 tior4 tier4 tsr4 module data bus tclka to tclkd ? ?2, ?4, ?8 tocxa 4 tocxb 4 tioca 4 tiocb 4 imia4 imib4 ovi4 302 10.1.3 input/output pins table 10-2 summarizes the itu pins. table 10-2 itu pins abbre- input/ channel name viation output function common clock input a tclka input external clock a input pin (phase-a input pin in phase counting mode) clock input b tclkb input external clock b input pin (phase-b input pin in phase counting mode) clock input c tclkc input external clock c input pin clock input d tclkd input external clock d input pin 0 input capture/output tioca 0 input/ gra0 output compare or input capture pin compare a0 output pwm output pin in pwm mode input capture/output tiocb 0 input/ grb0 output compare or input capture pin compare b0 output 1 input capture/output tioca 1 input/ gra1 output compare or input capture pin compare a1 output pwm output pin in pwm mode input capture/output tiocb 1 input/ grb1 output compare or input capture pin compare b1 output 2 input capture/output tioca 2 input/ gra2 output compare or input capture pin compare a2 output pwm output pin in pwm mode input capture/output tiocb 2 input/ grb2 output compare or input capture pin compare b2 output 3 input capture/output tioca 3 input/ gra3 output compare or input capture pin compare a3 output pwm output pin in pwm mode, comple- mentary pwm mode, or reset-synchronized pwm mode input capture/output tiocb 3 input/ grb3 output compare or input capture pin compare b3 output pwm output pin in complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode 4 input capture/output tioca 4 input/ gra4 output compare or input capture pin compare a4 output pwm output pin in pwm mode, comple- mentary pwm mode, or reset-synchronized pwm mode input capture/output tiocb 4 input/ grb4 output compare or input capture pin compare b4 output pwm output pin in complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode output compare xa4 tocxa 4 output pwm output pin in complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode output compare xb4 tocxb 4 output pwm output pin in complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode 303 10.1.4 register configuration table 10-3 summarizes the itu registers. table 10-3 itu registers abbre- initial channel address * 1 name viation r/w value common h'ff60 timer start register tstr r/w h'e0 h'ff61 timer synchro register tsnc r/w h'e0 h'ff62 timer mode register tmdr r/w h'80 h'ff63 timer function control register tfcr r/w h'c0 h'ff90 timer output master enable register toer r/w h'ff h'ff91 timer output control register tocr r/w h'ff 0 h'ff64 timer control register 0 tcr0 r/w h'80 h'ff65 timer i/o control register 0 tior0 r/w h'88 h'ff66 timer interrupt enable register 0 tier0 r/w h'f8 h'ff67 timer status register 0 tsr0 r/(w) * 2 h'f8 h'ff68 timer counter 0 (high) tcnt0h r/w h'00 h'ff69 timer counter 0 (low) tcnt0l r/w h'00 h'ff6a general register a0 (high) gra0h r/w h'ff h'ff6b general register a0 (low) gra0l r/w h'ff h'ff6c general register b0 (high) grb0h r/w h'ff h'ff6d general register b0 (low) grb0l r/w h'ff 1 h'ff6e timer control register 1 tcr1 r/w h'80 h'ff6f timer i/o control register 1 tior1 r/w h'88 h'ff70 timer interrupt enable register 1 tier1 r/w h'f8 h'ff71 timer status register 1 tsr1 r/(w) * 2 h'f8 h'ff72 timer counter 1 (high) tcnt1h r/w h'00 h'ff73 timer counter 1 (low) tcnt1l r/w h'00 h'ff74 general register a1 (high) gra1h r/w h'ff h'ff75 general register a1 (low) gra1l r/w h'ff h'ff76 general register b1 (high) grb1h r/w h'ff h'ff77 general register b1 (low) grb1l r/w h'ff notes: 1. the lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 304 table 10-3 itu registers (cont) abbre- initial channel address * 1 name viation r/w value 2 h'ff78 timer control register 2 tcr2 r/w h'80 h'ff79 timer i/o control register 2 tior2 r/w h'88 h'ff7a timer interrupt enable register 2 tier2 r/w h'f8 h'ff7b timer status register 2 tsr2 r/(w) * 2 h'f8 h'ff7c timer counter 2 (high) tcnt2h r/w h'00 h'ff7d timer counter 2 (low) tcnt2l r/w h'00 h'ff7e general register a2 (high) gra2h r/w h'ff h'ff7f general register a2 (low) gra2l r/w h'ff h'ff80 general register b2 (high) grb2h r/w h'ff h'ff81 general register b2 (low) grb2l r/w h'ff 3 h'ff82 timer control register 3 tcr3 r/w h'80 h'ff83 timer i/o control register 3 tior3 r/w h'88 h'ff84 timer interrupt enable register 3 tier3 r/w h'f8 h'ff85 timer status register 3 tsr3 r/(w) * 2 h'f8 h'ff86 timer counter 3 (high) tcnt3h r/w h'00 h'ff87 timer counter 3 (low) tcnt3l r/w h'00 h'ff88 general register a3 (high) gra3h r/w h'ff h'ff89 general register a3 (low) gra3l r/w h'ff h'ff8a general register b3 (high) grb3h r/w h'ff h'ff8b general register b3 (low) grb3l r/w h'ff h'ff8c buffer register a3 (high) bra3h r/w h'ff h'ff8d buffer register a3 (low) bra3l r/w h'ff h'ff8e buffer register b3 (high) brb3h r/w h'ff h'ff8f buffer register b3 (low) brb3l r/w h'ff notes: 1. the lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 305 table 10-3 itu registers (cont) abbre- initial channel address * 1 name viation r/w value 4 h'ff92 timer control register 4 tcr4 r/w h'80 h'ff93 timer i/o control register 4 tior4 r/w h'88 h'ff94 timer interrupt enable register 4 tier4 r/w h'f8 h'ff95 timer status register 4 tsr4 r/(w) * 2 h'f8 h'ff96 timer counter 4 (high) tcnt4h r/w h'00 h'ff97 timer counter 4 (low) tcnt4l r/w h'00 h'ff98 general register a4 (high) gra4h r/w h'ff h'ff99 general register a4 (low) gra4l r/w h'ff h'ff9a general register b4 (high) grb4h r/w h'ff h'ff9b general register b4 (low) grb4l r/w h'ff h'ff9c buffer register a4 (high) bra4h r/w h'ff h'ff9d buffer register a4 (low) bra4l r/w h'ff h'ff9e buffer register b4 (high) brb4h r/w h'ff h'ff9f buffer register b4 (low) brb4l r/w h'ff notes: 1. the lower 16 bits of the address are indicated. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 306 10.2 register descriptions 10.2.1 timer start register (tstr) tstr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that starts and stops the timer counter (tcnt) in channels 0 to 4. tstr is initialized to h'e0 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 5?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 4?ounter start 4 (str4): starts and stops timer counter 4 (tcnt4). bit 4 str4 description 0 tcnt4 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt4 is counting bit 3?ounter start 3 (str3): starts and stops timer counter 3 (tcnt3). bit 3 str3 description 0 tcnt3 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt3 is counting bit 2?ounter start 2 (str2): starts and stops timer counter 2 (tcnt2). bit 2 str2 description 0 tcnt2 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt2 is counting bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 str4 0 r/w 3 str3 0 r/w 2 str2 0 r/w 1 str1 0 r/w 0 str0 0 r/w reserved bits counter start 4 to 0 these bits start and stop tcnt4 to tcnt0 307 bit 1?ounter start 1 (str1): starts and stops timer counter 1 (tcnt1). bit 1 str1 description 0 tcnt1 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt1 is counting bit 0?ounter start 0 (str0): starts and stops timer counter 0 (tcnt0). bit 0 str0 description 0 tcnt0 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt0 is counting 10.2.2 timer synchro register (tsnc) tsnc is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether channels 0 to 4 operate independently or synchronously. channels are synchronized by setting the corresponding bits to 1. tsnc is initialized to h'e0 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 5?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 4?imer sync 4 (sync4): selects whether channel 4 operates independently or synchronously. bit 4 sync4 description 0 channel 4 s timer counter (tcnt4) operates independently (initial value) tcnt4 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 4 operates synchronously tcnt4 can be synchronously preset and cleared bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 sync4 0 r/w 3 sync3 0 r/w 2 sync2 0 r/w 1 sync1 0 r/w 0 sync0 0 r/w reserved bits timer sync 4 to 0 these bits synchronize channels 4 to 0 308 bit 3?imer sync 3 (sync3): selects whether channel 3 operates independently or synchronously. bit 3 sync3 description 0 channel 3 s timer counter (tcnt3) operates independently (initial value) tcnt3 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 3 operates synchronously tcnt3 can be synchronously preset and cleared bit 2?imer sync 2 (sync2): selects whether channel 2 operates independently or synchronously. bit 2 sync2 description 0 channel 2 s timer counter (tcnt2) operates independently (initial value) tcnt2 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 2 operates synchronously tcnt2 can be synchronously preset and cleared bit 1?imer sync 1 (sync1): selects whether channel 1 operates independently or synchronously. bit 1 sync1 description 0 channel 1 s timer counter (tcnt1) operates independently (initial value) tcnt1 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 1 operates synchronously tcnt1 can be synchronously preset and cleared bit 0?imer sync 0 (sync0): selects whether channel 0 operates independently or synchronously. bit 0 sync0 description 0 channel 0 s timer counter (tcnt0) operates independently (initial value) tcnt0 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 0 operates synchronously tcnt0 can be synchronously preset and cleared 309 10.2.3 timer mode register (tmdr) tmdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects pwm mode for channels 0 to 4. it also selects phase counting mode and the overflow flag (ovf) setting conditions for channel 2. tmdr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 6?hase counting mode flag (mdf): selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in phase counting mode. bit 6 mdf description 0 channel 2 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 2 operates in phase counting mode bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 mdf 0 r/w 5 fdir 0 r/w 4 pwm4 0 r/w 3 pwm3 0 r/w 0 pwm0 0 r/w 2 pwm2 0 r/w 1 pwm1 0 r/w reserved bit pwm mode 4 to 0 these bits select pwm mode for channels 4 to 0 phase counting mode flag selects phase counting mode for channel 2 flag direction selects the setting condition for the overflow flag (ovf) in timer status register 2 (tsr2) 310 when mdf is set to 1 to select phase counting mode, tcnt2 operates as an up/down-counter and pins tclka and tclkb become counter clock input pins. tcnt2 counts both rising and falling edges of tclka and tclkb, and counts up or down as follows. counting direction down-counting up-counting tclka pin high low low high tclkb pin low high high low in phase counting mode channel 2 operates as above regardless of the external clock edges selected by bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 and the clock source selected by bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2. phase counting mode takes precedence over these settings. the counter clearing condition selected by the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr2 and the compare match/input capture settings and interrupt functions of tior2, tier2, and tsr2 remain effective in phase counting mode. bit 5?lag direction (fdir): designates the setting condition for the ovf flag in tsr2. the fdir designation is valid in all modes in channel 2. bit 5 fdir description 0 ovf is set to 1 in tsr2 when tcnt2 overflows or underflows (initial value) 1 ovf is set to 1 in tsr2 when tcnt2 overflows bit 4?wm mode 4 (pwm4): selects whether channel 4 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 4 pwm4 description 0 channel 4 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 4 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm4 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 4 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra4, and to 0 at compare match with grb4. if complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected by bits cmd1 and cmd0 in tfcr, the cmd1 and cmd0 setting takes precedence and the pwm4 setting is ignored. 311 bit 3?wm mode 3 (pwm3): selects whether channel 3 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 3 pwm3 description 0 channel 3 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 3 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm3 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 3 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra3, and to 0 at compare match with grb3. if complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected by bits cmd1 and cmd0 in tfcr, the cmd1 and cmd0 setting takes precedence and the pwm3 setting is ignored. bit 2?wm mode 2 (pwm2): selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 2 pwm2 description 0 channel 2 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 2 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm2 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 2 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra2, and to 0 at compare match with grb2. bit 1?wm mode 1 (pwm1): selects whether channel 1 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 1 pwm1 description 0 channel 1 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 1 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm1 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 1 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra1, and to 0 at compare match with grb1. 312 bit 0?wm mode 0 (pwm0): selects whether channel 0 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 0 pwm0 description 0 channel 0 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 0 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm0 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 0 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra0, and to 0 at compare match with grb0. 10.2.4 timer function control register (tfcr) tfcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects complementary pwm mode, reset- synchronized pwm mode, and buffering for channels 3 and 4. tfcr is initialized to h'c0 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 cmd1 0 r/w 4 cmd0 0 r/w 3 bfb4 0 r/w 0 bfa3 0 r/w 2 bfa4 0 r/w 1 bfb3 0 r/w reserved bits combination mode 1/0 these bits select complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode for channels 3 and 4 buffer mode b4 and a4 these bits select buffering of general registers (grb4 and gra4) by buffer registers (brb4 and bra4) in channel 4 buffer mode b3 and a3 these bits select buffering of general registers (grb3 and gra3) by buffer registers (brb3 and bra3) in channel 3 313 bits 5 and 4?ombination mode 1 and 0 (cmd1, cmd0): these bits select whether channels 3 and 4 operate in normal mode, complementary pwm mode, or reset-synchronized pwm mode. bit 5 bit 4 cmd1 cmd0 description 0 0 channels 3 and 4 operate normally (initial value) 1 1 0 channels 3 and 4 operate together in complementary pwm mode 1 channels 3 and 4 operate together in reset-synchronized pwm mode before selecting reset-synchronized pwm mode or complementary pwm mode, halt the timer counter or counters that will be used in these modes. when these bits select complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode, they take precedence over the setting of the pwm mode bits (pwm4 and pwm3) in tmdr. settings of timer sync bits sync4 and sync3 in tsnc are valid in complementary pwm mode and reset- synchronized pwm mode, however. when complementary pwm mode is selected, channels 3 and 4 must not be synchronized (do not set bits sync3 and sync4 both to 1 in tsnc). bit 3?uffer mode b4 (bfb4): selects whether grb4 operates normally in channel 4, or whether grb4 is buffered by brb4. bit 3 bfb4 description 0 grb4 operates normally (initial value) 1 grb4 is buffered by brb4 bit 2?uffer mode a4 (bfa4): selects whether gra4 operates normally in channel 4, or whether gra4 is buffered by bra4. bit 2 bfa4 description 0 gra4 operates normally (initial value) 1 gra4 is buffered by bra4 314 bit 1?uffer mode b3 (bfb3): selects whether grb3 operates normally in channel 3, or whether grb3 is buffered by brb3. bit 1 bfb3 description 0 grb3 operates normally (initial value) 1 grb3 is buffered by brb3 bit 0?uffer mode a3 (bfa3): selects whether gra3 operates normally in channel 3, or whether gra3 is buffered by bra3. bit 0 bfa3 description 0 gra3 operates normally (initial value) 1 gra3 is buffered by bra3 10.2.5 timer output master enable register (toer) toer is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output settings for channels 3 and 4. toer is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 exb4 1 r/w 4 exa4 1 r/w 3 eb3 1 r/w 0 ea3 1 r/w 2 eb4 1 r/w 1 ea4 1 r/w reserved bits master enable tocxa4, tocxb4 these bits enable or disable output settings for pins tocxa 4 and tocxb 4 master enable tioca3, tiocb3 , tioca4, tiocb4 these bits enable or disable output settings for pins tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , and tiocb 4 315 bit 5?aster enable tocxb4 (exb4): enables or disables itu output at pin tocxb 4 . bit 5 exb4 description 0 tocxb 4 output is disabled regardless of tfcr settings (tocxb 4 operates as a generic input/output pin). if xtgd = 0, exb4 is cleared to 0 when input capture a occurs in channel 1. 1 tocxb 4 is enabled for output according to tfcr settings (initial value) bit 4?aster enable tocxa4 (exa4): enables or disables itu output at pin tocxa 4 . bit 4 exa4 description 0 tocxa 4 output is disabled regardless of tfcr settings (tocxa 4 operates as a generic input/output pin). if xtgd = 0, exa4 is cleared to 0 when input capture a occurs in channel 1. 1 tocxa 4 is enabled for output according to tfcr settings (initial value) bit 3?aster enable tiocb3 (eb3): enables or disables itu output at pin tiocb 3 . bit 3 eb3 description 0 tiocb 3 output is disabled regardless of tior3 and tfcr settings (tiocb 3 operates as a generic input/output pin). if xtgd = 0, eb3 is cleared to 0 when input capture a occurs in channel 1. 1 tiocb 3 is enabled for output according to tior3 and tfcr settings (initial value) 316 bit 2?aster enable tiocb4 (eb4): enables or disables itu output at pin tiocb 4 . bit 2 eb4 description 0 tiocb 4 output is disabled regardless of tior4 and tfcr settings (tiocb 4 operates as a generic input/output pin). if xtgd = 0, eb4 is cleared to 0 when input capture a occurs in channel 1. 1 tiocb 4 is enabled for output according to tior4 and tfcr settings (initial value) bit 1?aster enable tioca4 (ea4): enables or disables itu output at pin tioca 4 . bit 1 ea4 description 0 tioca 4 output is disabled regardless of tior4, tmdr, and tfcr settings (tioca 4 operates as a generic input/output pin). if xtgd = 0, ea4 is cleared to 0 when input capture a occurs in channel 1. 1 tioca 4 is enabled for output according to tior4, tmdr, and (initial value) tfcr settings bit 0?aster enable tioca3 (ea3): enables or disables itu output at pin tioca 3 . bit 0 ea3 description 0 tioca 3 output is disabled regardless of tior3, tmdr, and tfcr settings (tioca 3 operates as a generic input/output pin). if xtgd = 0, ea3 is cleared to 0 when input capture a occurs in channel 1. 1 tioca 3 is enabled for output according to tior3, tmdr, and (initial value) tfcr settings 317 10.2.6 timer output control register (tocr) tocr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects externally triggered disabling of output in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode, and inverts the output levels. the settings of the xtgd, ols4, and ols3 bits are valid only in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode. these settings do not affect other modes. tocr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 5?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 4?xternal trigger disable (xtgd): selects externally triggered disabling of itu output in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode. bit 4 xtgd description 0 input capture a in channel 1 is used as an external trigger signal in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode. when an external trigger occurs, bits 5 to 0 in toer are cleared to 0, disabling itu output. 1 external triggering is disabled (initial value) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 xtgd 1 r/w 3 1 0 ols3 1 r/w 2 1 1 ols4 1 r/w reserved bits output level select 3, 4 these bits select output levels in complementary pwm mode and reset- synchronized pwm mode external trigger disable selects externally triggered disabling of output in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode reserved bits 318 bits 3 and 2?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 1?utput level select 4 (ols4): selects output levels in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode. bit 1 ols4 description 0 tioca 3 , tioca 4 , and tiocb 4 outputs are inverted 1 tioca 3 , tioca 4 , and tiocb 4 outputs are not inverted (initial value) bit 0?utput level select 3 (ols3): selects output levels in complementary pwm mode and reset-synchronized pwm mode. bit 0 ols3 description 0 tiocb 3 , tocxa 4 , and tocxb 4 outputs are inverted 1 tiocb 3 , tocxa 4 , and tocxb 4 outputs are not inverted (initial value) 10.2.7 timer counters (tcnt) tcnt is a 16-bit counter. the itu has five tcnts, one for each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tcnt0 up-counter 1 tcnt1 2 tcnt2 phase counting mode: up/down-counter other modes: up-counter 3 tcnt3 4 tcnt4 each tcnt is a 16-bit readable/writable register that counts pulse inputs from a clock source. the clock source is selected by bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w complementary pwm mode: up/down-counter other modes: up-counter 319 tcnt0 and tcnt1 are up-counters. tcnt2 is an up/down-counter in phase counting mode and an up-counter in other modes. tcnt3 and tcnt4 are up/down-counters in complementary pwm mode and up-counters in other modes. tcnt can be cleared to h'0000 by compare match with gra or grb or by input capture to gra or grb (counter clearing function) in the same channel. when tcnt overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000), the ovf flag is set to 1 in tsr of the corresponding channel. when tcnt underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff), the ovf flag is set to 1 in tsr of the corresponding channel. the tcnts are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. each tcnt is initialized to h'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. 10.2.8 general registers (gra, grb) the general registers are 16-bit registers. the itu has 10 general registers, two in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 gra0, grb0 output compare/input capture register 1 gra1, grb1 2 gra2, grb2 3 gra3, grb3 4 gra4, grb4 a general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output compare register or an input capture register. the function is selected by settings in tior. when a general register is used as an output compare register, its value is constantly compared with the tcnt value. when the two values match (compare match), the imfa or imfb flag is set to 1 in tsr. compare match output can be selected in tior. output compare/input capture register; can be buffered by buffer registers bra and brb bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 320 when a general register is used as an input capture register, rising edges, falling edges, or both edges of an external input capture signal are detected and the current tcnt value is stored in the general register. the corresponding imfa or imfb flag in tsr is set to 1 at the same time. the valid edge or edges of the input capture signal are selected in tior. tior settings are ignored in pwm mode, complementary pwm mode, and reset-synchronized pwm mode. general registers are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. general registers are initialized to the output compare function (with no output signal) by a reset and in standby mode. the initial value is h'ffff. 10.2.9 buffer registers (bra, brb) the buffer registers are 16-bit registers. the itu has four buffer registers, two each in channels 3 and 4. channel abbreviation function 3 bra3, brb3 used for buffering 4 bra4, brb4 when the corresponding gra or grb functions as an output compare register, bra or brb can function as an output compare buffer register: the bra or brb value is automatically transferred to gra or grb at compare match when the corresponding gra or grb functions as an input capture register, bra or brb can function as an input capture buffer register: the gra or grb value is automatically transferred to bra or brb at input capture a buffer register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that is used when buffering is selected. buffering can be selected independently by bits bfb4, bfa4, bfb3, and bfa3 in tfcr. the buffer register and general register operate as a pair. when the general register functions as an output compare register, the buffer register functions as an output compare buffer register. when the general register functions as an input capture register, the buffer register functions as an input capture buffer register. bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 321 the buffer registers are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word or byte access. buffer registers are initialized to h'ffff by a reset and in standby mode. 10.2.10 timer control registers (tcr) tcr is an 8-bit register. the itu has five tcrs, one in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tcr0 1 tcr1 2 tcr2 3 tcr3 4 tcr4 each tcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the timer counter clock source, selects the edge or edges of external clock sources, and selects how the counter is cleared. tcr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. tcr controls the timer counter. the tcrs in all channels are functionally identical. when phase counting mode is selected in channel 2, the settings of bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 and tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 are ignored. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w timer prescaler 2 to 0 these bits select the counter clock reserved bit clock edge 1/0 these bits select external clock edges counter clear 1/0 these bits select the counter clear source 322 bits 6 and 5?ounter clear 1/0 (cclr1, cclr0): these bits select how tcnt is cleared. bit 6 bit 5 cclr1 cclr0 description 0 0 tcnt is not cleared (initial value) 1 tcnt is cleared by gra compare match or input capture * 1 1 0 tcnt is cleared by grb compare match or input capture * 1 1 synchronous clear: tcnt is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers * 2 notes: 1. tcnt is cleared by compare match when the general register functions as an output compare register, and by input capture when the general register functions as an input capture register. 2. selected in tsnc. bits 4 and 3?lock edge 1/0 (ckeg1, ckeg0): these bits select external clock input edges when an external clock source is used. bit 4 bit 3 ckeg1 ckeg0 description 0 0 count rising edges (initial value) 1 count falling edges 1 count both edges when channel 2 is set to phase counting mode, bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr2 are ignored. phase counting takes precedence. 323 bits 2 to 0?imer prescaler 2 to 0 (tpsc2 to tpsc0): these bits select the counter clock source. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 function 0 0 0 internal clock: (initial value) 1 internal clock: ?2 1 0 internal clock: ?4 1 internal clock: ?8 1 0 0 external clock a: tclka input 1 external clock b: tclkb input 1 0 external clock c: tclkc input 1 external clock d: tclkd input when bit tpsc2 is cleared to 0 an internal clock source is selected, and the timer counts only falling edges. when bit tpsc2 is set to 1 an external clock source is selected, and the timer counts the edge or edges selected by bits ckeg1 and ckeg0. when channel 2 is set to phase counting mode (mdf = 1 in tmdr), the settings of bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 are ignored. phase counting takes precedence. 10.2.11 timer i/o control register (tior) tior is an 8-bit register. the itu has five tiors, one in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tior0 1 tior1 2 tior2 3 tior3 4 tior4 tior controls the general registers. some functions differ in pwm mode. tior3 and tior4 settings are ignored when complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected in channels 3 and 4. 324 each tior is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the output compare or input capture function for gra and grb, and specifies the functions of the tioca and tiocb pins. if the output compare function is selected, tior also selects the type of output. if input capture is selected, tior also selects the edge or edges of the input capture signal. tior is initialized to h'88 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bits 6 to 4?/o control b2 to b0 (iob2 to iob0): these bits select the grb function. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 iob2 iob1 iob0 function 0 0 0 no output at compare match (initial value) 1 0 output at grb compare match * 1 1 0 1 output at grb compare match * 1 1 output toggles at grb compare match (1 output in channel 2) * 1, * 2 1 0 0 grb captures rising edge of input 1 grb captures falling edge of input 1 0 grb captures both edges of input 1 notes: 1. after a reset, the output is 0 until the first compare match. 2. channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. this setting selects 1 output instead. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w i/o control a2 to a0 these bits select gra functions reserved bit i/o control b2 to b0 these bits select grb functions reserved bit grb is an output compare register grb is an input capture register 325 bit 3?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bits 2 to 0?/o control a2 to a0 (ioa2 to ioa0): these bits select the gra function. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 function 0 0 0 no output at compare match (initial value) 1 0 output at gra compare match * 1 1 0 1 output at gra compare match * 1 1 output toggles at gra compare match (1 output in channel 2) * 1, * 2 1 0 0 gra captures rising edge of input 1 gra captures falling edge of input 1 0 gra captures both edges of input 1 notes: 1. after a reset, the output is 0 until the first compare match. 2. channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. this setting selects 1 output instead. 10.2.12 timer status register (tsr) tsr is an 8-bit register. the itu has five tsrs, one in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tsr0 indicates input capture, compare match, and overflow status 1 tsr1 2 tsr2 3 tsr3 4 tsr4 gra is an output compare register gra is an input capture register 326 each tsr is an 8-bit readable/writable register containing flags that indicate tcnt overflow or underflow and gra or grb compare match or input capture. these flags are interrupt sources and generate cpu interrupts if enabled by corresponding bits in tier. tsr is initialized to h'f8 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 3?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 2?verflow flag (ovf): this status flag indicates tcnt overflow or underflow. bit 2 ovf description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000, or underflowed from h'0000 to h'ffff * notes: * tcnt underflow occurs when tcnt operates as an up/down-counter. underflow occurs only under the following conditions: 1. channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (mdf = 1 in tmdr) 2. channels 3 and 4 operate in complementary pwm mode (cmd1 = 1 and cmd0 = 0 in tfcr) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 * 2 ovf 0 r/(w) reserved bits note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * * 1 imfb 0 r/(w) * 0 imfa 0 r/(w) overflow flag status flag indicating overflow or underflow input capture/compare match flag b status flag indicating grb compare match or input capture input capture/compare match flag a status flag indicating gra compare match or input capture 327 bit 1?nput capture/compare match flag b (imfb): this status flag indicates grb compare match or input capture events. bit 1 imfb description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb when imfb = 1, then write 0 in imfb 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = grb when grb functions as an output compare register. tcnt value is transferred to grb by an input capture signal, when grb functions as an input capture register. bit 0?nput capture/compare match flag a (imfa): this status flag indicates gra compare match or input capture events. bit 0 imfa description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfa when imfa = 1, then write 0 in imfa. dmac activated by imia interrupt (channels 0 to 3 only). 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = gra when gra functions as an output compare register. tcnt value is transferred to gra by an input capture signal, when gra functions as an input capture register. 328 10.2.13 timer interrupt enable register (tier) tier is an 8-bit register. the itu has five tiers, one in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tier0 enables or disables interrupt requests. 1 tier1 2 tier2 3 tier3 4 tier4 each tier is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables and disables overflow interrupt requests and general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests. tier is initialized to h'f8 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 3?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 ovie 0 r/w 1 imieb 0 r/w 0 imiea 0 r/w reserved bits overflow interrupt enable enables or disables ovf interrupts input capture/compare match interrupt enable b enables or disables imfb interrupts input capture/compare match interrupt enable a enables or disables imfa interrupts 329 bit 2?verflow interrupt enable (ovie): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the ovf flag in tsr when ovf is set to 1. bit 2 ovie description 0 ovi interrupt requested by ovf is disabled (initial value) 1 ovi interrupt requested by ovf is enabled bit 1?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable b (imieb): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfb flag in tsr when imfb is set to 1. bit 1 imieb description 0 imib interrupt requested by imfb is disabled (initial value) 1 imib interrupt requested by imfb is enabled bit 0?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable a (imiea): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfa flag in tsr when imfa is set to 1. bit 0 imiea description 0 imia interrupt requested by imfa is disabled (initial value) 1 imia interrupt requested by imfa is enabled 330 10.3 cpu interface 10.3.1 16-bit accessible registers the timer counters (tcnts), general registers a and b (gras and grbs), and buffer registers a and b (bras and brbs) are 16-bit registers, and are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit data bus. these registers can be written or read a word at a time, or a byte at a time. figures 10-6 and 10-7 show examples of word access to a timer counter (tcnt). figures 10-8, 10-9, 10-10, and 10-11 show examples of byte access to tcnth and tcntl. figure 10-6 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcnt, word) figure 10-7 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcnt, word) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl 331 figure 10-8 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcnt, upper byte) figure 10-9 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcnt, lower byte) figure 10-10 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcnt, upper byte) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl 332 figure 10-11 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcnt, lower byte) 10.3.2 8-bit accessible registers the registers other than the timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers are 8-bit registers. these registers are linked to the cpu by an internal 8-bit data bus. figures 10-12 and 10-13 show examples of byte read and write access to a tcr. if a word-size data transfer instruction is executed, two byte transfers are performed. figure 10-12 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcr) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcr 333 figure 10-13 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcr) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcr 334 10.4 operation 10.4.1 overview a summary of operations in the various modes is given below. normal operation: each channel has a timer counter and general registers. the timer counter counts up, and can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, or external event counter. general registers a and b can be used for input capture or output compare. synchronous operation: the timer counters in designated channels are preset synchronously. data written to the timer counter in any one of these channels is simultaneously written to the timer counters in the other channels as well. the timer counters can also be cleared synchronously if so designated by the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in the tcrs. pwm mode: a pwm waveform is output from the tioca pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match a and to 0 at compare match b. the duty cycle can be varied from 0% to 100% depending on the settings of gra and grb. when a channel is set to pwm mode, its gra and grb automatically become output compare registers. reset-synchronized pwm mode: channels 3 and 4 are paired for three-phase pwm output with complementary waveforms. (the three phases are related by having a common transition point.) when reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected gra3, grb3, gra4, and grb4 automatically function as output compare registers, tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tocxa 4 , tiocb 4 , and tocxb 4 function as pwm output pins, and tcnt3 operates as an up-counter. tcnt4 operates independently, and is not compared with gra4 or grb4. complementary pwm mode: channels 3 and 4 are paired for three-phase pwm output with non-overlapping complementary waveforms. when complementary pwm mode is selected gra3, grb3, gra4, and grb4 automatically function as output compare registers, and tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tocxa 4 , tiocb 4 , and tocxb 4 function as pwm output pins. tcnt3 and tcnt4 operate as up/down-counters. phase counting mode: the phase relationship between two clock signals input at tclka and tclkb is detected and tcnt2 counts up or down accordingly. when phase counting mode is selected tclka and tclkb become clock input pins and tcnt2 operates as an up/down- counter. 335 buffering if the general register is an output compare register when compare match occurs the buffer register value is transferred to the general register. if the general register is an input capture register when input capture occurs the tcnt value is transferred to the general register, and the previous general register value is transferred to the buffer register. complementary pwm mode the buffer register value is transferred to the general register when tcnt3 and tcnt4 change counting direction. reset-synchronized pwm mode the buffer register value is transferred to the general register at gra3 compare match. 10.4.2 basic functions counter operation: when one of bits str0 to str4 is set to 1 in the timer start register (tstr), the timer counter (tcnt) in the corresponding channel starts counting. the counting can be free-running or periodic. sample setup procedure for counter figure 10-14 shows a sample procedure for setting up a counter. 336 figure 10-14 counter setup procedure (example) 1. set bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr to select the counter clock source. if an external clock source is selected, set bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. 2. for periodic counting, set cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr to have tcnt cleared at gra compare match or grb compare match. 3. set tior to select the output compare function of gra or grb, whichever was selected in step 2. 4. write the count period in gra or grb, whichever was selected in step 2. 5. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. counter setup select counter clock type of counting? periodic counting no yes select counter clear source select output compare register function set period start counter free-running counting start counter periodic counter free-running counter 1 2 3 4 55 337 free-running and periodic counter operation a reset leaves the counters (tcnts) in itu channels 0 to 4 all set as free-running counters. a free-running counter starts counting up when the corresponding bit in tstr is set to 1. when the count overflows from h'ffff to h'0000, the ovf flag is set to 1 in tsr. if the corresponding ovie bit is set to 1 in tier, a cpu interrupt is requested. after the overflow, the counter continues counting up from h'0000. figure 10-15 illustrates free-running counting. figure 10-15 free-running counter operation when a channel is set to have its counter cleared by compare match, in that channel tcnt operates as a periodic counter. select the output compare function of gra or grb, set bit cclr1 or cclr0 in tcr to have the counter cleared by compare match, and set the count period in gra or grb. after these settings, the counter starts counting up as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit is set to 1 in tstr. when the count matches gra or grb, the imfa or imfb flag is set to 1 in tsr and the counter is cleared to h'0000. if the corresponding imiea or imieb bit is set to 1 in tier, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. after the compare match, tcnt continues counting up from h'0000. figure 10-16 illustrates periodic counting. tcnt value h'ffff h'0000 str0 to str4 bit ovf time 338 figure 10-16 periodic counter operation tcnt count timing internal clock source bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr select the system clock (? or one of three internal clock sources obtained by prescaling the system clock (?2, ?4, ?8). figure 10-17 shows the timing. figure 10-17 count timing for internal clock sources tcnt value gr h'0000 str bit imf time counter cleared by general register compare match tcnt input tcnt internal clock n ?1 n n + 1 339 external clock source bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr select an external clock input pin (tclka to tclkd), and its valid edge or edges are selected by bits ckeg1 and ckeg0. the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected. the pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. shorter pulses will not be counted correctly. figure 10-18 shows the timing when both edges are detected. figure 10-18 count timing for external clock sources (when both edges are detected) tcnt input tcnt external clock input n ?1 n n + 1 340 waveform output by compare match: in itu channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, compare match a or b can cause the output at the tioca or tiocb pin to go to 0, go to 1, or toggle. in channel 2 the output can only go to 0 or go to 1. sample setup procedure for waveform output by compare match figure 10-19 shows a sample procedure for setting up waveform output by compare match. figure 10-19 setup procedure for waveform output by compare match (example) examples of waveform output figure 10-20 shows examples of 0 and 1 output. tcnt operates as a free-running counter, 0 output is selected for compare match a, and 1 output is selected for compare match b. when the pin is already at the selected output level, the pin level does not change. output setup select waveform output mode set output timing start counter waveform output select the compare match output mode (0, 1, or toggle) in tior. when a waveform output mode is selected, the pin switches from its generic input/ output function to the output compare function (tioca or tiocb). an output compare pin outputs set a value in gra or grb to designate the compare match timing. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 1 2 3 0 until the first compare match occurs. 1. 2. 3. 341 figure 10-20 0 and 1 output (examples) figure 10-21 shows examples of toggle output. tcnt operates as a periodic counter, cleared by compare match b. toggle output is selected for both compare match a and b. figure 10-21 toggle output (example) time h'ffff grb tiocb tioca gra no change no change no change no change 1 output 0 output tcnt value h'0000 grb tiocb tioca gra tcnt value time counter cleared by compare match with grb toggle output toggle output h'0000 342 output compare timing the compare match signal is generated in the last state in which tcnt and the general register match (when tcnt changes from the matching value to the next value). when the compare match signal is generated, the output value selected in tior is output at the output compare pin (tioca or tiocb). when tcnt matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. figure 10-22 shows the output compare timing. figure 10-22 output compare timing input capture function: the tcnt value can be captured into a general register when a transition occurs at an input capture/output compare pin (tioca or tiocb). capture can take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. the input capture function can be used to measure pulse width or period. sample setup procedure for input capture figure 10-23 shows a sample procedure for setting up input capture. n + 1 n n tcnt input clock tcnt gr compare match signal tioca, tiocb 343 figure 10-23 setup procedure for input capture (example) examples of input capture figure 10-24 illustrates input capture when the falling edge of tiocb and both edges of tioca are selected as capture edges. tcnt is cleared by input capture into grb. figure 10-24 input capture (example) input selection select input-capture input start counter input capture set tior to select the input capture function of a general register and the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture signal. clear the port data direction bit to 0 before making these tior settings. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 1 2 1. 2. h'0005 h'0180 time h'0180 h'0160 h'0005 h'0000 tiocb tioca gra grb counter cleared by tiocb input (falling edge) tcnt value h'0160 344 input capture signal timing input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in tior. figure 10-25 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. the pulse width of the input capture signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks for single-edge capture, and 2.5 system clocks for capture of both edges. figure 10-25 input capture signal timing n n input-capture input internal input capture signal tcnt gra, grb 345 10.4.3 synchronization the synchronization function enables two or more timer counters to be synchronized by writing the same data to them simultaneously (synchronous preset). with appropriate tcr settings, two or more timer counters can also be cleared simultaneously (synchronous clear). synchronization enables additional general registers to be associated with a single time base. synchronization can be selected for all channels (0 to 4). sample setup procedure for synchronization: figure 10-26 shows a sample procedure for setting up synchronization. figure 10-26 setup procedure for synchronization (example) setup for synchronization synchronous preset set the sync bits to 1 in tsnc for the channels to be synchronized. when a value is written in tcnt in one of the synchronized channels, the same value is simultaneously written in tcnt in the other channels (synchronized preset). 1. 2. 2 3 1 5 4 5 select synchronization synchronous preset write to tcnt synchronous clear clearing synchronized to this channel? select counter clear source start counter counter clear synchronous clear start counter select counter clear source yes no set the cclr1 or cclr0 bit in tcr to have the counter cleared by compare match or input capture. set the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr to have the counter cleared synchronously. set the str bits in tstr to 1 to start the synchronized counters. 3. 4. 5. 346 example of synchronization: figure 10-27 shows an example of synchronization. channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronized, and are set to operate in pwm mode. channel 0 is set for counter clearing by compare match with grb0. channels 1 and 2 are set for synchronous counter clearing. the timer counters in channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronously preset, and are synchronously cleared by compare match with grb0. a three-phase pwm waveform is output from pins tioca 0 , tioca 1 , and tioca 2 . for further information on pwm mode, see section 10.4.4, pwm mode. figure 10-27 synchronization (example) time tioca 1 tioca 0 gra2 gra1 grb2 gra0 grb1 grb0 value of tcnt0 to tcnt2 cleared by compare match with grb0 h'0000 347 10.4.4 pwm mode in pwm mode gra and grb are paired and a pwm waveform is output from the tioca pin. gra specifies the time at which the pwm output changes to 1. grb specifies the time at which the pwm output changes to 0. if either gra or grb is selected as the counter clear source, a pwm waveform with a duty cycle from 0% to 100% is output at the tioca pin. pwm mode can be selected in all channels (0 to 4). table 10-4 summarizes the pwm output pins and corresponding registers. if the same value is set in gra and grb, the output does not change when compare match occurs. table 10-4 pwm output pins and registers channel output pin 1 output 0 output 0 tioca 0 gra0 grb0 1 tioca 1 gra1 grb1 2 tioca 2 gra2 grb2 3 tioca 3 gra3 grb3 4 tioca 4 gra4 grb4 348 sample setup procedure for pwm mode: figure 10-28 shows a sample procedure for setting up pwm mode. figure 10-28 setup procedure for pwm mode (example) pwm mode 1. set bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr to select the counter clock source. if an external clock source is selected, set bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. pwm mode select counter clock 1 select counter clear source 2 set gra 3 set grb 4 select pwm mode 5 start counter 6 2. set bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr to select the counter clear source. 3. set the time at which the pwm waveform should go to 1 in gra. 4. set the time at which the pwm waveform should go to 0 in grb. 5. set the pwm bit in tmdr to select pwm mode. when pwm mode is selected, regardless of the tior contents, gra and grb become output compare registers specifying the times at which the pwm output goes to 1 and 0. the tioca pin automatically becomes the pwm output pin. the tiocb pin conforms to the settings of bits iob1 and iob0 in tior. if tiocb output is not desired, clear both iob1 and iob0 to 0. 6. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 349 examples of pwm mode: figure 10-29 shows examples of operation in pwm mode. in pwm mode tioca becomes an output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra, and to 0 at compare match with grb. in the examples shown, tcnt is cleared by compare match with gra or grb. synchronized operation and free-running counting are also possible. figure 10-29 pwm mode (example 1) tcnt value counter cleared by compare match with gra time gra grb tioca a. counter cleared by gra tcnt value counter cleared by compare match with grb time grb gra tioca b. counter cleared by grb h'0000 h'0000 350 figure 10-30 shows examples of the output of pwm waveforms with duty cycles of 0% and 100%. if the counter is cleared by compare match with grb, and gra is set to a higher value than grb, the duty cycle is 0%. if the counter is cleared by compare match with gra, and grb is set to a higher value than gra, the duty cycle is 100%. figure 10-30 pwm mode (example 2) tcnt value counter cleared by compare match with grb time grb gra tioca a. 0% duty cycle tcnt value counter cleared by compare match with gra time gra grb tioca b. 100% duty cycle write to gra write to gra write to grb write to grb h'0000 h'0000 351 10.4.5 reset-synchronized pwm mode in reset-synchronized pwm mode channels 3 and 4 are combined to produce three pairs of complementary pwm waveforms, all having one waveform transition point in common. when reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tocxa 4 , tiocb 4 , and tocxb 4 automatically become pwm output pins, and tcnt3 functions as an up- counter. table 10-5 lists the pwm output pins. table 10-6 summarizes the register settings. table 10-5 output pins in reset-synchronized pwm mode channel output pin description 3 tioca 3 pwm output 1 tiocb 3 pwm output 1 (complementary waveform to pwm output 1) 4 tioca 4 pwm output 2 tocxa 4 pwm output 2 (complementary waveform to pwm output 2) tiocb 4 pwm output 3 tocxb 4 pwm output 3 (complementary waveform to pwm output 3) table 10-6 register settings in reset-synchronized pwm mode register setting tcnt3 initially set to h'0000 tcnt4 not used (operates independently) gra3 specifies the count period of tcnt3 grb3 specifies a transition point of pwm waveforms output from tioca 3 and tiocb 3 gra4 specifies a transition point of pwm waveforms output from tioca 4 and tocxa 4 grb4 specifies a transition point of pwm waveforms output from tiocb 4 and tocxb 4 352 sample setup procedure for reset-synchronized pwm mode: figure 10-31 shows a sample procedure for setting up reset-synchronized pwm mode. figure 10-31 setup procedure for reset-synchronized pwm mode (example) reset-synchronized pwm mode 1. clear the str3 bit in tstr to 0 to halt tcnt3. reset-synchronized pwm mode must be set up while tcnt3 is halted. stop counter 1 select counter clock 2 select counter clear source 3 select reset-synchronized pwm mode 4 set tcnt 5 set general registers 6 2. set bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr to select the counter clock source for channel 3. if an external clock source is selected, select the external clock edge(s) with bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr. 3. set bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr3 to select gra3 compare match as the counter clear source. 4. set bits cmd1 and cmd0 in tfcr to select reset-synchronized pwm mode. tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tiocb 4 , tocxa 4 , and tocxb 4 automatically become pwm output pins. 5. preset tcnt3 to h'0000. tcnt4 need not be preset. start counter 7 6. gra3 is the waveform period register. set the waveform period value in gra3. set transition times of the pwm output waveforms in grb3, gra4, and grb4. set times within the compare match range of tcnt3. 353 example of reset-synchronized pwm mode: figure 10-32 shows an example of operation in reset-synchronized pwm mode. tcnt3 operates as an up-counter in this mode. tcnt4 operates independently, detached from gra4 and grb4. when tcnt3 matches gra3, tcnt3 is cleared and resumes counting from h'0000. the pwm outputs toggle at compare match of tcnt3 with grb3, gra4, and grb4 respectively, and all toggle when the counter is cleared. figure 10-32 operation in reset-synchronized pwm mode (example) (when ols3 = ols4 = 1) for the settings and operation when reset-synchronized pwm mode and buffer mode are both selected, see section 10.4.8, buffering. tcnt3 value counter cleared at compare match with gra3 time gra3 grb3 gra4 grb4 h'0000 tioca 3 tiocb 3 tioca 4 tocxa 4 tiocb 4 tocxb 4 354 10.4.6 complementary pwm mode in complementary pwm mode channels 3 and 4 are combined to output three pairs of complementary, non-overlapping pwm waveforms. when complementary pwm mode is selected tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tocxa 4 , tiocb 4 , and tocxb 4 automatically become pwm output pins, and tcnt3 and tcnt4 function as up/down-counters. table 10-7 lists the pwm output pins. table 10-8 summarizes the register settings. table 10-7 output pins in complementary pwm mode channel output pin description 3 tioca 3 pwm output 1 tiocb 3 pwm output 1 (non-overlapping complementary waveform to pwm output 1) 4 tioca 4 pwm output 2 tocxa 4 pwm output 2 (non-overlapping complementary waveform to pwm output 2) tiocb 4 pwm output 3 tocxb 4 pwm output 3 (non-overlapping complementary waveform to pwm output 3) table 10-8 register settings in complementary pwm mode register setting tcnt3 initially specifies the non-overlap margin (difference to tcnt4) tcnt4 initially set to h'0000 gra3 specifies the upper limit value of tcnt3 minus 1 grb3 specifies a transition point of pwm waveforms output from tioca 3 and tiocb 3 gra4 specifies a transition point of pwm waveforms output from tioca 4 and tocxa 4 grb4 specifies a transition point of pwm waveforms output from tiocb 4 and tocxb 4 355 setup procedure for complementary pwm mode: figure 10-33 shows a sample procedure for setting up complementary pwm mode. figure 10-33 setup procedure for complementary pwm mode (example) complementary pwm mode 1. clear bits str3 and str4 to 0 in tstr to halt the timer counters. complementary pwm mode must be set up while tcnt3 and tcnt4 are halted. complementary pwm mode stop counting 1 select counter clock 2 select complementary pwm mode 3 set tcnts 4 set general registers 5 start counters 6 2. set bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr to select the same counter clock source for channels 3 and 4. if an external clock source is selected, select the external clock edge(s) with bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr. do not select any counter clear source with bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr. 3. set bits cmd1 and cmd0 in tfcr to select complementary pwm mode. tioca 3 , tiocb 3 , tioca 4 , tiocb 4 , tocxa 4 , and tocxb 4 automatically become pwm output pins. 4. clear tcnt4 to h'0000. set the non-overlap margin in tcnt3. do not set tcnt3 and tcnt4 to the same value. 5. gra3 is the waveform period register. set the upper limit value of tcnt3 minus 1 in gra3. set transition times of the pwm output waveforms in grb3, gra4, and grb4. set times within the compare match range of tcnt3 and tcnt4. t x (x: initial setting of grb3, gra4, or grb4. t: initial setting of tcnt3) 6. set bits str3 and str4 in tstr to 1 to start tcnt3 and tcnt4. note: after exiting complementary pwm mode, to resume operating in complementary pwm mode, follow the entire setup procedure from step 1 again. 356 clearing procedure for complementary pwm mode: figure 10-34 shows the steps to clear complementary pwm mode. figure 10-34 clearing procedure for complementary pwm mode complementary pwm mode 1. clear the cmd1 bit of tfcr to 0 to set channels 3 and 4 to normal operating mode. normal operating mode clear complementary pwm mode 1 stop counter operation 2 2. after setting channels 3 and 4 to normal operating mode, wait at least one counter clock period, then clear bits str3 and str4 of tstr to 0 to stop counter operation of tcnt3 and tcnt4. 357 examples of complementary pwm mode: figure 10-35 shows an example of operation in complementary pwm mode. tcnt3 and tcnt4 operate as up/down-counters, counting down from compare match between tcnt3 and gra3 and counting up from the point at which tcnt4 underflows. during each up-and-down counting cycle, pwm waveforms are generated by compare match with general registers grb3, gra4, and grb4. since tcnt3 is initially set to a higher value than tcnt4, compare match events occur in the sequence tcnt3, tcnt4, tcnt4, tcnt3. figure 10-35 operation in complementary pwm mode (example 1, ols3 = ols4 = 1) tcnt3 and tcnt4 values down-counting starts at compare match between tcnt3 and gra3 time gra3 grb3 gra4 grb4 h'0000 tioca 3 tiocb 3 tioca 4 tocxa 4 tiocb 4 tocxb 4 tcnt3 tcnt4 up-counting starts when tcnt4 underflows 358 figure 10-36 shows examples of waveforms with 0% and 100% duty cycles (in one phase) in complementary pwm mode. in this example the outputs change at compare match with grb3, so waveforms with duty cycles of 0% or 100% can be output by setting grb3 to a value larger than gra3. the duty cycle can be changed easily during operation by use of the buffer registers. for further information see section 10.4.8, buffering. figure 10-36 operation in complementary pwm mode (example 2, ols3 = ols4 = 1) tcnt3 and tcnt4 values time gra3 grb3 tioca 3 tiocb 3 0% duty cycle a. 0% duty cycle tcnt3 and tcnt4 values time gra3 grb3 tioca 3 tiocb 3 100% duty cycle b. 100% duty cycle h'0000 h'0000 359 in complementary pwm mode, tcnt3 and tcnt4 overshoot and undershoot at the transitions between up-counting and down-counting. the setting conditions for the imfa bit in channel 3 and the ovf bit in channel 4 differ from the usual conditions. in buffered operation the buffer transfer conditions also differ. timing diagrams are shown in figures 10-37 and 10-38. figure 10-37 overshoot timing tcnt3 gra3 imfa buffer transfer signal (br to gr) gr n ?1 n n + 1 n n ?1 n set to 1 flag not set no buffer transfer buffer transfer 360 figure 10-38 undershoot timing in channel 3, imfa is set to 1 only during up-counting. in channel 4, ovf is set to 1 only when an underflow occurs. when buffering is selected, buffer register contents are transferred to the general register at compare match a3 during up-counting, and when tcnt4 underflows. general register settings in complementary pwm mode: when setting up general registers for complementary pwm mode or changing their settings during operation, note the following points. initial settings do not set values from h'0000 to t ?1 (where t is the initial value of tcnt3). after the counters start and the first compare match a3 event has occurred, however, settings in this range also become possible. changing settings use the buffer registers. correct waveform output may not be obtained if a general register is written to directly. cautions on changes of general register settings figure 10-39 shows six correct examples and one incorrect example. tcnt4 ovf buffer transfer signal (br to gr) gr h'0001 h'0000 h'ffff h'0000 set to 1 flag not set no buffer transfer buffer transfer underflow overflow 361 figure 10-39 changing a general register setting by buffer transfer (example 1) buffer transfer at transition from up-counting to down-counting if the general register value is in the range from gra3 ?t + 1 to gra3, do not transfer a buffer register value outside this range. conversely, if the general register value is outside this range, do not transfer a value within this range. see figure 10-40. figure 10-40 changing a general register setting by buffer transfer (caution 1) gra3 gr h'0000 br gr not allowed gra3 + 1 gra3 gra3 ?t + 1 gra3 ?t illegal changes tcnt3 tcnt4 362 buffer transfer at transition from down-counting to up-counting if the general register value is in the range from h'0000 to t ?1, do not transfer a buffer register value outside this range. conversely, when a general register value is outside this range, do not transfer a value within this range. see figure 10-41. figure 10-41 changing a general register setting by buffer transfer (caution 2) t t ?1 h'0000 h'ffff illegal changes tcnt3 tcnt4 363 general register settings outside the counting range (h'0000 to gra3) waveforms with a duty cycle of 0% or 100% can be output by setting a general register to a value outside the counting range. when a buffer register is set to a value outside the counting range, then later restored to a value within the counting range, the counting direction (up or down) must be the same both times. see figure 10-42. figure 10-42 changing a general register setting by buffer transfer (example 2) settings can be made in this way by detecting gra3 compare match or tcnt4 underflow before writing to the buffer register. they can also be made by using gra3 compare match to activate the dmac. 0% duty cycle 100% duty cycle write during down-counting write during up-counting gra3 gr h'0000 output pin output pin br gr 364 10.4.7 phase counting mode in phase counting mode the phase difference between two external clock inputs (at the tclka and tclkb pins) is detected, and tcnt2 counts up or down accordingly. in phase counting mode, the tclka and tclkb pins automatically function as external clock input pins and tcnt2 becomes an up/down-counter, regardless of the settings of bits tpsc2 to tpsc0, ckeg1, and ckeg0 in tcr2. settings of bits cclr1, cclr0 in tcr2, and settings in tior2, tier2, tsr2, gra2, and grb2 are valid. the input capture and output compare functions can be used, and interrupts can be generated. phase counting is available only in channel 2. sample setup procedure for phase counting mode: figure 10-43 shows a sample procedure for setting up phase counting mode. figure 10-43 setup procedure for phase counting mode (example) phase counting mode select phase counting mode select flag setting condition start counter 1 2 3 phase counting mode 1. 2. 3. set the mdf bit in tmdr to 1 to select phase counting mode. select the flag setting condition with the fdir bit in tmdr. set the str2 bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 365 example of phase counting mode: figure 10-44 shows an example of operations in phase counting mode. table 10-9 lists the up-counting and down-counting conditions for tcnt2. in phase counting mode both the rising and falling edges of tclka and tclkb are counted. the phase difference between tclka and tclkb must be at least 1.5 states, the phase overlap must also be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. see figure 10-45. figure 10-44 operation in phase counting mode (example) table 10-9 up/down counting conditions counting direction up-counting down-counting tclkb high low high low tclka low high low high figure 10-45 phase difference, overlap, and pulse width in phase counting mode tcnt2 value counting up counting down time tclkb tclka tclka tclkb phase difference phase difference pulse width pulse width overlap overlap phase difference and overlap: pulse width: at least 1.5 states at least 2.5 states 366 10.4.8 buffering buffering operates differently depending on whether a general register is an output compare register or an input capture register, with further differences in reset-synchronized pwm mode and complementary pwm mode. buffering is available only in channels 3 and 4. buffering operations under the conditions mentioned above are described next. general register used for output compare the buffer register value is transferred to the general register at compare match. see figure 10-46. figure 10-46 compare match buffering general register used for input capture the tcnt value is transferred to the general register at input capture. the previous general register value is transferred to the buffer register. see figure 10-47. figure 10-47 input capture buffering compare match signal comparator tcnt gr br input capture signal br gr tcnt 367 complementary pwm mode the buffer register value is transferred to the general register when tcnt3 and tcnt4 change counting direction. this occurs at the following two times: when tcnt3 compare matches gra3 when tcnt4 underflows reset-synchronized pwm mode the buffer register value is transferred to the general register at compare match a3. sample buffering setup procedure: figure 10-48 shows a sample buffering setup procedure. figure 10-48 buffering setup procedure (example) buffering select general register functions set buffer bits start counters buffered operation 11. 2. 3. 2 3 set tior to select the output compare or input capture function of the general registers. set bits bfa3, bfa4, bfb3, and bfb4 in tfcr to select buffering of the required general registers. set the str bits to 1 in tstr to start the timer counters. 368 examples of buffering: figure 10-49 shows an example in which gra is set to function as an output compare register buffered by bra, tcnt is set to operate as a periodic counter cleared by grb compare match, and tioca and tiocb are set to toggle at compare match a and b. because of the buffer setting, when tioca toggles at compare match a, the bra value is simultaneously transferred to gra. this operation is repeated each time compare match a occurs. figure 10-50 shows the transfer timing. figure 10-49 register buffering (example 1: buffering of output compare register) grb h'0250 h'0200 h'0100 h'0000 bra gra tiocb tioca tcnt value counter cleared by compare match b time toggle output toggle output compare match a h'0200 h'0250 h'0100 h'0200 h'0100 h'0200 h'0200 369 figure 10-50 compare match and buffer transfer timing (example) tcnt br gr compare match signal buffer transfer signal n n + 1 nn n 370 figure 10-51 shows an example in which gra is set to function as an input capture register buffered by bra, and tcnt is cleared by input capture b. the falling edge is selected as the input capture edge at tiocb. both edges are selected as input capture edges at tioca. because of the buffer setting, when the tcnt value is captured into gra at input capture a, the previous gra value is simultaneously transferred to bra. figure 10-52 shows the transfer timing. figure 10-51 register buffering (example 2: buffering of input capture register) h'0180 h'0160 h'0005 h'0000 tiocb tioca gra bra grb h'0005 h'0160 h'0005 h'0180 tcnt value counter cleared by input capture b time input capture a h'0160 371 figure 10-52 input capture and buffer transfer timing (example) tcnt gr br tioc pin input capture signal n n + 1 n n m n + 1 n n m m n m 372 figure 10-53 shows an example in which grb3 is buffered by brb3 in complementary pwm mode. buffering is used to set grb3 to a higher value than gra3, generating a pwm waveform with 0% duty cycle. the brb3 value is transferred to grb3 when tcnt3 matches gra3, and when tcnt4 underflows. figure 10-53 register buffering (example 3: buffering in complementary pwm mode) tcnt3 and tcnt4 values time gra3 h'0999 h'0000 tcnt3 tcnt4 grb3 h'1fff brb3 grb3 tioca 3 tiocb 3 h'0999 h'0999 h'0999 h'1fff h'0999 h'1fff h'1fff h'0999 373 10.4.9 itu output timing the itu outputs from channels 3 and 4 can be disabled by bit settings in toer or by an external trigger, or inverted by bit settings in tocr. timing of enabling and disabling of itu output by toer: in this example an itu output is disabled by clearing a master enable bit to 0 in toer. an arbitrary value can be output by appropriate settings of the data register (dr) and data direction register (ddr) of the corresponding input/output port. figure 10-54 illustrates the timing of the enabling and disabling of itu output by toer. figure 10-54 timing of disabling of itu output by writing to toer (example) address bus toer itu output pin toer address timer output i/o port generic input/output itu output t 1 t 2 t 3 374 timing of disabling of itu output by external trigger: if the xtgd bit is cleared to 0 in tocr in reset-synchronized pwm mode or complementary pwm mode, when an input capture a signal occurs in channel 1, the master enable bits are cleared to 0 in toer, disabling itu output. figure 10-55 shows the timing. figure 10-55 timing of disabling of itu output by external trigger (example) timing of output inversion by tocr: the output levels in reset-synchronized pwm mode and complementary pwm mode can be inverted by inverting the output level select bits (ols4 and ols3) in tocr. figure 10-56 shows the timing. figure 10-56 timing of inverting of itu output level by writing to tocr (example) tioca 1 pin toer itu output i/o port itu output i/o port generic input/output generic input/output itu output itu output input capture signal itu output pins nn h'c0 h'c0 n: arbitrary setting (h'c1 to h'ff) address bus tocr itu output pin tocr address inverted t 1 t 2 t 3 375 10.5 interrupts the itu has two types of interrupts: input capture/compare match interrupts, and overflow interrupts. 10.5.1 setting of status flags timing of setting of imfa and imfb at compare match: imfa and imfb are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when tcnt matches a general register (gr). the compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when tcnt is updated from the matching count to the next count). therefore, when tcnt matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next timer clock input. figure 10-57 shows the timing of the setting of imfa and imfb. figure 10-57 timing of setting of imfa and imfb by compare match tcnt gr imf imi tcnt input clock compare match signal n n + 1 n 376 timing of setting of imfa and imfb by input capture: imfa and imfb are set to 1 by an input capture signal. the tcnt contents are simultaneously transferred to the corresponding general register. figure 10-58 shows the timing. figure 10-58 timing of setting of imfa and imfb by input capture timing of setting of overflow flag (ovf): ovf is set to 1 when tcnt overflows from h'ffff to h'0000 or underflows from h'0000 to h'ffff. figure 10-59 shows the timing. input capture signal n n imf tcnt gr imi 377 figure 10-59 timing of setting of ovf 10.5.2 clearing of status flags if the cpu reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag is cleared. figure 10-60 shows the timing. figure 10-60 timing of clearing of status flags overflow signal h'ffff h'0000 tcnt ovf ovi address imf, ovf tsr write cycle tsr address t 1 t 2 t 3 378 10.5.3 interrupt sources and dma controller activation each itu channel can generate a compare match/input capture a interrupt, a compare match/input capture b interrupt, and an overflow interrupt. in total there are 15 interrupt sources, all independently vectored. an interrupt is requested when the interrupt request flag and interrupt enable bit are both set to 1. the priority order of the channels can be modified in interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra and iprb). for details see section 5, interrupt controller. compare match/input capture a interrupts in channels 0 to 3 can activate the dma controller (dmac). when the dmac is activated a cpu interrupt is not requested. table 10-10 lists the interrupt sources. table 10-10 itu interrupt sources interrupt dmac channel source description activatable priority * 0 imia0 compare match/input capture a0 yes high imib0 compare match/input capture b0 no ovi0 overflow 0 no 1 imia1 compare match/input capture a1 yes imib1 compare match/input capture b1 no ovi1 overflow 1 no 2 imia2 compare match/input capture a2 yes imib2 compare match/input capture b2 no ovi2 overflow 2 no 3 imia3 compare match/input capture a3 yes imib3 compare match/input capture b3 no ovi3 overflow 3 no 4 imia4 compare match/input capture a4 no imib4 compare match/input capture b4 no ovi4 overflow 4 no low note: * the priority immediately after a reset is indicated. inter-channel priorities can be changed by settings in ipra and iprb. 379 10.6 usage notes this section describes contention and other matters requiring special attention during itu operations. contention between tcnt write and clear: if a counter clear signal occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. see figure 10-61. figure 10-61 contention between tcnt write and clear address bus internal write signal tcnt write cycle tcnt address t 1 t 2 t 3 380 contention between tcnt word write and increment: if an increment pulse occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt word write cycle, writing takes priority and tcnt is not incremented. see figure 10-62. figure 10-62 contention between tcnt word write and increment address bus internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnt n tcnt address m tcnt write data tcnt word write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 381 contention between tcnt byte write and increment: if an increment pulse occurs in the t 2 or t 3 state of a tcnt byte write cycle, writing takes priority and tcnt is not incremented. the tcnt byte that was not written retains its previous value. see figure 10-63, which shows an increment pulse occurring in the t 2 state of a byte write to tcnth. figure 10-63 contention between tcnt byte write and increment address bus internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnth tcntl tcnth byte write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 n tcnth address m tcnt write data xx x + 1 382 contention between general register write and compare match: if a compare match occurs in the t 3 state of a general register write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. see figure 10-64. figure 10-64 contention between general register write and compare match address bus internal write signal tcnt gr compare match signal general register write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 n gr address m n n + 1 general register write data inhibited 383 contention between tcnt write and overflow or underflow: if an overflow occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt write cycle, writing takes priority and the counter is not incremented. ovf is set to 1.the same holds for underflow. see figure 10-65. figure 10-65 contention between tcnt write and overflow address bus internal write signal tcnt input clock overflow signal tcnt ovf h'ffff tcnt address m tcnt write data tcnt write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 384 contention between general register read and input capture: if an input capture signal occurs during the t 3 state of a general register read cycle, the value before input capture is read. see figure 10-66. figure 10-66 contention between general register read and input capture address bus internal read signal input capture signal gr internal data bus gr address x general register read cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 xm 385 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment: if an input capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, the counter is cleared according to the input capture signal. the counter is not incremented by the increment signal. the value before the counter is cleared is transferred to the general register. see figure 10-67. figure 10-67 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment input capture signal counter clear signal tcnt input clock tcnt gr n n h'0000 386 contention between general register write and input capture: if an input capture signal occurs in the t 3 state of a general register write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to the general register is not performed. see figure 10-68. figure 10-68 contention between general register write and input capture note on waveform period setting: when a counter is cleared by compare match, the counter is cleared in the last state at which the tcnt value matches the general register value, at the time when this value would normally be updated to the next count. the actual counter frequency is therefore given by the following formula: f = (f: counter frequency. ? system clock frequency. n: value set in general register.) address bus internal write signal input capture signal tcnt gr m gr address general register write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 m (n + 1) 387 contention between buffer register write and input capture: if a buffer register is used for input capture buffering and an input capture signal occurs in the t 3 state of a write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to the buffer register is not performed. see figure 10-69. figure 10-69 contention between buffer register write and input capture address bus internal write signal input capture signal gr br br address buffer register write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 nx mn tcnt value 388 note on synchronous preset: when channels are synchronized, if a tcnt value is modified by byte write access, all 16 bits of all synchronized counters assume the same value as the counter that was addressed. (example) when channels 2 and 3 are synchronized note on setup of reset-synchronized pwm mode and complementary pwm mode: when setting bits cmd1 and cmd0 in tfcr, take the following precautions: write to bits cmd1 and cmd0 only when tcnt3 and tcnt4 are stopped. do not switch directly between reset-synchronized pwm mode and complementary pwm mode. first switch to normal mode (by clearing bit cmd1 to 0), then select reset- synchronized pwm mode or complementary pwm mode. ? byte write to channel 2 or byte write to channel 3 tcnt2 tcnt3 w y x z tcnt2 tcnt3 a a x x tcnt2 tcnt3 y y a a w d it t h l 2 d it t h l 3 upper byte lower byte upper byte lower byte upper byte lower byte write a to upper byte of channel 2 write a to lower byte of channel 3 389 390 itu operating modes table 10-11 (a) itu operating modes (channel 0) register settings tsnc tmdr tfcr tocr toer tior0 tcr0 reset- comple- synchro- output synchro- mentary nized buffer- level master clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm pwm pwm ing xtgd select enable ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync0 = 1 o oooo pwm mode o pwm0 = 1 o * oo output compare a o pwm0 = 0 ioa2 = 0 ooo other bits unrestricted output compare b o o o iob2 = 0 oo other bits unrestricted input capture a o pwm0 = 0 ioa2 = 1 ooo other bits unrestricted input capture b o pwm0 = 0 o iob2 = 1 oo other bits unrestricted counter by compare o o oo cclr1 = 0 o clearing match/input cclr0 = 1 capture a by compare o o oo cclr1 = 1 o match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync0 = 1 o oo cclr1 = 1 o chronous cclr0 = 1 clear legend: o setting available (valid). ?setting does not affect this mode. note: * the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 391 table 10-11 (b) itu operating modes (channel 1) register settings tsnc tmdr tfcr tocr toer tior1 tcr1 reset- comple- synchro- output synchro- mentary nized buffer- level master clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm pwm pwm ing xtgd select enable ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync1 = 1 o oooo pwm mode o pwm1 = 1 o * 1 oo output compare a o pwm1 = 0 ioa2 = 0 ooo other bits unrestricted output compare b o o o iob2 = 0 oo other bits unrestricted input capture a o pwm1 = 0 o * 2 ioa2 = 1 ooo other bits unrestricted input capture b o pwm1 = 0 o iob2 = 1 oo other bits unrestricted counter by compare o o oo cclr1 = 0 o clearing match/input cclr0 = 1 capture a by compare o o oo cclr1 = 1 o match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync1 = 1 o oo cclr1 = 1 o chronous cclr0 = 1 clear legend: o setting available (valid). ?setting does not affect this mode. notes: 1. the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 2. valid only when channels 3 and 4 are operating in complementary pwm mode or reset-synchronized pwm mode. 392 table 10-11 (c) itu operating modes (channel 2) register settings tsnc tmdr tfcr tocr toer tior2 tcr2 reset- comple- synchro- output synchro- mentary nized buffer- level master clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm pwm pwm ing xtgd select enable ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync2 = 1 o o oooo pwm mode oo pwm2 = 1 o * oo output compare a oo pwm2 = 0 ioa2 = 0 ooo other bits unrestricted output compare b oo o o iob2 = 0 oo other bits unrestricted input capture a oo pwm2 = 0 ioa2 = 1 ooo other bits unrestricted input capture b oo pwm2 = 0 o iob2 = 1 oo other bits unrestricted counter by compare oo o oo cclr1 = 0 o clearing match/input cclr0 = 1 capture a by compare oo o oo cclr1 = 1 o match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync2 = 1 o o oo cclr1 = 1 o chronous cclr0 = 1 clear phase counting o mdf = 1 oo ooo mode legend: o setting available (valid). ?setting does not affect this mode. note: * the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 393 table 10-11 (d) itu operating modes (channel 3) register settings tsnc tmdr tfcr tocr toer tior3 tcr3 comple- reset- output synchro- mentary synchro- level master clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm pwm nized pwm buffering xtgd select enable ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync3 = 1 oo * 3 oo o * 1 oooo pwm mode o pwm3 = 1 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o o o * 2 oo output compare a o pwm3 = 0 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o o ioa2 = 0 oo o other bits unrestricted output compare b o o cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o oo iob2 = 0 oo other bits unrestricted input capture a o pwm3 = 0 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o ea3 ignored ioa2 = 1 oo o other bits other bits unrestricted unrestricted input capture b o pwm3 = 0 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o eb3 ignored o ioa2 = 1 oo other bits other bits unrestricted unrestricted counter by compare o o illegal setting: o * 4 o o * 1 oo cclr1 = 0 o clearing match/input cmd1 = 1 cclr0 = 1 capture a cmd0 = 0 by compare o o cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o o * 1 oo cclr1 = 1 o match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync3 = 1 o illegal setting: oo o * 1 oo cclr1 = 1 o chronous cmd1 = 1 cclr0 = 1 clear cmd0 = 0 complementary o * 3 cmd1 = 1 cmd1 = 1 oo * 6 oo cclr1 = 0 o * 5 pwm mode cmd0 = 0 cmd0 = 0 cclr0 = 0 reset-synchronized o cmd1 = 1 cmd1 = 1 oo * 6 oo cclr1 = 0 o pwm mode cmd0 = 1 cmd0 = 1 cclr0 = 1 buffering o oo o bfa3 = 1 o * 1 oooo (bra) other bits unrestricted buffering o oo o bfb3 = 1 o * 1 oooo (brb) other bits unrestricted legend: o setting available (valid). ?setting does not affect this mode. notes: 1. master enable bit settings are valid only during waveform output. 2. the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compa re match signal is inhibited. 3. do not set both channels 3 and 4 for synchronous operation when complementary pwm mode is selected. 4. the counter cannot be cleared by input capture a when reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected. 5. in complementary pwm mode, select the same clock source for channels 3 and 4. 6. use the input capture a function in channel 1. 394 table 10-11 (e) itu operating modes (channel 4) register settings tsnc tmdr tfcr tocr toer tior4 tcr4 comple- reset- output synchro- mentary synchro- level master clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm pwm nized pwm buffering xtgd select enable ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync4 = 1 oo * 3 oo o * 1 oooo pwm mode o pwm4 = 1 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o o o * 2 oo output compare a o pwm4 = 0 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o o ioa2 = 0 oo o other bits unrestricted output compare b o o cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o oo iob2 = 0 oo other bits unrestricted input capture a o pwm4 = 0 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o ea4 ignored ioa2 = 1 oo o other bits other bits unrestricted unrestricted input capture b o pwm4 = 0 cmd1 = 0 cmd1 = 0 o eb4 ignored o iob2 = 1 oo other bits other bits unrestricted unrestricted counter by compare o o illegal setting: o * 4 o o * 1 oo cclr1 = 0 o clearing match/input cmd1 = 1 cclr0 = 1 capture a cmd0 = 0 by compare o o illegal setting: o * 4 o o * 1 oo cclr1 = 1 o match/input cmd1 = 1 cclr0 = 0 capture b cmd0 = 0 syn- sync4 = 1 o illegal setting: o * 4 o o * 1 oo cclr1 = 1 o chronous cmd1 = 1 cclr0 = 1 clear cmd0 = 0 complementary o * 3 cmd1 = 1 cmd1 = 1 oooo cclr1 = 0 o * 5 pwm mode cmd0 = 0 cmd0 = 0 cclr0 = 0 reset-synchronized o cmd1 = 1 cmd1 = 1 oooo o * 6 o * 6 pwm mode cmd0 = 1 cmd0 = 1 buffering o oo o bfa4 = 1 o * 1 oooo (bra) other bits unrestricted buffering o oo o bfb4 = 1 o * 1 oooo (brb) other bits unrestricted legend: o setting available (valid). ?setting does not affect this mode. notes: 1. master enable bit settings are valid only during waveform output. 2. the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compa re match signal is inhibited. 3. do not set both channels 3 and 4 for synchronous operation when complementary pwm mode is selected. 4. when reset-synchronized pwm mode is selected, tcnt4 operates independently and the counter clearing function is available. wa veform output is not affected. 5. in complementary pwm mode, select the same clock source for channels 3 and 4. 6. tcr4 settings are valid in reset-synchronized pwm mode, but tcnt4 operates independently, without affecting waveform output. section 11 programmable timing pattern controller 11.1 overview the h8/3048 series has a built-in programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) that provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit integrated timer unit (itu) as a time base. the tpc pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 3 to group 0) that can operate simultaneously and independently. 11.1.1 features tpc features are listed below. 16-bit output data maximum 16-bit data can be output. tpc output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis. four output groups output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to four different 4-bit outputs. selectable output trigger signals output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare-match signals of four itu channels. non-overlap mode a non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs. can operate together with the dma controller (dmac) the compare-match signals selected as trigger signals can activate the dmac for sequential output of data without cpu intervention. 395 11.1.2 block diagram figure 11-1 shows a block diagram of the tpc. figure 11-1 tpc block diagram paddr ndera tpmr pbddr nderb tpcr internal data bus tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 control logic itu compare match signals pulse output pins, group 3 pbdr padr legend tpmr: tpcr: nderb: ndera: pbddr: paddr: ndrb: ndra: pbdr: padr: pulse output pins, group 2 pulse output pins, group 1 pulse output pins, group 0 tpc output mode register tpc output control register next data enable register b next data enable register a port b data direction register port a data direction register next data register b next data register a port b data register port a data register ndrb ndra 396 11.1.3 tpc pins table 11-1 summarizes the tpc output pins. table 11-1 tpc pins name symbol i/o function tpc output 0 tp 0 output group 0 pulse output tpc output 1 tp 1 output tpc output 2 tp 2 output tpc output 3 tp 3 output tpc output 4 tp 4 output group 1 pulse output tpc output 5 tp 5 output tpc output 6 tp 6 output tpc output 7 tp 7 output tpc output 8 tp 8 output group 2 pulse output tpc output 9 tp 9 output tpc output 10 tp 10 output tpc output 11 tp 11 output tpc output 12 tp 12 output group 3 pulse output tpc output 13 tp 13 output tpc output 14 tp 14 output tpc output 15 tp 15 output 397 11.1.4 registers table 11-2 summarizes the tpc registers. table 11-2 tpc registers address * 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffd1 port a data direction register paddr w h'00 h'ffd3 port a data register padr r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'ffd4 port b data direction register pbddr w h'00 h'ffd6 port b data register pbdr r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'ffa0 tpc output mode register tpmr r/w h'f0 h'ffa1 tpc output control register tpcr r/w h'ff h'ffa2 next data enable register b nderb r/w h'00 h'ffa3 next data enable register a ndera r/w h'00 h'ffa5/ next data register a ndra r/w h'00 h'ffa7 * 3 h'ffa4 next data register b ndrb r/w h'00 h'ffa6 * 3 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. bits used for tpc output cannot be written. 3. the ndra address is h'ffa5 when the same output trigger is selected for tpc output groups 0 and 1 by settings in tpcr. when the output triggers are different, the ndra address is h'ffa7 for group 0 and h'ffa5 for group 1. similarly, the address of ndrb is h'ffa4 when the same output trigger is selected for tpc output groups 2 and 3 by settings in tpcr. when the output triggers are different, the ndrb address is h'ffa6 for group 2 and h'ffa4 for group 3. 398 11.2 register descriptions 11.2.1 port a data direction register (paddr) paddr is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port a. port a is multiplexed with pins tp 7 to tp 0 . bits corresponding to pins used for tpc output must be set to 1. for further information about paddr, see section 9.11, port a. 11.2.2 port a data register (padr) padr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores tpc output data for groups 0 and 1, when these tpc output groups are used. for further information about padr, see section 9.11, port a. bit initial value read/write 7 pa ddr 0 w port a data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port a pins 7 6 pa ddr 0 w 6 5 pa ddr 0 w 5 4 pa ddr 0 w 4 3 pa ddr 0 w 3 2 pa ddr 0 w 2 1 pa ddr 0 w 1 0 pa ddr 0 w 0 bit initial value read/write 0 pa 0 r/(w) 0 1 pa 0 r/(w) 1 2 pa 0 r/(w) 2 3 pa 0 r/(w) 3 4 pa 0 r/(w) 4 5 pa 0 r/(w) 5 6 pa 0 r/(w) 6 7 pa 0 r/(w) 7 port a data 7 to 0 these bits store output data for tpc output groups 0 and 1 * ******* note: bits selected for tpc output by ndera settings become read-only bits. * 399 11.2.3 port b data direction register (pbddr) pbddr is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port b. port b is multiplexed with pins tp 15 to tp 8 . bits corresponding to pins used for tpc output must be set to 1. for further information about pbddr, see section 9.12, port b. 11.2.4 port b data register (pbdr) pbdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores tpc output data for groups 2 and 3, when these tpc output groups are used. for further information about pbdr, see section 9.12, port b. bit initial value read/write 7 pb ddr 0 w port b data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port b pins 7 6 pb ddr 0 w 6 5 pb ddr 0 w 5 4 pb ddr 0 w 4 3 pb ddr 0 w 3 2 pb ddr 0 w 2 1 pb ddr 0 w 1 0 pb ddr 0 w 0 bit initial value read/write 0 pb 0 r/(w) 0 1 pb 0 r/(w) 1 2 pb 0 r/(w) 2 3 pb 0 r/(w) 3 4 pb 0 r/(w) 4 5 pb 0 r/(w) 5 6 pb 0 r/(w) 6 7 pb 0 r/(w) 7 port b data 7 to 0 these bits store output data for tpc output groups 2 and 3 * ******* note: bits selected for tpc output by nderb settings become read-only bits. * 400 11.2.5 next data register a (ndra) ndra is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for tpc output groups 1 and 0 (pins tp 7 to tp 0 ). during tpc output, when an itu compare match event specified in tpcr occurs, ndra contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in padr. the address of ndra differs depending on whether tpc output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. ndra is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. same trigger for tpc output groups 0 and 1: if tpc output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the ndra address is h'ffa5. the upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. address h'ffa7 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. address h'ffa5 address h'ffa7 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr7 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 4 ndr4 0 r/w 3 ndr3 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w 0 ndr0 0 r/w next data 3 to 0 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 0 next data 7 to 4 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 1 bit initial value read/write 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 reserved bits 401 different triggers for tpc output groups 0 and 1: if tpc output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of ndra (group 1) is h'ffa5 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is h'ffa7. bits 3 to 0 of address h'ffa5 and bits 7 to 4 of address h'ffa7 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. address h'ffa5 address h'ffa7 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr7 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 4 ndr4 0 r/w 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 reserved bits next data 7 to 4 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 1 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 ndr3 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w 0 ndr0 0 r/w next data 3 to 0 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 0 reserved bits 402 11.2.6 next data register b (ndrb) ndrb is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for tpc output groups 3 and 2 (pins tp 15 to tp 8 ). during tpc output, when an itu compare match event specified in tpcr occurs, ndrb contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in pbdr. the address of ndrb differs depending on whether tpc output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. ndrb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. same trigger for tpc output groups 2 and 3: if tpc output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the same compare match event, the ndrb address is h'ffa4. the upper 4 bits belong to group 3 and the lower 4 bits to group 2. address h'ffa6 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. address h'ffa4 address h'ffa6 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 3 ndr11 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w 0 ndr8 0 r/w next data 11 to 8 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 2 next data 15 to 12 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 3 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 3 ndr11 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w 0 ndr8 0 r/w next data 11 to 8 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 2 next data 15 to 12 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 3 bit initial value read/write 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 reserved bits 403 different triggers for tpc output groups 2 and 3: if tpc output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of ndrb (group 3) is h'ffa4 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is h'ffa6. bits 3 to 0 of address h'ffa4 and bits 7 to 4 of address h'ffa6 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. address h'ffa4 address h'ffa6 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 reserved bits next data 15 to 12 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 3 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 ndr11 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w 0 ndr8 0 r/w next data 11 to 8 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 2 reserved bits 404 11.2.7 next data enable register a (ndera) ndera is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables tpc output groups 1 and 0 (tp 7 to tp 0 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. if a bit is enabled for tpc output by ndera, then when the itu compare match event selected in the tpc output control register (tpcr) occurs, the ndra value is automatically transferred to the corresponding padr bit, updating the output value. if tpc output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from ndra to padr and the output value does not change. ndera is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?ext data enable 7 to 0 (nder7 to nder0): these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 1 and 0 (tp 7 to tp 0 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. bits 7 to 0 nder7 to nder0 description 0 tpc outputs tp 7 to tp 0 are disabled (initial value) (ndr7 to ndr0 are not transferred to pa 7 to pa 0 ) 1 tpc outputs tp 7 to tp 0 are enabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are transferred to pa 7 to pa 0 ) bit initial value read/write 0 nder0 0 r/w 1 nder1 0 r/w 2 nder2 0 r/w 3 nder3 0 r/w 4 nder4 0 r/w 5 nder5 0 r/w 6 nder6 0 r/w 7 nder7 0 r/w next data enable 7 to 0 these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 1 and 0 405 11.2.8 next data enable register b (nderb) nderb is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables tpc output groups 3 and 2 (tp 15 to tp 8 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. if a bit is enabled for tpc output by nderb, then when the itu compare match event selected in the tpc output control register (tpcr) occurs, the ndrb value is automatically transferred to the corresponding pbdr bit, updating the output value. if tpc output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from ndrb to pbdr and the output value does not change. nderb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?ext data enable 15 to 8 (nder15 to nder8): these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 3 and 2 (tp 15 to tp 8 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. bits 7 to 0 nder15 to nder8 description 0 tpc outputs tp 15 to tp 8 are disabled (initial value) (ndr15 to ndr8 are not transferred to pb 7 to pb 0 ) 1 tpc outputs tp 15 to tp 8 are enabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are transferred to pb 7 to pb 0 ) bit initial value read/write 0 nder8 0 r/w 1 nder9 0 r/w 2 nder10 0 r/w 3 nder11 0 r/w 4 nder12 0 r/w 5 nder13 0 r/w 6 nder14 0 r/w 7 nder15 0 r/w next data enable 15 to 8 these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 3 and 2 406 11.2.9 tpc output control register (tpcr) tpcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for tpc outputs on a group-by-group basis. tpcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 g3cms1 1 r/w 6 g3cms0 1 r/w 5 g2cms1 1 r/w 4 g2cms0 1 r/w 3 g1cms1 1 r/w 0 g0cms0 1 r/w 2 g1cms0 1 r/w 1 g0cms1 1 r/w group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 3 (tp to tp ) group 2 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 2 (tp to tp ) group 1 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 1 (tp to tp ) group 0 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 0 (tp to tp ) 15 12 11 8 74 30 407 bits 7 and 6?roup 3 compare match select 1 and 0 (g3cms1, g3cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ). bit 7 bit 6 g3cms1 g3cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 1 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 1 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by (initial value) compare match in itu channel 3 bits 5 and 4?roup 2 compare match select 1 and 0 (g2cms1, g2cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ). bit 5 bit 4 g2cms1 g2cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 1 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 1 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by (initial value) compare match in itu channel 3 408 bits 3 and 2?roup 1 compare match select 1 and 0 (g1cms1, g1cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ). bit 3 bit 2 g1cms1 g1cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 1 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 1 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by (initial value) compare match in itu channel 3 bits 1 and 0?roup 0 compare match select 1 and 0 (g0cms1, g0cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ). bit 1 bit 0 g0cms1 g0cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 1 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 1 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by (initial value) compare match in itu channel 3 409 11.2.10 tpc output mode register (tpmr) tpmr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for each group. the output trigger period of a non-overlapping tpc output waveform is set in general register b (grb) in the itu channel selected for output triggering. the non-overlap margin is set in general register a (gra). the output values change at compare match a and b. for details see section 11.3.4, non-overlapping tpc output. tpmr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 4?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 g3nov 0 r/w 0 g0nov 0 r/w 2 g2nov 0 r/w 1 g1nov 0 r/w group 3 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 3 (tp to tp ) reserved bits group 2 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 2 (tp to tp ) group 1 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 1 (tp to tp ) group 0 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 0 (tp to tp ) 15 12 11 8 74 30 410 bit 3?roup 3 non-overlap (g3nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ). bit 3 g3nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 3 (output values change at (initial value) compare match a in the selected itu channel) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected itu channel) bit 2?roup 2 non-overlap (g2nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ). bit 2 g2nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 2 (output values change at (initial value) compare match a in the selected itu channel) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected itu channel) bit 1?roup 1 non-overlap (g1nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ). bit 1 g1nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 1 (output values change at (initial value) compare match a in the selected itu channel) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected itu channel) bit 0?roup 0 non-overlap (g0nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ). bit 0 g0nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 0 (output values change at (initial value) compare match a in the selected itu channel) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected itu channel) 411 11.3 operation 11.3.1 overview when corresponding bits in paddr or pbddr and ndera or nderb are set to 1, tpc output is enabled. the tpc output initially consists of the corresponding padr or pbdr contents. when a compare-match event selected in tpcr occurs, the corresponding ndra or ndrb bit contents are transferred to padr or pbdr to update the output values. figure 11-2 illustrates the tpc output operation. table 11-3 summarizes the tpc operating conditions. figure 11-2 tpc output operation table 11-3 tpc operating conditions nder ddr pin function 0 0 generic input port 1 generic output port 1 0 generic input port (but the dr bit is a read-only bit, and when compare match occurs, the ndr bit value is transferred to the dr bit) 1 tpc pulse output sequential output of up to 16-bit patterns is possible by writing new output data to ndra and ndrb before the next compare match. for information on non-overlapping operation, see section 11.3.4, non-overlapping tpc output. ddr nder qq tpc output pin dr ndr c qd qd internal data bus output trigger signal 412 11.3.2 output timing if tpc output is enabled, ndra/ndrb contents are transferred to padr/pbdr and output when the selected compare match event occurs. figure 11-3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match a. figure 11-3 timing of transfer of next data register contents and output (example) tcnt gra compare match a signal ndrb pbdr tp to tp 815 n n n m m n + 1 n n 413 11.3.3 normal tpc output sample setup procedure for normal tpc output: figure 11-4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal tpc output. figure 11-4 setup procedure for normal tpc output (example) normal tpc output set next tpc output data compare match? no yes set next tpc output data itu setup port and tpc setup itu setup 10 11 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. set tior to make gra an output compare register (with output inhibited). set the tpc output trigger period. select the counter clock source with bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. select the counter clear source with bits cclr1 and cclr0. enable the imfa interrupt in tier. the dmac can also be set up to transfer data to the next data register. set the initial output values in the dr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output. set the ddr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output to 1. set the nder bits of the pins to be used for tpc output to 1. select the itu compare match event to be used as the tpc output trigger in tpcr. set the next tpc output values in the ndr bits. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. at each imfa interrupt, set the next output values in the ndr bits. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 select gr functions set gra value select counting operation select interrupt request start counter set initial output data select port output enable tpc output select tpc output trigger 414 example of normal tpc output (example of five-phase pulse output): figure 11-5 shows an example in which the tpc is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output. figure 11-5 normal tpc output example (five-phase pulse output) gra h'0000 ndrb pbdr tp 15 tp 14 tp 13 tp 12 tp 11 time 80 tcnt tcnt value c0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 c0 compare match the itu channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that gra is an output compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match a. the trigger period is set in gra. the imiea bit is set to 1 in tier to enable the compare match a interrupt. h'f8 is written in pbddr and nderb, and bits g3cms1, g3cms0, g2cms1, and g2cms0 are set in tpcr to select compare match in the itu channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. output data h'80 is written in ndrb. the timer counter in this itu channel is started. when compare match a occurs, the ndrb contents are transferred to pbdr and output. the compare match/input capture a (imfa) interrupt service routine writes the next output data (h'c0) in ndrb. five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained by writing h'40, h'60, h'20, h'30, h'10, h'18, h'08, h'88?at successive imfa interrupts. if the dmac is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the cpu. 00 80 c0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 c0 40 415 11.3.4 non-overlapping tpc output sample setup procedure for non-overlapping tpc output: figure 11-6 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping tpc output. figure 11-6 setup procedure for non-overlapping tpc output (example) non-overlapping tpc output set next tpc output data compare match a? no yes set next tpc output data start counter itu setup port and tpc setup itu setup set initial output data set up tpc output enable tpc transfer select tpc transfer trigger select non-overlapping groups 1 2 3 4 12 10 11 5 6 7 8 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. set tior to make gra and grb output compare registers (with output inhibited). set the tpc output trigger period in grb and the non-overlap margin in gra. select the counter clock source with bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. select the counter clear source with bits cclr1 and cclr0. enable the imfa interrupt in tier. the dmac can also be set up to transfer data to the next data register. set the initial output values in the dr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output. set the ddr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output to 1. set the nder bits of the pins to be used for tpc output to 1. in tpcr, select the itu compare match event to be used as the tpc output trigger. in tpmr, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. set the next tpc output values in the ndr bits. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. at each imfa interrupt, write the next output value in the ndr bits. select gr functions set gr values select counting operation select interrupt requests 416 example of non-overlapping tpc output (example of four-phase complementary non- overlapping output): figure 11-7 shows an example of the use of tpc output for four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output. figure 11-7 non-overlapping tpc output example (four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output) grb h'0000 ndrb pbdr tp 15 tp 14 tp 13 tp 12 tp 11 tp 10 tp 9 tp 8 time 95 00 65 95 59 56 95 65 05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65 tcnt h'ff is written in pbddr and nderb, and bits g3cms1, g3cms0, g2cms1, and g2cms0 are set tcnt value non-overlap margin the output trigger itu channel is set up so that gra and grb are output compare registers and the counter will be cleared by compare match b. the tpc output trigger period is set in grb. the non- overlap margin is set in gra. the imiea bit is set to 1 in tier to enable imfa interrupts. this operation example is described below. bits g3nov and g2nov are set to 1 in tpmr to select non-overlapping output. output data h'95 is written in ndrb. the timer counter in this itu channel is started. when compare match b occurs, outputs change from in tpcr to select compare match in the itu channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. 1 to 0. when compare match a occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value of gra). the imfa interrupt service routine writes the next output data (h'65) in ndrb. four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained by writing h'59, h'56, h'95 at successive imfa interrupts. if the dmac is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the cpu. gra 417 11.3.5 tpc output triggering by input capture tpc output can be triggered by itu input capture as well as by compare match. if gra functions as an input capture register in the itu channel selected in tpcr, tpc output will be triggered by the input capture signal. figure 11-8 shows the timing. figure 11-8 tpc output triggering by input capture (example) tioc pin input capture signal ndr dr n n m 418 11.4 usage notes 11.4.1 operation of tpc output pins tp 0 to tp 15 are multiplexed with itu, dmac, address bus, and other pin functions. when itu, dmac, or address output is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for tpc output. the data transfer from ndr bits to dr bits takes place, however, regardless of the usage of the pin. pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur. 11.4.2 note on non-overlapping output during non-overlapping operation, the transfer of ndr bit values to dr bits takes place as follows. 1. ndr bits are always transferred to dr bits at compare match a. 2. at compare match b, ndr bits are transferred only if their value is 0. bits are not transferred if their value is 1. figure 11-9 illustrates the non-overlapping tpc output operation. figure 11-9 non-overlapping tpc output ddr nder qq tpc output pin dr ndr c qd qd compare match a compare match b internal data bus 419 therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match b occur before compare match a. ndr contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match b to compare match a (the non-overlap margin). this can be accomplished by having the imfa interrupt service routine write the next data in ndr, or by having the imfa interrupt activate the dmac. the next data must be written before the next compare match b occurs. figure 11-10 shows the timing relationships. figure 11-10 non-overlapping operation and ndr write timing compare match a compare match b ndr write ndr ndr write dr 0/1 output 0/1 output 0 output 0 output do not write to ndr in this interval do not write to ndr in this interval write to ndr in this interval write to ndr in this interval 420 section 12 watchdog timer 12.1 overview the h8/3048 series has an on-chip watchdog timer (wdt). the wdt has two selectable functions: it can operate as a watchdog timer to supervise system operation, or it can operate as an interval timer. as a watchdog timer, it generates a reset signal for the chip if a system crash allows the timer counter (tcnt) to overflow before being rewritten. in interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is requested at each tcnt overflow. 12.1.1 features wdt features are listed below. selection of eight counter clock sources ?2, ?32, ?64, ?128, ?256, ?512, ?2048, or ?4096 interval timer option timer counter overflow generates a reset signal or interrupt. the reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation. an interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. watchdog timer reset signal resets the entire chip internally, and can also be output externally. the reset signal generated by timer counter overflow during watchdog timer operation resets the entire chip internally. an external reset signal can be output from the reso pin to reset other system devices simultaneously. 421 12.1.2 block diagram figure 12-1 shows a block diagram of the wdt. figure 12-1 wdt block diagram 12.1.3 pin configuration table 12-1 describes the wdt output pin. table 12-1 wdt pin name abbreviation i/o function reset output reso output * external output of the watchdog timer reset signal note: * open-drain output. ?2 ?32 ?64 ?128 ?256 ?512 ?2048 ?4096 tcnt tcsr rstcsr reset control interrupt signal reset (internal, external) (interval timer) interrupt control overflow clock clock selector read/ write control internal data bus internal clock sources legend tcnt: tcsr: rstcsr: timer counter timer control/status register reset control/status register 422 12.1.4 register configuration table 12-2 summarizes the wdt registers. table 12-2 wdt registers address * 1 write * 2 read name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffa8 h'ffa8 timer control/status register tcsr r/(w) * 3 h'18 h'ffa9 timer counter tcnt r/w h'00 h'ffaa h'ffab reset control/status register rstcsr r/(w) * 3 h'3f notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. write word data starting at this address. 3. only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 423 12.2 register descriptions 12.2.1 timer counter (tcnt) tcnt is an 8-bit readable and writable* up-counter. when the tme bit is set to 1 in tcsr, tcnt starts counting pulses generated from an internal clock source selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in tcsr. when the count overflows (changes from h'ff to h'00), the ovf bit is set to 1 in tcsr. tcnt is initialized to h'00 by a reset and when the tme bit is cleared to 0. note: * tcnt is write-protected by a password. for details see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 424 12.2.2 timer control/status register (tcsr) tcsr is an 8-bit readable and writable *1 register. its functions include selecting the timer mode and clock source. bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 by a reset. in software standby mode bits 2 to 0 are not initialized, but retain their previous values. notes: 1. tcsr differs from other registers in being more difficult to write. for details see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bit initial value read/write 7 ovf 0 r/(w) 6 wt/it 0 r/w 5 tme 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w overflow flag status flag indicating overflow clock select these bits select the tcnt clock source timer mode select selects the mode timer enable selects whether tcnt runs or halts reserved bits * 2 425 bit 7?verflow flag (ovf): this status flag indicates that the timer counter has overflowed from h'ff to h'00. bit 7 ovf description 0 [clearing condition] cleared by reading ovf when ovf = 1, then writing 0 in ovf (initial value) 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt changes from h'ff to h'00 bit 6?imer mode select (wt/ it ): selects whether to use the wdt as a watchdog timer or interval timer. if used as an interval timer, the wdt generates an interval timer interrupt request when tcnt overflows. if used as a watchdog timer, the wdt generates a reset signal when tcnt overflows. bit 6 wt/ it description 0 interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts (initial value) 1 watchdog timer: generates a reset signal bit 5?imer enable (tme): selects whether tcnt runs or is halted. when wt/ it = 1, clear the syscr software standby bit (ssby) to 0, then set the tme to 1. when ssby is set to 1, clear tme to 0. bit 5 tme description 0 tcnt is initialized to h'00 and halted (initial value) 1 tcnt is counting and cpu interrupt requests are enabled bits 4 and 3?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. 426 bits 2 to 0?lock select 2 to 0 (cks2/1/0): these bits select one of eight internal clock sources, obtained by prescaling the system clock (?, for input to tcnt. bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 cks2 cks1 cks0 description 0 0 0 ?2 (initial value) 1 ?32 1 0 ?64 1 ?128 1 0 0 ?256 1 ?512 1 0 ?2048 1 ?4096 12.2.3 reset control/status register (rstcsr) rstcsr is an 8-bit readable and writable *1 register that indicates when a reset signal has been generated by watchdog timer overflow, and controls external output of the reset signal. bits 7 and 6 are initialized by input of a reset signal at the res pin. they are not initialized by reset signals generated by watchdog timer overflow. notes: 1. rstcsr differs from other registers in being more difficult to write. for details see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. 2. only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. bit initial value read/write 7 wrst 0 r/(w) 6 rstoe 0 r/w 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 * watchdog timer reset indicates that a reset signal has been generated reserved bits reset output enable enables or disables external output of the reset signal 2 427 bit 7?atchdog timer reset (wrst): during watchdog timer operation, this bit indicates that tcnt has overflowed and generated a reset signal. this reset signal resets the entire chip internally. if bit rstoe is set to 1, this reset signal is also output (low) at the reso pin to initialize external system devices. bit 7 wrst description 0 [clearing conditions] cleared to 0 by reset signal input at res pin (initial value) cleared by reading wrst when wrst = 1, then writing 0 in wrst 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt overflow generates a reset signal during watchdog timer operation bit 6?eset output enable (rstoe): enables or disables external output at the reso pin of the reset signal generated if tcnt overflows during watchdog timer operation. bit 6 rstoe description 0 reset signal is not output externally (initial value) 1 reset signal is output externally bits 5 to 0?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. 428 12.2.4 notes on register access the watchdog timer s tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write. the procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below. writing to tcnt and tcsr: these registers must be written by a word transfer instruction. they cannot be written by byte instructions. figure 12-2 shows the format of data written to tcnt and tcsr. tcnt and tcsr both have the same write address. the write data must be contained in the lower byte of the written word. the upper byte must contain h'5a (password for tcnt) or h'a5 (password for tcsr). this transfers the write data from the lower byte to tcnt or tcsr. figure 12-2 format of data written to tcnt and tcsr 15 8 7 0 h'5a write data address h'ffa8 * 15 8 7 0 h'a5 write data address h'ffa8 * tcnt write tcsr write note: lower 16 bits of the address. * 429 writing to rstcsr: rstcsr must be written by a word transfer instruction. it cannot be written by byte transfer instructions. figure 12-3 shows the format of data written to rstcsr. to write 0 in the wrst bit, the write data must have h'a5 in the upper byte and h'00 in the lower byte. the h'00 in the lower byte clears the wrst bit in rstcsr to 0. to write to the rstoe bit, the upper byte must contain h'5a and the lower byte must contain the write data. writing this word transfers a write data value into the rstoe bit. figure 12-3 format of data written to rstcsr reading tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr: these registers are read like other registers. byte access instructions can be used. the read addresses are h'ffa8 for tcsr, h'ffa9 for tcnt, and h'ffab for rstcsr, as listed in table 12-3. table 12-3 read addresses of tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr address * register h'ffa8 tcsr h'ffa9 tcnt h'ffab rstcsr note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 15 8 7 0 h'a5 h'00 address h'ffaa * 15 8 7 0 h'5a write data address h'ffaa * writing 0 in wrst bit writing to rstoe bit note: lower 16 bits of the address. * 430 12.3 operation operations when the wdt is used as a watchdog timer and as an interval timer are described below. 12.3.1 watchdog timer operation figure 12-4 illustrates watchdog timer operation. to use the wdt as a watchdog timer, set the wt/ it and tme bits to 1 in tcsr. software must prevent tcnt overflow by rewriting the tcnt value (normally by writing h'00) before overflow occurs. if tcnt fails to be rewritten and overflows due to a system crash etc., the chip is internally reset for a duration of 518 states. the watchdog reset signal can be externally output from the reso pin to reset external system devices. the reset signal is output externally for 132 states. external output can be enabled or disabled by the rstoe bit in rstcsr. a watchdog reset has the same vector as a reset generated by input at the res pin. software can distinguish a res reset from a watchdog reset by checking the wrst bit in rstcsr. if a res reset and a watchdog reset occur simultaneously, the res reset takes priority. figure 12-4 watchdog timer operation h'ff h'00 reso wdt overflow start h'00 written in tcnt reset tme set to 1 h'00 written in tcnt internal reset signal 518 states 132 states tcnt count value ovf = 1 431 12.3.2 interval timer operation figure 12-5 illustrates interval timer operation. to use the wdt as an interval timer, clear bit wt/ it to 0 and set bit tme to 1 in tcsr. an interval timer interrupt request is generated at each tcnt overflow. this function can be used to generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals. figure 12-5 interval timer operation tcnt count value time t interval timer interrupt interval timer interrupt interval timer interrupt interval timer interrupt wt/ = 0 tme = 1 it h'ff h'00 432 12.3.3 timing of setting of overflow flag (ovf) figure 12-6 shows the timing of setting of the ovf flag in tcsr. the ovf flag is set to 1 when tcnt overflows. at the same time, a reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation, or an interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. figure 12-6 timing of setting of ovf tcnt overflow signal ovf h'ff h'00 433 12.3.4 timing of setting of watchdog timer reset bit (wrst) the wrst bit in rstcsr is valid when bits wt/ it and tme are both set to 1 in tcsr. figure 12-7 shows the timing of setting of wrst and the internal reset timing. the wrst bit is set to 1 when tcnt overflows and ovf is set to 1. at the same time an internal reset signal is generated for the entire chip. this internal reset signal clears ovf to 0, but the wrst bit remains set to 1. the reset routine must therefore clear the wrst bit. figure 12-7 timing of setting of wrst bit and internal reset tcnt overflow signal ovf wrst h'ff h'00 wdt internal reset 434 12.4 interrupts during interval timer operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (wovi). the interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the ovf bit is set to 1 in tcsr. 12.5 usage notes contention between tcnt write and increment: if a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the t 3 state of a write cycle to tcnt, the write takes priority and the timer count is not incremented. see figure 12-8. figure 12-8 contention between tcnt write and increment changing cks2 to cks0 values: halt tcnt by clearing the tme bit to 0 in tcsr before changing the values of bits cks2 to cks0. tcnt tcnt nm counter write data t 3 t 2 t 1 write cycle: cpu writes to tcnt internal write signal tcnt input clock 435 section 13 serial communication interface 13.1 overview the h8/3048 series has a serial communication interface (sci) with two independent channels. the two channels are functionally identical. the sci can communicate in asynchronous or synchronous mode. it also has a multiprocessor communication function for serial communication among two or more processors. when the sci is not used, it can be halted to conserve power. each sci channel can be halted independently. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. channel 0 (sci0) also has a smart card interface function conforming to the iso/iec7816-3 (identification card) standard. this function supports serial communication with a smart card. for details, see section 14, smart card interface. 13.1.1 features sci features are listed below. selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode for serial communication a. asynchronous mode serial data communication is synchronized one character at a time. the sci can communicate with a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (uart), asynchronous communication interface adapter (acia), or other chip that employs standard asynchronous serial communication. it can also communicate with two or more other processors using the multiprocessor communication function. there are twelve selectable serial data communication formats. data length: 7 or 8 bits stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits parity bit: even, odd, or none multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0 receive error detection: parity, overrun, and framing errors break detection: by reading the rxd level directly when a framing error occurs 437 b. synchronous mode serial data communication is synchronized with a clock signal. the sci can communicate with other chips having a synchronous communication function. there is one serial data communication format. data length: 8 bits receive error detection: overrun errors full duplex communication the transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the sci can transmit and receive simultaneously. the transmitting and receiving sections are both double-buffered, so serial data can be transmitted and received continuously. built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates selectable transmit/receive clock sources: internal clock from baud rate generator, or external clock from the sck pin. four types of interrupts transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. the transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci0 can activate the dma controller (dmac) to transfer data. 438 13.1.2 block diagram figure 13-1 shows a block diagram of the sci. figure 13-1 sci block diagram rxd txd sck rdr rsr tdr tsr ssr scr smr brr module data bus bus interface internal data bus transmit/ receive control baud rate generator ?4 ?16 ?64 clock parity generate parity check tei txi rxi eri legend external clock rsr: rdr: tsr: tdr: smr: scr: ssr: brr: receive shift register receive data register transmit shift register transmit data register serial mode register serial control register serial status register bit rate register 439 13.1.3 input/output pins the sci has serial pins for each channel as listed in table 13-1. table 13-1 sci pins channel name abbreviation i/o function 0 serial clock pin sck 0 input/output sci 0 clock input/output receive data pin rxd 0 input sci 0 receive data input transmit data pin txd 0 output sci 0 transmit data output 1 serial clock pin sck 1 input/output sci 1 clock input/output receive data pin rxd 1 input sci 1 receive data input transmit data pin txd 1 output sci 1 transmit data output 13.1.4 register configuration the sci has internal registers as listed in table 13-2. these registers select asynchronous or synchronous mode, specify the data format and bit rate, and control the transmitter and receiver sections. table 13-2 registers channel address * 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value 0 h'ffb0 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h'ffb1 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h'ffb2 serial control register scr r/w h'00 h'ffb3 transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h'ffb4 serial status register ssr r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'ffb5 receive data register rdr r h'00 1 h'ffb8 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h'ffb9 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h'ffba serial control register scr r/w h'00 h'ffbb transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h'ffbc serial status register ssr r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'ffbd receive data register rdr r h'00 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 440 13.2 register descriptions 13.2.1 receive shift register (rsr) rsr is the register that receives serial data. the sci loads serial data input at the rxd pin into rsr in the order received, lsb (bit 0) first, thereby converting the data to parallel data. when 1 byte has been received, it is automatically transferred to rdr. the cpu cannot read or write rsr directly. 13.2.2 receive data register (rdr) rdr is the register that stores received serial data. when the sci finishes receiving 1 byte of serial data, it transfers the received data from rsr into rdr for storage. rsr is then ready to receive the next data. this double buffering allows data to be received continuously. rdr is a read-only register. its contents cannot be modified by the cpu. rdr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit read/write 7 6 5 4 3 0 2 1 bit initial value read/write 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 0 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 441 13.2.3 transmit shift register (tsr) tsr is the register that transmits serial data. the sci loads transmit data from tdr into tsr, then transmits the data serially from the txd pin, lsb (bit 0) first. after transmitting one data byte, the sci automatically loads the next transmit data from tdr into tsr and starts transmitting it. if the tdre flag is set to 1 in ssr, however, the sci does not load the tdr contents into tsr. the cpu cannot read or write tsr directly. 13.2.4 transmit data register (tdr) tdr is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. when the sci detects that tsr is empty, it moves transmit data written in tdr from tdr into tsr and starts serial transmission. continuous serial transmission is possible by writing the next transmit data in tdr during serial transmission from tsr. the cpu can always read and write tdr. tdr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. bit read/write 7 6 5 4 3 0 2 1 bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 442 13.2.5 serial mode register (smr) smr is an 8-bit register that specifies the sci serial communication format and selects the clock source for the baud rate generator. the cpu can always read and write smr. smr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 c/a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w communication mode selects asynchronous or synchronous mode clock select 1/0 these bits select the baud rate generator? clock source character length selects character length in asynchronous mode parity enable selects whether a parity bit is added parity mode selects even or odd parity stop bit length selects the stop bit length multiprocessor mode selects the multiprocessor function 443 bit 7?ommunication mode (c/ a ): selects whether the sci operates in asynchronous or synchronous mode. bit 7 c/ a description 0 asynchronous mode (initial value) 1 synchronous mode bit 6?haracter length (chr): selects 7-bit or 8-bit data length in asynchronous mode. in synchronous mode the data length is 8 bits regardless of the chr setting. bit 6 chr description 0 8-bit data (initial value) 1 7-bit data * note: * when 7-bit data is selected, the msb (bit 7) in tdr is not transmitted. bit 5?arity enable (pe): in asynchronous mode, this bit enables or disables the addition of a parity bit to transmit data, and the checking of the parity bit in receive data. in synchronous mode the parity bit is neither added nor checked, regardless of the pe setting. bit 5 pe description 0 parity bit not added or checked (initial value) 1 parity bit added and checked * note: * when pe is set to 1, an even or odd parity bit is added to transmit data according to the even or odd parity mode selected by the o/ e bit, and the parity bit in receive data is checked to see that it matches the even or odd mode selected by the o/ e bit. 444 bit 4?arity mode (o/ e ): selects even or odd parity. the o/ e bit setting is valid in asynchronous mode when the pe bit is set to 1 to enable the adding and checking of a parity bit. the o/ e setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when parity adding and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode. bit 4 o/ e description 0 even parity * 1 (initial value) 1 odd parity * 2 notes: 1. when even parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an even number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. receive data must have an even number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. 2. when odd parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an odd number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. receive data must have an odd number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. bit 3?top bit length (stop): selects one or two stop bits in asynchronous mode. this setting is used only in asynchronous mode. in synchronous mode no stop bit is added, so the stop bit setting is ignored. bit 3 stop description 0 one stop bit * 1 (initial value) 1 two stop bits * 2 notes: 1. one stop bit (with value 1) is added at the end of each transmitted character. 2. two stop bits (with value 1) are added at the end of each transmitted character. in receiving, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the stop bit setting. if the second stop bit is 1 it is treated as a stop bit. if the second stop bit is 0 it is treated as the start bit of the next incoming character. 445 bit 2?ultiprocessor mode (mp): selects a multiprocessor format. when a multiprocessor format is selected, parity settings made by the pe and o/ e bits are ignored. the mp bit setting is valid only in asynchronous mode. it is ignored in synchronous mode. for further information on the multiprocessor communication function, see section 13.3.3, multiprocessor communication. bit 2 mp description 0 multiprocessor function disabled (initial value) 1 multiprocessor format selected bits 1 and 0?lock select 1 and 0 (cks1/0): these bits select the clock source of the on-chip baud rate generator. four clock sources are available: ? ?4, ?16, and ?64. for the relationship between the clock source, bit rate register setting, and baud rate, see section 13.2.8, bit rate register (brr). bit 1 bit 0 cks1 cks0 description 0 0 (initial value) 0 1 ?4 1 0 ?16 1 1 ?64 446 13.2.6 serial control register (scr) scr enables the sci transmitter and receiver, enables or disables serial clock output in asynchronous mode, enables or disables interrupts, and selects the transmit/receive clock source. the cpu can always read and write scr. scr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w transmit interrupt enable enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupts (txi) clock enable 1/0 these bits select the sci clock source receive interrupt enable enables or disables receive-data-full interrupts (rxi) and receive-error interrupts (eri) transmit enable enables or disables the transmitter receive enable enables or disables the receiver multiprocessor interrupt enable enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts transmit-end interrupt enable enables or disables transmit- end interrupts (tei) 447 bit 7?ransmit interrupt enable (tie): enables or disables the transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) requested when the tdre flag in ssr is set to 1 due to transfer of serial transmit data from tdr to tsr. bit 7 tie description 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is disabled * (initial value) 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is enabled note: * txi interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the tdre flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the tie bit to 0. bit 6?eceive interrupt enable (rie): enables or disables the receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) requested when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr due to transfer of serial receive data from rsr to rdr; also enables or disables the receive-error interrupt (eri). bit 6 rie description 0 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are disabled (initial value) 1 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are enabled note: * rxi and eri interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the rdrf, fer, per, or orer flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the rie bit to 0. bit 5?ransmit enable (te): enables or disables the start of sci serial transmitting operations. bit 5 te description 0 transmitting disabled * 1 (initial value) 1 transmitting enabled * 2 notes: 1. the tdre bit is locked at 1 in ssr. 2. in the enabled state, serial transmitting starts when the tdre bit in ssr is cleared to 0 after writing of transmit data into tdr. select the transmit format in smr before setting the te bit to 1. 448 bit 4?eceive enable (re): enables or disables the start of sci serial receiving operations. bit 4 re description 0 receiving disabled * 1 (initial value) 1 receiving enabled * 2 notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 does not affect the rdrf, fer, per, and orer flags. these flags retain their previous values. 2. in the enabled state, serial receiving starts when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode, or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. select the receive format in smr before setting the re bit to 1. bit 3?ultiprocessor interrupt enable (mpie): enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. the mpie setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only if the mp bit is set to 1 in smr. the mpie setting is ignored in synchronous mode or when the mp bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 mpie description 0 multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) (initial value) [clearing conditions] the mpie bit is cleared to 0. mpb = 1 in received data. 1 multiprocessor interrupts are enabled * receive-data-full interrupts (rxi), receive-error interrupts (eri), and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer status flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. note: * the sci does not transfer receive data from rsr to rdr, does not detect receive errors, and does not set the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr. when it receives data in which mpb = 1, the sci sets the mpb bit to 1 in ssr, automatically clears the mpie bit to 0, enables rxi and eri interrupts (if the rie bit is set to 1 in scr), and allows the fer and orer flags to be set. 449 bit 2?ransmit-end interrupt enable (teie): enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt (tei) requested if tdr does not contain new transmit data when the msb is transmitted. bit 2 teie description 0 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are disabled * (initial value) 1 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are enabled * note: * tei interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the tdre flag in ssr, then clearing the tdre flag to 0, thereby also clearing the tend flag to 0; or by clearing the teie bit to 0. bits 1 and 0?lock enable 1 and 0 (cke1/0): these bits select the sci clock source and enable or disable clock output from the sck pin. depending on the settings of cke1 and cke0, the sck pin can be used for generic input/output, serial clock output, or serial clock input. the cke0 setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only when the sci is internally clocked (cke1 = 0). the cke0 setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when an external clock source is selected (cke1 = 1). select the sci operating mode in smr before setting the cke1 and cke0 bits. for further details on selection of the sci clock source, see table 13-9 in section 13.3, operation. bit 1 bit 0 cke1 cke0 description 0 0 asynchronous mode internal clock, sck pin available for generic input/output * 1 synchronous mode internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output * 1 0 1 asynchronous mode internal clock, sck pin used for clock output * 2 synchronous mode internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output 1 0 asynchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for clock input * 3 synchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input 1 1 asynchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for clock input * 3 synchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input notes: 1. initial value 2. the output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate. 3. the input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate. 450 13.2.7 serial status register (ssr) ssr is an 8-bit register containing multiprocessor bit values, and status flags that indicate sci operating status. bit initial value read/write 7 tdre 1 r/(w) 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) 5 orer 0 r/(w) 4 fer 0 r/(w) 3 per 0 r/(w) 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r transmit data register empty status flag indicating that transmit data has been transferred from tdr into tsr and new data can be written in tdr multiprocessor bit transfer value of multi- processor bit to be transmitted receive data register full status flag indicating that data has been received and stored in rdr overrun error status flag indicating detection of a receive overrun error framing error status flag indicating detection of a receive framing error parity error status flag indicating detection of a receive parity error transmit end status flag indicating end of transmission * note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * **** multiprocessor bit stores the received multiprocessor bit value 451 the cpu can always read and write ssr, but cannot write 1 in the tdre, rdrf, orer, per, and fer flags. these flags can be cleared to 0 only if they have first been read while set to 1. the tend and mpb flags are read-only bits that cannot be written. ssr is initialized to h'84 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ransmit data register empty (tdre): indicates that the sci has loaded transmit data from tdr into tsr and the next serial transmit data can be written in tdr. bit 7 tdre description 0 tdr contains valid transmit data [clearing conditions] software reads tdre while it is set to 1, then writes 0. the dmac writes data in tdr. 1 tdr does not contain valid transmit data (initial value) [setting conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. the te bit in scr is cleared to 0. tdr contents are loaded into tsr, so new data can be written in tdr. bit 6?eceive data register full (rdrf): indicates that rdr contains new receive data. bit 6 rdrf description 0 rdr does not contain new receive data (initial value) [clearing conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. software reads rdrf while it is set to 1, then writes 0. the dmac reads data from rdr. 1 rdr contains new receive data [setting condition] when serial data is received normally and transferred from rsr to rdr. note: the rdr contents and rdrf flag are not affected by detection of receive errors or by clearing of the re bit to 0 in scr. they retain their previous values. if the rdrf flag is still set to 1 when reception of the next data ends, an overrun error occurs and receive data is lost. 452 bit 5?verrun error (orer): indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to an overrun error. bit 5 orer description 0 receiving is in progress or has ended normally (initial value) * 1 [clearing conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. software reads orer while it is set to 1, then writes 0. 1 a receive overrun error occurred * 2 [setting condition] reception of the next serial data ends when rdrf = 1. notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 in scr does not affect the orer flag, which retains its previous value. 2. rdr continues to hold the receive data before the overrun error, so subsequent receive data is lost. serial receiving cannot continue while the orer flag is set to 1. in synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. bit 4?raming error (fer): indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a framing error in asynchronous mode. bit 4 fer description 0 receiving is in progress or has ended normally (initial value) * 1 [clearing conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. software reads fer while it is set to 1, then writes 0. 1 a receive framing error occurred * 2 [setting condition] the stop bit at the end of receive data is checked and found to be 0. notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 in scr does not affect the fer flag, which retains its previous value. 2. when the stop bit length is 2 bits, only the first bit is checked. the second stop bit is not checked. when a framing error occurs the sci transfers the receive data into rdr but does not set the rdrf flag. serial receiving cannot continue while the fer flag is set to 1. in synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. 453 bit 3?arity error (per): indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a parity error in asynchronous mode. bit 3 per description 0 receiving is in progress or has ended normally * 1 (initial value) [clearing conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. software reads per while it is set to 1, then writes 0. 1 a receive parity error occurred * 2 [setting condition] the number of 1s in receive data, including the parity bit, does not match the even or odd parity setting of o/ e in smr. notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 in scr does not affect the per flag, which retains its previous value. 2. when a parity error occurs the sci transfers the receive data into rdr but does not set the rdrf flag. serial receiving cannot continue while the per flag is set to 1. in synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. bit 2?ransmit end (tend): indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was transmitted tdr did not contain new transmit data, so transmission has ended. the tend flag is a read-only bit and cannot be written. bit 2 tend description 0 transmission is in progress [clearing conditions] software reads tdre while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the tdre flag. the dmac writes data in tdr. 1 end of transmission (initial value) [setting conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. the te bit is cleared to 0 in scr. tdre is 1 when the last bit of a serial character is transmitted. 454 bit 1?ultiprocessor bit (mpb): stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in receive data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous mode. mpb is a read-only bit and cannot be written. bit 1 mpb description 0 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0 * (initial value) 1 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 note: * if the re bit is cleared to 0 when a multiprocessor format is selected, mpb retains its previous value. bit 0?ultiprocessor bit transfer (mpbt): stores the value of the multiprocessor bit added to transmit data when a multiprocessor format is selected for transmitting in asynchronous mode. the mpbt setting is ignored in synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not selected, or when the sci is not transmitting. bit 0 mpbt description 0 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 (initial value) 1 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 13.2.8 bit rate register (brr) brr is an 8-bit register that, together with the cks1 and cks0 bits in smr that select the baud rate generator clock source, determines the serial communication bit rate. the cpu can always read and write brr. brr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. the two sci channels have independent baud rate generator control, so different values can be set in the two channels. table 13-3 shows examples of brr settings in asynchronous mode. table 13-4 shows examples of brr settings in synchronous mode. bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 455 table 13-3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode ?(mhz) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 bit rate error error error error (bits/s) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) 110 1 141 0.03 1 148 ?.04 1 174 ?.26 1 212 0.03 150 1 103 0.16 1 108 0.21 1 127 0 1 155 0.16 300 0 207 0.16 0 217 0.21 0 255 0 1 77 0.16 600 0 103 0.16 0 108 0.21 0 127 0 0 155 0.16 1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 ?.70 0 63 0 0 77 0.16 2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.14 0 31 0 0 38 0.16 4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 ?.48 0 15 0 0 19 ?.34 9600 0 6 ?.99 0 6 ?.48 0 7 0 0 9 ?.34 19200 0 2 8.51 0 2 13.78 0 3 0 0 4 ?.34 31250 0 1 0 0 1 4.86 0 1 22.88 0 2 0 38400 0 1 ?8.62 0 1 ?4.67 0 1 0 ?(mhz) 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 bit rate error error error error (bits/s) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) 110 2 64 0.70 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 ?.25 150 1 191 0 1 207 0.16 1 255 0 2 64 0.16 300 1 95 0 1 103 0.16 1 127 0 1 129 0.16 600 0 191 0 0 207 0.16 0 255 0 1 64 0.16 1200 0 95 0 0 103 0.16 0 127 0 0 129 0.16 2400 0 47 0 0 51 0.16 0 63 0 0 64 0.16 4800 0 23 0 0 25 0.16 0 31 0 0 32 ?.36 9600 0 11 0 0 12 0.16 0 15 0 0 15 1.73 19200 0 5 0 0 6 ?.99 0 7 0 0 7 1.73 31250 0 3 0 0 4 ?.70 0 4 0 38400 0 2 0 0 2 8.51 0 3 0 0 3 1.73 456 table 13-3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode (cont) ?(mhz) 6 6.144 7.3728 8 bit rate error error error error (bits/s) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) 110 2 106 ?.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 ?.07 2 141 0.03 150 2 77 0.16 2 79 0 2 95 0 2 103 0.16 300 1 155 0.16 1 159 0 1 191 0 1 207 0.16 600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0 1 95 0 1 103 0.16 1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0 0 191 0 0 207 0.16 2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0 0 95 0 0 103 0.16 4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0 0 47 0 0 51 0.16 9600 0 19 ?.34 0 19 0 0 23 0 0 25 0.16 19200 0 9 ?.34 0 9 0 0 11 0 0 12 0.16 31250 0 5 0 0 5 2.40 0 6 5.33 0 7 0 38400 0 4 ?.34 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 ?.99 ?(mhz) 9.8304 10 12 12.288 bit rate error error error error (bits/s) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) 110 2 174 ?.26 2 177 ?.25 2 212 0.03 2 217 0.08 150 2 127 0 2 129 0.16 2 155 0.16 2 159 0 300 1 255 0 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16 2 79 0 600 1 127 0 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16 1 159 0 1200 0 255 0 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16 1 79 0 2400 0 127 0 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16 0 159 0 4800 0 63 0 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16 0 79 0 9600 0 31 0 0 32 ?.36 0 38 0.16 0 39 0 19200 0 15 0 0 15 1.73 0 19 ?.34 0 19 0 31250 0 9 ?.70 0 9 0 0 11 0 0 11 2.40 38400 0 7 0 0 7 1.73 0 9 ?.34 0 9 0 457 table 13-3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode (cont) ?(mhz) 13 14 14.7456 16 bit rate error error error error (bits/s) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) n n (%) 110 2 230 ?.08 2 248 ?.17 3 64 0.70 3 70 0.03 150 2 168 0.16 2 181 0.16 2 191 0 2 207 0.16 300 2 84 ?.43 2 90 0.16 2 95 0 2 103 0.16 600 1 168 0.16 1 181 0.16 1 191 0 1 207 0.16 1200 1 84 ?.43 1 90 0.16 1 95 0 1 103 0.16 2400 0 168 0.16 0 181 0.16 0 191 0 0 207 0.16 4800 0 84 ?.43 0 90 0.16 0 95 0 0 103 0.16 9600 0 41 0.76 0 45 ?.93 0 47 0 0 51 0.16 19200 0 20 0.76 0 22 ?.93 0 23 0 0 25 0.16 31250 0 12 0.00 0 13 0 0 14 ?.70 0 15 0 38400 0 10 ?.82 0 10 3.57 0 11 0 0 12 0.16 table 13-3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode (cont) ?(mhz) 18 bit rate error (bits/s) n n (%) 110 3 79 ?.12 150 2 233 0.16 300 2 116 0.16 600 1 233 0.16 1200 1 116 0.16 2400 0 233 0.16 4800 0 116 0.16 9600 0 58 ?.69 19200 0 28 1.02 31250 0 17 0.00 38400 0 14 ?.34 458 table 13-4 examples of bit rates and brr settings in synchronous mode ?(mhz) 2 4 8 10131618 nnnnnnnnnnnnnn 110 3 70 250 2 124 2 249 3 124 3 202 3 249 500 1 249 2 124 2 249 3 101 3 124 3 140 1 k 1 124 1 249 2 124 2 202 2 249 3 69 2.5 k 0 199 1 99 1 199 1 249 2 80 2 99 2 112 5 k 0 99 0 199 1 99 1 124 1 162 1 199 1 224 10 k 0 49 0 99 0 199 0 249 1 80 1 99 1 112 25 k 0 19 0 39 0 79 0 99 0 129 0 159 0 179 50 k 0 9 0 19 0 39 0 49 0 64 0 79 0 89 100 k 0 4 0 9 0 19 0 24 0 39 0 44 250 k 0 1 0 3 0 7 0 9 0 12 0 15 0 17 500 k 0 0 * 010304 0708 1 m 0 0 * 01 0304 2 m 0 0 * 01 2.5 m 0 0 * 4 m 0 0 * note: settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended. legend blank: no setting available ? setting possible, but error occurs * : continuous transmit/receive not possible the brr setting is calculated as follows: asynchronous mode: n = 10 6 ?1 synchronous mode: n = 10 6 ?1 b: bit rate (bits/s) n: brr setting for baud rate generator (0 n 255) ? system clock frequency (mhz) n: baud rate generator clock source (n = 0, 1, 2, 3) (for the clock sources and values of n, see the following table.) bit rate (bits/s) 64 2 2n? b 8 2 2n? b 459 smr settings n clock source cks1 cks0 0 0 0 1 ?4 0 1 2 ?16 1 0 3 ?64 1 1 the bit rate error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows. error (%) = ? 100 ? 10 6 (n + 1) b 64 2 2n? 460 table 13-5 indicates the maximum bit rates in asynchronous mode for various system clock frequencies. tables 13-6 and 13-7 indicate the maximum bit rates with external clock input. table 13-5 maximum bit rates for various frequencies (asynchronous mode) settings ?(mhz) maximum bit rate (bits/s) n n 2 62500 0 0 2.097152 65536 0 0 2.4576 76800 0 0 3 93750 0 0 3.6864 115200 0 0 4 125000 0 0 4.9152 153600 0 0 5 156250 0 0 6 187500 0 0 6.144 192000 0 0 7.3728 230400 0 0 8 250000 0 0 9.8304 307200 0 0 10 312500 0 0 12 375000 0 0 12.288 384000 0 0 14 437500 0 0 14.7456 460800 0 0 16 500000 0 0 17.2032 537600 0 0 18 562500 0 0 461 table 13-6 maximum bit rates with external clock input (asynchronous mode) ?(mhz) external input clock (mhz) maximum bit rate (bits/s) 2 0.5000 31250 2.097152 0.5243 32768 2.4576 0.6144 38400 3 0.7500 46875 3.6864 0.9216 57600 4 1.0000 62500 4.9152 1.2288 76800 5 1.2500 78125 6 1.5000 93750 6.144 1.5360 96000 7.3728 1.8432 115200 8 2.0000 125000 9.8304 2.4576 153600 10 2.5000 156250 12 3.0000 187500 12.288 3.0720 192000 14 3.5000 218750 14.7456 3.6864 230400 16 4.0000 250000 17.2032 4.3008 268800 18 4.5000 281250 462 table 13-7 maximum bit rates with external clock input (synchronous mode) ?(mhz) external input clock (mhz) maximum bit rate (bits/s) 2 0.3333 333333.3 4 0.6667 666666.7 6 1.0000 1000000.0 8 1.3333 1333333.3 10 1.6667 1666666.7 12 2.0000 2000000.0 14 2.3333 2333333.3 16 2.6667 2666666.7 18 3.0000 3000000.0 463 13.3 operation 13.3.1 overview the sci has an asynchronous mode in which characters are synchronized individually, and a synchronous mode in which communication is synchronized with clock pulses. serial communication is possible in either mode. asynchronous or synchronous mode and the communication format are selected in smr, as shown in table 13-8. the sci clock source is selected by the c/ a bit in smr and the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr, as shown in table 13-9. asynchronous mode data length is selectable: 7 or 8 bits. parity and multiprocessor bits are selectable. so is the stop bit length (1 or 2 bits). these selections determine the communication format and character length. in receiving, it is possible to detect framing errors, parity errors, overrun errors, and the break state. an internal or external clock can be selected as the sci clock source. when an internal clock is selected, the sci operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and can output a serial clock signal with a frequency matching the bit rate. when an external clock is selected, the external clock input must have a frequency 16 times the bit rate. (the on-chip baud rate generator is not used.) synchronous mode the communication format has a fixed 8-bit data length. in receiving, it is possible to detect overrun errors. an internal or external clock can be selected as the sci clock source. when an internal clock is selected, the sci operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and outputs a serial clock signal to external devices. when an external clock is selected, the sci operates on the input serial clock. the on-chip baud rate generator is not used. 464 table 13-8 smr settings and serial communication formats sci communication format multi- stop bit 7 bit 6 bit 2 bit 5 bit 3 data processor parity bit c/ a chr mp pe stop mode length bit bit length 00000 8-bit data absent absent 1 bit 00001 2 bits 00010 present 1 bit 00011 2 bits 01000 7-bit data absent 1 bit 01001 2 bits 01010 present 1 bit 01011 2 bits 001 0 8-bit data present absent 1 bit 001 1 2 bits 011 0 7-bit data 1 bit 011 1 2 bits 1 synchronous 8-bit data absent none mode table 13-9 smr and scr settings and sci clock source selection smr scr settings bit 7 bit 1 bit 0 c/ a cke1 cke0 mode clock source sck pin function 0 0 0 asynchronous mode internal sci does not use the sck pin 0 0 1 outputs a clock with frequency matching the bit rate 0 1 0 external 01 1 1 0 0 synchronous mode internal outputs the serial clock 10 1 1 1 0 external inputs the serial clock 11 1 smr settings asynchronous mode asynchronous mode (multi- processor format) sci transmit/receive clock inputs a clock with frequency 16 times the bit rate 465 13.3.2 operation in asynchronous mode in asynchronous mode each transmitted or received character begins with a start bit and ends with a stop bit. serial communication is synchronized one character at a time. the transmitting and receiving sections of the sci are independent, so full duplex communication is possible. the transmitter and receiver are both double buffered, so data can be written and read while transmitting and receiving are in progress, enabling continuous transmitting and receiving. figure 13-2 shows the general format of asynchronous serial communication. in asynchronous serial communication the communication line is normally held in the mark (high) state. the sci monitors the line and starts serial communication when the line goes to the space (low) state, indicating a start bit. one serial character consists of a start bit (low), data (lsb first), parity bit (high or low), and stop bit (high), in that order. when receiving in asynchronous mode, the sci synchronizes at the falling edge of the start bit. the sci samples each data bit on the eighth pulse of a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. receive data is latched at the center of each bit. figure 13-2 data format in asynchronous communication (example: 8-bit data with parity and 2 stop bits) serial data 0 1 1 1 idle (mark) state 1 d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 0/1 (lsb) (msb) start bit transmit or receive data parity bit stop bit one unit of data (character or frame) 1 bit 7 bits or 8 bits 1 bit or no bit 1 bit or 2 bits 466 communication formats: table 13-10 shows the 12 communication formats that can be selected in asynchronous mode. the format is selected by settings in smr. table 13-10 serial communication formats (asynchronous mode) 123456789101112 8-bit data stop 8-bit data 8-bit data 8-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data 8 bit data 8 bit data 7-bit data 7-bit data s s s s s s s s s s s s stop stop p stop p stop stop stop stop stop stop stop stop p p mpb stop stop stop mpb mpb mpb stop stop legend s: stop: p: mpb: start bit stop bit parity bit multiprocessor bit chr pe mp stop smr settings 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 serial communication format and frame length stop 467 clock: an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the sck pin can be selected as the sci transmit/receive clock. the clock source is selected by the c/ a bit in smr and bits cke1 and cke0 in scr. see table 13-9. when an external clock is input at the sck pin, it must have a frequency equal to 16 times the desired bit rate. when the sci operates on an internal clock, it can output a clock signal at the sck pin. the frequency of this output clock is equal to the bit rate. the phase is aligned as in figure 13-3 so that the rising edge of the clock occurs at the center of each transmit data bit. figure 13-3 phase relationship between output clock and serial data (asynchronous mode) transmitting and receiving data sci initialization (asynchronous mode): before transmitting or receiving, clear the te and re bits to 0 in scr, then initialize the sci as follows. when changing the communication mode or format, always clear the te and re bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. clearing te to 0 sets the tdre flag to 1 and initializes tsr. clearing re to 0, however, does not initialize the rdrf, per, fer, and orer flags and rdr, which retain their previous contents. when an external clock is used, the clock should not be stopped during initialization or subsequent operation. sci operation becomes unreliable if the clock is stopped. figure 13-4 is a sample flowchart for initializing the sci. 0 d0d1d2d3d4d5d6d70/1 1 1 1 frame 468 figure 13-4 sample flowchart for sci initialization clear te and re bits to 0 in scr transmitting or receiving no yes 1. 2. 3. 4. select the communication format in smr. write the value corresponding to the bit rate in brr. this step is not necessary when an external clock is used. select communication format in smr 1 set value in brr 2 3 set te or re bit to 1 in scr set rie, tie, teie, and mpie bits as necessary 4 1 bit interval elapsed? wait wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive 1 bit, then set the te or re bit to 1 in scr. set the rie, tie, teie, and mpie bits as necessary. setting the te or re bit enables the sci to use the txd or rxd pin. start of initialization set cke1 and cke0 bits in scr (leaving te and re bits cleared to 0) select the clock source in scr. clear the rie, tie, teie, mpie, te, and re bits to 0. if clock output is selected in asynchronous mode, clock output starts immediately after the setting is made in scr. 469 transmitting serial data (asynchronous mode): figure 13-5 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. figure 13-5 sample flowchart for transmitting serial data start transmitting read tdre flag in ssr tdre = 1? write transmit data in tdr and clear tdre flag to 0 in ssr all data transmitted? end 1 2 3 no yes no yes sci initialization: the transmit data output function of the txd pin is selected automatically. sci status check and transmit data write: read ssr, check that the tdre flag is 1, then write transmit data in tdr and clear the tdre flag to 0. read tend flag in ssr tend = 1? no yes output break signal? no yes clear te bit to 0 in scr 4 1. 2. 3. 4. clear dr bit to 0, set ddr bit to 1 initialize to continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the tdre flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in tdr, then clear the tdre flag to 0. when the dmac is activated by a transmit- -data-empty interrupt request (txi) to write data in tdr, the tdre flag is checked and cleared automatically. to output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the ddr bit to 1 and clear the dr bit to 0 (ddr and dr are i/o port registers), then clear the te bit to 0 in scr. 470 in transmitting serial data, the sci operates as follows. the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr. when the tdre flag is cleared to 0 the sci recognizes that tdr contains new data, and loads this data from tdr into tsr. after loading the data from tdr into tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmitting. if the tie bit is set to 1 in scr, the sci requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) at this time. serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the txd pin: start bit: one 0 bit is output. transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, lsb first. parity bit or multiprocessor bit: one parity bit (even or odd parity) or one multiprocessor bit is output. formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. stop bit: one or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. mark state: output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. the sci checks the tdre flag when it outputs the stop bit. if the tdre flag is 0, the sci loads new data from tdr into tsr, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. if the tdre flag is 1, the sci sets the tend flag to 1 in ssr, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. if the teie bit is set to 1 in scr, a transmit-end interrupt (tei) is requested at this time. figure 13-6 shows an example of sci transmit operation in asynchronous mode. figure 13-6 example of sci transmit operation in asynchronous mode (8-bit data with parity and 1 stop bit) 1 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 stop bit 1 data parity bit start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 stop bit 1 data parity bit 1 idle (mark) state tdre tend txi interrupt request txi interrupt handler writes data in tdr and clears tdre flag to 0 1 frame tei interrupt request txi interrupt request 471 receiving serial data (asynchronous mode): figure 13-7 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. figure 13-7 sample flowchart for receiving serial data (1) start receiving read rdrf flag in ssr rdrf = 1? read receive data from rdr, and clear rdrf flag to 0 in ssr per fer orer = 1? clear re bit to 0 in scr finished receiving? end error handling (continued on next page) 1 4 no yes yes no no yes 1. 2, 3. 4. 5. sci initialization: the receive data function of the rxd pin is selected automatically. receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the orer, per, and fer flags in ssr to identify the error. after executing the necessary error handling, clear the orer, per, and fer flags all to 0. receiving cannot resume if any of the orer, per, and fer flags remains set to 1. when a framing error occurs, the rxd pin can be read to detect the break state. sci status check and receive data read: read ssr, check that rdrf is set to 1, then read receive data from rdr and clear the rdrf flag to 0. notification that the rdrf flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the rxi interrupt. to continue receiving serial data: check the rdrf flag, read rdr, and clear the rdrf flag to 0 before the stop bit of the current frame is received. if the dmac is activated by an rxi interrupt to read the rdr value, the rdrf flag is cleared automatically. read orer, per, and fer flags in ssr 2 5 initialize 3 472 figure 13-7 sample flowchart for receiving serial data (2) no no no no yes yes yes yes framing error handling per = 1? orer = 1? overrun error handling fer = 1? break? error handling parity error handling clear orer, per, and fer flags to 0 in ssr clear re bit to 0 in scr end 3 473 in receiving, the sci operates as follows. the sci monitors the receive data line. when it detects a start bit, the sci synchronizes internally and starts receiving. receive data is stored in rsr in order from lsb to msb. the parity bit and stop bit are received. after receiving, the sci makes the following checks: parity check: the number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity setting of the o/ e bit in smr. stop bit check: the stop bit value must be 1. if there are two stop bits, only the first stop bit is checked. status check: the rdrf flag must be 0 so that receive data can be transferred from rsr into rdr. if these checks all pass, the rdrf flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in rdr. if one of the checks fails (receive error), the sci operates as indicated in table 13-11. note: when a receive error occurs, further receiving is disabled. in receiving, the rdrf flag is not set to 1. be sure to clear the error flags to 0. when the rdrf flag is set to 1, if the rie bit is set to 1 in scr, a receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) is requested. if the orer, per, or fer flag is set to 1 and the rie bit in scr is also set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (eri) is requested. table 13-11 receive error conditions receive error abbreviation condition data transfer overrun error orer receiving of next data ends receive data not transferred while rdrf flag is still set to from rsr to rdr 1 in ssr framing error fer stop bit is 0 receive data transferred from rsr to rdr parity error per parity of receive data differs receive data transferred from even/odd parity setting from rsr to rdr in smr 474 figure 13-8 shows an example of sci receive operation in asynchronous mode. figure 13-8 example of sci receive operation (8-bit data with parity and one stop bit) 13.3.3 multiprocessor communication the multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial communication line. the processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format). in multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an id. a serial communication cycle consists of an id-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a data-sending cycle. the multiprocessor bit distinguishes id-sending cycles from data-sending cycles. the transmitting processor starts by sending the id of the receiving processor with which it wants to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. next the transmitting processor sends transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0. receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. when they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, receiving processors compare the data with their ids. the receiving processor with a matching id continues to receive further incoming data. processors with ids not matching the received data skip further incoming data until they again receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. multiple processors can send and receive data in this way. figure 13-9 shows an example of communication among different processors using a multiprocessor format. 1 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 stop bit 1 data parity bit start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 stop bit 1 data parity bit 1 idle (mark) state rdrf fer 1 frame framing error, eri request rxi interrupt handler reads data in rdr and clears rdrf flag to 0 rxi request 475 communication formats: four formats are available. parity-bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor format is selected. for details see table 13-10. clock: see the description of asynchronous mode. figure 13-9 example of communication among processors using multiprocessor format (sending data h'aa to receiving processor a) transmitting processor receiving processor a serial communication line receiving processor b receiving processor c receiving processor d (id = 01) (id = 02) (id = 03) (id = 04) serial data h'01 h'aa (mpb = 1) (mpb = 0) id-sending cycle: receiving processor address data-sending cycle: data sent to receiving processor specified by id legend mpb: multiprocessor bit 476 transmitting and receiving data transmitting multiprocessor serial data: figure 13-10 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. figure 13-10 sample flowchart for transmitting multiprocessor serial data no no no no yes yes yes yes initialize start transmitting read tdre flag in ssr tdre = 1? write transmit data in tdr and set mpbt bit in ssr clear tdre flag to 0 all data transmitted? read tend flag in ssr tend = 1? 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. sci initialization: the transmit data output function of the txd pin is selected automatically. sci status check and transmit data write: read ssr, check that the tdre flag is 1, then write transmit data in tdr. also set the mpbt flag to 0 or 1 in ssr. finally, clear the tdre flag to 0. to continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the tdre flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in tdr, then clear the tdre flag to 0. when the dmac is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) to write data in tdr, the tdre flag is checked and cleared automatically. to output a break signal at the end of serial transmission: set the ddr bit to 1 and clear the dr bit to 0 (ddr and dr are i/o port registers), then clear the te bit to 0 in scr. output break signal? clear dr bit to 0, set ddr bit to 1 clear te bit to 0 in scr end 477 in transmitting serial data, the sci operates as follows. the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr. when the tdre flag is cleared to 0 the sci recognizes that tdr contains new data, and loads this data from tdr into tsr. after loading the data from tdr into tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmitting. if the tie bit in scr is set to 1, the sci requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) at this time. serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the txd pin: start bit: one 0 bit is output. transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, lsb first. multiprocessor bit: one multiprocessor bit (mpbt value) is output. stop bit: one or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. mark state: output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. the sci checks the tdre flag when it outputs the stop bit. if the tdre flag is 0, the sci loads data from tdr into tsr, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. if the tdre flag is 1, the sci sets the tend flag in ssr to 1, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. if the teie bit is set to 1 in scr, a transmit-end interrupt (tei) is requested at this time. figure 13-11 shows an example of sci transmit operation using a multiprocessor format. figure 13-11 example of sci transmit operation (8-bit data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit) 1 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 stop bit 1 data multi- processor bit start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 stop bit 1 data 1 idle (mark) state tdre tend txi request txi interrupt handler writes data in tdr and clears tdre flag to 0 1 frame tei request multi- processor bit txi request 478 receiving multiprocessor serial data: figure 13-12 shows a sample flowchart for receiving multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. figure 13-12 sample flowchart for receiving multiprocessor serial data (1) initialize start receiving read rdrf flag in ssr rdrf = 1? read receive data from rdr read orer and fer flags in ssr fer orer = 1 read rdrf flag in ssr rdrf = 1? read receive data from rdr finished receiving? clear re bit to 0 in scr error handling (continued on next page) end 1 2 4 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. sci initialization: the receive data function of the rxd pin is selected automatically. id receive cycle: set the mpie bit to 1 in scr. sci status check and id check: read ssr, check that the rdrf flag is set to 1, then read data from rdr and compare with the processor?s own id. if the id does not match, set the mpie bit to 1 again and clear the rdrf flag to 0. if the id matches, clear the rdrf flag to 0. sci status check and data receiving: read ssr, check that the rdrf flag is set to 1, then read data from rdr. receive error handling and break detection: if a receive error occurs, read the orer and fer flags in ssr to identify the error. after executing the necessary error handling, clear the orer and fer flags both to 0. receiving cannot resume while either the orer or fer flag remains set to 1. when a framing error occurs, the rxd pin can be read to detect the break state. yes yes yes no yes no yes no no no 3 set mpie bit to 1 in scr read orer and fer flags in ssr yes fer orer = 1 own id? no no 479 figure 13-12 sample flowchart for receiving multiprocessor serial data (2) no no yes no yes yes error handling orer = 1? overrun error handling fer = 1? break? framing error handling clear orer, per, and fer flags to 0 in ssr clear re bit to 0 in scr end 5 480 figure 13-13 shows an example of sci receive operation using a multiprocessor format. figure 13-13 example of sci receive operation (8-bit data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit) 1 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 1 stop bit 1 data (id1) mpb start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0 stop bit 1 data (data1) mpb 1 idle (mark) state mpie rdrf rdr value id1 rxi request (multiprocessor interrupt) mpb detection mpie= 0 mpb detection mpie= 0 rxi handler reads rdr data and clears rdrf flag to 0 not own id, so mpie bit is set to 1 again no rxi request, rdr not updated a. own id does not match data 1 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 1 stop bit 1 data (id2) mpb start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0 stop bit 1 data (data2) mpb 1 idle (mark) state mpie rdrf rdr value id2 rxi request (multiprocessor interrupt) rxi interrupt handler reads rdr data and clears rdrf flag to 0 own id, so receiving continues, with data received by rxi interrupt handler mpie bit is set to 1 again b. own id matches data data 2 481 13.3.4 synchronous operation in synchronous mode, the sci transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses. this mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication. the sci transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so full duplex communication is possible. the transmitter and receiver are also double buffered, so continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or receiving is in progress. figure 13-14 shows the general format in synchronous serial communication. figure 13-14 data format in synchronous communication in synchronous serial communication, each data bit is placed on the communication line from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. data is guaranteed valid at the rise of the serial clock. in each character, the serial data bits are transmitted in order from lsb (first) to msb (last). after output of the msb, the communication line remains in the state of the msb. in synchronous mode the sci receives data by synchronizing with the rise of the serial clock. communication format: the data length is fixed at 8 bits. no parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added. clock: an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the sck pin can be selected by clearing or setting the cke1 bit in scr. see table 13-9. when the sci operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock signal at the sck pin. eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. when the sci operates on an internal clock, the serial clock outputs the clock signal at the sck pin. eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. when the sci is not transmitting or receiving, the clock signal remains in the high state. however, when receiving only, overrun error may occur or the serial clock continues output until the re bit clears at 0. when transmitting or receiving in single characters, select the external clock. serial clock serial data bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 lsb msb don? care don? care one unit (character or frame) of serial data transfer direction * * note: high except in continuous transmitting or receiving * 482 transmitting and receiving data sci initialization (synchronous mode): before transmitting or receiving, clear the te and re bits to 0 in scr, then initialize the sci as follows. when changing the communication mode or format, always clear the te and re bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. clearing the te bit to 0 sets the tdre flag to 1 and initializes tsr. clearing the re bit to 0, however, does not initialize the rdrf, per, fer, and ore flags and rdr, which retain their previous contents. figure 13-15 is a sample flowchart for initializing the sci. figure 13-15 sample flowchart for sci initialization clear te and re bits to 0 in scr 1 bit interval elapsed? start transmitting or receiving no yes 1. 2. 3. 4. select the clock source in scr. clear the rie, tie, teie, mpie, te, and re bits to 0. select the communication format in smr. write the value corresponding to the bit rate in brr. this step is not necessary when an external clock is used. 1 2 set rie, tie, teie, mpie, cke1, and cke0 bits in scr (leaving te and re bits cleared to 0) 3 set te or re to 1 in scr set rie, tie, teie, and mpie bits as necessary 4 wait wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set the te or re bit to 1 in scr. also set the rie, tie, teie, and mpie bits as necessary. setting the te or re bit enables the sci to use the txd or rxd pin. start of initialization set value in brr select communication format in smr 483 transmitting serial data (synchronous mode): figure 13-16 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. figure 13-16 sample flowchart for serial transmitting start transmitting read tdre flag in ssr tdre = 1? write transmit data in tdr and clear tdre flag to 0 in ssr end 1 2 3 no yes no yes sci initialization: the transmit data output function of the txd pin is selected automatically. after setting te bit to 1, output 1 from frame one transmission is possible. sci status check and transmit data write: read ssr, check that the tdre flag is 1, then write transmit data in tdr and clear the tdre flag to 0. read tend flag in ssr no yes 1. 2. 3. initialize clear te bit to 0 in scr to continue transmitting serial data: after checking that the tdre flag is 1, indicating that data can be written, write data in tdr, then clear the tdre flag to 0. when the dmac is activated by a transmit- data-empty interrupt request (txi) to write data in tdr, the tdre flag is checked and cleared automatically. all data transmitted? tend = 1? 484 in transmitting serial data, the sci operates as follows. the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr. when the tdre flag is cleared to 0 the sci recognizes that tdr contains new data, and loads this data from tdr into tsr. after loading the data from tdr into tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmitting. if the tie bit is set to 1 in scr, the sci requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) at this time. if clock output is selected, the sci outputs eight serial clock pulses. if an external clock source is selected, the sci outputs data in synchronization with the input clock. data is output from the txd pin in order from lsb (bit 0) to msb (bit 7). the sci checks the tdre flag when it outputs the msb (bit 7). if the tdre flag is 0, the sci loads data from tdr into tsr and begins serial transmission of the next frame. if the tdre flag is 1, the sci sets the tend flag to 1 in ssr, and after transmitting the msb, holds the txd pin in the msb state. if the teie bit in scr is set to 1, a transmit-end interrupt (tei) is requested at this time. after the end of serial transmission, the sck pin is held in a constant state. 485 figure 13-17 shows an example of sci transmit operation. figure 13-17 example of sci transmit operation transmit direction serial clock serial data tdre tend bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 txi interrupt handler writes data in tdr and clears tdre flag to 0 txi request tei request 1 frame txi request 486 receiving serial data: figure 13-18 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. when switching from asynchronous mode to synchronous mode, make sure that the orer, per, and fer flags are cleared to 0. if the fer or per flag is set to 1 the rdrf flag will not be set and both transmitting and receiving will be disabled. figure 13-18 sample flowchart for serial receiving (1) start receiving read rdrf flag in ssr read receive data from rdr, and clear rdrf flag to 0 in ssr read orer flag in ssr clear re bit to 0 in scr end error handling continued on next page 1 4 5 no yes yes no yes 3 1. 2, 3. 4. 5. sci initialization: the receive data function of the rxd pin is selected automatically. receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the orer flag in ssr, then after executing the necessary error handling, clear the orer flag to 0. neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while the orer flag remains set to 1. sci status check and receive data read: read ssr, check that the rdrf flag is set to 1, then read receive data from rdr and clear the rdrf flag to 0. notification that the rdrf flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the rxi interrupt. to continue receiving serial data: check the rdrf flag, read rdr, and clear the rdrf flag to 0 before the msb (bit 7) of the current frame is received. if the dmac is activated by a receive-data-full interrupt request (rxi) to read rdr, the rdrf flag is cleared automatically. initialize no rdrf = 1? orer = 1? finished receiving? 2 487 figure 13-18 sample flowchart for serial receiving (2) in receiving, the sci operates as follows. the sci synchronizes with serial clock input or output and initializes internally. receive data is stored in rsr in order from lsb to msb. after receiving the data, the sci checks that the rdrf flag is 0 so that receive data can be transferred from rsr to rdr. if this check passes, the rdrf flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in rdr. if the check does not pass (receive error), the sci operates as indicated in table 13-11. after setting the rdrf flag to 1, if the rie bit is set to 1 in scr, the sci requests a receive- data-full interrupt (rxi). if the orer flag is set to 1 and the rie bit in scr is also set to 1, the sci requests a receive-error interrupt (eri). 3 end error handling overrun error handling clear orer flag to 0 in ssr 488 figure 13-19 shows an example of sci receive operation. figure 13-19 example of sci receive operation transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously (synchronous mode): figure 13-20 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting and receiving serial data simultaneously and indicates the procedure to follow. serial clock serial data bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 rxi request receive direction rdrf orer rxi interrupt handler reads data in rdr and clears rdrf flag to 0 overrun error, eri request 1 frame rxi request 489 figure 13-20 sample flowchart for serial transmitting no yes no yes yes no yes no initialize start transmitting and receiving read tdre flag in ssr tdre = 1? write transmit data in tdr and clear tdre flag to 0 in ssr rdrf = 1? read rdrf flag in ssr read receive data from rdr and clear rdrf flag to 0 in ssr read orer flag in ssr orer = 1? end of transmitting and receiving? 1 2 5 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. sci initialization: the transmit data output function of the txd pin and receive data input function of the rxd pin are selected, enabling simultaneous transmitting and receiving. sci status check and transmit data write: read ssr, check that the tdre flag is 1, then write transmit data in tdr and clear the tdre flag to 0. error handling note: * when switching from transmitting or receiving to simultaneous transmitting and receiving, clear the te and re bits both to 0, then set the te and re bits both to 1. clear te and re bits to 0 in scr end notification that the tdre flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the txi interrupt. receive error handling: if a receive error occurs, read the orer flag in ssr, then after executing the neces- sary error handling, clear the orer flag to 0. neither transmitting nor receiving can resume while the orer flag remains set to 1. sci status check and receive data read: read ssr, check that the rdrf flag is 1, then read receive data from rdr and clear the rdrf flag to 0. notification that the rdrf flag has changed from 0 to 1 can also be given by the rxi interrupt. to continue transmitting and receiving serial data: check the rdrf flag, read rdr, and clear the rdrf flag to 0 before the msb (bit 7) of the current frame is received. also check that the tdre flag is set to 1, indicat- ing that data can be written, write data in tdr, then clear the tdre flag to 0 before the msb (bit 7) of the current frame is transmitted. when the dmac is activated by a transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) to write data in tdr, the tdre flag is checked and cleared automatically. when the dmac is activated by a receive- data-full interrupt request (rxi) to read rdr, the rdrf flag is cleared automatically. 4 490 13.4 sci interrupts the sci has four interrupt request sources: tei (transmit-end interrupt), eri (receive-error interrupt), rxi (receive-data-full interrupt), and txi (transmit-data-empty interrupt). table 13-12 lists the interrupt sources and indicates their priority. these interrupts can be enabled and disabled by the tie, teie, and rie bits in scr. each interrupt request is sent separately to the interrupt controller. the txi interrupt is requested when the tdre flag is set to 1 in ssr. the tei interrupt is requested when the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr. the txi interrupt request can activate the dmac to transfer data. data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the tdre flag to 0. the tei interrupt request cannot activate the dmac. the rxi interrupt is requested when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr. the eri interrupt is requested when the orer, per, or fer flag is set to 1 in ssr. the rxi interrupt request can activate the dmac to transfer data. data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the rdrf flag to 0. the eri interrupt request cannot activate the dmac. the dmac can be activated by interrupts from sci channel 0. table 13-12 sci interrupt sources interrupt description priority eri receive error (orer, fer, or per) high rxi receive data register full (rdrf) txi transmit data register empty (tdre) tei transmit end (tend) low 491 13.5 usage notes note the following points when using the sci. tdr write and tdre flag: the tdre flag in ssr is a status flag indicating the loading of transmit data from tdr into tsr. the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 when it transfers data from tdr to tsr. data can be written into tdr regardless of the state of the tdre flag. if new data is written in tdr when the tdre flag is 0, the old data stored in tdr will be lost because this data has not yet been transferred to tsr. before writing transmit data in tdr, be sure to check that the tdre flag is set to 1. simultaneous multiple receive errors: table 13-13 indicates the state of ssr status flags when multiple receive errors occur simultaneously. when an overrun error occurs the rsr contents are not transferred to rdr, so receive data is lost. table 13-13 ssr status flags and transfer of receive data receive data transfer rdrf orer fer per rsr ? rdr receive errors 1100 overrun error 0010 o framing error 0001 o parity error 1110 overrun error + framing error 1101 overrun error + parity error 0011 o framing error + parity error 1111 overrun error + framing error + parity error notes: o : receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr. receive data is not transferred from rsr to rdr. ssr status flags 492 break detection and processing: break signals can be detected by reading the rxd pin directly when a framing error (fer) is detected. in the break state the input from the rxd pin consists of all 0s, so the fer flag is set and the parity error flag (per) may also be set. in the break state the sci receiver continues to operate, so if the fer flag is cleared to 0 it will be set to 1 again. sending a break signal: when the te bit is cleared to 0 the txd pin becomes an i/o port, the level and direction (input or output) of which are determined by dr and ddr bits. this feature can be used to send a break signal. after the serial transmitter is initialized, the dr value substitutes for the mark state until the te bit is set to 1 (the txd pin function is not selected until the te bit is set to 1). the ddr and dr bits should therefore both be set to 1 beforehand. to send a break signal during serial transmission, clear the dr bit to 0, then clear the te bit to 0. when the te bit is cleared to 0 the transmitter is initialized, regardless of its current state, so the txd pin becomes an output port outputting the value 0. receive error flags and transmitter operation (synchronous mode only): when a receive error flag (orer, per, or fer) is set to 1 the sci will not start transmitting, even if the tdre flag is cleared to 0. be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 when starting to transmit. note that clearing the re bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags to 0. receive data sampling timing in asynchronous mode and receive margin: in asynchronous mode the sci operates on a base clock with 16 times the bit rate frequency. in receiving, the sci synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. receive data is latched at the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse. see figure 13-21. 493 figure 13-21 receive data sampling timing in asynchronous mode the receive margin in asynchronous mode can therefore be expressed as in equation (1). ...................(1) m: receive margin (%) n: ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (n = 16) d: clock duty cycle (d = 0 to 1.0) l: frame length (l = 9 to 12) f: absolute deviation of clock frequency from equation (1), if f = 0 and d = 0.5 the receive margin is 46.875%, as given by equation (2). d = 0.5, f = 0 m = {0.5 ?1/(2 16)} 100% = 46.875%.................................................................................................(2) this is a theoretical value. a reasonable margin to allow in system designs is 20% to 30%. internal base clock receive data (rxd) synchronization sampling timing data sampling timing 0 7 15 0 7 15 0 d 0 d 1 8 clocks 16 clocks start bit m = | (0.5 ? ) ?(l ?0.5) f ? (1 + f) | 100% 1 2n | d ?0.5 | n 494 restrictions on usage of dmac to have the dmac read rdr, be sure to select the sci receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) as the activation source with bits dts2 to dts0 in dtcr. restrictions on usage of the serial clock when transmitting data using the serial clock as an external clock, after clearing ssr of tdre, maintain the space between each frame of the lead of the transmission clock (start-up edge) at five states or more (see figure 13-22). this condition is also needed for continuous transmission. if it is not fulfilled, operational error will occur. figure 13-22 serial clock transmission (example) ensure that t 3 5 states. sck tdre txd t * t * continuous transmission x0 x1 x2 x3 y0 y1 y2 y3 x4 x5 x6 x7 note: * 495 section 14 smart card interface 14.1 overview as an extension of its serial communication interface functions, sci0 supports a smart card (ic card) interface conforming to the iso/iec7816-3 (identification card) standard. switchover between normal serial communication and the smart card interface is controlled by a register setting. 14.1.1 features features of the smart-card interface supported by the h8/3048 series are listed below. asynchronous communication data length: 8 bits parity bits generated and checked error signal output in receive mode (parity error) error signal detect and automatic data retransmit in transmit mode supports both direct convention and inverse convention built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates three types of interrupts transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. the transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts can activate the dma controller (dmac) to transfer data. 497 14.1.2 block diagram figure 14-1 shows a block diagram of the smart card interface. figure 14-1 smart card interface block diagram module data bus internal data bus brr scmr baud rate generator transmit/receive control rdr tsr rsr bus interface ssr scr smr tdr legend scmr: rsr: rdr: tsr: tdr: smr: scr: ssr: brr: smart card mode register receive shift register receive data register transmit shift register transmit data register serial mode register serial control register serial status register bit rate register ?4 ?16 ?64 txi clock parity generate parity check rxd 0 txd 0 sck 0 rxi eri 498 14.1.3 input/output pins table 14-1 lists the smart card interface pins. table 14-1 smart card interface pins name abbreviation i/o function serial clock pin sck 0 output clock output receive data pin rxd 0 input receive data input transmit data pin txd 0 output transmit data output 14.1.4 register configuration the smart card interface has the internal registers listed in table 14-2. brr, tdr, and rdr have their normal serial communication interface functions, as described in section 13, serial communication interface. table 14-2 registers address * 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffb0 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h'ffb1 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h'ffb2 serial control register scr r/w h'00 h'ffb3 transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h'ffb4 serial status register ssr r/(w) * 2 f'84 h'ffb5 receive data register rdr r h'00 h'ffb6 smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 499 14.2 register descriptions this section describes the new or modified registers and bit functions in the smart card interface. 14.2.1 smart card mode register (scmr) scmr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects smart card interface functions. scmr is initialized to h'f2 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 4?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 3?mart card data transfer direction (sdir) : selects the serial/parallel conversion format. bit 3 sdir description 0 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first (initial value) received data is stored lsb-first in rdr 1 tdr contents are transmitted msb-first received data is stored msb-first in rdr bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 1 reserved bits smart card data transfer direction selects the serial/parallel conversion format smart card data invert inverts data logic levels smart card interface mode select enables or disables the smart card interface function reserved bits 500 bit 2?mart card data inverter (sinv): inverts data logic levels. this function is used in combination with bit 3 to communicate with inverse-convention cards. sinv does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. for parity settings, see section 14.3.4, register settings. bit 2 sinv description 0 unmodified tdr contents are transmitted (initial value) received data is stored unmodified in rdr 1 inverted tdr contents are transmitted received data is inverted before storage in rdr bit 1?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 0?mart card interface mode select (smif): enables the smart card interface function. bit 0 smif description 0 smart card interface function is disabled (initial value) 1 smart card interface function is enabled 14.2.2 serial status register (ssr) the function of ssr bit 4 is modified in the smart card interface. this change also causes a modification to the setting conditions for bit 2 (tend). bit initial value read/write note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 7 tdre 1 r/(w) * 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) * 5 orer 0 r/(w) * 4 ers 0 r/(w) * 3 per 0 r/(w) * 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r error signal status (ers) status flag indicating that an error signal has been received transmit end status flag indicating end of transmission 501 bits 7 to 5: these bits operate as in normal serial communication. for details see section 13, serial communication interface. bit 4?rror signal status (ers): in smart card interface mode, this flag indicates the status of the error signal sent from the receiving device to the transmitting device. the smart card interface does not detect framing errors. bit 4 ers description 0 indicates normal data transmission, with no error signal returned (initial value) [clearing conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. software reads ers while it is set to 1, then writes 0. 1 indicates that the receiving device sent an error signal reporting a parity error [setting condition] a low error signal was sampled. note: clearing the te bit to 0 in scr does not affect the ers flag, which retains its previous value. bits 3 to 0: these bits operate as in normal serial communication. for details see section 13, serial communication interface. the setting conditions for transmit end (tend, bit 2), however, are modified as follows. bit 2 tend description 0 transmission is in progress [clearing conditions] software reads tdre while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the tdre flag. the dmac writes data in tdr. 1 end of transmission (initial value) [setting conditions] the chip is reset or enters standby mode. the te bit and fer/ers bit are both cleared to 0 in scr. tdre is 1 and fer/ers is 0 at a time 2.5 etu after the last bit of a 1-byte serial character is transmitted (normal transmission) note: an etu (elementary time unit) is the time needed to transmit one bit. 502 14.2.3 serial mode register (smr) bit 7 of smr has a different function in smart card interface mode. the related serial control register (scr) changes from bit 1 to bit 0. however, this function does not exist in the flash memory version. bit 7-gsm mode (gm): set at 0 when using the regular smart card interface. in gsm mode, set to 1. when transmission is complete, initially the tend flag set timing appears followed by clock output restriction mode. clock output restriction mode comprises serial control register bit 1 and bit 0. bit 7 gm description 0 using the regular smart card interface mode ? the tend flag is set 12.5 etu after the beginning of the start bit (initial value) ? clock output on/off control only 1 using the gsm mode smart card interface mode ? the tend flag is set 11.0 etu after the beginning of the start bit ? clock output on/off and fixed-high/fixed-low control bits 6 to 0?perate in the same way as for the normal sci. for details, see section 13.2.5, serial mode register (smr). 503 bit initial value read/write 7 gm 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pr 0 r/w 4 o/e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 14.2.4 serial control register (scr) bits 1 and 0 have different functions in smart card interface mode. however, this function does not exist in the flash memory version. bits 7 to 2?perate in the same way as for the normal sci. for details, see section 13.2.6, serial control register (scr). bits 1 and 0?lock enable (cke1, cke0): setting enable or disable for the sci clock selection and clock output from the sck pin. in smart card interface mode, it is possible to switch between enabling and disabling of the normal clock output, and specify a fixed high level or fixed low level for the clock output. smr scr bit 7 bit 1 bit 0 gm cke1 cke0 description 0 0 0 the internal clock/sck0 pin functions as an i/o port (initial value) 0 0 1 the internal clock/sck0 pin functions as the clock output 1 0 0 the internal clock/sck0 pin is fixed at low-level output 1 0 1 the internal clock/sck0 pin functions as the clock output 1 1 0 the internal clock/sck0 pin is fixed at high-level output 1 1 1 the internal clock/sck0 pin functions as the clock output 504 bit initial value read/write 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w 14.3 operation 14.3.1 overview the main features of the smart-card interface are as follows. one frame consists of eight data bits and a parity bit. in transmitting, a guard time of at least two elementary time units (2 etu) is provided between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. (an elementary time unit is the time required to transmit one bit.) in receiving, if a parity error is detected, a low error signal is output for 1 etu, beginning 10.5 etu after the start bit. in transmitting, if an error signal is received, after at least 2 etu, the same data is automatically transmitted again. only asynchronous communication is supported. there is no synchronous communication function. 14.3.2 pin connections figure 14-2 shows a pin connection diagram for the smart card interface. in communication with a smart card, data is transmitted and received over the same signal line. the txd 0 and rxd 0 pins should both be connected to this line. the data transmission line should be pulled up to v cc through a resistor. if the smart card uses the clock generated by the smart card interface, connect the sck 0 output pin to the card s clk input. if the card uses its own internal clock, this connection is unnecessary. the reset signal should be output from one of the h8/3048 series?generic ports. in addition to these pin connections, power and ground connections will normally also be necessary. 505 figure 14-2 smart card interface connection diagram note: a loop-back test can be performed by setting both re and te to 1 without connecting a smart card. 14.3.3 data format figure 14-3 shows the data format of the smart card interface. in receive mode, parity is checked once per frame. if a parity error is detected, an error signal is returned to the transmitting device to request retransmission. in transmit mode, the error signal is sampled and the same data is retransmitted if the error signal is low. figure 14-3 smart card interface data format h8/3048 series chip card-processing device smart card txd 0 rxd 0 sck 0 px (port) i/o clk rst data line v cc clock line reset line ds parity error d0 d1 d2 d3 output from transmitting device output from receiving device d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds no parity error d0 d1 d2 d3 output from transmitting device d4 d5 d6 d7 dp ds: d0 to d7: dp: de: start bit data bits parity bit error signal 506 the operating sequence is as follows. 1. when not in use, the data line is in the high-impedance state, and is pulled up to the high level through a resistor. 2. to start transmitting a frame of data, the transmitting device transmits a low start bit (ds), followed by eight data bits (d0 to d7) and a parity bit (dp). 3. next, in the smart card interface, the transmitting device returns the data line to the high- impedance state. the data line is pulled up to the high level through a resistor. 4. the receiving device performs a parity check. if there is no parity error, the receiving device waits to receive the next data. if a parity error is present, the receiving device outputs a low error signal (de) to request retransmission of the data. after outputting the error signal for a designated interval, the receiving device returns the signal line to the high-impedance state. the signal line is pulled back up to the high level through the pull-up resistor. 5. if the transmitting device does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next data. if it receives an error signal, it returns to step 2 and transmits the same data again. 507 14.3.4 register settings table 14-3 shows a bit map of the registers used in the smart card interface. bits indicated as 0 or 1 should always be set to the indicated value. the settings of the other bits will be described in this section. table 14-3 register settings in smart card interface register address * 1 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 smr h'ffb0 gm 0 1 o/ e 1 0 cks1 cks0 brr h'ffb1 brr7 brr6 brr5 brr4 brr3 brr2 brr1 brr0 scr h'ffb2 tie rie te re 0 0 cke1 * 2 cke0 tdr h'ffb3 tdr7 tdr6 tdr5 tdr4 tdr3 tdr2 tdr1 tdr0 ssr h'ffb4 tdre rdrf orer ers per tend 0 0 rdr h'ffb5 rdr7 rdr6 rdr5 rdr4 rdr3 rdr2 rdr1 rdr0 scmr h'ffb6 sdir sinv smif notes: unused bit. 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. when the gm of the smr is set at 0, be sure the cke1 bit is 0. serial mode register (smr) settings: in regular smart card interface mode, set the gm bit at 0. in regular smart card mode, clear the gm bit to 0. in gsm mode, set the gm bit to 1. clear the o/ e bit to 0 if the smart card uses the direct convention. set the o/ e bit to 1 if the smart card uses the inverse convention. bits cks1 and cks0 select the clock source of the built-in baud rate generator. see section 14.3.5, clock. bit rate register (brr) settings: this register sets the bit rate. equations for calculating the setting are given in section 14.3.5, clock. serial control register (scr): the tie, rie, te, and re bits have their normal serial communication functions. for details, see section 13, serial communication interface. the cke1 and cke0 bits select clock output. when the gm bit of the smr is cleared to 0, to disable clock output, clear this bit to 00. to enable clock output, set this bit to 01. when the gm bit of the smr is set to 1, clock output is enabled. clock output is fixed at high or low. smart card mode register (scmr): if the smart card follows the direct convention, clear the sdir and sinv bits to 0. if the smart card follows the indirect convention, set the sdir and sinv bits to 1. to use the smart card interface, set the smif bit to 1. 508 the register settings and examples of starting character waveforms are shown below for two smart cards, one following the direct convention and one the inverse convention. direct convention (sdir = sinv = o/ e = 0) in the direct convention, state z corresponds to logic level 1, and state a to logic level 0. characters are transmitted and received lsb-first. in the example above the first character data is h'3b. the parity bit is 1, following the even parity rule designated for smart cards. inverse convention (sdir = sinv = o/ e = 1) in the inverse convention, state a corresponds to the logic level 1, and state z to the logic level 0. characters are transmitted and received msb-first. in the example above the first character data is h'3f. following the even parity rule designated for smart cards, the parity bit logic level is 0, corresponding to state z. in the h8/3048 series, the sinv bit inverts only the data bits d7 to d0. the parity bit is not inverted, so the o/ e bit in smr must be set to odd parity mode. this applies in both transmitting and receiving. ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp azzazzzaaz (z) (z) state ds d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 dp azzaaaaaaz (z) (z) state 509 14.3.5 clock as its serial communication clock, the smart card interface can use only the internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator. the bit rate can be selected by setting the bit rate register (brr) and bits cks1 and cks0 in the serial mode register (smr). the bit rate can be calculated from the equation given below. table 14-5 lists some examples of bit rate settings. if bit cke0 is set to 1, a clock signal with a frequency equal to 372 times the bit rate is output from the sck 0 pin. b = 10 6 where, n: brr setting (0 n 255) b: bit rate (bits/s) ? system clock frequency (mhz)* n: see table 14-4 table 14-4 n-values of cks1 and cks0 settings n cks1 cks0 000 101 210 311 note: * if the gear function is used to divide the system clock frequency, use the divided frequency to calculate the bit rate. the equation above applies directly to 1/1 frequency division. table 14-5 bit rates (bits/s) for different brr settings (when n = 0) ?(mhz) n 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 0 9600.0 13440.9 14400.0 17473.1 19200.0 21505.4 24193.5 1 4800.0 6720.4 7200.0 8736.6 9600.0 10752.7 12096.8 2 3200.0 4480.3 4800.0 5824.4 6400.0 7168.5 8064.5 note: bit rates are rounded off to one decimal place. 1488 2 2n? (n + 1) 510 the following equation calculates the bit rate register (brr) setting from the system clock frequency and bit rate. n is an integer from 0 to 255, specifying the value with the smaller error. n = 10 6 ?1 table 14-6 brr settings for typical bit rate (bits/s) (when n = 0) ?(mhz) 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 bit/s n error n error n error n error n error n error n error 9600 0 0.00 1 30.00 1 25.00 1 8.99 1 0.00 1 12.01 2 15.99 table 14-7 maximum bit rates for various frequencies (smart card interface) ?(mhz) maximum bit rate (bits/s) n n 7.1424 9600 0 0 10 13441 0 0 10.7136 14400 0 0 13 17473 0 0 14.2848 19200 0 0 16 21505 0 0 18 24194 0 0 the bit rate error is calculated from the following equation. error (%) = 10 6 ? 100 1488 2 2n? b 1488 2 2n ?1 b (n + 1) 511 14.3.6 transmitting and receiving data initialization: before transmitting or receiving data, initialize the smart card interface by the procedure below. initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode or from receive mode to transmit mode. 1. clear the te and re bits to 0 in the serial control register (scr). 2. clear the ers, per, and orer error flags to 0 in the serial status register (ssr). 3. set the parity mode bit (o/ e ) and baud rate generator clock source select bits (cks1 and cks0) as required in the serial mode register (smr). at the same time, clear the c/ a , chr, and mp bits to 0, and set the stop and pe bits to 1. 4. set the smif, sdir, and sinv bits as required in the smart card mode register (smr). when the smif bit is set to 1, the txd 0 and rxd 0 pins switch from their i/o port functions to their serial communication interface functions, and are placed in the high-impedance state. 5. set a value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the bit rate register (brr). 6. set clock enable bit 0 (cke0) as required in the serial control register (scr). write 0 in the tie, rie, te, re, mpie, teie, and cke1 bits. if bit cke0 is set to 1, a serial clock will be output from the sck 0 pin. 7. wait for at least the interval required to transmit or receive one bit, then set the tie, rie, te, and re bits as necessary in scr. do not set te and re both to 1, except when performing a loop-back test. transmitting serial data: the transmitting procedure in smart card mode is different from the normal sci procedure, because of the need to sample the error signal and retransmit. figure 14-4 shows a flowchart for transmitting, and figure 14-5 shows the relation between a transmit operation and the internal registers. 1. initialize the smart card interface by the procedure given above in initialization. 2. check that the ers error flag is cleared to 0 in ssr. 3. check that the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr. repeat steps 2 and 3 until this check passes. 4. write transmit data in tdr and clear the tdre flag to 0. the data will be transmitted and the tend flag will be cleared to 0. 5. to continue transmitting data, return to step 2. 6. to terminate transmission, clear the te bit to 0. this procedure may include interrupt handling and dma transfer. if the tie bit is set to 1 to enable interrupt requests, when transmission is completed and the 512 tend flag is set to 1, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) is requested. if the rie bit is set to 1 to enable interrupt requests, when a transmit error occurs and the ers flag is set to 1, a transmit/receive-error interrupt (eri) is requested. the timing of tend flag setting depends on the gm bit in smr. the timing is shown in figure 14-6. if the txi interrupt activates the dmac, the number of bytes designated in the dmac can be transmitted automatically, including automatic retransmit. for details, see interrupt operations and data transfer by dmac in this section. figure 14-4 transmit flowchart (example) fer/ers = 0 ? tend = 1 ? fer/ers = 0 ? tend = 1 ? all data transmitted ? initialize write data in tdr and clear tdre flag to 0 in ssr clear te bit to 0 start error handling error handling start transmitting end no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes 513 figure 14-5 relation between transmit operation and internal registers figure 14-6 tend flag occurrence timing 514 tdr tsr (shift register) (1) data write (2) transfer from tdr to tsr (3) serial data output data 1 data 1 data 1 data 1 ; data remains in tdr i/o signal line output in case of normal transmission: tend flag is set in case of transmit error: ers flag is set steps (2) and (3) above are repeated until the tend flag is set data 1 note: when the ers flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (d7 in lsb-first transmission, d0 in msb-first transmission) of the next transfer data to be transmitted has been completed. i/o data guard gm = 1 gm = 0 txi (tend interrupt) ds da db dc dd de 12.5 etu 11.0 etu df dg dh dp de receiving serial data: the receiving procedure in smart card mode is the same as the normal sci procedure. figure 14-7 shows a flowchart for receiving. 1. initialize the smart card interface by the procedure given in initialization at the beginning of this section. 2. check that the orer and per error flags are cleared to 0 in ssr. if either flag is set, carry out the necessary error handling, then clear both the orer and per flags to 0. 3. check that the rdrf flag is set to 1. repeat steps 2 and 3 until this check passes. 4. read receive data from rdr. 5. to continue receiving data, clear the rdrf flag to 0 and return to step 2. 6. to terminate receiving, clear the re bit to 0. figure 14-7 receive flowchart (example) 515 orer = 0 and per = 0 ? rdrf = 1 ? all data received ? initialize read rdr and clear rdrf flag to 0 in ssr clear re bit to 0 start error handling start receiving no no no yes yes this procedure may include interrupt handling and dma transfer. if the rie bit is set to 1 to enable interrupt requests, when receiving is completed and the rdrf flag is set to 1, a receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) is requested. if a receive error occurs, either the orer or per flag is set to 1 and a transmit/receive-error interrupt (eri) is requested. if the rxi interrupt activates the dmac, the number of bytes designated in the dmac will be transferred, skipping receive data in which an error occurred. for details, see interrupt operations and data transfer by dmac below. when a parity error occurs and per is set to 1, the receive data is transferred to rdr, so the erroneous data can be read. switching modes: to switch from receive mode to transmit mode, check that receiving operations have completed, then initialize the smart card interface, clearing re to 0 and setting te to 1. completion of receive operations is indicated by the rdrf, per, or orer flag. to switch from transmit mode to receive mode, check that transmitting operations have completed, then initialize the smart card interface, clearing te to 0 and setting re to 1. completion of transmit operations can be verified from the tend flag. fixing clock output: when the gm bit of the smr is set to 1, clock output is fixed by cke1 and cke0 of scr. in this case, the clock pulse can be set at minimum value. figure 14-8 shows clock output fixed timing: cke0 is restricted with gm = 1 and cke1 = 1. figure 14-8 clock output fixed timing interrupt operations: the smart card interface has three interrupt sources: transmit-data-empty (txi), transmit/receive-error (eri), and receive-data-full (rxi). the transmit-end interrupt request (tei) is not available in smart card mode. 516 scr write (cke0 = 1) scr write (cke0 = 0) sck specified pulse width specified pulse width cke1 value a txi interrupt is requested when the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr. an rxi interrupt is requested when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr. an eri interrupt is requested when the orer, per, or ers flag is set to 1 in ssr. these relationships are shown in table 14-8. table 14-8 smart card mode operating states and interrupt sources interrupt dmac operating state flag mask bit source activation transmit mode normal operation tend tie txi available error ers rie eri not available receive mode normal operation rdrf rie rxi available error per, orer rie eri not available data transfer by dmac: the dmac can be used to transmit and receive in smart card mode, as in normal sci operations. in transmit mode, when the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr, the tdre flag is set simultaneously, generating a txi interrupt. if txi is designated in advance as a dmac activation source, the dmac will be activated by the txi request and will transfer the next transmit data. this data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the tdre and tend flags to 0. when an error occurs, the sci automatically retransmits the same data, keeping tend cleared to 0 so that the dmac is not activated. the sci and dmac will therefore automatically transmit the designated number of bytes, including retransmission when an error occurs. when an error occurs the ers flag is not cleared automatically, so the rie bit should be set to 1 to enable the error to generate an eri request, and the eri interrupt handler should clear ers. when using the dmac to transmit or receive, first set up and enable the dmac, then make sci settings. dmac settings are described in section 8, dma controller. in receive operations, when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr, an rxi interrupt is requested. if rxi is designated in advance as a dmac activation source, the dmac will be activated by the rxi request and will transfer the received data. this data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the rdrf flag to 0. when an error occurs, the rdrf flag is not set and an error flag is set instead. the dmac is not activated. the eri interrupt request is directed to the cpu. the eri interrupt handler should clear the error flags. examples of operation in gsm mode when switching between smart card interface mode and software standby mode, use the following procedures to maintain the clock duty cycle. switching from smart card interface mode to software standby mode 1. set the p94 data register (dr) and data direction register (ddr) to the values for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 517 2. write 0 to the te and re bits in the serial control register (scr) to stop transmit/receive operations. at the same time, set the cke1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 3. write 0 to the cke0 bit in scr to stop the clock. 4. wait for one serial clock cycle. during this period, the duty cycle is preserved and clock output is fixed at the specified level. 5. write h'00 to the serial mode register (smr) and smart card mode register (scmr). 6. make the transition to the software standby state. returning from software standby mode to smart card interface mode 1. clear the software standby state. 2. set the cke1 bit in scr to the value for the fixed output state at the start of software standby (the current p94 pin state). 3. set smart card interface mode and output the clock. clock signal generation is started with the normal duty cycle. figure 14.9 procedure for stopping and restarting the clock use the following procedure to secure the clock duty cycle after powering on. 1. the initial state is port input and high impedance. use pull-up or pull-down resistors to fix the potential. 2. fix at the output specified by the cke1 bit in scr. 3. set smr and scmr, and switch to smart card interface mode operation. 4. set the cke0 bit in scr to 1 to start clock output. (1)(2)(3) (1) (2)(3) (4) (5)(6) normal operation normal operation software standby mode 518 14.4 usage notes when using the sci as a smart card interface, note the following points. receive data sampling timing in smart card mode and receive margin: in smart card mode the sci operates on a base clock with 372 times the bit rate frequency. in receiving, the sci synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. receive data is latched at the rising edge of the 186th base clock pulse. see figure 14-10. figure 14-10 receive data sampling timing in smart card mode 372 clocks 186 clocks 185 185 internal base clock receive data (rxd) synchronization sampling timing data sampling timing 0 d1 d0 371 371 00 start bit 519 the receive margin can therefore be expressed as follows. receive margin in smart card mode: m = | 0.5 (l ?0.5) f (1 + f) | 100% m: receive margin (%) n: ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (n = 372) d: clock duty cycle (d = 0 to 1.0) l: frame length (l = 10) f: absolute deviation of clock frequency from this equation, if f = 0 and d = 0.5 the receive margin is as follows. d = 0.5, f = 0 m = {0.5 ?1/(2 372)} 100% = 49.866% 1 2n | d ?0.5 | n 520 retransmission: retransmission is described below for the separate cases of transmit mode and receive mode. retransmission when sci is in receive mode (see figure 14-11): (1) the sci checks the received parity bit. if it detects an error, it automatically sets the per flag to 1. if the rie bit in scr is set to the enable state, an eri interrupt is requested. the per flag should be cleared to 0 in ssr before the next parity bit sampling timing. (2) the rdrf bit in ssr is not set to 1 for the error frame. (3) if an error is not detected when the parity bit is checked, the per flag is not set in ssr. (4) if an error is not detected when the parity bit is checked, receiving operations are assumed to have ended normally, and the rdrf bit is automatically set to 1 in ssr. if the rie bit in scr is set to the enable state, an rxi interrupt is requested. if rxi is enabled as a dma transfer activation source, the rdr contents can be read automatically. when the dmac reads the rdr data, it automatically clears rdrf to 0. (5) when a normal frame is received, at the error signal transmit timing, the data pin is held in the high-impedance state. figure 14-11 retransmission in sci receive mode ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp ds (de) d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 frame n rdrf (2) (4) (1) (3) per retransmitted frame frame n + 1 521 retransmission when sci is in transmit mode (see figure 14-12): (6) after transmitting one frame, if the receiving device returns an error signal, the sci sets the ers flag to 1 in ssr. if the rie bit in scr is set to the enable state, an eri interrupt is requested. the ers flag should be cleared to 0 in ssr before the next parity bit sampling timing. (7) the tend bit in ssr is not set for the frame in which the error signal was received, indicating an error. (8) if no error signal is returned from the receiving device, the ers flag is not set in ssr. (9) if no error signal is returned from the receiving device, transmission of the frame, including retransmission, is assumed to be complete, and the tend bit is set to 1 in ssr. if the tie bit in scr is set to the enable state, a txi interrupt is requested. if txi is enabled as a dma transfer activation source, the next data can be written in tdr automatically. when the dmac writes data in tdr, it automatically clears the tdre bit to 0. figure 14-12 retransmission in sci transmit mode ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp ds (de) d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 frame n (9) (7) transfer from tdr to tsr transfer from tdr to tsr transfer from tdr to tsr tdre tend ers (6) (8) retransmitted frame frame n + 1 522 section 15 a/d converter 15.1 overview the h8/3048 series includes a 10-bit successive-approximations a/d converter with a selection of up to eight analog input channels. when the a/d converter is not used, it can be halted independently to conserve power. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. 15.1.1 features a/d converter features are listed below. 10-bit resolution eight input channels selectable analog conversion voltage range the analog voltage conversion range can be programmed by input of an analog reference voltage at the v ref pin. high-speed conversion conversion time: maximum 7.4 ? per channel (with 18 mhz system clock) two conversion modes single mode: a/d conversion of one channel scan mode: continuous conversion on one to four channels four 16-bit data registers a/d conversion results are transferred for storage into data registers corresponding to the channels. sample-and-hold function a/d conversion can be externally triggered a/d interrupt requested at end of conversion at the end of a/d conversion, an a/d end interrupt (adi) can be requested. 523 15.1.2 block diagram figure 15-1 shows a block diagram of the a/d converter. figure 15-1 a/d converter block diagram module data bus bus interface on-chip data bus addra addrb addrc addrd adcsr adcr successive- approximations register 10-bit d/a av v av cc ref ss analog multi- plexer an an an an an an an an 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 sample-and- hold circuit comparator + control circuit adtrg ?8 ?16 adi legend adcr: adcsr: addra: addrb: addrc: addrd: a/d control register a/d control/status register a/d data register a a/d data register b a/d data register c a/d data register d 524 15.1.3 input pins table 15-1 summarizes the a/d converter s input pins. the eight analog input pins are divided into two groups: group 0 (an 0 to an 3 ), and group 1 (an 4 to an 7 ). av cc and av ss are the power supply for the analog circuits in the a/d converter. v ref is the a/d conversion reference voltage. table 15-1 a/d converter pins abbrevi- pin name ation i/o function analog power supply pin av cc input analog power supply analog ground pin av ss input analog ground and reference voltage reference voltage pin v ref input analog reference voltage analog input pin 0 an 0 input group 0 analog inputs analog input pin 1 an 1 input analog input pin 2 an 2 input analog input pin 3 an 3 input analog input pin 4 an 4 input group 1 analog inputs analog input pin 5 an 5 input analog input pin 6 an 6 input analog input pin 7 an 7 input a/d external trigger input pin adtrg input external trigger input for starting a/d conversion 525 15.1.4 register configuration table 15-2 summarizes the a/d converter s registers. table 15-2 a/d converter registers address * 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffe0 a/d data register a (high) addrah r h'00 h'ffe1 a/d data register a (low) addral r h'00 h'ffe2 a/d data register b (high) addrbh r h'00 h'ffe3 a/d data register b (low) addrbl r h'00 h'ffe4 a/d data register c (high) addrch r h'00 h'ffe5 a/d data register c (low) addrcl r h'00 h'ffe6 a/d data register d (high) addrdh r h'00 h'ffe7 a/d data register d (low) addrdl r h'00 h'ffe8 a/d control/status register adcsr r/(w) * 2 h'00 h'ffe9 a/d control register adcr r/w h'7e notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address 2. only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 526 15.2 register descriptions 15.2.1 a/d data registers a to d (addra to addrd) the four a/d data registers (addra to addrd) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the results of a/d conversion. an a/d conversion produces 10-bit data, which is transferred for storage into the a/d data register corresponding to the selected channel. the upper 8 bits of the result are stored in the upper byte of the a/d data register. the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower byte. bits 5 to 0 of an a/d data register are reserved bits that are always read as 0. table 15-3 indicates the pairings of analog input channels and a/d data registers. the cpu can always read and write the a/d data registers. the upper byte can be read directly, but the lower byte is read through a temporary register (temp). for details see section 15.3, cpu interface. the a/d data registers are initialized to h'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. table 15-3 analog input channels and a/d data registers analog input channel group 0 group 1 a/d data register an 0 an 4 addra an 1 an 5 addrb an 2 an 6 addrc an 3 an 7 addrd bit addrn initial value 14 ad8 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 0 0 r 4 0 r 2 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 1 0 r 5 0 r 3 0 r a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result reserved bits read/write (n = a to d) 527 15.2.2 a/d control/status register (adcsr) adcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the mode and controls the a/d converter. adcsr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 adf 0 r/(w) 6 adie 0 r/w 5 adst 0 r/w 4 scan 0 r/w 3 cks 0 r/w 0 ch0 0 r/w 2 ch2 0 r/w 1 ch1 0 r/w * note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * a/d end flag indicates end of a/d conversion a/d interrupt enable enables and disables a/d end interrupts a/d start starts or stops a/d conversion scan mode selects single mode or scan mode clock select selects the a/d conversion time channel select 2 to 0 these bits select analog input channels 528 bit 7?/d end flag (adf): indicates the end of a/d conversion. bit 7 adf description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) cleared by reading adf while adf = 1, then writing 0 in adf 1 [setting conditions] single mode: a/d conversion ends scan mode: a/d conversion ends in all selected channels bit 6?/d interrupt enable (adie): enables or disables the interrupt (adi) requested at the end of a/d conversion. bit 6 adie description 0 a/d end interrupt request (adi) is disabled (initial value) 1 a/d end interrupt request (adi) is enabled bit 5?/d start (adst): starts or stops a/d conversion. the adst bit remains set to 1 during a/d conversion. it can also be set to 1 by external trigger input at the adtrg pin. bit 5 adst description 0 a/d conversion is stopped (initial value) 1 single mode: a/d conversion starts; adst is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. scan mode: a/d conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels, until adst is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode. 529 bit 4?can mode (scan): selects single mode or scan mode. for further information on operation in these modes, see section 15.4, operation. clear the adst bit to 0 before switching the conversion mode. bit 4 scan description 0 single mode (initial value) 1 scan mode bit 3?lock select (cks): selects the a/d conversion time. clear the adst bit to 0 before switching the conversion time. bit 3 cks description 0 conversion time = 266 states (maximum) (initial value) 1 conversion time = 134 states (maximum) bits 2 to 0?hannel select 2 to 0 (ch2 to ch0): these bits and the scan bit select the analog input channels. clear the adst bit to 0 before changing the channel selection. group selection channel selection description ch2 ch1 ch0 single mode scan mode 000 an 0 (initial value) an 0 1an 1 an 0 , an 1 10 an 2 an 0 to an 2 1an 3 an 0 to an 3 100 an 4 an 4 1an 5 an 4 , an 5 10 an 6 an 4 to an 6 1an 7 an 4 to an 7 530 15.2.3 a/d control register (adcr) adcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables external triggering of a/d conversion. adcr is initialized to h'7f by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?rigger enable (trge): enables or disables external triggering of a/d conversion. bit 7 trge description 0 a/d conversion cannot be externally triggered (initial value) 1 a/d conversion starts at the falling edge of the external trigger signal ( adtrg ) bits 6 to 0?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit initial value read/write 7 trge 0 r/w 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 trigger enable enables or disables external triggering of a/d conversion reserved bits 531 15.3 cpu interface addra to addrd are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to the cpu by an 8-bit data bus. therefore, although the upper byte can be be accessed directly by the cpu, the lower byte is read through an 8-bit temporary register (temp). an a/d data register is read as follows. when the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred directly to the cpu and the lower-byte value is transferred into temp. next, when the lower byte is read, the temp contents are transferred to the cpu. when reading an a/d data register, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. it is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. figure 15-2 shows the data flow for access to an a/d data register. figure 15-2 a/d data register access operation (reading h'aa40) upper-byte read bus interface module data bus cpu (h'aa) addrnh (h'aa) addrnl (h'40) lower-byte read bus interface module data bus cpu (h'40) addrnh (h'aa) addrnl (h'40) temp (h'40) temp (h'40) (n = a to d) (n = a to d) 532 15.4 operation the a/d converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. it has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 15.4.1 single mode (scan = 0) single mode should be selected when only one a/d conversion on one channel is required. a/d conversion starts when the adst bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. the adst bit remains set to 1 during a/d conversion and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. when conversion ends the adf bit is set to 1. if the adie bit is also set to 1, an adi interrupt is requested at this time. to clear the adf flag to 0, first read adcsr, then write 0 in adf. when the mode or analog input channel must be switched during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the adst bit to 0 in adcsr to halt a/d conversion. after making the necessary changes, set the adst bit to 1 to start a/d conversion again. the adst bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel is changed. typical operations when channel 1 (an 1 ) is selected in single mode are described next. figure 15-3 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. single mode is selected (scan = 0), input channel an 1 is selected (ch2 = ch1 = 0, ch0 = 1), the a/d interrupt is enabled (adie = 1), and a/d conversion is started (adst = 1). 2. when a/d conversion is completed, the result is transferred into addrb. at the same time the adf flag is set to 1, the adst bit is cleared to 0, and the a/d converter becomes idle. 3. since adf = 1 and adie = 1, an adi interrupt is requested. 4. the a/d interrupt handling routine starts. 5. the routine reads adcsr, then writes 0 in the adf flag. 6. the routine reads and processes the conversion result (addrb). 7. execution of the a/d interrupt handling routine ends. after that, if the adst bit is set to 1, a/d conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated. 533 figure 15-3 example of a/d converter operation (single mode, channel 1 selected) adie adst adf state of channel 0 (an ) set set set clear clear idle idle idle idle a/d conversion (1) a/d conversion (2) idle read conversion result a/d conversion result (1) read conversion result a/d conversion result (2) note: vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 0 1 2 3 a/d conversion starts * * * * * * addra addrb addrc addrd state of channel 1 (an ) state of channel 2 (an ) state of channel 3 (an ) idle 534 15.4.2 scan mode (scan = 1) scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. when the adst bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, a/d conversion starts on the first channel in the group (an 0 when ch2 = 0, an 4 when ch2 = 1). when two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (an 1 or an 5 ) starts immediately. a/d conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the adst bit is cleared to 0. the conversion results are transferred for storage into the a/d data registers corresponding to the channels. when the mode or analog input channel selection must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the adst bit to 0 in adcsr to halt a/d conversion. after making the necessary changes, set the adst bit to 1. a/d conversion will start again from the first channel in the group. the adst bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel selection is changed. typical operations when three channels in group 0 (an 0 to an 2 ) are selected in scan mode are described next. figure 15-4 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. scan mode is selected (scan = 1), scan group 0 is selected (ch2 = 0), analog input channels an 0 to an 2 are selected (ch1 = 1, ch0 = 0), and a/d conversion is started (adst = 1). 2. when a/d conversion of the first channel (an 0 ) is completed, the result is transferred into addra. next, conversion of the second channel (an 1 ) starts automatically. 3. conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (an 2 ). 4. when conversion of all selected channels (an 0 to an 2 ) is completed, the adf flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (an 0 ) starts again. if the adie bit is set to 1, an adi interrupt is requested at this time. 5. steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the adst bit remains set to 1. when the adst bit is cleared to 0, a/d conversion stops. after that, if the adst bit is set to 1, a/d conversion starts again from the first channel (an 0 ). 535 figure 15-4 example of a/d converter operation (scan mode, channels an 0 to an 2 selected) adst adf state of channel 0 (an ) 0 1 2 3 continuous a/d conversion set clear * 1 clear * 1 idle a/d conversion (1) idle idle idle a/d conversion (4) idle a/d conversion (2) idle a/d conversion (5) idle a/d conversion (3) idle idle transfer a/d conversion result (1) a/d conversion result (4) a/d conversion result (2) a/d conversion result (3) 1. 2. a/d conversion time notes: * 2 * 1 addra addrb addrc addrd state of channel 1 (an ) state of channel 2 (an ) state of channel 3 (an ) vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. data currently being converted is ignored. 536 15.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time the a/d converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. the a/d converter samples the analog input at a time t d after the adst bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. figure 15-5 shows the a/d conversion timing. table 15-4 indicates the a/d conversion time. as indicated in figure 15-5, the a/d conversion time includes t d and the input sampling time. the length of t d varies depending on the timing of the write access to adcsr. the total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15-4. in scan mode, the values given in table 15-4 apply to the first conversion. in the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 256 states when cks = 0 or 128 states when cks = 1. figure 15-5 a/d conversion timing address bus write signal input sampling timing adf (1) (2) t d t spl t conv legend (1): (2): t : t : t : d spl conv adcsr write cycle adcsr address synchronization delay input sampling time a/d conversion time 537 table 15-4 a/d conversion time (single mode) cks = 0 cks = 1 symbol min typ max min typ max synchronization delay t d 10?76 ? input sampling time t spl ?331 a/d conversion time t conv 259 266 131 134 note: values in the table are numbers of states. 15.4.4 external trigger input timing a/d conversion can be externally triggered. when the trge bit is set to 1 in adcr, external trigger input is enabled at the adtrg pin. a high-to-low transition at the adtrg pin sets the adst bit to 1 in adcsr, starting a/d conversion. other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as if the adst bit had been set to 1 by software. figure 15-6 shows the timing. figure 15-6 external trigger input timing adtrg internal trigger signal adst a/d conversion 538 15.5 interrupts the a/d converter generates an interrupt (adi) at the end of a/d conversion. the adi interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the adie bit in adcsr. 15.6 usage notes when using the a/d converter, note the following points: 1. analog input voltage range: during a/d conversion, the voltages input to the analog input pins should be in the range av ss an n v ref . 2. relationships of av cc and av ss to v cc and v ss : av cc , av ss , v cc , and v ss should be related as follows: av ss = v ss . av cc and av ss must not be left open, even if the a/d converter is not used. 3. v ref programming range: the reference voltage input at the v ref pin should be in the range v ref av cc . 4. analog voltage when using an a/d converter, make the following voltage settings. (1) v cc 3 av cc - 0.3v (2) av cc 3 v ref 3 ann 3 av ss = v ss (n = 0 to 7) note: restriction for the ztat tm version only; the s mask version of ztat tm , the flash memory version and mask rom version can be used regularly without restriction. failure to observe points 1, 2, 3, and 4 above may degrade chip reliability. 5. note on board design: in board layout, separate the digital circuits from the analog circuits as much as possible. particularly avoid layouts in which the signal lines of digital circuits cross or closely approach the signal lines of analog circuits. induction and other effects may cause the analog circuits to operate incorrectly, or may adversely affect the accuracy of a/d conversion. the analog input signals (an 0 to an 7 ), analog reference voltage (v ref ), and analog supply voltage (av cc ) must be separated from digital circuits by the analog ground (av ss ). the analog ground (av ss ) should be connected to a stable digital ground (v ss ) at one point on the board. 539 6. note on noise: to prevent damage from surges and other abnormal voltages at the analog input pins (an 0 to an 7 ) and analog reference voltage pin (v ref ), connect a protection circuit like the one in figure 15-7 between av cc and av ss . the bypass capacitors connected to av cc and v ref and the filter capacitors connected to an 0 to an 7 must be connected to av ss . if filter capacitors like the ones in figure 15-7 are connected, the voltage values input to the analog input pins (an 0 to an 7 ) will be smoothed, which may give rise to error. error can also occur if a/d conversion is frequently performed in scan mode so that the current that charges and discharges the capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit of the a/d converter becomes greater than that input to the analog input pins via input impedance rin. the circuit constants should therefore be selected carefully. figure 15-7 example of analog input protection circuit 540 av cc * 1 * 1 v ref an 0 to an 7 av ss notes: 1. numeric values are approximate. 2. rin: input impedance rin * 2 100 w 0.1 f 0.01 f 10 f figure 15-8 analog input pin equivalent circuit table 15-5 analog input pin ratings item min max unit analog input capacitance 20 pf allowable signal-source impedance 10 * k note: * when v cc = 4.0 v to 5.5 v and 12 mhz. 7. a/d conversion accuracy definitions: a/d conversion accuracy in the h8/3048 series is defined as follows: resolution:..................digital output code length of a/d converter offset error:.................deviation from ideal a/d conversion characteristic of analog input voltage required to raise digital output from minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001 (figure 15-10) full-scale error:...........deviation from ideal a/d conversion characteristic of analog input voltage required to raise digital output from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (figure 15-10) quantization error:......intrinsic error of the a/d converter; 1/2 lsb (figure 15-9) nonlinearity error: ......deviation from ideal a/d conversion characteristic in range from zero volts to full scale, exclusive of offset error, full-scale error, and quantization error. absolute accuracy:......deviation of digital value from analog input value, including offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. 20 pf to a/d converter an 0 to an 7 10 k w 541 note: numeric values are approximate. figure 15-9 a/d converter accuracy definitions (1) 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 fs quantization error analog input voltage digital output ideal a/d conversion characteristic 542 figure 15-10 a/d converter accuracy definitions (2) 8. allowable signal-source impedance: the analog inputs of the h8/3048 series are designed to assure accurate conversion of input signals with a signal-source impedance not exceeding 10 k . the reason for this rating is that it enables the input capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit in the a/d converter to charge within the sampling time. if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 k , charging may be inadequate and the accuracy of a/d conversion cannot be guaranteed. if a large external capacitor is provided in scan mode, then the internal 10-k input resistance becomes the only significant load on the input. in this case the impedance of the signal source is not a problem. a large external capacitor, however, acts as a low-pass filter. this may make it impossible to track analog signals with high dv/dt (e.g. a variation of 5 mv/?) (figure 15-11). to convert high-speed analog signals or to use scan mode, insert a low-impedance buffer. 9. effect on absolute accuracy: attaching an external capacitor creates a coupling with ground, so if there is noise on the ground line, it may degrade absolute accuracy. the capacitor must be connected to an electrically stable ground, such as av ss . if a filter circuit is used, be careful of interference with digital signals on the same board, and make sure the circuit does not act as an antenna. 543 fs offset error nonlinearity error actual a/d conversion characteristic analog input voltage digital output ideal a/d conversion characteristic full-scale error figure 15-11 analog input circuit (example) equivalent circuit of a/d converter h8/3048 series 20 pf cin = 15 pf 10 k w up to 10 k w low-pass filter up to 0.1 m f sensor output impedance sensor input 544 section 16 d/a converter 16.1 overview the h8/3048 series includes a d/a converter with two channels. 16.1.1 features d/a converter features are listed below. eight-bit resolution two output channels conversion time: maximum 10 ? (with 20-pf capacitive load) output voltage: 0 v to v ref d/a outputs can be sustained in software standby mode 16.1.2 block diagram figure 16-1 shows a block diagram of the d/a converter. figure 16-1 d/a converter block diagram dadr0 dadr1 dacr dastcr v av da da av ref cc ss 0 1 legend dacr: dadr0: dadr1: dastcr: 8-bit d/a module data bus bus interface on-chip data bus control circuit d/a control register d/a data register 0 d/a data register 1 d/a standby control register 545 16.1.3 input/output pins table 16-1 summarizes the d/a converter s input and output pins. table 16-1 d/a converter pins pin name abbreviation i/o function analog power supply pin av cc input analog power supply analog ground pin av ss input analog ground and reference voltage analog output pin 0 da 0 output analog output, channel 0 analog output pin 1 da 1 output analog output, channel 1 reference voltage input pin v ref input analog reference voltage 16.1.4 register configuration table 16-2 summarizes the d/a converter s registers. table 16-2 d/a converter registers address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ffdc d/a data register 0 dadr0 r/w h'00 h'ffdd d/a data register 1 dadr1 r/w h'00 h'ffde d/a control register dacr r/w h'1f h'ff5c d/a standby control register dastcr r/w h'fe note: * lower 16 bits of the address 546 16.2 register descriptions 16.2.1 d/a data registers 0 and 1 (dadr0/1) the d/a data registers (dadr0 and dadr1) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the data to be converted. when analog output is enabled, the d/a data register values are constantly converted and output at the analog output pins. the d/a data registers are initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 16.2.2 d/a control register (dacr) dacr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the d/a converter. dacr is initialized to h'1f by a reset and in standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 daoe1 0 r/w 6 daoe0 0 r/w 5 dae 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 d/a output enable 1 d/a output enable 0 d/a enable controls d/a conversion and analog output controls d/a conversion and analog output controls d/a conversion 547 bit 7?/a output enable 1 (daoe1): controls d/a conversion and analog output. bit 7 daoe1 description 0da 1 analog output is disabled 1 channel-1 d/a conversion and da 1 analog output are enabled bit 6?/a output enable 0 (daoe0): controls d/a conversion and analog output. bit 6 daoe0 description 0da 0 analog output is disabled 1 channel-0 d/a conversion and da 0 analog output are enabled bit 5?/a enable (dae): controls d/a conversion, together with bits daoe0 and daoe1. when the dae bit is cleared to 0, analog conversion is controlled independently in channels 0 and 1. when the dae bit is set to 1, analog conversion is controlled together in channels 0 and 1. output of the conversion results is always controlled independently by daoe0 and daoe1. bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 daoe1 daoe0 dae description 0 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1 0 1 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 1 0 1 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 1 0 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 1 1 0 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 1 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 when the dae bit is set to 1, even if bits daoe0 and daoe1 in dacr and the adst bit in adcsr are cleared to 0, the same current is drawn from the analog power supply as during a/d and d/a conversion. bits 4 to 0?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. 548 16.2.3 d/a standby control register (dastcr) dastcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables d/a output in software standby mode. dastcr is initialized to h'fe by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 1?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 0?/a standby enable (daste): enables or disables d/a output in software standby mode. bit 0 daste description 0 d/a output is disabled in software standby mode (initial value) 1 d/a output is enabled in software standby mode bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 daste 0 r/w 2 1 1 1 reserved bits d/a standby enable enables or disables d/a output in software standby mode 549 16.3 operation the d/a converter has two built-in d/a conversion circuits that can perform conversion independently. d/a conversion is performed constantly while enabled in dacr. if the dadr0 or dadr1 value is modified, conversion of the new data begins immediately. the conversion results are output when bits daoe0 and daoe1 are set to 1. an example of d/a conversion on channel 0 is given next. timing is indicated in figure 16-2. 1. data to be converted is written in dadr0. 2. bit daoe0 is set to 1 in dacr. d/a conversion starts and da 0 becomes an output pin. the converted result is output after the conversion time. the output value is (dadr0 contents/256) v ref . output of this conversion result continues until the value in dadr0 is modified or the daoe0 bit is cleared to 0. 3. if the dadr0 value is modified, conversion starts immediately, and the result is output after the conversion time. 4. when the daoe0 bit is cleared to 0, da 0 becomes an input pin. figure 16-2 example of d/a converter operation dadr0 write cycle dacr write cycle dadr0 write cycle dacr write cycle address bus dadr0 daoe0 da 0 conversion data 1 conversion data 2 high-impedance state conversion result 1 conversion result 2 t dconv t dconv legend t : d/a conversion time dconv 550 16.4 d/a output control in the h8/3048 series, d/a converter output can be enabled or disabled in software standby mode. when the daste bit is set to 1 in dastcr, d/a converter output is enabled in software standby mode. the d/a converter registers retain the values they held prior to the transition to software standby mode. when d/a output is enabled in software standby mode, the reference supply current is the same as during normal operation. 16.5 usage notes when using an d/a converter, note the following. (1) v cc 3 av cc ?0.3v (2) av cc 3 v ref 3 ann 3 av ss = v ss (n = 0 to 7) note: restriction for the ztat tm version only; the s mask version of ztat tm , the flash memory version and mask rom version can be used regularly without restriction. 551 section 17 ram 17.1 overview the h8/3048 and h8/3047 have 4 kbytes of high-speed static ram on-chip. the h8/3045 and h8/3044 have 2 kbytes. the ram is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus. the cpu accesses both byte data and word data in two states, making the ram useful for rapid data transfer. the on-chip ram of the h8/3048 and h8/3047 is assigned to addresses h'fef10 to h'fff0f in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, and to addresses h'ffef10 to h'ffff0f in modes 3, 4, and 6. the on-chip ram of the h8/3045 and h8/3044 are assigned to addresses h'ff710 to h'fff0f in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, and to addresses h'fff710 to h'ffff0f in modes 3, 4, and 6. the ram enable bit (rame) in the system control register (syscr) can enable or disable the on-chip ram. 17.1.1 block diagram figure 17-1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip ram. figure 17-1 ram block diagram h'fef10 * h'fef12 * h'fff0e * h'fef11 * h'fef13 * h'fff0f * on-chip data bus (upper 8 bits) on-chip data bus (lower 8 bits) bus interface syscr on-chip ram even addresses odd addresses legend syscr: system control register note: * this example is of the h8/3048 operating in mode 7. the lower 20 bits of the address are shown. 553 17.1.2 register configuration the on-chip ram is controlled by syscr. table 17-1 gives the address and initial value of syscr. table 17-1 system control register address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fff2 system control register syscr r/w h'0b note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 554 17.2 system control register (syscr) one function of syscr is to enable or disable access to the on-chip ram. the on-chip ram is enabled or disabled by the rame bit in syscr. for details about the other bits, see section 3.3, system control register (syscr). bit 0?am enable (rame): enables or disables the on-chip ram. the rame bit is initialized at the rising edge of the input at the res pin. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0 rame description 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled (initial value) bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 1 0 rame 1 r/w software standby standby timer select 2 to 0 user bit enable nmi edge select reserved bit ram enable enables or disables on-chip ram 555 17.3 operation when the rame bit is set to 1, the on-chip ram is enabled. accesses to addresses h'fef10 to h'fff0f in the h8/3048 and h8/3047 in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, addresses h'ffef10 to h'ffff0f in the h8/3048 and h8/3047 in modes 3, 4, and 6, addresses h'ff710 to h'fff0f in the h8/3045 and h8/3044 in modes 1, 2, 5, and 7, and addresses h'fff710 to h'ffff0f in the h8/3045 and h8/3044 in modes 3, 4, and 6 are directed to the on-chip ram. in modes 1 to 6 (expanded modes), when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the off-chip address space is accessed. in mode 7 (single-chip mode), when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip ram is not accessed: read access always results in h'ff data, and write access is ignored. since the on-chip ram is connected to the cpu by an internal 16-bit data bus, it can be written and read by word access. it can also be written and read by byte access. byte data is accessed in two states using the upper 8 bits of the data bus. word data starting at an even address is accessed in two states using all 16 bits of the data bus. 556 section 18 rom 18.1 overview the h8/3048 has 128 kbytes of on-chip rom, the h8/3047 has 96 kbytes, the h8/3045 has 64 kbytes and the h8/3044 has 32 kbytes. the rom is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus. the cpu accesses both byte data and word data in two states, enabling rapid data transfer. the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) can be set to enable or disable the on-chip rom as indicated in table 18-1. table 18-1 operating mode and rom mode pins mode md 2 md 1 md 0 on-chip rom mode 1 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 0 0 1 mode 2 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 0 1 0 mode 3 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 0 1 1 mode 4 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 1 0 0 mode 5 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) 1 0 1 enabled mode 6 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) 1 1 0 mode 7 (single-chip mode) 1 1 1 the prom version (h8/3048-ztat) and the flash memory version (h8/3048f-ztat) can be set to prom mode and programmed with a general-purpose prom programmer. disabled (external address area) 557 18.1.1 block diagram figure 18-1 shows a block diagram of the rom. figure 18-1 rom block diagram (h8/3048, mode 7) h'0000 h'0002 h'1fffe h'0001 h'0003 h'1ffff on-chip data bus (upper 8 bits) on-chip data bus (lower 8 bits) on-chip rom even addresses odd addresses bus interface 558 18.2 prom mode 18.2.1 prom mode setting in prom mode, the h8/3048 version with on-chip prom suspends its microcontroller functions, enabling the on-chip prom to be programmed. the programming method is the same as for the hn27c101, except that page programming is not supported. table 18-2 indicates how to select prom mode. table 18-2 selecting prom mode pins setting three mode pins (md 2 , md 1 , md 0 ) low stby pin p5 1 and p5 0 high 18.2.2 socket adapter and memory map the prom is programmed using a general-purpose prom programmer with a socket adapter to convert to 32 pins. table 18-3 lists the socket adapter for each package option. figure 18-2 shows the pin assignments of the socket adapter. figure 18-3 shows a memory map in prom mode. table 18-3 socket adapter ?reliminary microcontroller package socket adapter h8/3048 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hs3042eshs1h 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hs3042esns1h the size of the h8/3048 prom is 128 kbytes. figure 18-3 shows a memory map in prom mode. h'ff data should be specified for unused address areas in the on-chip prom. when programming the h8/3048 with a prom programmer, set the address range to h'00000 to h'1ffff. 559 figure 18-2 socket adapter pin assignments h8/3048 fp-100b, tfp-100b 10 64 58 87 88 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 77 76 1 35 68 73 74 75 62 86 11 22 44 57 65 92 pin reso nmi p6 p8 p8 p3 p3 p3 p3 p3 p3 p3 p3 p1 p1 p1 p1 p1 p1 p1 p1 p2 p2 p2 p2 p2 p2 p2 p2 p5 p5 v av v v v md md md stby av v v v v v v 0 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 ref cc cc cc cc 0 1 2 ss ss ss ss ss ss ss pin v ea ea ea pgm eo eo eo eo eo eo eo eo ea ea ea ea ea ea ea ea ea oe ea ea ea ea ea ce v v prom socket hn27c101 (32 pins) 1 26 3 2 31 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 27 24 23 25 4 28 29 22 32 16 legend v : eo to eo : ea to ea : oe: ce: pgm: programming voltage (12.5 v) data input/output address input output enable chip enable program pp cc ss pp note: pins not shown in this diagram should be left open. this figure shows pin assignments, and does not show the entire socket adapter circuit. when undertaking a new design, board design (power supply voltage stabilization, noise countermeasures, etc.) as a high-speed cmos lsi is necessary. 9 15 16 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 7 16 0 0 560 figure 18-3 h8/3048 memory map in prom mode on-chip prom h'00000 h'00000 h'1ffff h'1ffff address in mcu mode address in prom mode 561 18.3 prom programming table 18-4 indicates how to select the program, verify, and other modes in prom mode. table 18-4 mode selection in prom mode pins mode ce oe pgm v pp v cc eo 7 to eo 0 ea 16 to ea 0 program l h l v pp v cc data input address input verify l l h v pp v cc data output address input program inhibited l l l v pp v cc high impedance address input lhh hl l hhh legend l: low voltage level h: high voltage level v pp :v pp voltage level v cc :v cc voltage level read/write specifications are the same as for the standard hn27c101 eprom, except that page programming is not supported. do not select page programming mode. a prom programmer that supports only page-programming mode cannot be used. when selecting a prom programmer, check that it supports a byte-at-a-time high-speed programming mode. be sure to set the address range to h'00000 to h'1ffff. 18.3.1 programming and verification an efficient, high-speed programming procedure can be used to program and verify prom data. this procedure programs the chip quickly without subjecting it to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability. unused address areas contain h'ff data. figure 18-4 shows the basic high-speed programming flowchart. tables 18-5 and 18-6 list the electrical characteristics of the chip during programming. figure 18-5 shows a timing chart. 562 figure 18-4 high-speed programming flowchart start set programming/verification mode v = 6.0 v ?0.25 v, v = 12.5 v ?0.3 v cc pp address = 0 ? pw verification ok? program with t = 0.2n ms opw last address? set read mode v = 5.0 v ?0.25 v, v = v cc pp cc all addresses read? end fail n 25 < address + 1 address ? no yes no yes no no program with t = 0.2 ms ?5% n = 0 n + 1 n yes yes 563 table 18-5 dc characteristics (conditions: v cc = 6.0 v 0.25 v, v pp = 12.5 v 0.3 v, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25? 5?) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input high eo 7 to eo 0 , v ih 2.4 v cc + 0.3 v voltage ea 16 to ea 0 , oe , ce , pgm input low eo 7 to eo 0 , v il e0.3 ? 0.8 v voltage ea 16 to ea 0 , oe , ce , pgm output high eo 7 to eo 0 v oh 2.4 ? ? v i oh = e200 a voltage output low eo 7 to eo 0 v ol ? ? 0.45 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage input leakage eo 7 to eo 0 , |i li | ??2 a v in = 5.25 v/0.5 v current ea 16 to ea 0 , oe , ce , pgm v cc current i cc ??40 ma v pp current i pp ??40 ma 564 table 18-6 ac characteristics (conditions: v cc = 6.0 v 0.25 v, v pp = 12.5 v 0.3 v, t a = 25? 5?) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions address setup time t as 2 s figure 18-5 * 1 oe setup time t oes 2?? s data setup time t ds 2?? s address hold time t ah 0?? s data hold time t dh 2?? s data output disable time t df * 2 130 ns v pp setup time t vps 2 s programming pulse width t pw 0.19 0.20 0.21 ms pgm pulse width for overwrite t opw * 3 0.19 5.25 ms programming v cc setup time t vcs 2 s ce setup time t ces 2?? s data output delay time t oe 0 ? 150 ns notes: 1. input pulse level: 0.8 v to 2.2 v input rise time and fall time 20 ns timing reference levels: 1.0 v and 2.0 v for input; 0.8 v and 2.0 v for output 2. t df is defined at the point where the output is in the open state and the output level cannot be read. 3. t opw is defined by the value given in the flowchart. 565 figure 18-5 prom program/verify timing address data v pp v cc ce pgm oe v pp v cc v cc v cc program verify input data output data t as t ds t vps t vcs t ces t pw t opw * t dh t oes t oe t df t ah note: t is defined by the value given in the flowchart. * opw +1 566 18.3.2 programming precautions program with the specified voltages and timing. the programming voltage (v pp ) in prom mode is 12.5 v. applied voltages in excess of the rated values can permanently destroy the chip. be particularly careful about the prom programmer s overshoot characteristics. if the prom programmer is set to hitachi hn27c101 specifications, v pp will be 12.5 v. before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the prom programmer. overcurrent damage to the chip can result if the index marks on the prom programmer, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. don t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. select the programming mode carefully. the chip cannot be programmed in page programming mode. the h8/3048 prom size is 128 kbytes. set the address range to h'00000 to h'1ffff. 567 18.3.3 reliability of programmed data a highly effective way to improve data retention characteristics is to bake the programmed chips at 150?, then screen them for data errors. this procedure quickly eliminates chips with prom memory cells prone to early failure. figure 18-6 shows the recommended screening procedure. figure 18-6 recommended screening procedure if a series of programming errors occurs while the same prom programmer is in use, stop programming and check the prom programmer and socket adapter for defects. please inform hitachi of any abnormal conditions noted during or after programming or in screening of program data after high-temperature baking. install program chip and verify programmed data bake chip for 24 to 48 hours at 125? to 150? with power off read and check program 568 18.4 flash memory overview 18.4.1 flash memory operation table 18-7 illustrates the principle of operation of the h8/3048f s on-chip flash memory. like eprom, flash memory is programmed by applying a high gate-to-drain voltage that draws hot electrons generated in the vicinity of the drain into a floating gate. the threshold voltage of a programmed memory cell is therefore higher than that of an erased cell. cells are erased by grounding the gate and applying a high voltage to the source, causing the electrons stored in the floating gate to tunnel out. after erasure, the threshold voltage drops. a memory cell is read like an eprom cell, by driving the gate to the high level and detecting the drain current, which depends on the threshold voltage. erasing must be done carefully, because if a memory cell is overerased, its threshold voltage may become negative, causing the cell to operate incorrectly. section 18.7.6, erasing flowchart and sample program shows an optimal erase control flowchart and sample program. table 18-7 principle of memory cell operation program erase read memory cell memory array vd vg = v pp vd vg = v pp vd 0 v vd vg = v pp vd 0 v vd vg = v pp vd 0 v vd vg = v pp vd vg = v pp vd 0 v 569 18.4.2 mode programming and flash memory address space as its on-chip rom, the h8/3048f has 128 kbytes of flash memory. the flash memory is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus. the cpu accesses both byte data and word data in two states. the flash memory is assigned to addresses h'00000 to h'1ffff on the memory map. the mode pins enable either on-chip flash memory or external memory to be selected for this area. table 18-8 summarizes the mode pin settings and usage of the flash memory area. table 18-8 mode pin settings and flash memory area mode pin setting mode md 2 md 1 md 0 flash memory area usage mode 0 0 0 0 illegal setting mode 1 0 0 1 external memory area mode 2 0 1 0 external memory area mode 3 0 1 1 external memory area mode 4 1 0 0 external memory area mode 5 1 0 1 on-chip flash memory area mode 6 1 1 0 on-chip flash memory area mode 7 1 1 1 on-chip flash memory area 18.4.3 features features of the flash memory are listed below. five flash memory operating modes the flash memory has five operating modes: program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, erase-verify mode, and prewrite-verify mode. block erase designation blocks to be erased in the flash memory address space can be selected by bit settings. the address space includes a large-block area (eight blocks with sizes from 12 kbytes to 16 kbytes) and a small-block area (eight 512-byte blocks). program and erase time programming one byte of flash memory typically takes 50 ?. erasing all blocks (128 kbytes) typically takes 1 s. 570 erase-program cycles flash memory contents can be erased and reprogrammed up to 100 times. on-board programming modes these modes can be used to program, erase, and verify flash memory contents. there are two modes: boot mode, and user programming mode. automatic bit-rate alignment in boot-mode data transfer, the h8/3048f aligns its bit rate automatically to the host bit rate (9600 bps, 4800 bps and 2400 bps). flash memory emulation by ram part of the ram area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates in real time. prom mode as an alternative to on-board programming, the flash memory can be programmed and erased in prom mode, using a general-purpose prom programmer. protect modes flash memory can be program-, erase-, and/or verify-protected in hardware and software protect modes. 571 18.4.4 block diagram figure 18-7 shows a block diagram of the flash memory. figure 18-7 flash memory block diagram flmcr ebr1 ebr2 h'00000 h'00002 h'00004 h'1fffc h'1fffe h'00001 h'00003 h'00005 h'1fffd h'1ffff md 2 md 1 md 0 internal data bus (upper) internal data bus (lower) bus interface and control section operating mode on-chip flash memory (128 kbytes) upper byte (even address) lower byte (odd address) legend flmcr: ebr1: ebr2: flash memory control register erase block register 1 erase block register 2 8 8 572 18.4.5 input/output pins flash memory is controlled by the pins listed in table 18-9. table 18-9 flash memory pins pin name abbreviation input/output function programming power v pp power supply apply 12.0 v mode 2 md 2 input h8/3048f operating mode programming mode 1 md 1 input h8/3048f operating mode programming mode 0 md 0 input h8/3048f operating mode programming transmit data txd 1 output serial transmit data output receive data rxd 1 input serial receive data input the transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode. 18.4.6 register configuration the flash memory is controlled by the registers listed in table 18-10. table 18-10 flash memory registers address name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ff40 flash memory control flmcr r/w * 2 h'00 * 1 register h'ff42 erase block register 1 ebr1 r/w * 2 h'00 * 1 h'ff43 erase block register 2 ebr2 r/w * 2 h'00 * 1 h'ff48 ram control register ramcr r/w h'70 notes: 1. the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). 2. in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. 573 18.5 flash memory register descriptions 18.5.1 flash memory control register the flash memory control register (flmcr) is an eight-bit register that controls the flash memory operating modes. transitions to program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase- verify mode are made by setting bits in this register. flmcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, and when 12 v is not applied to v pp . when 12 v is applied to v pp , a reset or entry to a standby mode initializes flmcr to h'80. bit initial value r/w 7 0 v pp ev 6543210 0000000 r r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w pv e p reserved bits erase mode designates transition to or exit from erase mode program mode designates transition to or exit from program mode **** * program-verify mode designates transition to or exit from program-verify mode erase-verify mode designates transition to or exit from erase-verify mode programming power status flag indicating the power to v pp v pp enable disables or enables 12-v application to v pp pin v e pp note: * the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. 574 bit 7?rogramming power (v pp ): programming power bit (v pp ) detects v pp , and level is displayed as ??or ?.?the permissible output currents for impressed high voltage vh are given in 21.3.1, ?c characteristics.?the value of vh ranges from v cc + 2 v to 11.4 v. if a voltage in excess of vh is applied, ??is displayed; otherwise ??is displayed. this bit restricts the hardware protect functions during write and erase operations for the flash memory. for details on hardware protect, see 18.7.8, ?rotect modes.?for notes on vpp usage, see 10.10, ?lash memory programming and erasing precautions. bit 7 v pp description 0 [clear conditions] (initial value) this is the regular operational mode when a voltage exceeding vh is not applied to the v pp pin. the flash memory cannot be written or erased. ?ardware protect?is displayed. 1 [set conditions] this is the operational mode when a voltage exceeding vh is applied to the v pp pin. the flash memory can be written and erased. ?ardware protect disabled?is displayed * . note: for correct write and erase functions, the setting should be v pp = 12.0 v to 0.6 v (11.4 v to 12.6 v). bit 6? pp enable (v pp e): disables or enables 12-v application to the v pp pin. after this bit is set, it is necessary to wait for at least 5 ? for the internal power supply to stabilize; programming and erasing cannot be performed until stabilization is complete. after this bit is cleared, it is necessary to wait for the flash memory read setup time (t frs ) in order to read flash memory. bit 6 v pp e description 0v pp pin 12-v power supply is disabled (initial value) 1v pp pin 12-v supply is enabled note: the power supply system used for the flash memory is switched by means of the vppe bit. after switching, operation is not guaranteed during the period before the power supply system stabilizes. it is therefore prohibited to fetch from flash memory and execute an instruction that sets or resets the vppe bit. 575 bits 5 to 4?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 0. bit 3?rase-verify mode (ev) *1 : selects transition to or exit from erase-verify mode. bit 3 ev description 0 exit from erase-verify mode (initial value) 1 transition to erase-verify mode bit 2?rase-verify mode (pv) *1 : selects transition to or exit from program-verify mode. bit 2 pv description 0 exit from program-verify mode (initial value) 1 transition to program-verify mode bit 1?rase mode (e) *1, *2 : selects transition to or exit from erase mode. bit 1 e description 0 exit from erase mode (initial value) 1 transition to erase mode bit 0?rogram mode (p) *1, *2 : selects transition to or exit from program mode. bit 0 p description 0 exit from program mode (initial value) 1 transition to program mode notes: 1. do not set two or more of these bits simultaneously. do not turn off power supply (v cc ? pp ) while a bit is set. 2. for each bit setting procedure, follow the algorithm described in section 18.7, programming and erasing flash memory. for the notes on programming and erasing, refer to section 18.10, flash memory programming and erasing precautions. particularly, be sure to set the watchdog timer beforehand to prevent program runaway, when the e or p bit is set. 576 18.5.2 erase block register 1 erase block register 1 (ebr1) is an eight-bit register that designates large flash-memory blocks for programming and erasure. ebr1 is initialized to h'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, when 12 v is applied to v pp while the v pp e bit is 0, and when 12 v is not applied to v pp . when a bit in ebr1 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed and erased. figure 18-8 shows a block map. note: * the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. bits 7 to 0?arge block 7 to 0 (lb7 to lb0): these bits select large blocks (lb7 to lb0) to be programmed and erased. bits 7 to 0 lb7 to lb0 description 0 block lb7 to lb0 is not selected (initial value) 1 block lb7 to lb0 is selected bit initial value r/w 7 0 lb3 6543210 0000000 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w lb6 lb5 lb4 lb2 lb1 lb0 **** * * * * lb7 r/w * 577 18.5.3 erase block register 2 erase block register 2 (ebr2) is an eight-bit register that designates small flash-memory blocks for programming and erasure. ebr2 is initialized to h'00 by a reset, in the standby modes, when 12 v is applied to v pp while the v pp e bit is 0, and when 12 v is not applied to v pp . when a bit in ebr2 is set to 1, the corresponding block is selected and can be programmed and erased. figure 18-8 shows a block map. note: * the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. bits 7 to 0?mall block 7 to 0 (sb7 to sb0): these bits select small blocks (sb7 to sb0) to be programmed and erased. bits 7 to 0 sb7 to sb0 description 0 block sb7 to sb0 is not selected (initial value) 1 block sb7 to sb0 is selected bit initial value r/w 7 0 sb7 sb3 6543210 0000000 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w sb6 sb5 sb4 sb2 sb1 sb0 **** * * * * * 578 figure 18-8 erase block map bit addresses lb0 lb1 lb2 lb3 lb4 lb5 lb6 lb7 sb0 sb1 sb2 sb3 sb4 sb5 sb6 sb7 h'00000?'03fff h'04000?'07fff h'08000?'0bfff h'0c000?'0ffff h'10000?'13fff h'14000?'17fff h'18000?'1bfff h'1c000-h'1efff h'1f000?'1f1ff h'1f200?'1f3ff h'1f400?'1f5ff h'1f600?'1f7ff h'1f800?'1f9ff h'1fa00?'1fbff h'1fc00?'1fdff h'1fe00?'1ffff 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 12 kbytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes 512 bytes large block area (124 kbytes) small block area (4 kbytes) h'00000 h'03fff h'04000 h'07fff h'08000 h'0bfff h'0c000 h'0ffff h'10000 h'13fff h'14000 h'17fff h'18000 h'1bfff h'1c000 h'1f1ff h'1f200 h'1f3ff h'1f400 h'1f5ff h'1f600 h'1f7ff h'1f800 h'1f9ff h'1fa00 h'1fbff h'1fc00 h'1fdff h'1fe00 h'1ffff h'1efff h'1f000 579 18.5.4 ram control register (ramcr) the ram control register (ramcr) enables flash-memory updates to be emulated in ram, and indicates flash memory errors. bit 7?lash memory error (fler): indicates that an error occurred while flash memory was being programmed or erased. when bit 7 is set, flash memory is placed in an error-protect mode.* 1 bit 7 fler description 0 flash memory is not write/erase-protected (initial value) (is not in error protect mode * 1 ) [clearing conditions] reset or hardware standby mode 1 indicates that an error occurred while flash memory was being programmed or erased, and error protection * 1 is in effect [setting conditions] flash memory was read * 2 while being programmed or erased (including vector or instruction fetch, but not including reading of a ram area overlapped onto flash memory). a hardware exception-handling sequence (other than a reset, trace exception, invalid instruction, trap instruction, or zero-divide exception) was executed just before programming or erasing. the sleep instruction (for transition to sleep mode or software standby mode) was executed during programming or erasing. a bus was released during programming or erasing. notes: 1. for details, see section 18.7.8, protect modes. 2. the read data has undetermined values. bit initial value r/w 7 0 fler rams 6543210 1110000 r r/w r/w r/w r/w ram2 ram1 ram0 580 bits 6 to 4?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 3?am select (rams): is used with bits 2 to 0 to reassign an area to ram (see table 18- 11). when bit 3 is set, all flash-memory blocks are protected from programming and erasing, regardless of the values of bits 2 to 0. it is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 2 to 0?am2 to ram0: these bits are used with bit 3 to reassign an area to ram (see table 18-11). they are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. they are not initialized in software standby mode. table 18-11 ram area reassignment bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 ram area rams ram2 ram1 ram0 h'fff000 to h'fff1ff 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 h'01f000 to h'01f1ff 1000 h'01f200 to h'01f3ff 1001 h'01f400 to h'01f5ff 1010 h'01f600 to h'01f7ff 1011 h'01f800 to h'01f9ff 1100 h'01fa00 to h'01fbff 1101 h'01fc00 to h'01fdff 1110 h'01fe00 to h'01ffff 1111 581 18.6 on-board programming modes when an on-board programming mode is selected, the on-chip flash memory can be programmed, erased, and verified. there are two on-board programming modes: boot mode, and user program mode. these modes are selected by inputs at the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) and v pp pin. table 18- 12 indicates how to select the on-board programming modes. for information about turning v pp on and off, see note (4) in section 18.10, flash memory programming and erasing precautions. table 18-12 on-board programming mode selection mode selections v pp md 2 md 1 md 0 notes boot mode mode 5 12 v 12 v 0 1 mode 6 12 v 1 0 mode 7 12 v 1 1 mode 5 1 0 1 mode 6 1 1 0 mode 7 1 1 1 18.6.1 boot mode to use boot mode, a user program for programming and erasing the flash memory must be provided in advance on the host machine (which may be a personal computer). serial communication interface 1 (sci1) is used in asynchronous mode (see figure 18-9). if the h8/3048f is placed in boot mode, after it comes out of reset, a built-in boot program is activated. this program starts by measuring the low period of data transmitted from the host and setting the bit rate register (brr) accordingly. the h8/3048f s built-in serial communication interface (sci) can then be used to download the user program from the host machine. the user program is stored in on-chip ram. after the program has been stored, execution branches to address h'ff300 in modes 5 and 6 and h'fff300 in mode 7 in the on-chip ram, and the program stored on ram is executed to program and erase the flash memory. figure 18-10 shows the boot-mode execution procedure. figure 18-9 boot-mode system configuration user program mode 0: v il 1: v ih host receive data to be programmed transmit verification data h8/3048f rxd 1 txd 1 sci1 582 boot-mode execution procedure: figure 18-10 shows the boot-mode execution procedure. figure 18-10 boot mode flowchart start 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 program h8/3048f pins for boot mode, and resets. after completing bit rate adjustment, h8/3048f transmits one h'00 byte to the host to indicate completion. host transmits h'00 data continuously at desired bit rate. the host confirms that bit rate adjustment was completed successfully, then transmits one h'55 byte. after receiving the h'55 byte, h8/3048f branches to boot program area in ram. h8/3048f branches to ram boot area h'fff300 to h'fffeff, then checks the flash memory user area data. h8/3048f confirms that all blocks of the flash memory are in h'ff, then transmits one h'aa byte to the host. h8/3048f receives two bytes of the program byte number (n) downloaded to the internal ram. * 1 h8/3048f downloads user program to ram. * 2 no yes h8/3048f computes the length of bytes downloaded (n = n-1). h8/3048f branches to ram area h'f7e0, and user program downloaded to the ram is executed. erase all blocks of the flash memory. does all data = h'ff? * 4 no yes h8/3048f measures h'00 low period for data transmitted from the host. h8/3048f computes the bit rate, then sets the value in the bit rate register. is the number of bytes n = 0? 1. program the h8/3048f pins for boot mode, and start the h8/3048f from a reset. 2. set the host's data format to 8 bits + 1 stop bit, select the desired bit rate (2400, 4800 or 9600), and transmit h'00 data continuously. 3. h8/3048f measures the duration of repeat when the rdx pin is "low," then computes the bit rate of the serial transmission from the host. 4. after h8/3048f completes sci bit rate adjustment, one byte of h'00 data is transmitted to indicate completion. 5. on receiving one byte from h8/3048f to indicate completion of bit rate adjustment, the host confirms regular reception then transmits one byte of h'55. h8/3048f transmits h'aa to indicate regular reception. 6. after h8/3048f receives h'55, it branches to boot program area h'fff300 to h'fffeff. 7. when h8/3048f branches to boot program area h'fff300 to h'fffeff, it confirms that data written to the flash memory is saved. if data is already written, all blocks are erased. 8. h8/3048f transmits one byte of h'aa. then the host transmits the byte length of the user program downloaded to h8/3048f. the byte length must be sent as two-byte data, most significant byte first and least significant byte second. then user-specified programs should be transmitted in order. the byte length received by h8/3048f or the user program is verified, and one byte each is transmitted in order to the host (echo back). 9. h8/3048f writes the received user program to area h'fff300 to h'fffeff on the internal ram. 10. h8/3048f branches to the internal ram fff300, and the written user program is executed. notes: 1. the user can use 3072 bytes of ram. the number of bytes transferred must not exceed 3072 bytes. be sure to transmit the byte length in two bytes, most significant byte first and least significant byte second. for example, if the byte length of the program to be transferred is 256 bytes, (h'0100), transmit h'01 as the most significant byte, followed by h'00 as the least significant byte. 2. the part of the user program that controls the flash memory should be coded according to the flash memory program/erase algorithms given later. 3. if a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be erased, the h8/3048f transmits one h'ff byte to report an erase error, halts erasing, and halts further operations. 4. the allotted boot program area is h'fff300 to h'fffeff. 583 automatic alignment of sci bit rate figure 18-11 measurement of low period in data transmitted from host when started in boot mode, the h8/3048f measures the low period in asynchronous sci data transmitted from the host (figure 18-11). the data format is eight data bits, one stop bit, and no parity bit. from the measured low period (nine bits), the h8/3048f computes the host s transmission bit rate. after aligning its own bit rate, the h8/3048f sends the host one byte of h'00 data to indicate that bit-rate alignment is completed. the host should check that this alignment- completed indication is received normally, then transmit one h'55 byte. if the host does not receive a normal alignment-completed indication, the h8/3048f should be reset, then restarted in boot mode to measure the low period again. there may be some alignment error between the host s and h8/3048f s bit rates, depending on the host s bit rate and the h8/3048f s system clock frequency. to have the sci operate normally, set the host s bit rate to a value 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps* 1 . table 18-13 lists typical host bit rates and indicates the clock-frequency ranges over which the h8/3048f can align its bit rate automatically. boot mode should be used within these frequency ranges.* 2 table 18-13 system clock frequencies permitting automatic bit-rate alignment by h8/3048f system clock frequencies permitting host bit rate * 1 automatic bit-rate alignment by h8/3048f 9600 bps 8 mhz to 16 mhz 4800 bps 4 mhz to 16 mhz 2400 bps 2 mhz to 16 mhz notes: 1. host bit rate settings are 2400, 4800, and 9600 bps; no other settings should be used. 2. although the h8/3048f may perform automatic bit-rate alignment with combinations of bit rate and system clock other than those shown in table 18-13, there may be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the h8/3048f, preventing subsequent transfer from being performed normally. boot mode execution should therefore be confined to the range of combinations shown in table 18-13. d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 start bit stop bit this low period (9 bits) is measured (h'00 data) high for at least 1 bit 584 ram area allocation in boot mode: in boot mode, the h'3f0 bytes from h'fef10 to h'ff2ff in modes 5 and 7, and from h'ffef10 to h'fff2ff in mode 6 are reserved for use by the boot program. the user program is transferred into the area from h'ff300 to h'ffeff, in modes 5 and 7, and from h'fff300 to h'fffeff in mode 6 (h'c00 bytes). the boot program area is used during the transition to execution of the user program transferred into ram. figure 18-12 ram areas in boot mode notes on use of boot mode 1. when the h8/3048f comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the sci1 s rxd 1 pin. the reset should end with rxd 1 high. after the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for the h8/3048f to get ready to measure the low period of the rxd 1 input. 2. in boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data are not h'ff), all flash memory blocks are erased. boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable, e.g. the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the update program activated in user program mode is accidentally erased. 3. interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. user program transfer area (h'c00 bytes) boot program area * 1 * 1 h'fef10 h'ff300 h'fff0f user program transfer area (h'c00 bytes) reserved * 2 reserved * 2 boot program area h'ffef10 h'fff300 h'ffff0f h'fff00 h'ffff00 h'ffeff h'fffeff modes 5 and 7 mode 6 585 notes: 1. this area is unavailable until the user program transferred into ram enters execution state (branch to h'ff300 in modes 5 and 7, and h'fff300 in mode 6). after branching to the user program area, the boot program is retained in the boot program area (h'fef10 to h'ff2ff in modes 5 and 7, and h'ffef10 to h'fff2ff in mode 6). 2. do not use reversed areas. 4. the rxd 1 and txd 1 lines should be pulled up on-board. 5. before branching to the user program (at address h'f300 in the ram area), the h8/3048f terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip sci (channel 1) (by clearing the re and te bits in serial control register (scr) to 0 in channel 1), but the auto-aligned bit rate remains set in bit rate register brr1. the transmit data pin (txd 1 ) is in the high output state (in port 9, the p9 1 ddr bit in port 9 data direction register p9ddr and p9 1 dr bit in port 9 data register are set to 1). when the branch to the user program occurs, the contents of general registers in the cpu are undetermined. after the branch, the user program should begin by initializing general registers, especially the stack pointer (sp), which is used implicitly in subroutine calls and at other times. the stack pointer must be set to provide a stack area for use by the user program. the other on-chip registers do not have specific initialization requirements. 6. transition to boot mode are shown in figure 18-12, ?am areas in boot mode.?this is possible after applying 12 v to pins md 2 and v pp and restarting. in this case, h8/3048f reset is erased (startup with low ? high) timing* 1 , mode pin status latches the personal computer internally to maintain boot mode. boot mode can be erased if the 12 v applied to the md 2 pin and the v pp pin is erased, then reset is erased* 1 . however, please note the following. when transferring from boot mode to regular mode (v pp 1 12 v, md 2 1 12 v), before transfer the erase must be carried out by the reset input personal computer internal boot mode res pin. after v pp interrupt, erase reset. the time needed until reset vector lead is flash memory read setup (t frs ) * 2 . while in boot mode, if the 12 v applied to the md 2 pin is erased, as long as reset input from the res pin does not occur, the personal computer internal boot mode status will be maintained and boot mode will continue. in boot mode, if watchdog timer reset occur, the personal computer internal boot mode is not erased, and despite mode pin status the internal boot program restarts. when transferring to boot mode (reset erase timing) or during boot mode operation, program voltage v pp should be within the range 12 v to 0.6 v. if this range is exceeded, boot mode will not operate correctly. in addition, during boot program operation or writing and erasing the flash memory, do not interrupt v pp * 2 . 7. during reset (when res pin input is low), if md 2 pin input changes from 0 v to 12 v or vice versa, by instantaneous transfer to 5 v input, the personal computer switches to operation mode. as a result, the address port or bus control output signal ( as , rd , hwr , lwr ) status changes, so do not these pins as output signals during reset, as the personal computer internal section needs to be shut down. 586 8. regarding 12 v application to the v pp and md 2 pins, insure that peak overshoot does not exceed the maximum rating of 13 v. also, be sure to connect bypass capacitors to the vpp and md 2 pins* 1 . notes: 1. mode pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t mds ) with respect to the reset release timing. when 12 v is applied to or disconnected from the md 2 pin, a delay occurs in the fall and rise waveforms due to the influence of the pull-up/pull- down resistor connected to the md 2 pin, etc. for reset release timing, therefore, this delay must be confirmed with the actual waveform on the board. 2. for notes on applying and cutting v pp , refer to 18.10, section (4) of ?rogramming and erasing flash memory. 18.6.2 user program mode when set to user program mode, the h8/3048f can erase and program its flash memory by executing a user program. on-board updates of the on-chip flash memory can be carried out by providing on-board circuits for supplying v pp and data, and storing an update program in part of the program area. to select user program mode, select a mode that enables the on-chip rom (mode 5, 6, or 7) and apply 12 v to the v pp pin. in this mode, the on-chip peripheral modules operate as they normally would in mode 5, 6, or 7, except for the flash memory. a watchdog timer overflow, however, cannot output a reset signal while 12 v is applied to v pp . the watchdog timer s reset output enable bit (rstoe) should not be set to 1. 587 the flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased, so the update program must either be stored in external memory, or transferred temporarily to the ram area and executed in ram. user program mode execution procedure: figure 18-13 shows the procedure for user program mode execution in ram. figure 18-13 user program mode operation (example) transfer on-board update program into ram store user application programs set md 2 to md 0 to 101, 110, or 111 apply 0 to 5 v to md 2 v pp = 12 v (user program mode) wait 5 to 10 s update flash memory execute user application program execute on-board update program in ram 1 2 set v pp e bit 4 3 5 procedure 1. the user stores application programs in flash memory. one of these is an on- board update program that will execute steps 3 to 5 below. 2. pin inputs are set up for user program mode. 3. a reset starts the cpu, which transfers the on-board update program into ram. 4. following a branch to the program in ram, the on-board update program is executed. v pp e bit in flmcr is set to update flash memory. wait 5 to 10 s to stabilize internal power supply. update program is executed. 5. after the on-board update ends, clear the v pp e bit then a branch is made to the updated user application program and this program is executed. after clearing the v pp e bit, before the flash memory program executes, flash memory read setup time (t prs ) is needed. 588 note: to prevent microcontroller errors caused by accidental programming or erasing, apply 12 v to v pp only when the flash memory is programmed or erased, or when flash memory is emulated by ram; do not apply 12 v to the v pp pin during normal operation. while 12 v is applied, the watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway program execution, so that program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing. for further information about turning v pp on and off, see section 18-10, flash memory programming and erasing precautions. 18.7 programming and erasing flash memory the h8/3048f s on-chip flash memory is programmed and erased by software, using the cpu. the flash memory operating modes and state transition diagram are shown in figure 18-14. program/erase modes comprise program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, erase-verify mode, and prewrite-verify mode. transitions to these modes can be made by setting the p, e, pv, and ev bits in the flash memory control register (flmcr). transition to the prewrite-verify mode can also be made by clearing all the bits in flmcr. the flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. the program that controls the programming and erasing of the flash memory must be stored and executed in on-chip ram or in external memory. a description of each mode is given below, with recommended flowcharts and sample programs for programming and erasing. high-reliability programming and erasing algorithms are used, which double the programming or erase processing time for each step. section 18.10, flash memory programming and erasing precautions, gives further notes on programming and erasing. figure 18-14 flash memory program/erase operating mode state transition diagram 589 normal rom access mode v pp e= 0 v pp off ev= 0 flash memory program/erase operations note: do not perform simultaneous setting/clearing of the p, e, pv, and ev bits. e= 0 ev= 1 e= 1 pv= 0 p= 0 pv= 1 p= 1 program mode program-verify mode erase-verify mode erase mode v pp = 12 v and v pp e= 1 prewrite-verify mode 18.7.1 program mode to write data into the flash memory, follow the programming algorithm shown in figure 18-15. this programming algorithm can write data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing the reliability of programmed data. to program data, first set the v pp e bit in flmcr, wait 5 to 10 ?, then designate the blocks to be programmed by erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1, ebr2), and write the data to the address to be programmed, as in writing to ram. the flash memory latches the address and data in an address latch and data latch. next set the p bit in flmcr, selecting program mode. the programming duration is the time during which the p bit is set. a software timer should be used to provide an initial programming duration of 15.8 ? or less. programming for too long a time, due to program runaway for example, can cause device damage. before selecting program mode, set up the watchdog timer so as to prevent overprogramming. 18.7.2 program-verify mode in program-verify mode, after data has been programmed in program mode, the data is read to check that it has been programmed correctly. after the programming time has elapsed, exit programming mode (clear the p bit to 0) and select program-verify mode (set the pv bit to 1). in program-verify mode, a program-verify voltage is applied to the memory cells at the latched address. if the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the latched address will be read. after selecting program-verify mode, wait 4 ? before reading, then compare the programmed data with the verify data. if they agree, exit program- verify mode and program the next address. if they do not agree, select program mode again and repeat the same program and program-verify sequence. do not repeat the program and program- verify sequence more than 6 times for the same bit. (when a bit is programmed repeatedly, set a loop counter so that the total programming time will not exceed 1 ms.) 590 18.7.3 programming flowchart and sample program flowchart for programming one byte figure 18-15 programming flowchart 591 write data to flash memory (flash memory latches write address and data) * 1 start n = 1 enable watchdog timer wait initial value setting x = 15 m s * 2 select program mode (p bit = 1 in flmcr) wait (x) s clear p bit disable watchdog timer select program-verify mode (pv bit = 1 in flmcr) wait (t vs1 ) s verify (read memory) * 3 no good ok clear pv bit end (1-byte data programmed) programming ends clear pv bit programming error n 3 n? n + 1 double the programming time (x 2 ? x) ? n no yes verify ends set erase block register (set bit of block to be programmed to 1) wait (z) s v e pp clear bit clear erase block register (clear bit of programmed block to 0) v e pp clear bit set v e bit (v e bit = 1 in flmcr) pp clear erase block register (clear bit of block to be programmed to 0) pp notes: 1. write the data to be programmed using a byte transfer instruction. 2. set the watchdog timer overflow interval by setting cks2 and cks1 to 0 and cks0 to 1. 3. read to verify data from the memory using a byte transfer instruction. 4. t vs1 :4 s z: 5 to 10 s n: 6 (set n so that total programming time does not exceed 1 ms) 5. programming time x, which is determined by the initial time 2 n? (n = 1 to 6), increases in proportion to n. thus, set the initial time to 15.8 s or less to make total programming time 1 ms or less. sample program for programming one byte : this program uses the following registers. r0: program-verify fail counter r1: program-verify timing loop counter er2: stores the address to be programmed as long word data. valid addresses are h'00000000 to h'0001ffff. r3h: stores data to be programmed as byte data r4: sets and clears tcsr and flmcr e4: stores the initial program loop counter value r5: clears flmcr e5: stores the program loop counter value arbitrary data can be programmed at an arbitrary address by setting the address in er2 and the data in r3h. the values of #a, #b, and #g depend on the clock frequency. they can be calculated as indicated under table 18-14. flmcr: .equ ffff40 ebr1: .equ ffff42 ebr2: .equ ffff43 tcsr: .equ ffffa8 prgm: mov.w #0001, r0 ; program-verify fail count mov.w #g, r1 ; set program loop counter mov.w #4140, r4 ; mov.b r4l, @flmcr:8 ; set v pp e bit loop0: dec.w #1, r1 ; bpl loop0 mov.b #**, r0h ; mov.b r0h, @ebr*:8 ; set ebr* mov.b r3h, @er2 ; dummy write mov.w #a, e4 ; set initial program loop counter value prgms: mov.w #a579, r4 ; start watchdog timer mov.w r4, @tcsr:16 ; mov:w e4, e5 ; set program loop counter mov.w #4140, r4 ; mov.b r4h, @flmcr:8 ; set p bit loop1: dec.w #1, e5 ; program bpl loop1 ; mov.b r4l, @flmcr:8 ; clear p bit mov.w #a500, r4 ; mov.w r4, @tcsr:16 ; stop watchdog timer mov:w #b , r1 ; set program-verify loop counter mov.b #44, r4h ; mov.b r4h, @flmcr:8 ; set pv bit loop2: dec.w #1, r1 ; wait bpl loop2 ; mov.b @er2, r1h ; read programmed address 592 cmp.b r3h, r1h ; compare programmed data with read data beq pvok ; program-verify decision pvng: mov.b #40, r5h ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; clear pv bit cmp.b #06, r0l ; program-verify executed 6 times? beq ngend ; if program-verify executed 6 times, branch to ngend inc.b r0l ; program-verify fail count + 1 ? r0l shll.w e4 ; double program loop counter value bra prgms ; program again pvok: mov.w #4000, r5 ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; clear pv bit mov.b r5l, @ebr*:8 ; clear ebr* mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit .................. one byte programmed ngend: mov.w #4000, r5 ; mov.b r5l, @ebr*:8 ; clear ebr* mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit programming error 18.7.4 erase mode to erase the flash memory, follow the erasing algorithm shown in figure 18-16. this erasing algorithm can erase data without subjecting the device to voltage stress or impairing the reliability of programmed data. to erase flash memory, before starting to erase, first place all memory data in all blocks to be erased in the programmed state (program all memory data to h'00). if all memory data is not in the programmed state, follow the sequence described later to program the memory data to zero. to select the flash memory areas to be erased, first set the v pp e bit in the flash memory control register (flmcr), wait 5 to 10 ?, and set up erase block registers 1 and 2 (ebr1 and ebr2). next set the e bit in flmcr, selecting erase mode. the erase time is the time during which the e bit is set. to prevent overerasing, use a software timer to divide the erase time. overerasing, due to program runaway for example, can give memory cells a negative threshold voltage and cause them to operate incorrectly. before selecting erase mode, set up the watchdog timer so as to prevent overerasing. 593 18.7.5 erase-verify mode in program-verify mode, after data has been erased, it is read to check that it has been erased correctly. after the erase time has elapsed, exit erase mode (clear the e bit to 0), select erase- verify mode (set the ev bit to 1), and wait 4 ?. before reading data in erase-verify mode, write h'ff dummy data to the address to be read. this dummy write applies an erase-verify voltage to the memory cells at the latched address. if the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the latched address will be read. after the dummy write, wait 2 ? before reading. if the read data has been successfully erased, perform the dummy write, wait 2 ?, and erase-verify for the next address. if the read data has not been erased, select erase mode again and repeat the same erase and erase-verify sequence through the last address, until all memory data has been erased to 1. do not repeat the erase and erase-verify sequence more than 602 times, however. 594 18.7.6 erasing flowchart and sample program flowchart for erasing one block figure 18-16 erasing flowchart start write 0 data in all addresses to be erased (prewrite) * 1 n = 1 set erase block register (set bit of block to be erased to 1) enable watchdog timer wait initial value setting x = 6.25 ms * 2 select erase mode (e bit = 1 in flmcr) clear e bit disable watchdog timer set top address in block as verify address select erase-verify mode (ev bit = 1) wait (t vs1 ) s dummy write to verify address * 3 (flash memory latches address) verify (read memory) *4 last address? address + 1 ? address yes ok no no good no no yes yes clear ev bit clear erase block register (clear bit of erased block to 0) end of block erase clear ev bit erase error n 3 n? n 3 5? erase-verify ends erasing ends n + 1 double the erase time (x 2 ? x) ? n wait (z) s v e pp set bit ( bit = 1 in flmcr) v e pp clear bit v e pp clear bit wait (x) ms v e pp wait (t vs2 ) s clear erase block register (clear bit of block to be erased to 0) notes: 1. program all addresses to be erased by following the prewrite flowchart. 2. set the watchdog timer overflow interval to the value indicated in table 18-15. 3. for the erase-verify dummy write, write h'ff using a byte transfer instruction. 4. read to verify data from the memory using a byte transfer instruction. 5. t vs1 :4 s z: 5 to 10 s t vs2 :2 s n: 602 6. the erase time x is successively incremented by the initial set value 2 n? (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). an initial value of 6.25 ms or less should be set, and the time for one erasure should be 50 ms or less. 595 prewrite flowchart figure 18-17 prewrite flowchart end of prewrite n 3 n? n + 1 double the programming time (x 2 ? x) ? n no start address = top address wait initial value setting x = 15 m s write h'00 to flash memory (flash memory latches write address and write data) enable watchdog timer * 2 * 1 select program mode (set p bit to 1 in flmcr) wait (x) s clear p bit disable watchdog timer wait (t vs1 ) s prewrite verify * 3 (read data = h'00?) last address? no good no yes programming ends programming error address + 1 ? address ok yes set erase block register (set bit of block to be erased to 1) wait (z) s n = 1 v e pp clear bit clear erase block register (clear bit of block to be erased to 0) v e pp set bit ( bit = 1 in flmcr) v e pp clear erase block register (clear bit of block to be erased to 0) clear v pp e bit notes: 1. use a byte transfer instruction. 2. set the watchdog timer overflow interval by setting cks2 = 0, cks1 = 0 and cks0 = 0. 3. in prewrite-verify mode p, e, pv, and ev are all cleared to 0 and 12 v is applied to v pp . use a byte transfer instruction. 4. t vs1 :4 s z: 5 to 10 s n: 6 (set n so that total programming time does not exceed 1 ms) 596 sample program for erasing one block: this program uses the following registers. r0: prewrite-verify and erase-verify fail counter er1: stores address used in prewrite er2: stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify er3: stores address used in erase-verify er4: timing loop counter r5: sets appropriate registers r6: sets appropriate registers the values of #a, #c, #d, #e, #f, #g, and #h, in the program depend on the clock frequency. they can be calculated as indicated in tables 18-14 and 18-15. flmcr: .equ ffff40 ebr1: .equ ffff42 ebr2: .equ ffff43 tcsr: .equ ffffa8 ; #blkstr is top address of block to be erased ; #blkend is last address of block to be erased mov.l #blkstr:32, er1 ; er1: top address of block to be erased mov.l #blkend:32, er2 ; er2: last address of block to be erased ; execute prewrite prewrt: mov.w #g, r4 ; set wait counter mov.w #4140, r6 ; mov.b r6l, @flmcr:8 ; set v pp e bit loopr0: dec.w #1, r4 ; bpl loopr0 ; ; set ebr1 or ebr2 bit of block to be erased mov.b #**, r5h ; mov.b r5h, @ebr* ; set ebr* prewrn: sub.b r0h, r0h ; r0: prewrite-verify fail count mov.w #a, e4 ; set initial prewrite loop counter value prewrs: mov.b #00, r5h ; write #00 data mov.b r5h, @er1 ; mov.w #a579, r5 ; start watchdog timer mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; mov.w e4, r4 ; set prewrite loop counter mov.w #4140, r6 ; mov.b r6h, @flmcr:8 ; set p bit loopr1: dec.w #1, r4 ; prewrite bpl loopr1 ; mov.b r6l, @flmcr:8 ; clear p bit mov.w #a500, r5 ; stop watchdog timer mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; mov.w #c , r5 ; set prewrite-verify loop counter 597 loopr2: dec.w #1, r5 ; wait bpl loopr2 ; mov.b @er1, r5h ; read data = h'00? beq pwvfok ; if read data = h'00, branch to pwvfok cmp.b #05, r0h ; prewrite-verify executed 6 times? beq abend1 ; if prewrite-verify executed 6 times, branch to abend1 shll.w e4 ; double prewrite loop counter value inc.b r0h ; prewrite-verify fail count + 1 ? r0h bra prewrs ; prewrite again pwvfok: cmp.l er2, er1 ; last address? beq erases ; inc.l #1, er1 ; address + 1 ? r1 bra prewrn ; if not last address, prewrite next address ; execute erase erases: sub.w r0, r0 ; r0: erase-verify fail count mov.l #blkstr:32,er3 ; er3: top address of block to be erased mov.w #d, e4 ; set initial erase loop counter value erase: cmp.w #025a, r0 ; r0 = h'025a? (erase-verify fail count = 603?) beq abend2 ; if r0 = h'025a, branch to abend2 inc.w #1, r0 ; erase-verify fail count + 1 ? r0 mov.w e4, r4 ; mov.w #f, r5 ; start watchdog timer mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; mov.b #42, r5h ; set e bit mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; loope: push.l er5 pop.l er5 push.l er5 pop.l er5 push.l er5 pop.l er5 dec.w #1, r4 ; erase bpl loope ; mov.b #40, r5h ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; clear e bit mov.w #a500, r5 ; mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; stop watchdog timer ; execute erase-verify mov.b #48, r5h ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; set ev bit mov.w #e , r4 ; r4: erase-verify loop counter loopev: dec.w #1, r4 ; bpl loopev ; wait evr2: mov.b #ff, @er3 ; dummy write mov.w #h, r4 ; r4: erase-verify loop counter 598 loopdw: dec.w #1, r4 ; bpl loopdw ; wait mov.b @er3+, r4h ; read cmp.b #ff, r4h ; read data = h?f? bne rerase ; if read data h?f, branch to rerase cmp.l er2, er3 ; last address in block? bgt evr2 ; if not last address in block, erase-verify next address bra okend, ; branch to okend rerase: mov.w #4000, r5 ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; clear ev bit dec.l #1, er3 ; erase-verify address ?1 ? r3 cmp.w #0004, r0 ; bge keep ; erase executed 4 times? shll.w e4 ; double erase loop counter value keep: bra erase ; erase again okend: mov.w #4000, r5 ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; clear ev bit mov.w #0000, r5 ; mov.w r5, @ebr1:16 ; clear ebr1 and ebr2 mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit ............................. one block erased abend1: mov.w #0000, r5 ; mov.w r5, @ebr1:16 ; clear ebr1 and ebr2 mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit programming error abend2: mov.w #0000, r5 ; mov.w r5, @ebr1:16 ; clear ebr1 and ebr2 mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit erase error 599 flowchart for erasing multiple blocks figure 18-18 multiple-block erase flowchart start write 0 data to all addresses to be erased (prewrite) * 1 n = 1 set erase block registers (set bits of blocks to be erased to 1) enable watchdog timer wait initial value setting x = 6.25 ms * 2 select erase mode (e bit = 1 in flmcr) wait (x) ms clear e bit disable watchdog timer select erase-verify mode (ev bit = 1 in flmcr) wait (t vs1 ) m s set top address of block as verify address dummy write to verify address (flash memory latches address) 3 * erase-verify next block verify * 4 (read memory) last address in block? address + 1 ? address clear ebr bit of erase-verified block all erased blocks verified? clear ev bit all blocks erased? (ebr1 = ebr2 = 0?) end of erase n 3 n? erase error n + 1 ? n no no yes yes no no yes no yes no good ok erasing ends all erased blocks verified? erase-verify next block yes no yes v e pp clear bit clear erase block registers (clear bits of blocks to be erased to 0) n 3 4? wait (t vs2 ) m s wait (z) s v e pp clear bit pp pp set v e bit (v e bit = 1 in flmcr) double the erase time (x 2 ? x) notes: 1. program all addresses to be erased by following the prewrite flowchart. 2. set the watchdog timer overflow interval to the value indicated in table 18-15. 3. for the erase-verify dummy write, write h'ff with a byte transfer instruction. 4. when erasing two or more blocks, clear the bits of erased blocks in the erase block register, so that only unerased blocks will be erased again. 5. t vs1 :4 s z: 5 to 10 s t vs2 :2 s n: 602 6. the erase time x is successively incremented by the initial set value 2 n? (n = 1, 2, 3, 4). an initial value of 10 ms or less should be set, and the time for one erasure should be 50 ms or less. 600 sample program for erasing multiple blocks: this program uses the following registers. r0, r6: specifies blocks to be erased (set as explained below) r1h: prewrite-verify fail counter r1l: used to test bits 0 to 15 of r0 er2: specifies address where address used in prewrite and erase-verify is stored er3: stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify er4: stores address used in prewrite and erase-verify er5: sets appropriate registers e0, e1: timing loop counter e6: erase-verify fail counter arbitrary blocks can be erased by setting bits in r6. a bit map of r6 and an example setting for erasing specific blocks are shown next. example: to erase blocks lb2, sb7, and sb0 r6 is set as follows: mov.w #0481, r6 mov.w r6, @ebr1 the values of #a, #c, #d, #e, #f, #g, and #h in the program depend on the clock frequency. they can be calculated as indicated in tables 18-14 and 18-15. for #ramstr in the program, substitute the starting destination address in ram, to be used when this program is moved from flash memory into ram. lb7 lb6 lb5 lb4 lb3 lb2 lb1 lb0 sb7 sb6 sb5 sb4 sb3 sb2 sb1 sb0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit r6 corresponds to ebr1 corresponds to ebr2 lb7 lb6 lb5 lb4 lb3 lb2 lb1 lb0 sb7 sb6 sb5 sb4 sb3 sb2 sb1 sb0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 bit r6 corresponds to ebr1 corresponds to ebr2 setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 601 flmcr: .equ ffff40 ebr1: .equ ffff42 ebr2: .equ ffff43 tcsr: .equ ffffa8 ; set r0 value start: mov.w #ffff, r6 ; select blocks to be erased (r6: ebr1/ebr2) mov.w r6, r0 ; r0: ebr1/ebr2 sub.w r1, r1 ; r1l: used to test r1-th bit in r0 ; #ramstr is starting destination address to which program is transferred in ram ; set #ramstr to even number mov.l #ramstr:32, er2 ; starting transfer destination address add.l #ervadr:32, er2 ; #ramstr + #ervadr ? er2 sub.l #start:32, er2 ; er2: address of data area used in ram pretst: cmp.b #10, r1l ; r1l = #10? beq erases ; if finished checking all r0 bits, branch to erases cmp.b #08, r1l ; bcc bc0 ; btst r1l, r0h ; bne prewrt ; bra pwadd1 ; bc0: btst r1l, r0l ; test r1-th bit in r0 bne prewrt ; if r1-th bit in r0 is 1, branch to prewrt pwadd1: inc.b r1l ; r1l + 1 ? r1l mov.l @er2+, er3 ; dummy-increment er2 bra pretst ; execute prewrite prewrt: mov.l @er2+, er3 ; er3: prewrite starting address mov.l @er2, er4 ; er4: top address of next block mov.w #g, e5 ; wait counter mov.w #4140, r5 ; mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; set v pp e bit loopr0 dec.w #1, e5 ; bpl loopr0 ; mov.w r6, @ebr1:16 ; set ebr (r6: ebr1/ebr2) prew: mov.b #01, r1h ; prewrite-verify fail count mov.w #a, e0 ; set initial prewrite loop counter value prewrs: mov.b #00, r5h ; write #00 data mov.b r5h, @er3 ; mov.w #a579, e5 ; mov.w e5, @tcsr:16 ; start watchdog timer mov.w e0, e1 ; set program loop counter mov.w #4140, r5 ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; set p bit 602 loopr1: dec.w #1, e1 ; program bpl loopr1 ; mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear p bit mov.w #a500, r5 ; mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; stop watchdog timer mov.w #c, r5 ; prewrite-verify loop counter loopr2: dec.w #1, r5 ; bpl loopr2 ; mov.b @er3, r5h ; read data = #'00? beq pwvfok ; if read data = #'00, branch to pwvfok pwvfng: cmp.b #06, r1h ; prewrite-verify executed 6 times? beq abend1 ; if prewrite-verify executed 6 times, branch to abend1 inc.b r1h ; prewrite-verify fail count + 1 ? r1h shll.w e0 ; double prewrite loop counter value bra prewrs ; prewrite again pwvfok: inc.l #1, er3 ; address + 1 ? er3 cmp.l er4, er3 ; last address? beq pwadd2 ; bra prew ; pwadd2: inc.b r1l ; used to test (r1l + 1)?h bit in r0 bra pretst ; branch to pretst ; execute erase erases: mov.w r6, @ebr1:16 ; set ebr1/ebr2 sub.w e6, e6 ; e6: erase-verify fail count mov.w #d, e0 ; set initial erase loop counter value erase: mov.w #f , r5 ; mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; start watchdog timer mov.w e0, e1 ; set erase-loop counter mov.w #4240, r5 ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; set e bit loope: push.l er5 pop.l er5 push.l er5 pop.l er5 push.l er5 pop.l er5 dec.w #1, e1 ; erase bpl loope mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear e bit mov.w #a500, r5 ; mov.w r5, @tcsr:16 ; stop watchdog timer 603 ; execute erase-verify evr: mov.w r6, r0 ; r0: ebr1/ebr2 sub.w r1, r1 ; r1: used to test r1-th bit in r0 ; #ramstr is starting destination address to which program is transferred in ram mov.l #ramstr:32, er2 ; starting transfer destination address (ram) add.l #ervadr:32, er2 ; #ramstr + #ervadr ? er2 sub.l #start:32, er2 ; er2: address of data area used in ram mov.b #48, r5h ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; set ev bit mov.w #e , r5 ; r5: set erase-verify loop counter loopev: dec.w #1, r5 ; program bpl loopev ; wait ebrtst: cmp.b #10, r1l ; r1l = #10? beq hantei ; if finished checking all r0 bits, branch to hantei cmp.b #08, r1l ; bcc bc1 ; btst r1l, r0h ; test r1-th bit in r0h (ebr1) bne ersevf ; bra add01 ; bc1: btst r1l, r0l ; test r1-th bit in r0l (ebr2) bne ersevf ; if r1-th bit in r0 is 1, branch to ersevf add01: inc.b r1l ; r1l + 1 ? r1l mov.l @er2+, er3 ; dummy-increment r2 bra ebrtst ; ersevf: mov.l @er2+, er3 ; er3: top address of block to be erase-verified mov.l @er2, er4 ; er4: top address of next block evr2: mov.b #ff, r5h ; mov.b r5h, @er3 ; dummy write mov.w #h , r5 ; r5: erase-verify loop counter loopdw: dec.w #1, r5 ; bpl loopdw ; wait mov.b @er3+, r5l ; read cmp.b #ff, r5l ; read data = #ff? bne add02 ; if read data #ff, branch to add02 cmp.l er4, er3 ; last address in block? bne evr2 ; if not last address in block, branch to evr2 cmp.b #08, r1l ; bcc bc2 ; bclr r1l, r0h ; clear r1l-th bit in r0h (ebr1) bra add02 ; bc2: bclr r1l, r0l ; clear r1l-th bit in r0l (ebr2) add02: inc.b r1l ; r1l + 1 ? r1l bra ebrtst ; erase-verify next erased block 604 hantei: mov.w #4000, r5 ; mov.b r5h, @flmcr:8 ; clear ev bit mov.w r0, @ebr1:16 ; clear bit of erased block to 0 beq eowari ; if ebr1/ebr2 is all 0, erasing ended normally cmp.w #025a, e6 ; e6 = 025a? (erase-verify fail count = 602?) beq abend2 ; if e6 = 025a, branch to abend2 inc.w #1, e6 ; erase-verify fail count + 1 ? e6 cmp.w #0004, e6 ; bge keep ; erase executed 4-times? shll.w e0 ; double erase loop counter value keep: bra erase ; erase again ;? block address table used in erase-verify > .align2 ervadr: .data.l 00000000 ; #0000 lb0 .data.l 00004000 ; #4000 lb1 .data.l 00008000 ; #8000 lb2 .data.l 0000c000 ; #c000 lb3 .data.l 00010000 ; #10000 lb4 .data.l 00014000 ; #14000 lb5 .data.l 00018000 ; #18000 lb6 .data.l 0001c000 ; #1c000 lb7 .data.l 0001f000 ; #1f000 sb0 .data.l 0001f200 ; #1f200 sb1 .data.l 0001f400 ; #1f400 sb2 .data.l 0001f600 ; #1f600 sb3 .data.l 0001f800 ; #1f800 sb4 .data.l 0001fa00 ; #1fa00 sb5 .data.l 0001fc00 ; #1fc00 sb6 .data.l 0001fe00 ; #1fe00 sb7 .data.l 00020000 ; #20000 flash area end address eowari: mov.b #00, r5l ; mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit erase end abend1: mov.w #0000, r5 ; mov.w r5, @ebr1:16 ; clear ebr1 and ebr2 mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit programming error abend2: mov.w #0000, r5 ; mov.w r5, @ebr1:16 ; clear ebr1 and ebr2 mov.b r5l, @flmcr:8 ; clear v pp e bit erase error 605 loop counter values in programs and watchdog timer overflow interval settings: the values of a to h in the programs depend on the clock frequency. table 18-14 indicates the values for 10 mhz. values for other frequencies can be calculated as shown below, but use the settings in table 18-15 for the value off. table 18-14 loop counter values in program (10 mhz) variable clock frequency a (f) b (f) c (f) d (f) e (f) g (f) h (f) f = 10 mhz hexadecimal h'0019 h'0007 h'0007 h'03b3 h'0007 h'0009 h'0004 decimal 25 7 7 947 7 9 4 comments program tvs1 tvs2 erase tvs1 z tvs2 at write at pre-write at erase formula: a (f) to h (f) = {a (f = 10) to h (f = 10) } examples for 16 mhz: a (f) = 25 = 40 ? h'0028 b (f) = 7 = 11.2 ? h'000c c (f) = 7 = 11.2 ? h'000c d (f) = 947 = 1515.2 ? h'05ec e (f) = 7 = 11.2 ? h'000c g (f) = 9 = 14.4 ? h'000f h (f) = 4 = 6.4 ? h'0007 table 18-15 watchdog timer overflow interval settings variable clock frequency f 10 mhz frequency 16 mhz h'a57f 2 mhz frequency < 10 mhz h'a57e 1 mhz frequency < 2 mhz h'a57d note: the watchdog timer (wdt) set value is calculated based on the number of instructions including write time and erase time from start to stop of wdt operation. in this program example, therefore, no more instructions should be added between the start and stop of wdt operation. clock frequency f [mhz] 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 606 18.7.7 prewrite-verify mode prewrite-verify mode is a verify mode used after writing 0 to all bits to equalize their threshold voltages before erasure. to program all bits, write h'00 in accordance with the algorithm shown in figure 18-17. use this procedure to set all data in the flash memory to h'00 after programming. after the necessary programming time has elapsed, exit program mode (by clearing the p bit to 0) and select prewrite- verify mode (leave the p, e, pv, and ev bits all cleared to 0). in prewrite-verify mode, a prewrite- verify voltage is applied to the memory cells at the read address. if the flash memory is read in this state, the data at the read address will be read. after selecting prewrite-verify mode, wait 4 ? before reading. note: for a sample prewriting program, see the sample erasing program. 18.7.8 protect modes flash memory can be protected from programming and erasing by software or hardware methods. these two protection modes are described below. software protection: prevents transitions to program mode and erase mode even if the p or e bit is set in the flash memory control register (flmcr). details are as follows. function protection description program erase verify * 1 block individual blocks can be erase and disabled disabled enabled protect program-protected by the erase block registers (ebr1 and ebr2). if ebr1 and ebr2 are both set to h'00, all blocks are erase- and program-protected. emulation when the rams bit is set in the ram disabled * 2 disabled * 3 enabled * 2 protect control register (ramcr), all blocks are protected from both programming and erasing. notes: 1. three modes: program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify. 2. except in ram areas overlapped onto flash memory. 3. all blocks are erase-disabled. it is not possible to specify individual blocks. 607 hardware protection: suspends or disables the programming and erasing of flash memory, and resets the flash memory control register (flmcr) and erase block registers (ebr1 and ebr2). the error-protect function permits the p and e bits to be set, but prevents transitions to program mode and erase mode. details of hardware protection are as follows. function protection description program erase verify * 1 programing when v pp is not applied, flmcr, ebr1, disabled disabled * 2 disabled voltage (v pp ) and ebr2 are initialized, disabling protect programming and erasing. to obtain this protection, v pp should not exceed v cc . * 3 reset and when a reset occurs (including a watchdog disabled disabled * 2 disabled standby timer reset) or standby mode is entered, protect flmcr, ebr1, and ebr2 are initialized, disabling programming and erasing. note that res input does not ensure a reset unless the res pin is held low for at least 20 ms at power-up (to enable the oscillator to settle), or at least 10 system clock cycles ( ) during operation. error protect if an operational error is detected during disabled disabled * 2 enabled programming or erasing of flash memory (fler = 1), the flmcr, ebr1, and ebr2 settings are preserved, but programming or erasing is aborted immediately. this type of protection can be cleared only by a reset or hardware standby. notes: 1. program-verify, erase-verify, and prewrite-verify modes. 2. all blocks are erase-disabled. it is not possible to specify individual blocks. 3. for details, see section 18.10, flash memory programming and erasing precautions. error protect: this protection mode is entered if one of the error conditions that set the fler bit in ramcr is detected while flash memory is being programmed or erased (while the p bit or e bit is set in flmcr). these conditions can occur if microcontroller operations do not follow the programming or erasing algorithm. error protect is a flash-memory state. it does not affect other microcontroller operations. in this state the settings of the flash memory control register (flmcr) and erase block registers (ebr1 and ebr2) are preserved,* but program mode or erase mode is terminated as soon as the error is detected. while the fler bit is set, it is not possible to enter program mode or erase mode, even by setting the p bit or e bit in flmcr again. the pv and ev bits in flmcr remain valid, however. transitions to verify modes are possible in the error-protect state. 608 the error-protect state can be cleared only by a reset or entry to hardware standby mode. note: * it is possible to write to these registers. note that a transition to software standby mode initializes these registers. figure 18-19 flash memory state transitions in modes 5, 6 and 7 (on-chip rom enabled) when programming voltage (v pp ) is applied the purpose of error-protect mode is to prevent overprogramming or overerasing damage to flash memory by detecting abnormal conditions that occur if the programming or erasing algorithm is not followed, or if a program crashes while the flash memory is being programmed or erased. this protection function does not cover abnormal conditions other than the setting conditions of the flash memory error bit (fler), however. also, if too much time elapses before the error- protect state is reached, the flash memory may already have been damaged. this function accordingly does not offer foolproof protection from damage to flash memory. to prevent abnormal operations, when programming voltage (v pp ) is applied, follow the programming and erasing algorithms correctly, and keep microcontroller operations under constant internal and external supervision, using the watchdog timer for example. if a transition to error-protect mode occurs, the flash memory may contain incorrect data due to errors in p = 1 or e = 1 p = 0 and e = 0 error occurs res = 0 or stby = 0 or software standby res = 1 and stby = 1 and not software standby res = 0 or stby = 0 error occurs (software standby) res = 0 or stby = 0 software standby software standby cleared res = 0 or stby = 0 rd: vf: pr: er: rd: vf: pr: er: init.: memory read enabled verify read enabled programming enabled erase enabled memory read disabled verify read disabled programming disabled erase disabled initialized state of registers (flmcr, ebr1, ebr2) memory read or verify mode program mode or erase mode reset or standby (hardware protect) error-protect mode (software standby) error-protect mode rd vf pr er fler = 0 rd vf pr er fler = 0 rd vf pr er fler = 1 rd vf pr er init. fler = 1 rd vf pr er init. fler = 0 609 programming or erasing, or it may contain data that has been insufficiently programmed or erased because of the suspension of these operations. boot mode should be used to recover to a normal state. if the memory contains overerased memory cells, boot mode may not operate correctly. this is because the h8/3048f s built-in boot program is located in part of flash memory, and will not read correctly if memory cells have been overerased. 18.7.9 nmi input masking nmi input is disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased (when the p or e bit is set in flmcr). nmi input is also disabled while the boot program is executing in boot mode, until the branch to the on-chip ram area takes place.* 1 there are three reasons for this. nmi input during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or erasing algorithm. normal operation could not be assured. in the nmi exception-handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would not be read correctly.* 2 the result might be a program runaway. if nmi input occurred during boot program execution, the normal boot-mode sequence could not be executed. nmi input is also disabled in the error-protect state while the p or e bit remains set in the flash memory control register (flmcr). nmi requests should be disabled externally whenever v pp is applied. notes: 1. the disabled state lasts until the branch to the boot program area in on-chip ram (addresses h'ffef10 to h'fff2ff) that takes place as soon as the transfer of the user program is completed. after the branch to the ram area, nmi input is enabled except during programming or erasing. nmi interrupt requests must therefore be disabled externally until the user program has completed initial programming (including the vector table and the nmi interrupt-handling program). 2. the vector may not be read correctly for the following two reasons. if flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the p or e bit is set in flmcr), correct read data will not be obtained. undetermined values are returned. if the nmi entry in the vector table has not been programmed yet, nmi exception handling will not be executed correctly. 610 18.8 flash memory emulation by ram erasing and programming flash memory takes time, which can make it difficult to tune parameters and other data in real time. if necessary, real-time updates of flash memory can be emulated by overlapping the small-block flash-memory area with part of the ram (h'fff000 to h'fff1ff). this ram reassignment is performed using bits 3 to 0 of the ram control register (ramcr). after a flash memory area has been overlapped by ram, it can be accessed from two address areas: the overlapped flash memory area, and the original ram area (h'fff000 to h'fff1ff). table 18-16 indicates how to reassign ram. ram control register (ramcr) note: * bit 7 and bits 3 to 0 are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. they are not initialized in software standby mode. table 18-16 ram area reassignment bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 ram area rams ram2 ram1 ram0 h'fff000 to h'fff1ff 0 0/1 0/1 0/1 h'01f000 to h'01f1ff 1000 h'01f200 to h'01f3ff 1001 h'01f400 to h'01f5ff 1010 h'01f600 to h'01f7ff 1011 h'01f800 to h'01f9ff 1100 h'01fa00 to h'01fbff 1101 h'01fc00 to h'01fdff 1110 h'01fe00 to h'01ffff 1111 bit initial value r/w 7 0 fler rams 6543210 110000 r r/w r/w r/w r/w ram2 ram1 ram0 * 1 611 example of emulation of real-time flash-memory update figure 18-20 example of ram overlap h'fff000 h'01f9ff h'01fa00 h'01fbff h'01fdff h'01fe00 h'01ffff h'fff1ff h'fff200 h'ffff0f flash memory address space small-block area (sb5) overlapped by ram h'01f000 on-chip ram area h'ffef10 procedure 1. set the rame bit to 1 in syscr to enable the on-chip ram. 2. overlap part of ram (h'fff000 to h'fff1ff) onto the area requiring real-time update (sb5). (set ramcr bits 3 to 0 to 1101.) 3. perform real-time updates in the overlapping ram. 4. after finalization of the update data, clear the ram overlap (by clearing the rams bit). 5. program the data written in ram addresses h'fff000 to h'fff1ff into the flash memory area. notes: 1. when part of ram (h'fff000 to h'fff1ff) is overlapped onto a small-block area in flash memory, the overlapped flash memory area cannot be accessed. access is enabled when the overlap is cleared. 2. when the rams bit is set to 1, all flash memory blocks are write-protected and erase- protected, regardless of the values of bits ram2 to ram0. in this state, no transition to program or erase mode will take place if the p or e bit is set in the flash memory control register (flmcr). to actually program or erase a flash memory area, the rams bit must be cleared to 0. 612 18.9 flash memory prom mode 18.9.1 prom mode setting the on-chip flash memory of the h8/3048f can be programmed and erased not only in the on- board programming modes but also in prom mode, using a general-purpose prom programmer. table 18-17 indicates how to select prom mode. be sure to use the indicated socket adapter in prom mode. table 18-17 selecting prom mode pins setting mode pins: md 2 , md 1 , md 0 low p8 0 , p8 1 , and p9 2 stby and hwr high p5 0 , p5 1 , and p8 2 res power-on reset circuit xtal and extal oscillator circuit 613 18.9.2 socket adapter and memory map programs can be written and verified by attaching a special 100-pin/32-pin socket adapter to the prom programmer. table 18-18 gives ordering information for the socket adapter. figure 18-21 shows a memory map in prom mode. figure 18-22 shows the socket adapter pin interconnections. table 18-18 socket adapter microcontroller package socket adapter hd64f3048f 100-pin plastic qfp (fp-100b) hs3048eshf1h hd64f3048vf hd64f3048tf 100-pin plastic tqfp (tfp-100b) hs3048esnf1h hd64f3048vtf figure 18-21 memory map in prom mode note: * the fp-100b and tfp-100b pin pitch is only 0.5 mm. use an appropriate tool when inserting the device in the ic socket and removing it. for example, the tool listed in table 18-19 can be used. table 18-19 manufacturer part number enplas corporation hp-100 (vacuum pen) h8/3048f h'00000 h'1ffff h'000000 h'01ffff on-chip rom area mcu mode prom mode 614 figure 18-22 wiring of socket adapter h8/3048f pin name fp-100b, tfp-100b 10 64 69 58 90 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53, 54, 89 62, 71 76, 77 1, 35, 68 86 11, 22, 44 57, 65, 92 63 66, 67 other pins 1 26 2 3 31 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 27 24 23 25 4 28 29 22 32 16 hn28f101 (32 pins) pin no. pin name v pp a 9 a 16 a 15 we i/o 0 i/o 1 i/o 2 i/o 3 i/o 4 i/o 5 i/o 6 i/o 7 a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 a 8 oe a 10 a 11 a 12 a 13 a 14 ce v cc v ss socket adapter pin no. reso nmi p6 3 p6 0 p8 3 p3 0 p3 1 p3 2 p3 3 p3 4 p3 5 p3 6 p3 7 p1 0 p1 1 p1 2 p1 3 p1 4 p1 5 p1 6 p1 7 p2 0 p2 1 p2 2 p2 3 p2 4 p2 5 p2 6 p2 7 p5 0 , p5 1 , p8 2 stby, hwr md 0 , md 1 , md 2 , p8 0 , p8 1 av cc , v ref v cc av ss v ss res extal, xtal nc (open) power-on reset circuit oscillator circuit legend v pp : i/o 7 to i/o 0 : a 16 to a 0 : oe: ce: we: programming power supply data input/output address input output enable chip enable write enable note: this figure shows pin assignments, and does not show the entire socket adapter circuit. when undertaking a new design, board design (power supply voltage stabilization, noise countermeasures, etc.) and operating timing design as a high-speed cmos lsi are necessary. 73 to 75 87, 88, 14 , p9 2 615 18.9.3 operation in prom mode the program/erase/verify specifications in prom mode are the same as for the standard hn28f101 flash memory. table 18-20 indicates how to select the various operating modes. the h8/3048f does not have a device recognition code, so the programmer cannot read the device name automatically. table 18-20 operating mode selection in prom mode pins mode v pp v cc ce oe we i/o 7 to i/o 0 a 16 to a 0 read read v cc v cc l l h data output address input output v cc v cc l h h high impedance disable standby v cc v cc h x x high impedance read v pp v cc l l h data output output v pp v cc l h h high impedance disable standby v pp v cc h x x high impedance write v pp v cc l h l data input legend l: low level h: high level v pp :v pp level v cc :v cc level x: don? care command write 616 table 18-21 prom mode commands 1st cycle 2nd cycle command cycles mode address data mode address data memory read 1 write x h'00 read ra dout erase setup/erase 2 write x h'20 write x h'20 erase-verify 2 write ea h'a0 read x evd auto-erase setup/ 2 write x h'30 write x h'30 auto-erase program setup/ 2 write x h'40 write pa pd program program-verify 2 write x h'c0 read x pvd reset 2 write x h'ff write x h'ff pa: program address ea: erase-verify address ra: read address pd: program data pvd: program-verify output data evd: erase-verify output data 617 high-speed, high-reliability programming: unused areas of the h8/3048f flash memory contain h'ff data (initial value). the h8/3048f flash memory uses a high-speed, high-reliability programming procedure. this procedure provides enhanced programming speed without subjecting the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing the reliability of programmed data. figure 18-23 shows the basic high-speed, high-reliability programming flowchart. tables 18-22 and 18-23 list the electrical characteristics during programming. figure 18-23 high-speed, high-reliability programming start set v pp = 12.0 v 0.6 v address = 0 n = 0 program command program setup command n + 1 ? n wait (25 s) program-verify command wait (6 s) address + 1 ? address verification? last address? set v pp = v cc end fail n = 20? no good no yes ok yes no 618 high-speed, high-reliability erasing: the h8/3048f flash memory uses a high-speed, high- reliability erasing procedure. this procedure provides enhanced erasing speed without subjecting the device to voltage stress and without sacrificing data reliability . figure 18-24 shows the basic high-speed, high-reliability erasing flowchart. tables 18-22 and 18-23 list the electrical characteristics during programming. figure 18-24 high-speed, high-reliability erasing start program 0 to all bits * address = 0 n = 0 wait (10 ms) erase setup/erase command n + 1 ? n erase-verify command wait (6 s) address + 1 ? address verification? last address? end fail n = 3000? no good no yes ok yes no note: * follow the high-speed, high-reliability flowchart in programming all bits. 619 table 18-22 dc characteristics in prom mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v pp = 12.0 v 0.6 v, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25? 5?) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input high i/o 7 to i/o 0 , v ih 2.2 v cc + 0.3 v voltage a 16 to a 0 , oe , ce , we input low i/o 7 to i/o 0 , v il ?.3 0.8 v voltage a 16 to a 0 , oe , ce , we output high i/o 7 to i/o 0 v oh 2.4 v i oh = ?00 a voltage output low i/o 7 to i/o 0 v ol 0.45 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage input leakage i/o 7 to i/o 0 , i li 2 av in = 0 to v cc v current a 16 to a 0 , oe , ce , we v cc current read i cc ?080 ma program i cc ?080 ma erase i cc ?080 ma v pp current read i pp 200 a v pp = 5.0 v ?020 mav pp = 12.6 v program i pp ?040 ma erase i pp ?040 ma note: for details on absolute maximum ratings, see section 21-1. using an lsi in excess of absolute maximum ratings may result in permanent damage * . * v pp peak overshoot should not exceed 13 v. 620 table 18-23 ac characteristics in prom mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v pp = 12.0 v 0.6 v, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25? 5?) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions command write cycle t cwc 120 ns address setup time t as 0 ns address hold time t ah 60 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns data hold time t dh 10 ns ce setup time t ces 0 ns ce hold time t ceh 0 ns v pp setup time t vps 100 ns v pp hold time t vph 100 ns we programming pulse t wep 70 ns width we programming pulse t weh 20 ns high time oe setup time before t oews 0 ns command write oe setup time before verify t oers 6 s verify access time t va 500 ns oe setup time before status t oeps 120 ns polling status polling access time t spa 120 ns program wait time t ppw 25 ns erase wait time t et 9 11ms output disable time t df 0 40 ns total auto-erase time t aet 0.5 30 s note: ce , oe , and we should be high during transitions of v pp from 5 v to 12 v and from 12 v to 5 v. * input pulse level: 0.45 v to 2.4 v input rise time and fall time 10 ns timing reference levels: 0.8 v and 2.0 v for input; 0.8 v and 2.0 v for output figure 18-25 figure 18-26 * figure 18-27 621 figure 18-25 auto-erase timing figure 18-26 high-speed, high-reliability programming timing auto-erase setup auto-erase and status polling address command in status polling command in command in command in 5.0 v 12 v 5.0 v v cc v pp ce oe we i/o i/o to i/o t vps t vph t ceh t ces t ces t oews t wep t ceh t ces t cwc t wep t oeps t aet t weh t ds t dh t ds t dh t spa t df 7 06 t vph t vps t ceh t ces t oews t wep t ceh t ces t cwc t wep t ds t dh t ds t dh t as t ah t ppw t ces t weh t ceh t wep t oers t dh t ds t va t df command in command in data in command in command in valid data out valid data out data in program setup program program-verify valid address address 5.0 v 12 v 5.0 v v cc v pp ce oe we i/o i/o to i/o 7 06 note: program-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 if programming is insufficient. 622 figure 18-27 erase timing address 5.0 v 12 v 5.0 v v cc v pp ce oe we i/o 0 to i/o 7 erase setup erase erase-verify valid address command in command in command in valid data out t vps t vph t as t ah t oews t cwc t ces t wep t ceh t dh t ds t weh t ds t dh t ds t dh t va t df t ces t wep t ceh t ces t et t wep t ceh t oers note: erase-verify data output values may be intermediate between 1 and 0 if erasing is insufficient. 623 18.10 flash memory programming and erasing precautions (1) program with the specified voltages and timing. the programming voltage (v pp ) of the flash memory is 12.0 v. if the prom programmer is set to hitachi hn28f101 specifications, v pp will be 12.0 v. applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. insure, in particular, that peak overshoot at the vpp and md2 pins does not exceed the maximum rating of 13 v. also, be very careful about prom programmer overshoot. (2) before programming, check that the chip is correctly mounted in the prom programmer. overcurrent damage to the device can result if the index marks on the prom programmer socket, socket adapter, and chip are not correctly aligned. (3) don t touch the socket adapter or chip while programming. touching either of these can cause contact faults and write errors. (4) precautions in turning the programming voltage (v pp ) on and off: (a) apply the programming voltage (v pp ) after the rise of v cc , when the microcontroller is in a stable condition. shut off v pp before v cc , again while the microcontroller is in a stable condition. if v pp is turned on or off while v cc is not within its rated voltage range (v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v), since microcontroller operation is unstable and flash memory protection is not functioning, the flash memory may be programmed or erased by mistake. this can occur even if v cc = 0 v. the same danger of incorrect programming or erasing exists when v cc is within its rated voltage range (v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v) if the clock oscillator has not stabilized, if the clock oscillator has stopped (except in standby), or if a program runaway has occurred. after v cc power-up, do not apply v pp until the clock oscillator has had time to settle (t osc1 = 20 ms min) and the microcontroller is safely in the reset state, or the reset has been cleared. these power-on and power-off timing requirements should also be satisfied in the event of a power failure and recovery from a power failure. if these requirements are not satisfied, the flash memory may not only be unintentionally programmed or erased; it may be permanently damaged. 624 (b) the v pp bit in the flash memory control register (flmcr) is set or cleared when the v pp e bit in flmcr is set or cleared while a voltage of 12.0 0.6 v is being applied to the v pp pin. after the v pp e bit is set, it becomes possible to write the erase block registers (ebr1 and ebr2) and the ev, pv, e, and p bits in flmcr. accordingly, program or erase flash memory 5 to 10 ? after the v pp e bit is set. v pp should be turned off only when the p, e and v pp e bits in flmcr are cleared. be sure that these bits are not set by mistaken access to flmcr. figure 18-28 power-on and power-off timing (boot mode) tosc1 12 0.6 v min 0 s t mds min 0 s 12 0.6 v 0 to vcc v 0 to vcc v 2.7 to 5.5 v vppe set vppe cleared min 10 min 0 s 0 to vcc v 0 to vcc v t frs t vps * v cc v pp md2 res v pp e bit programming/ erasing possible period during which flash memory access is prohibited period during which flash memory can be rewritten (execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited) * t vps : 5 to 10 s 625 626 figure 18-29 power-on and power-off timing (user program mode) tosc1 12 0.6 v 0 to vcc v 2.7 to 5.5 v vppe set vppe cleared min 0 s 0 to vcc v t frs t vps * 1 v cc v pp md2 to 0 res v pp e bit 0 to vcc v t mds 0 to vcc v * 2 * 2 programming/ erasing possible period during which flash memory access is prohibited period during which flash memory can be rewritten (execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited) t vps : 5 to 10 s * 1 the level of the mode pins (md2 to md0) must be fixed from power-on to power-off by pulling the pins up or down. * 2 figure 18-30 mode transition timing (example: boot mode ? user mode ? user program mode) 627 tosc1 12 0.6 v 0 to vcc v 2.7 to 5.5 v v ppe set clear vppe user program mode mode switch- ing * 1 mode switch- ing * 1 boot mode user program mode user mode user mode v cc v pp md2 to 0 res v pp e bit 0 to vcc v t mds 12 0.6 v min 0 s min 0 s min 10 t mds * 2 t frs * 2 programming/ erasing possible t frs programming/ erasing possible t frs t vps programming/ erasing possible t frs t vps programming/ erasing possible t vps t vps period during which flash memory access is prohibited period during which flash memory can be rewritten (execution of program in flash memory prohibited, and data reads other than verify operations prohibited) 1 2 notes when entering boot mode or making a transition from boot mode to another mode, mode switching must be carried out by means of res input. the pin output states change during this switchover interval (the interval during which the res pin is low), and therefore these pins should not be used as output signals during this time. when making a transition from boot mode to another mode, the flash memory read setup time t frs and mode programming setup time t mds must be satisfied with respect to res clearance timing. vppe cleared (5) do not apply 12 v to the v pp pin during normal operation. to prevent microcontroller errors caused by accidental programming or erasing, apply 12 v to v pp only when the flash memory is programmed or erased, or when flash memory is emulated by ram. while 12 v is applied, the watchdog timer should be running and enabled to halt runaway program execution, so that program runaway will not lead to overprogramming or overerasing. (6) disable watchdog-timer reset output ( reso ) while the programming voltage (v pp ) is turned on. if 12 v is applied during watchdog timer reset output (while the reso pin is low), overcurrent flow will permanently destroy the reset output circuit. the watchdog timers reset output enable bit (rstoe) should not be set to 1. if a pull-up resistor is externally attached to the v pp / reso pin, a diode is necessary to prevent reverse current from flowing to v cc when v pp is applied (figure 18-31). (7) if the watchdog timer generates a reset output signal when 12 v is not applied, the rise and fall of the reset output waveform will be delayed by any decoupling capacitors connected to the v pp pin. figure 18-31 v pp power supply circuit design (example) 0.01 f 1.0 f +12 v v / reso pp h8/3048f +5 v pull-up resistor and a diode 628 (8) notes concerning mounting board development?andling of v pp and mode md2 pins 1. the standard 12 v high voltage is applied to the v pp and mode md2 pins when erasing or programming flash memory. the voltage at these pins also includes overshoot and noise, and the following points should be noted to ensure that the 13 v maximum rated voltage is not exceeded. (a) bypass capacitors should be inserted to eliminate overshoot and noise. these should be positioned as close as possible to the chip s v pp and mode md2 pins. 1.0 ?: stabilizes fluctuations in the low-frequency components, such as power supply ripple. 0.01 ?: bypasses high-frequency components such as induction noise. (b) the v pp and mode md2 pin wiring should be kept as short as possible to suppress induction noise. when designing a new board, in particular, noise may be increased by jumper wires, etc. in this case too, the power supply waveform should be monitored and measures taken to prevent the maximum rating from being exceeded. (c) the maximum rated voltage is based on the potential of the v ss pin. if the potential of this pin oscillates due to current fluctuations, etc., the voltage of the v pp and mode md2 pins may reciprocally exceed the maximum rated voltage. careful attention must therefore be paid to stabilizing the reference potential. note: when the user system s 12 v power supply is connected, attention must be paid to the current capacity. a power supply with a small current capacity will not be able to handle fluctuations in the chip s operating voltage, resulting in voltage drops and rises or oscillation that may make it impossible to obtain the rated operating voltage. if the power supply has a large current capacity, or if the 12 v voltage is turned on abruptly by means of a switch, etc., caution is required since a voltage exceeding the maximum rating may be generated due to the inductance component of the power supply wiring or the power supply characteristics. before using the power supply, check the power supply waveform to ensure that the above problems will not arise. 629 2. 12 v is applied to the v pp and mode md2 pins when programming or erasing flash memory. when these pins are pulled up to the v cc line in normal operation, diodes should be inserted to prevent reverse current from flowing to the v cc line when 12 v is applied. note: in normal operation, if the mode md2 pin to which 12 v is applied is to be set to 0, it should be pulled down with a resistor. a sample circuit is shown figure 18-32. figure 18-32 example of mounting board design (connection to adapter board?hen v pp pin and mode pin settings are 1) 630 v pp h8/3048f md2 0.01 m f 1.0 m f v cc v cc 0.01 m f 1.0 m f 12 v 12 v mode pin adapter board user system v pp pin mode pin (9) do not set or clear the vppe bit during execution of a program in flash memory. flash memory data cannot be read normally when the vppe bit is set or cleared. after the vppe bit is cleared, flash memory data can be rewritten after waiting for the elapse of the vpp enable setup time (tvps: 5 10 [??] ?), but flash memory cannot be accessed for purposes other than verification (verification during programming, erasing, or prewriting). after the vppe is cleared, wait for the elapse of the flash memory read setup time before performing program execution and data reading in flash memory. (10) do not use interrupts while programming or erasing flash memory. when vpp is applied, disable all interrupt requests, including nmi, to give the programming or erase operation the highest priority. (11) the vpp flag is set and cleared by a threshold decision on the voltage applied to the vpp pin. the threshold level is approximately in the range from vcc +2 v to 11.4 v. when this flag is set, it becomes possible to write to the flash memory control register (flmcr) and the erase block registers (ebr1 and ebr2), even though the vpp voltage may not yet have reached the programming voltage range of 12.0 v ?.6 v. do not actually program or erase the flash memory until vpp has reached the programming voltage range. the programming voltage range for programming and erasing flash memory is 12.0 v ?.6 v (11.4 v to 12.6 v). programming and erasing cannot be performed correctly outside this range. when not programming or erasing the flash memory, ensure that the vpp voltage does not exceed the vcc voltage. this will prevent unintentional programming and erasing. (12) after the vpp enable bit (vppe) is cleared, the flash memory read setup time (tfrs)* must elapse before the flash memory is read. when switching from boot mode or user program mode to normal mode (vpp 12 v, md? 12 v), this setup time is required as the period from vppe bit clearance until the flash memory is read. when switching from boot mode to another mode, a mode programming setup time (tmds) is required with respect to the ~res release timing. note: * the flash memory read setup time stipulates the interval before flash memory is read after the vppe bit is cleared (figure 18-30). also, when using an external clock (extal input), after powering on and when returning from standby mode, the flash memory read setup time must elapse before the flash memory is read. 631 18.11 notes on ordering masked rom version chip when ordering the h8/3048 series chips with a masked rom, note the following. when ordering through an eprom, use a 128-kbyte one. fill all the unused addresses with h'ff as shown in figure 18-33 to make the rom data size 128 kbytes for all h8/3048 series chips, which incorporate different sizes of rom. this applies to ordering through an eprom and through electrical data transfer. figure 18-33 masked rom addresses and data 632 hd6433048 (rom: 128 kbytes) address: h'00000?ffff h'00000 note: * program h'ff to all addresses in these areas. h'1ffff hd6433047 (rom: 96 kbytes) address: h'00000?7fff h'00000 not used * not used * not used * h'17fff h'18000 h'1ffff hd6433045 (rom: 64 kbytes) address: h'00000?ffff h'00000 h'0ffff h'10000 h'1ffff hd6433044 (rom: 32 kbytes) address: h'00000?7fff h'00000 h'07fff h'08000 h'1ffff section 19 clock pulse generator 19.1 overview the h8/3048 series has a built-in clock pulse generator (cpg) that generates the system clock (? and other internal clock signals (?2 to ?4096). after duty adjustment, a frequency divider divides the clock frequency to generate the system clock (?. the system clock is output at the ?pin *1 and furnished as a master clock to prescalers that supply clock signals to the on-chip supporting modules. frequency division ratios of 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, and 1/8 can be selected for the frequency divider by settings in a division control register (divcr). power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio *2 . notes: 1. usage of the ?pin differs depending on the chip operating mode and the pstop bit setting in the module standby control register (mstcr). for details, see section 20.7, system clock output disabling function. 2. the division ratio of the frequency divider can be changed dynamically during operation. the clock output at the ?pin also changes when the division ratio is changed. the frequency output at the ?pin is shown below. ?= extal n where, extal: frequency of crystal resonator or external clock signal n: frequency division ratio (n = 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, or 1/8) 19.1.1 block diagram figure 19-1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. figure 19-1 block diagram of clock pulse generator xtal extal cpg ?pin ?2 to ?4096 oscillator duty adjustment circuit frequency divider division control register prescalers data bus 633 19.2 oscillator circuit clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock signal. 19.2.1 connecting a crystal resonator circuit configuration: a crystal resonator can be connected as in the example in figure 19-2. the damping resistance rd should be selected according to table 19-1. an at-cut parallel- resonance crystal should be used. figure 19-2 connection of crystal resonator (example) table 19-1 damping resistance value damping resistance frequency f (mhz) value 2 2 < f 44 < f 88 < f 10 10 < f 13 13 < f 16 16 < f 18 rd for products 1 k 500 200 0000 ( ) listed below * hd64f3048 1 k 1 k 500 200 100 0 note: a crystal resonator between 2 mhz and 18 mhz (between 2 mhz and 16 mhz for the flash memory version) can be used. if the chip is to be operated at less than 2 mhz, the on-chip frequency divider should be used. (a crystal resonator of less than 2 mhz cannot be used.) * hd6473048, hd6433048, hd6433047, hd6433045, hd6433044 crystal resonator: figure 19-3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. the crystal resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 19-2. extal xtal c l1 c l2 c = c = 10 pf to 22 pf l1 l2 rd 634 figure 19-3 crystal resonator equivalent circuit table 19-2 crystal resonator parameters frequency (mhz) 2 4 8 10 12 16 18 rs max ( ) 500 120 80 70 60 50 40 co (pf) 7 pf max use a crystal resonator with a frequency equal to the system clock frequency (?. notes on board design: when a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted: other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. see figure 19-4. when the board is designed, the crystal resonator and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the xtal and extal pins. figure 19-4 example of incorrect board design xtal extal c l2 c l1 h8/3048 series avoid signal a signal b 635 xtal lrs c l c 0 extal at-cut parallel-resonance type 19.2.2 external clock input circuit configuration: an external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 19-5. if the xtal pin is left open, the stray capacitance should not exceed 10 pf. if the stray capacitance at the xtal pin exceeds 10 pf in configuration a, use configuration b instead and hold the clock high in standby mode. figure 19-5 external clock input (examples) extal xtal extal xtal 74hc04 external clock input open external clock input a. xtal pin left open b. complementary clock input at xtal pin 636 external clock: the external clock frequency should be equal to the system clock frequency (? when not divided by the on-chip frequency divider. table 19-3, figures 19-6 and 19-7 indicate the clock timing. when the appropriate external clock is input via the extal pin, its waveform is corrected by the on-chip oscillator and duty adjustment circuit. the resulting stable clock is output to external devices after the external clock settling time (t dext ) has passed after the clock input. the system must remain reset with the reset signal low during t dext , while the clock output is unstable. table 19-3 clock timing v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v v cc = 5.0 v 10% item symbol min max min max unit test conditions external clock input t exl 40 20 ns figure 19-6 low pulse width external clock input t exh 40 20 ns high pulse width external clock rise t exr ?0 5 ns time external clock fall t exf ?0 5 ns time clock low pulse t cl 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t cyc ? 3 5 mhz figure width 80 80 ns ?< 5 mhz 21-7 clock high pulse t ch 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t cyc ? 3 5 mhz width 80 80 ns ?< 5 mhz external clock t dext * 500 500 s figure 19-7 output settling delay time note: * t dext includes 10 t cyc of res (t resw ). 637 figure 19-6 external clock input timing figure 19-7 external clock output settling delay timing 638 extal t exr t exf v cc 0.7 0.3 v t exh t exl v cc 0.5 v cc stby extal ?(internal or external) res t dext * note: * t dext includes 10 t cyc of res (t resw ). 2.7 v v ih 19.3 duty adjustment circuit when the oscillator frequency is 5 mhz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the signal that becomes the system clock. 19.4 prescalers the prescalers divide the system clock (? to generate internal clocks (?2 to ?4096). 19.5 frequency divider the frequency divider divides the duty-adjusted clock signal to generate the system clock (?. the frequency division ratio can be changed dynamically by modifying the value in divcr, as described below. power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio. the system clock generated by the frequency divider can be output at the ?pin. 19.5.1 register configuration table 19-4 summarizes the frequency division register. table 19-4 frequency division register address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ff5d division control register divcr r/w h'fc note: * the lower 16 bits of the address are shown. 19.5.2 division control register (divcr) divcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the division ratio of the frequency divider. divcr is initialized to h'fc by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 div0 0 r/w 2 1 1 div1 0 r/w reserved bits divide bits 1 and 0 these bits select the frequency division ratio 639 bits 7 to 2?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bits 1 and 0?ivide (div1 and div0): these bits select the frequency division ratio, as follows. bit 1 bit 0 div1 div0 frequency division ratio 0 0 1/1 (initial value) 0 1 1/2 1 0 1/4 1 1 1/8 19.5.3 usage notes the divcr setting changes the ?frequency, so note the following points. select a frequency division ratio that stays within the assured operation range specified for the clock cycle time t cyc in the ac electrical characteristics. note that min = 1 mhz. avoid settings that give system clock frequencies less than 1 mhz. all on-chip module operations are based on ? note that the timing of timer operations, serial communication, and other time-dependent processing differs before and after any change in the division ratio. the waiting time for exit from software standby mode also changes when the division ratio is changed. for details, see section 20.4.3, selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode. 640 section 20 power-down state 20.1 overview the h8/3048 series has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by halting the cpu, and a module standby function that reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip modules. the power-down state includes the following three modes: sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode the module standby function can halt on-chip supporting modules independently of the power- down state. the modules that can be halted are the itu, sci0, sci1, dmac, refresh controller, and a/d converter. table 20-1 indicates the methods of entering and exiting the power-down modes and module standby mode, and gives the status of the cpu and on-chip supporting modules in each mode. 641 642 table 20-1 power-down state and module standby function state entering cpu refresh other ?clock i/o exiting mode conditions clock cpu registers dmac controller itu sci0 sci1 a/d modules ram output ports conditions sleep sleep instruc- active halted held active active active active active active active held ?output held interrupt mode tion executed res while ssby = 0 stby in syscr software sleep instruc- halted halted held halted halted halted halted halted halted halted held high held nmi standby tion executed and and and and and and and output irq 0 to irq 2 mode while ssby = 1 reset held * 1 reset reset reset reset reset res in syscr stby hardware low input at halted halted undeter- halted halted halted halted halted halted halted held * 3 high high stby standby stby pin mined and and and and and and and impedance impedance res mode reset reset reset reset reset reset reset module corresponding active active halted * 2 halted * 2 halted * 2 halted * 2 halted * 2 halted * 2 active high stby standby bit set to 1 in and and and and and and impedance * 2 res mstcr reset held * 1 reset reset reset reset clear mstcr bit to 0 * 4 notes: 1. rtcnt and bits 7 and 6 of rtmcsr are initialized. other bits and registers hold their previous states. 2. state in which the corresponding mstcr bit was set to 1. for details see section 20.2.2, module standby control register (mst cr). 3. the rame bit must be cleared to 0 in syscr before the transition from the program execution state to hardware standby mode. 4. when a mstcr bit is set to 1, the registers of the corresponding on-chip supporting module are initialized. to restart the mo dule, first clear the mstcr bit to 0, then set up the module registers again. legend syscr: system control register ssby: software standby bit mstcr: module standby control register 20.2 register configuration the h8/3048 series has a system control register (syscr) that controls the power-down state, and a module standby control register (mstcr) that controls the module standby function. table 20-2 summarizes these registers. table 20-2 control register address * name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fff2 system control register syscr r/w h'0b h'ff5e module standby control register mstcr r/w h'40 note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 20.2.1 system control register (syscr) syscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register. bit 7 (ssby) and bits 6 to 4 (sts2 to sts0) control the power-down state. for information on the other syscr bits, see section 3.3, system control register (syscr). bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 1 software standby enables transition to software standby mode ram enable standby timer select 2 to 0 these bits select the waiting time at exit from software standby mode user bit enable nmi edge select reserved bit 643 bit 7?oftware standby (ssby): enables transition to software standby mode. when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1 after the return to normal operation. to clear this bit, write 0. bit 7 ssby description 0 sleep instruction causes transition to sleep mode (initial value) 1 sleep instruction causes transition to software standby mode bits 6 to 4?tandby timer select (sts2 to sts0): these bits select the length of time the cpu and on-chip supporting modules wait for the clock to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. if the clock is generated by a crystal resonator, set these bits according to the clock frequency so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms. see table 20-3. if an external clock is used, any setting is permitted. bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 sts2 sts1 sts0 description 000w aiting time = 8,192 states (initial value) 1 waiting time = 16,384 states 1 0 waiting time = 32,768 states 1 waiting time = 65,536 states 100w aiting time = 131,072 states 101w aiting time = 1,024 states 1 1 illegal setting 644 20.2.2 module standby control register (mstcr) mstcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls output of the system clock (?. it also controls the module standby function, which places individual on-chip supporting modules in the standby state. module standby can be designated for the itu, sci0, sci1, dmac, refresh controller, and a/d converter modules. mstcr is initialized to h'40 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7? clock stop (pstop): enables or disables output of the system clock (?. bit 1 pstop description 0 system clock output is enabled (initial value) 1 system clock output is disabled bit 6?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 5?odule standby 5 (mstop5): selects whether to place the itu in standby. bit 5 mstop5 description 0 itu operates normally (initial value) 1 itu is in standby state bit initial value read/write 7 pstop 0 r/w 6 1 5 mstop5 0 r/w 4 mstop4 0 r/w 3 mstop3 0 r/w 0 mstop0 0 r/w 2 mstop2 0 r/w 1 mstop1 0 r/w ?clock stop enables or disables output of the system clock module standby 5 to 0 these bits select modules to be placed in standby reserved bit 645 bit 4?odule standby 4 (mstop4): selects whether to place sci0 in standby. bit 4 mstop4 description 0 sci0 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci0 is in standby state bit 3?odule standby 3 (mstop3): selects whether to place sci1 in standby. bit 3 mstop3 description 0 sci1 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci1 is in standby state bit 2?odule standby 2 (mstop2): selects whether to place the dmac in standby. bit 2 mstop2 description 0 dmac operates normally (initial value) 1 dmac is in standby state bit 1?odule standby 1 (mstop1): selects whether to place the refresh controller in standby. bit 1 mstop1 description 0 refresh controller operates normally (initial value) 1 refresh controller is in standby state bit 0?odule standby 0 (mstop0): selects whether to place the a/d converter in standby. bit 0 mstop0 description 0 a/d converter operates normally (initial value) 1 a/d converter is in standby state 646 20.3 sleep mode 20.3.1 transition to sleep mode when the ssby bit is cleared to 0 in syscr, execution of the sleep instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to sleep mode. immediately after executing the sleep instruction the cpu halts, but the contents of its internal registers are retained. the dma controller (dmac), refresh controller, and on-chip supporting modules do not halt in sleep mode. modules which have been placed in standby by the module standby function, however, remain halted. 20.3.2 exit from sleep mode sleep mode is exited by an interrupt, or by input at the res or stby pin. exit by interrupt: an interrupt terminates sleep mode and causes a transition to the interrupt exception handling state. sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt source in an on-chip supporting module if the interrupt is disabled in the on-chip supporting module. sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt other than nmi if the interrupt is masked by the i and ui bits in ccr and ipr. exit by res input: low input at the res pin exits from sleep mode to the reset state. exit by stby input: low input at the stby pin exits from sleep mode to hardware standby mode. 647 20.4 software standby mode 20.4.1 transition to software standby mode to enter software standby mode, execute the sleep instruction while the ssby bit is set to 1 in syscr. in software standby mode, current dissipation is reduced to an extremely low level because the cpu, clock, and on-chip supporting modules all halt. the dmac and on-chip supporting modules are reset. as long as the specified voltage is supplied, however, cpu register contents and on-chip ram data are retained. the settings of the i/o ports and refresh controller* are also held. note: * rtcnt and bits 7 and 6 of rtmcsr are initialized. other bits and registers hold their previous states. 20.4.2 exit from software standby mode software standby mode can be exited by input of an external interrupt at the nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , or irq 2 pin, or by input at the res or stby pin. exit by interrupt: when an nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , or irq 2 interrupt request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins operating. after the oscillator settling time selected by bits sts2 to sts0 in syscr, stable clock signals are supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode ends, and interrupt exception handling begins. software standby mode is not exited if the interrupt enable bits of interrupts irq 0 , irq 1 , and irq 2 are cleared to 0, or if these interrupts are masked in the cpu. exit by res input: when the res input goes low, the clock oscillator starts and clock pulses are supplied immediately to the entire chip. the res signal must be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to stabilize. when res goes high, the cpu starts reset exception handling. exit by stby input: low input at the stby pin causes a transition to hardware standby mode. 648 20.4.3 selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode bits sts2 to sts0 in syscr and bits div1 and div0 in divcr should be set as follows. crystal resonator: set sts2 to sts0, div1, and div0 so that the waiting time (for the clock to stabilize) is at least 7 ms. table 20-3 indicates the waiting times that are selected by sts2 to sts0, div1, and div0 settings at various system clock frequencies. external clock: any values may be set. table 20-3 clock frequency and waiting time for clock to settle div1 div0 sts2 sts1 sts0 waiting time 18 mhz 16 mhz 12 mhz 10 mhz 8 mhz 6 mhz 4 mhz 2 mhz 1 mhz unit 0 0 0 0 0 8192 states 0.46 0.51 0.65 0.8 1.0 1.3 2.0 4.1 8.2 ms 0 0 1 16384 states 0.91 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.1 8.2 16.4 0 1 0 32768 states 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8 0 1 1 65536 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5 1 0 0 131072 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 1 0 1 1024 states 0.057 0.064 0.085 0.10 0.13 0.17 0.26 0.51 1.0 1 1 illegal setting 0 1 0 0 0 8192 states 0.91 1.02 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.0 8.2 16.4 ms 0 0 1 16384 states 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8 0 1 0 32768 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5 0 1 1 65536 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 1 0 0 131072 states 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 1 0 1 1024 states 0.11 0.13 0.17 0.20 0.26 0.34 0.51 1.0 2.0 1 1 illegal setting 1 0 0 0 0 8192 states 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2 16.4 32.8 ms 0 0 1 16384 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5 0 1 0 32768 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 0 1 1 65536 states 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 1 0 0 131072 states 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3 1 0 1 1024 states 0.23 0.26 0.34 0.41 0.51 0.68 1.02 2.0 4.1 1 1 illegal setting 1 1 0 0 0 8192 states 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2 10.9 16.4 32.8 65.5 ms 0 0 1 16384 states 7.3 8.2 10.9 13.1 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 0 1 0 32768 states 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 0 1 1 65536 states 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3 1 0 0 131072 states 58.3 65.5 87.4 104.9 131.1 174.8 262.1 524.3 1048.6 1 0 1 1024 states 0.46 0.51 0.68 0.82 1.0 1.4 2.0 4.1 8.2 1 1 illegal setting : recommended setting 649 20.4.4 sample application of software standby mode figure 20-1 shows an example in which software standby mode is entered at the fall of nmi and exited at the rise of nmi. with the nmi edge select bit (nmieg) cleared to 0 in syscr (selecting the falling edge), an nmi interrupt occurs. next the nmieg bit is set to 1 (selecting the rising edge) and the ssby bit is set to 1; then the sleep instruction is executed to enter software standby mode. software standby mode is exited at the next rising edge of the nmi signal. figure 20-1 nmi timing for software standby mode (example) 20.4.5 note the i/o ports retain their existing states in software standby mode. if a port is in the high output state, its output current is not reduced. nmi nmieg ssby nmi interrupt handler nmieg = 1 ssby = 1 software standby mode (power- down state) oscillator settling time (t osc2 ) sleep instruction nmi exception handling clock oscillator 650 20.5 hardware standby mode 20.5.1 transition to hardware standby mode regardless of its current state, the chip enters hardware standby mode whenever the stby pin goes low. hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting all functions of the cpu, dmac, refresh controller, and on-chip supporting modules. all modules are reset except the on-chip ram. as long as the specified voltage is supplied, on-chip ram data is retained. i/o ports are placed in the high-impedance state. clear the rame bit to 0 in syscr before stby goes low to retain on-chip ram data. the inputs at the mode pins (md2 to md0) should not be changed during hardware standby mode. 20.5.2 exit from hardware standby mode hardware standby mode is exited by inputs at the stby and res pins. while res is low, when stby goes high, the clock oscillator starts running. res should be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to settle. when res goes high, reset exception handling begins, followed by a transition to the program execution state. 20.5.3 timing for hardware standby mode figure 20-2 shows the timing relationships for hardware standby mode. to enter hardware standby mode, first drive res low, then drive stby low. to exit hardware standby mode, first drive stby high, wait for the clock to settle, then bring res from low to high. figure 20-2 hardware standby mode timing res stby clock oscillator oscillator settling time reset exception handling 651 20.6 module standby function 20.6.1 module standby timing the module standby function can halt several of the on-chip supporting modules (the itu, sci0, sci1, dmac, refresh controller, and a/d converter) independently of the power-down state. this standby function is controlled by bits mstop5 to mstop0 in mstcr. when one of these bits is set to 1, the corresponding on-chip supporting module is placed in standby and halts at the beginning of the next bus cycle after the mstcr write cycle. 20.6.2 read/write in module standby when an on-chip supporting module is in module standby, read/write access to its registers is disabled. read access always results in h'ff data. write access is ignored. 20.6.3 usage notes when using the module standby function, note the following points. dmac and refresh controller: when setting bit mstop2 or mstop1 to 1 to place the dmac or refresh controller in module standby, make sure that the dmac or refresh controller is not currently requesting the bus right. if bit mstop2 or mstop1 is set to 1 when a bus request is present, operation of the bus arbiter becomes ambiguous and a malfunction may occur. internal peripheral module interrupt: when mstcr is set to ?? prevent module interrupt in advance. when an on-chip supporting module is placed in standby by the module standby function, its registers are initialized. pin states: pins used by an on-chip supporting module lose their module functions when the module is placed in module standby. what happens after that depends on the particular pin. for details, see section 9, i/o ports. pins that change from the input to the output state require special care. for example, if sci1 is placed in module standby, the receive data pin loses its receive data function and becomes a generic i/o pin. if its data direction bit is set to 1, the pin becomes a data output pin, and its output may collide with external serial data. data collisions should be prevented by clearing the data direction bit to 0 or taking other appropriate action. register resetting: when an on-chip supporting module is halted by the module standby function, all its registers are initialized. to restart the module, after its mstop bit is cleared to 0, its registers must be set up again. it is not possible to write to the registers while the mstop bit is set to 1. mstcr access from dmac disabled: to prevent malfunctions, mstcr can only be accessed from the cpu. it can be read by the dmac, but it cannot be written by the dmac. 652 20.7 system clock output disabling function output of the system clock (? can be controlled by the pstop bit in mstcr. when the pstop bit is set to 1, output of the system clock halts and the ?pin is placed in the high-impedance state. figure 20-3 shows the timing of the stopping and starting of system clock output. when the pstop bit is cleared to 0, output of the system clock is enabled. table 20-4 indicates the state of the ?pin in various operating states. figure 20-3 starting and stopping of system clock output table 20-4 ?pin state in various operating states operating state pstop = 0 pstop = 1 hardware standby high impedance high impedance software standby always high high impedance sleep mode system clock output high impedance normal operation system clock output high impedance t1 t2 (pstop = 1) t3 t1 t2 (pstop = 0) mstcr write cycle mstcr write cycle high impedance ?pin t3 653 section 21 electrical characteristics 21.1 absolute maximum ratings table 21-1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. table 21-1 absolute maximum ratings item symbol value unit power supply voltage v cc ?.3 to +7.0 v programming voltage hd6473048 v pp ?.3 to +13.5 v hd64f3048 ?.3 to +13.0 v input voltage v in ?.3 to v cc + 0.3 v (except for md 2 and port 7 input voltage (md 2 ) hd6473048, v in ?.3 to v cc + 0.3 v hd6433048, hd6433047, hd6433045, hd6433044 hd64f3048 ?.3 to +13.0 v input voltage (port 7) v in ?.3 to av cc + 0.3 v reference voltage v ref ?.3 to av cc + 0.3 v analog power supply voltage av cc ?.3 to +7.0 v analog input voltage v an ?.3 to av cc + 0.3 v operating temperature t opr regular specifications: ?0 to +75 ? wide-range specifications: ?0 to +85 ? storage temperature t stg ?5 to +125 ? caution: permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. particularly, insure that peak overshoot at the v pp and md2 pins does not exceed 13 v. 655 21.2 electrical characteristics of masked rom and prom versions 21.2.1 dc characteristics table 21-2 lists the dc characteristics. table 21-3 lists the permissible output currents. table 21-2 dc characteristics conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v*, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions port a, v t 1.0 v p8 0 to p8 2 ,v t + v cc 0.7 v pb 0 to pb 3 v t + ?v t 0.4 v input high res , stby , v ih v cc ?0.7 v cc + 0.3 v voltage nmi, md 2 to md 0 extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 2.0 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1, 2, 3, 2.0 v cc + 0.3 v 4, 5, 6, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 , pb 4 to pb 7 input low res , stby , v il ?.3 0.5 v voltage md 2 to md 0 nmi, extal, ?.3 0.8 v ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 , pb 4 to pb 7 all output pins v oh v cc ?0.5 v i oh = ?00 a (except reso ) 3.5 v i oh = ? ma output low all output pins v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage (except reso ) ports 1, 2, 1.0 v i ol = 10 ma 5, and b reso 0.4 v i ol = 2.6 ma note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . output high voltage schmitt trigger input voltages 656 table 21-2 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v *1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage stby , nmi, |i in | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to current res ,v cc ?0.5 v md 2 to md 0 port 7 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ?0.5 v ports 1, 2, |i ts1 | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to 3, 4, 5, 6, v cc ?0.5 v 8 to b reso 10.0 a input pull-up ports 2, ? p 50 300 a v in = 0 v current 4, and 5 nmi c in 50pf all input pins 15 pf except nmi i cc 50 65 ma f = 16 mhz 55 75 ma f = 18 mhz sleep mode 35 50 ma f = 16 mhz 40 55 ma f = 18 mhz 20 25 ma f = 16 mhz 25 27 ma f = 18 mhz 0.01 5.0 a t a 50? 20.0 a 50? < t a notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ihmin = v cc ?0.5 v and v ilmax = 0.5 v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 4.5 v, v ihmin = v cc 0.9, and v ilmax = 0.3 v. 4. module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted. current normal dissipation * 2 operation module standby mode * 4 input capacitance three-state leakage current (off state) v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? standby mode * 3 657 table 21-2 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v * , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power during a/d ai cc 1.2 2.0 ma supply current conversion during a/d 1.2 2.0 ma and d/a conversion idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 reference during a/d ai cc 0.3 0.6 ma v ref = 5.0 v current conversion during a/d 1.3 3.0 ma and d/a conversion idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 658 table 21-2 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v*, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions v t v cc 0.2 v v t + v cc 0.7 v v t + ?v t v cc 0.07 v input high res , stby , v ih v cc 0.9 v cc + 0.3 v voltage nmi, md 2 to md 0 extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 v cc 0.7 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1, 2, 3,4, v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v 5, 6, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 , pb 4 to pb 7 input low res , stby , v il ?.3 v cc 0.1 v voltage md 2 to md 0 ?.3 v cc 0.2 v v cc < 4.0 v 0.8 v v cc = 4.0 v to 5.5 v all output pins v oh v cc ?0.5 v i oh = ?00 a (except reso ) v cc ?1.0 v i oh = ? ma output low all output pins v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage (except reso ) ports 1, 2, 1.0 v v cc 4 v 5, and b i ol = 5 ma, 4 v < v cc 5.5 v i ol = 10 ma reso 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma input leakage stby , nmi, |i in | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to current res , v cc ?0.5 v md 2 to md 0 port 7 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ?0.5 v note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . schmitt port a, trigger input p8 0 to p8 2 , voltages pb 0 to pb 3 nmi, extal, ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 pb 4 to pb 7 output high voltage 659 table 21-2 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v *1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions ports 1, 2, |i ts1 | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to 3, 4, 5, 6, v cc ?0.5 v 8 to b reso 10.0 a input pull-up ports 2, ? p 10 300 a v cc = 2.7 v to current 4, and 5 5.5 v, v in = 0 v nmi c in 50 pf all input pins 15 except nmi current normal i cc * 4 12 35 ma f = 8 mhz dissipation * 2 operation (3.0 v) (5.5 v) 20 55 ma f = 13 mhz (3.3 v) (5.5 v) (v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v) sleep mode 8 25 ma f = 8 mhz (3.0 v) (5.5 v) 12 40 ma f = 13 mhz (3.3 v) (5.5 v) (v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v) module 5 14 ma f = 8 mhz standby mode * 5 (3.0 v) (5.5 v) 7 20 ma 13 mhz (3.3 v) (5.5 v) (v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v) standby 0.01 5.0 a t a 50? mode * 3 20.0 a 50? < t a notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ihmin = v cc ?0.5 v and v ilmax = 0.5 v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 2.7 v, v ihmin = v cc 0.9, and v ilmax = 0.3 v. 4. i cc depends on v cc and f as follows: i ccmax = 3.0 (ma) + 0.75 (ma/mhz v) v cc f [normal mode] i ccmax = 3.0 (ma) + 0.55 (ma/mhz v) v cc f [sleep mode] i ccmax = 3.0 (ma) + 0.25 (ma/mhz v) v cc f [module standby mode] 5. module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted. three-state leakage current (off state) input capacitance v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? 660 table 21-2 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v * , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions ai cc 0.4 1.0 ma av cc = 3.0 v 1.2 ma av cc = 5.0 v 0.4 1.0 ma av cc = 3.0 v 1.2 ma av cc = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 ai cc 0.2 0.4 ma v ref = 3.0 v 0.3 ma v ref = 5.0 v 0.8 2.0 ma v ref = 3.0 v 1.3 ma v ref = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . during a/d conversion during a/d and d/a conversion analog power supply current reference during a/d current conversion during a/d and d/a conversion 661 table 21-3 permissible output currents conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit ports 1, 2, 5, and b i ol 10ma other output pins 2.0 ma permissible output total of 28 pins in s i ol 80ma low current (total) ports 1, 2, 5, and b total of all output pins, 120 ma including the above permissible output all output pins i oh 2.0 ma high current (per pin) permissible output total of all output pins s i oh 40ma high current (total) notes: 1. to protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21-3. 2. when driving a darlington pair or led, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 21-1 and 21-2. permissible output low current (per pin) 662 figure 21-1 darlington pair drive circuit (example) figure 21-2 led drive circuit (example) h8/3048 series ports 1, 2, 5, and b led 600 w h8/3048 series port 2 k w darlington pair 663 21.2.2 ac characteristics bus timing parameters are listed in table 21-4. refresh controller bus timing parameters are listed in table 21-5. control signal timing parameters are listed in table 21-6. timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21-7. table 21-4 bus timing (1) condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item symbol min max min max min max min max unit clock cycle time t cyc 125 1000 76.9 1000 62.5 1000 55.5 1000 ns clock pulse low width t cl 40 20 20 17 clock pulse high width t ch 40 20 20 17 clock rise time t cr ?0 15?0 10 clock fall time t cf ?0 15?0 10 address delay time t ad ?0 50?0 25 address hold time t ah 25 20 10 10 address strobe delay t asd ?0 50?0 25 time write strobe delay time t wsd ?0 50?0 25 strobe delay time t sd ?0 50?0 25 write data strobe pulse t wsw1 * 85 40 35 32 width 1 write data strobe pulse t wsw2 * 150?0 65?2 width 2 address setup time 1 t as1 20 15 10 10 address setup time 2 t as2 80 45 40 38 read data setup time t rds 50 30 20 15 read data hold time t rdh 0 0 0 0 test conditions figure 21-7, figure 21-8 664 table 21-4 bus timing (cont) condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item symbol min max min max min max min max unit write data delay time t wdd ?5 75?0 55ns write data setup time 1 t wds1 60 20 15 10 write data setup time 2 t wds2 5 ?0 5 ?0 write data hold time t wdh 25 15 20 20 read data access t acc1 * ?20?0 60?0 time 1 read data access t acc2 * 240 140 120 105 time 2 read data access t acc3 * ?0 30?0 20 time 3 read data access t acc4 * 180 100 95 80 time 4 precharge time t pch * 85 55 45 40 wait setup time t wts 40 40 25 25 ns figure 21-9 wait hold time t wth 10 10 5 5 bus request setup ime t brqs 40 40 40 40 ns figure 21-21 bus acknowledge t bacd1 ?0 50?0 30 delay time 1 bus acknowledge t bacd2 ?0 50?0 30 delay time 2 bus-floating time t bzd 70 70 40 40 note is on next page. test conditions figure 21-7, figure 21-8 665 note: at 8 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t acc1 = 1.5 t cyc ?68 (ns) t wsw1 = 1.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) t acc2 = 2.5 t cyc ?73 (ns) t wsw2 = 1.5 t cyc ?38 (ns) t acc3 = 1.0 t cyc ?55 (ns) t pch = 1.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) t acc4 = 2.0 t cyc ?70 (ns) at 13 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t acc1 = 1.5 t cyc ?56 (ns) t wsw1 = 1.0 t cyc ?37 (ns) t acc2 = 2.5 t cyc ?53 (ns) t wsw2 = 1.5 t cyc ?26 (ns) t acc3 = 1.0 t cyc ?47 (ns) t pch = 1.0 t cyc ?32 (ns) t acc4 = 2.0 t cyc ?54 (ns) at 16 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t acc1 = 1.5 t cyc ?34 (ns) t wsw1 = 1.0 t cyc ?28 (ns) t acc2 = 2.5 t cyc ?37 (ns) t wsw2 = 1.5 t cyc ?29 (ns) t acc3 = 1.0 t cyc ?33 (ns) t pch = 1.0 t cyc ?28 (ns) t acc4 = 2.0 t cyc ?30 (ns) at 18 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t acc1 = 1.5 t cyc ?34 (ns) t wsw1 = 1.0 t cyc ?24 (ns) t acc2 = 2.5 t cyc ?34 (ns) t wsw2 = 1.5 t cyc ?22 (ns) t acc3 = 1.0 t cyc ?36 (ns) t pch = 1.0 t cyc ?21 (ns) t acc4 = 2.0 t cyc ?31 (ns) 666 table 21-5 refresh controller bus timing condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item symbol min max min max min max min max unit ras delay time 1 t rad1 ?0 50?0 30ns ras delay time 2 t rad2 ?0 50?0 30 ras delay time 3 t rad3 ?0 50?0 30 row address hold time * t rah 25 20 15 15 ras precharge time * t rp 85 55 45 40 cas to ras precharge t crp 85 55 45 40 time * cas pulse width t cas 100?5 40?5 ras access time * t rac ?60?0 85?0 address access time t aa ?05?5 55?5 cas access time * t cac ?0 30?0 25 write data setup time 3 t wds3 50 20 15 10 cas setup time * t csr 20 10 15 10 read strobe delay time t rsd ?0 50?0 30 note is on next page. test conditions figure 21-10 to figure 21-16 667 note: at 8 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t rah = 0.5 t cyc ?38 (ns) t cac = 1.0 t cyc ?75 (ns) t rac = 2.0 t cyc ?90 (ns) t csr = 0.5 t cyc ?43 (ns) t rp = t crp = 1.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) at 13 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t rah = 0.5 t cyc ?19 (ns) t cac = 1.0 t cyc ?47 (ns) t rac = 2.0 t cyc ?74 (ns) t csr = 0.5 t cyc ?29 (ns) t rp = t crp = 1.0 t cyc ?22 (ns) at 16 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t rah = 0.5 t cyc ?17 (ns) t cac = 1.0 t cyc ?33 (ns) t rac = 2.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) t csr = 0.5 t cyc ?17 (ns) t rp = t crp = 1.0 t cyc ?18 (ns) at 18 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t rah = 0.5 t cyc ?13 (ns) t cac = 1.0 t cyc ?31 (ns) t rac = 2.0 t cyc ?41 (ns) t csr = 0.5 t cyc ?18 (ns) t rp = t crp = 1.0 t cyc ?16 (ns) 668 table 21-6 control signal timing condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item symbol min max min max min max min max unit res setup time t ress 200 200 200 200 ns figure 21-18 res pulse width t resw 10 10 10 10 t cyc mode programming t mds 200 200 200 200 ns setup time reso output delay t resd 100 100 100 100 ns figure 21-19 time reso output pulse t resow 132 132 132 132 t cyc width nmi setup time t nmis 200 200 150 150 ns figure 21-20 (nmi, irq 5 to irq 0 ) nmi hold time t nmih 10 10 10 10 (nmi, irq 5 to irq 0 ) interrupt pulse width t nmiw 200 200 200 200 (nmi, irq 2 to irq 0 when exiting software standby mode) clock oscillator settling t osc1 20 20 20 20 ms figure 21-22 time at reset (crystal) clock oscillator settling t osc2 7 7 7 7 ms figure 20-1 time in software standby (crystal) test conditions 669 table 21-7 timing of on-chip supporting modules condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item symbol min max min max min max min max unit dmac dreq setup t drqs 40 40 30 30 ns figure 21-30 time dreq hold t drqh 10 10 10 10 time tend delay t ted1 100 100 50 50 figure 21-28, time 1 figure 21-29 tend delay t ted2 100 100 50 50 time 2 itu timer output t tocd 100 100 100 100 ns figure 21-24 delay time timer input t tics 50 50 50 50 setup time timer clock t tcks 50 50 50 50 figure 21-25 input setup time single t tckwh 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 t cyc edge both t tckwl 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 edges sci asyn- t scyc 4 4 4 4 t cyc figure 21-26 chronous syn- t scyc 6 6 6 6 chronous input clock rise t sckr 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 time input clock fall t sckf 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 time input clock t sckw 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t scyc pulse width test conditions timer clock pulse width input clock cycle 670 table 21-7 timing of on-chip supporting modules (cont) condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item symbol min max min max min max min max unit sci transmit data t txd 100 100 100 100 ns figure 21-27 delay time receive data t rxs 100 100 100 100 setup time (synchronous) clock input t rxh 100 100 100 100 clock output 0 0 0 0 output data t pwd 100 100 100 100 ns figure 21-23 delay time input data t prs 50 50 50 50 setup time input data t prh 50 50 50 50 hold time figure 21-3 output load circuit cr h 5 v r l h8/3048 series output pin c = 90 pf: ports 4, 5, 6, 8, a (19 to 0), d (15 to 8), c = 30 pf: ports 9, a, b, reso input/output timing measurement levels ?low: 0.8 v ?high: 2.0 v r = 2.4 k r = 12 k l h w w test conditions receive data hold time (synchronous) ports and tpc 671 21.2.3 a/d conversion characteristics table 21-8 lists the a/d conversion characteristics. table 21-8 a/d converter characteristics condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max unit resolution 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 bits conversion time 16.8 10.4 8.4 7.5 s analog input 20 20 20 20 pf capacitance 10 * 1 10 * 1 10 * 3 10 * 3 k 5 * 2 5 * 2 5 * 4 5 * 4 nonlinearity error 6.0 6.0 3.0 3.0 lsb offset error 4.0 4.0 2.0 2.0 lsb full-scale error 4.0 4.0 2.0 2.0 lsb quantization error 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy 8.0 8.0 4.0 4.0 lsb notes: 1. the value is for 4.0 av cc 5.5. 2. the value is for 2.7 av cc 4.0. 3. the value is for ? 12 mhz. 4. the value is for ? > 12 mhz. permissible signal- source impedance 672 21.2.4 d/a conversion characteristics table 21-9 lists the d/a conversion characteristics. table 21-9 d/a converter characteristics condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition b: v cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.15 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.15 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 13 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 18 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition b condition c 8 mhz 13 mhz 16 mhz 18 mhz item min typ max min typ max min typ max min typ max unit resolution 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 bits conversion 10 10 10 10 s 20-pf capaci- time tive load absolute 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 lsb 2-m accuracy resistive load 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 lsb 4-m resistive load test conditions 673 21.3 electrical characteristics of flash memory version 21.3.1 dc characteristics table 21-10 lists the dc characteristics. table 21-11 lists the permissible output currents. table 21-10 dc characteristics conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v*, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions port a, v t 1.0 v p8 0 to p8 2 ,v t + v cc 0.7 v pb 0 to pb 3 v t + ?v t 0.4 v input high res , stby , v ih v cc ?0.7 v cc + 0.3 v voltage nmi, md 2 to md 0 extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 2.0 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1, 2, 3, 2.0 v cc + 0.3 v 4, 5, 6, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 , pb 4 to pb 7 input low res , stby , v il ?.3 0.5 v voltage md 2 to md 0 nmi, extal, ?.3 0.8 v ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 , pb 4 to pb 7 all output pins v oh v cc ?0.5 v i oh = ?00 a 3.5 v i oh = ? ma output low all output pins v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage (except reso ) ports 1, 2, 1.0 v i ol = 10 ma 5, and b reso 0.4 v i ol = 2.6 ma high voltage reso /v pp v h v cc + 2.0 11.4 v v cc = 4.5 v (12 v) appli- md2 to 5.5 v cation criterion level * 5 note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 674 output high voltage schmitt trigger input voltages table 21-10 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v *1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage stby , nmi, |i in | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to current res , md 1 , v cc ?0.5 v md 0 md 2 10.0 a v in = 0.5 to v cc + 0.5 v md 2 50.0 a v in = v cc + 0.5 to 12.6 v port 7 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ?0.5 v ports 1, 2, |i ts1 | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to 3, 4, 5, 6, v cc ?0.5 v 8 to b reso /v pp 20.0 ma v cc to 5 v < v in 12.6 v 10.0 a 0.5 v v in v cc to 0.5 v input pull-up ports 2, ? p 50 300 a v in = 0 v current 4, and 5 nmi c in 50pf all input pins 15 pf except nmi i cc 50 65 ma f = 16 mhz sleep mode 35 50 ma f = 16 mhz 20 25 ma f = 16 mhz 0.01 5.0 a t a 50? 20.0 a 50? < t a notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ihmin = v cc ?0.5 v and v ilmax = 0.5 v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 4.5 v, v ihmin = v cc 0.9, and v ilmax = 0.3 v. 4. module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted. 5. the high-voltage application criterion level is as shown above. however, in boot mode and during flash memory write and erase it should be set at 12.0 v to 0.6 v. 675 current normal dissipation * 2 operation module standby mode * 4 input capacitance three-state leakage current (off state) v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? standby mode * 3 table 21-10 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v * , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power during a/d ai cc 1.2 2.0 ma supply current conversion during a/d 1.2 2.0 ma and d/a conversion idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 reference during a/d ai cc 0.3 0.6 ma v ref = 5.0 v current conversion during a/d 1.3 3.0 ma and d/a conversion idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 v pp pin read output i pp 10 av pp = 5.0 v current ?020mav pp = 12.6 v program 20 40 ma execution erase 20 40 ma ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 676 table 21-10 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v*, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions v t v cc 0.2 v v t + v cc 0.7 v v t + ?v t v cc 0.07 v input high res , stby , v ih v cc 0.9 v cc + 0.3 v voltage nmi, md 2 to md 0 extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 v cc 0.7 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1, 2, 3,4, v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v 5, 6, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 , pb 4 to pb 7 input low res , stby , v il ?.3 v cc 0.1 v voltage md 2 to md 0 ?.3 v cc 0.2 v v cc < 4.0 v 0.8 v v cc = 4.0 v to 5.5 v all output pins v oh v cc ?0.5 v i oh = ?00 a v cc ?1.0 v i oh = ? ma output low all output pins v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage (except reso ) ports 1, 2, 1.0 v v cc 4 v 5, and b i ol = 5 ma, 4 v < v cc 5.5 v i ol = 10 ma reso 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 677 schmitt port a, trigger input p8 0 to p8 2 , voltages pb 0 to pb 3 nmi, extal, ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, p8 3 , p8 4 pb 4 to pb 7 output high voltage table 21-10 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v*, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions high voltage reso /v pp v h v cc + 2.0 11.4 v v cc = 2.7 v (12 v) appli- md2 to 5.5 v cation criterion level * 6 input leakage stby , nmi, |i in | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to current res , md 1 , v cc ?0.5 v md 0 md 2 10.0 a v in = 0.5 to v cc + 0.5 v md 2 50.0 a v in = v cc + 0.5 to 12.6 v port 7 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to av cc ?0.5 v ports 1, 2, |i ts1 | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 to 3, 4, 5, 6, v cc ?0.5 v 8 to b reso 10.0 a input pull-up ports 2, ? p 10 300 a v cc = 2.7 v to current 4, and 5 5.5 v, v in = 0 v nmi c in 50 pf all input pins 15 except nmi note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 678 three-state leakage current (off state) input capacitance v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? table 21-10 dc characteristics (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v *1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions current normal i cc * 4 12 35 ma f = 8 mhz dissipation * 2 operation (3.0 v) (5.5 v) sleep mode 8 25 ma f = 8 mhz (3.0 v) (5.5 v) module 5 14 ma f = 8 mhz standby mode * 5 (3.0 v) (5.5 v) 0.01 5.0 a t a 50? 20.0 a 50? < t a notes: 1. if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 2. current dissipation values are for v ihmin = v cc ?0.5 v and v ilmax = 0.5 v with all output pins unloaded and the on-chip pull-up transistors in the off state. 3. the values are for v ram v cc < 2.7 v, v ihmin = v cc 0.9, and v ilmax = 0.3 v. 4. i cc depends on v cc and f as follows: i ccmax = 3.0 (ma) + 0.75 (ma/mhz v) v cc f [normal mode] i ccmax = 3.0 (ma) + 0.55 (ma/mhz v) v cc f [sleep mode] i ccmax = 3.0 (ma) + 0.25 (ma/mhz v) v cc f [module standby mode] 5. module standby current values apply in sleep mode with all modules halted. 6. the high-voltage application criterion level is as shown above. however, in boot mode and during flash memory write and erase it should be set at 12.0 v 0.6 v. 679 standby mode * 3 table 21-10 dc characteristics (cont) ?reliminary conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v*, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions ai cc 0.4 1.0 ma av cc = 3.0 v 1.2 ma av cc = 5.0 v 0.4 1.0 ma av cc = 3.0 v 1.2 ma av cc = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 ai cc 0.2 0.4 ma v ref = 3.0 v 0.3 ma v ref = 5.0 v 0.8 2.0 ma v ref = 3.0 v 1.3 ma v ref = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 v pp pin read output i pp 10 a v pp = 5.0 v current ?020ma program 20 40 ma v pp = 12.6 v execution erase 20 40 ma ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v note: * if the a/d and d/a converters are not used, do not leave the av cc , av ss , and v ref pins open. connect av cc and v ref to v cc , and connect av ss to v ss . 680 during a/d conversion during a/d and d/a conversion analog power supply current reference during a/d current conversion during a/d and d/a conversion table 21-11 permissible output currents conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit ports 1, 2, 5, and b i ol 10ma other output pins 2.0 ma permissible output total of 28 pins in s i ol 80ma low current (total) ports 1, 2, 5, and b total of all output pins, 120 ma including the above permissible output all output pins i oh 2.0 ma high current (per pin) permissible output total of all output pins s i oh 40ma high current (total) notes: 1. to protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21-11. 2. when driving a darlington pair or led, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 21-4 and 21-5. 681 permissible output low current (per pin) figure 21-4 darlington pair drive circuit (example) figure 21-5 led drive circuit (example) 682 h8/3048 series ports 1, 2, 5, and b led 600 w h8/3048 series port 2 k w darlington pair 21.3.2 ac characteristics bus timing parameters are listed in table 21-12. refresh controller bus timing parameters are listed in table 21-13. control signal timing parameters are listed in table 21-14. timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21-15. table 21-12 bus timing (1) condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item symbol min max min max unit conditions clock cycle time t cyc 125 1000 62.5 1000 ns figure 21-7 clock pulse low width t cl 40 20 figure 21-8 clock pulse high width t ch 40 20 clock rise time t cr ?0 10 clock fall time t cf ?0 10 address delay time t ad ?0 30 address hold time t ah 25 10 address strobe delay time t asd ?0 30 write strobe delay time t wsd ?0 30 strobe delay time t sd ?0 30 write data strobe pulse width 1 t wsw1 * 85 35 write data strobe pulse width 2 t wsw2 * 150 65 address setup time 1 t as1 20 10 address setup time 2 t as2 80 40 read data setup time t rds 50 20 read data hold time t rdh 0 0 683 table 21-12 bus timing (cont) condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item symbol min max min max unit conditions write data delay time t wdd 75 60 ns figure 21-7 write data setup time 1 t wds1 60 15 figure 21-8 write data setup time 2 t wds2 5 5 write data hold time t wdh 25 20 read data access time 1 t acc1 * 120 60 read data access time 2 t acc2 * 240 120 read data access time 3 t acc3 * ?0 30 read data access time 4 t acc4 * 180 95 precharge time t pch * 85 45 wait setup time t wts 40 25 ns figure 21-9 wait hold time t wth 10 5 bus request setup time t brqs 40 40 ns figure 21-21 bus acknowledge delay time 1 t bacd1 ?0 30 bus acknowledge delay time 2 t bacd2 ?0 30 bus-floating time t bzd 70 40 note: at 8 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t acc1 = 1.5 t cyc ?68 (ns) t wsw1 = 1.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) t acc2 = 2.5 t cyc ?73 (ns) t wsw2 = 1.5 t cyc ?38 (ns) t acc3 = 1.0 t cyc ?55 (ns) t pch = 1.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) t acc4 = 2.0 t cyc ?70 (ns) at 16 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t acc1 = 1.5 t cyc ?34 (ns) t wsw1 = 1.0 t cyc ?28 (ns) t acc2 = 2.5 t cyc ?37 (ns) t wsw2 = 1.5 t cyc ?29 (ns) t acc3 = 1.0 t cyc ?33 (ns) t pch = 1.0 t cyc ?28 (ns) t acc4 = 2.0 t cyc ?30 (ns) 684 table 21-13 refresh controller bus timing condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item symbol min max min max unit conditions ras delay time 1 t rad1 60 30 ns figure 21-10 ras delay time 2 t rad2 ?0 30 to ras delay time 3 t rad3 ?0 30 figure 21-16 row address hold time * t rah 25 15 ras precharge time * t rp 85 45 cas to ras precharge time * t crp 85 45 cas pulse width t cas 100 40 ras access time * t rac 160 85 address access time t aa 105 55 cas access time * t cac ?0 30 write data setup time 3 t wds3 50 15 cas setup time * t csr 20 15 read strobe delay time t rsd ?0 30 note: at 8 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t rah = 0.5 t cyc ?38 (ns) t cac = 1.0 t cyc ?75 (ns) t rac = 2.0 t cyc ?90 (ns) t csr = 0.5 t cyc ?43 (ns) t rp = t crp = 1.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) at 16 mhz, the times below depend as indicated on the clock cycle time. t rah = 0.5 t cyc ?17 (ns) t cac = 1.0 t cyc ?33 (ns) t rac = 2.0 t cyc ?40 (ns) t csr = 0.5 t cyc ?17 (ns) t rp = t crp = 1.0 t cyc ?18 (ns) 685 table 21-14 control signal timing condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item symbol min max min max unit conditions res setup time t ress 200 200 ns figure 21-18 res pulse width t resw 10 10 t cyc mode programming t mds 200 200 ns setup time reso output delay t resd 100 100 ns figure 21-19 time reso output pulse width t resow 132 132 t cyc nmi setup time t nmis 200 150 ns figure 21-20 (nmi, irq 5 to irq 0 ) nmi hold time t nmih 10 10 (nmi, irq 5 to irq 0 ) interrupt pulse width t nmiw 200 200 (nmi, irq 2 to irq 0 when exiting software standby mode) clock oscillator settling t osc1 20 20 ms figure 21-22 time at reset (crystal) clock oscillator settling t osc2 7 7 ms figure 20-1 time in software standby (crystal) 686 table 21-15 timing of on-chip supporting modules condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item symbol min max min max unit conditions dmac dreq setup time t drqs 40 30 ns figure 21-30 dreq hold time t drqh 10 10 tend delay time 1 t ted1 100 50 figure 21-28, tend delay time 2 t ted2 100 50 figure 21-29 itu timer output delay time t tocd 100 100 ns figure 21-24 timer input setup time t tics 50 50 timer clock input setup time t tcks 50 50 figure 21-25 timer clock single edge t tckwh 1.5 1.5 t cyc pulse width both edges t tckwl 2.5 2.5 sci input clock asynchronous t scyc 4 4 t cyc figure 21-26 cycle synchronous t scyc 6 6 input clock rise time t sckr 1.5 1.5 input clock fall time t sckf 1.5 1.5 input clock pulse width t sckw 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t scyc 687 table 21-15 timing of on-chip supporting modules (cont) condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item symbol min max min max unit conditions sci transmit data t txd 100 100 ns figure 21-27 delay time receive data t rxs 100 100 setup time (synchronous) receive data clock input t rxh 100 100 hold time clock output t rxh 0 0 (synchronous) ports output data t pwd 100 100 ns figure 21-23 and delay time tpc input data t prs 50 50 setup time input data t prh 50 50 hold time figure 21-6 output load circuit 688 cr h 5 v r l h8/3048 series output pin c = 90 pf: ports 4, 5, 6, 8, a (19 to 0), d (15 to 8), c = 30 pf: ports 9, a, b, reso input/output timing measurement levels ?low: 0.8 v ?high: 2.0 v r = 2.4 k r = 12 k l h w w 21.3.3 a/d conversion characteristics table 21-16 lists the a/d conversion characteristics. table 21-16 a/d converter characteristics condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz item min typ max min typ max unit resolution 10 10 10 10 10 10 bits conversion time 16.8 8.4 s analog input capacitance 20 20 pf permissible signal-source 10 * 1 10 * 3 k impedance 5 * 2 5 * 4 nonlinearity error 6.0 3.0 lsb offset error 4.0 2.0 lsb full-scale error 4.0 2.0 lsb quantization error 0.5 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy 8.0 4.0 lsb notes: 1. the value is for 4.0 av cc 5.5. 2. the value is for 2.7 av cc < 4.0. 3. the value is for ? 12 mhz. 4. the value is for ? > 12 mhz. 689 21.3.4 d/a conversion characteristics table 21-17 lists the d/a conversion characteristics. table 21-17 d/a converter characteristics condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a condition c 8 mhz 16 mhz test item min typ max min typ max unit conditions resolution 888888 bits conversion time 10 10 s 20-pf capacitive load absolute accuracy 2.0 3.0 1.0 1.5 lsb 2-m resistive load 2.0 1.0 lsb 4-m resistive load 690 21.3.5 flash memory characteristics table 21-18 lists the flash memory characteristics. table 21-18 flash memory condition a: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, v pp = 12 v 0.6 v, ?= 1 mhz to 8 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition c: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, av cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, v pp = 12 v 0.6 v, ?= 1 mhz to 16 mhz, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions programming time * 1 t p 50 1000 s erase time * 1 t e 1 30 s erase-program cycle n wec 100 time verify setup time 1 * 1 t vs1 4 s verify setup time 2 * 1 t vs2 2 s flash memory read t frs 50 s v cc 3 4.5 v setup time * 2 100 s v cc < 4.5 v notes: 1. to specify each time, follow the appropriate algorithm. 2. before reading the flash memory, wait at least for the read setup time after clearing the v pp e bit; lowering the voltage supplied to v pp from 12 v to 0? v; turning on the power when the external clock is used; or returning from standby mode. when the v pp voltage is cut off, t frs indicates the time from when the v pp falls below v cc + 2 v to when the flash memory is read. 691 21.4 operational timing this section shows timing diagrams. 21.4.1 bus timing bus timing is shown as follows: basic bus cycle: two-state access figure 21-7 shows the timing of the external two-state access cycle. basic bus cycle: three-state access figure 21-8 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle. basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state figure 21-9 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle with one wait state inserted. 692 figure 21-7 basic bus cycle: two-state access t 1 t 2 t cyc t ch t cl t ad t cf t cr t as1 t as1 t asd t acc3 t asd t acc3 t acc1 t asd t as1 t wdd t wds1 t wsw1 t sd t ah t pch t sd t ah t pch t rdh t rds t pch t sd t ah t wdh a 23 to a 0 , cs to cs as rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) 30 t cyc 693 figure 21-8 basic bus cycle: three-state access t 1 t 2 t 3 t acc4 t acc4 t acc2 t wsw2 t wsd t as2 t wds2 a 23 to a 0 as rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) t rds 694 figure 21-9 basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state t 1 t 2 t w t 3 t wts t wts t wth a 23 to a 0 as rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) wait t wth 695 21.4.2 refresh controller bus timing refresh controller bus timing is shown as follows: dram bus timing figures 21-10 to 21-15 show the dram bus timing in each operating mode. psram bus timing figures 21-16 and 21-17 show the pseudo-static ram bus timing in each operating mode. figure 21-10 dram bus timing (read/write): three-state access ?2 we mode a 9 to a 1 as cs ( ras ) rd ( cas ) hwr ( uw ), lwr ( ) lw (read) hwr ( uw ), lwr ( ) lw (write) rfsh d 15 to d 0 (read) d 15 to d 0 (write) t 1 t 2 t 3 t ad t ad t rah t rad1 t as1 t asd t as1 t rac t asd t aa t cac t rad3 t rp t sd t crp t sd t wdh t rds t rdh t wds3 t cas 3 696 figure 21-11 dram bus timing (refresh cycle): three-state access ?2 we mode figure 21-12 dram bus timing (self-refresh mode) ?2 we mode a 9 to a 1 as cs3 ( ras ) rd ( cas ) hwr ( uw ), lwr ( lw ) rfsh t 1 t 2 t 3 t asd t csr t asd t rad2 t rad2 t csr t rad3 t sd t rad3 t sd cs ( ras ) rd ( cas ) rfsh t csr t csr 3 697 figure 21-13 dram bus timing (read/write): three-state access ?2 cas mode ) t 1 t 2 t 3 t ad t ad t rah t rad1 t as1 t asd t as1 t aa t rac t asd t cac t wds3 t rds t wdh t rdh t sd t sd t rad3 t crp t rp t cas rfsh a 9 to a 1 as cs ( ras hwr ( ucas ), lwr ( lcas ) rd ( we ) (read) rd ( we ) (write) d 15 to d 0 (read) (write) d 15 to d 0 3 698 figure 21-14 dram bus timing (refresh cycle): three-state access ?2 cas mode figure 21-15 dram bus timing (self-refresh mode) ?2 cas mode a 9 to a 1 as cs ( ras ) rd ( we ) hwr ( ucas ), lwr ( lcas ) rfsh t 1 t 2 t 3 t asd t csr t asd t rad2 t rad2 t csr t rad3 t sd t rad3 t sd 3 t csr t csr ucas cs ( ras ) hwr lwr ( ( ), rfsh lcas ) 3 699 figure 21-16 psram bus timing (read/write): three-state access figure 21-17 psram bus timing (refresh cycle): three-state access a 23 to a 0 as cs 3 rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr , lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) rfsh t ad t 2 t 3 t rad1 t as1 t rsd t wsd t wds2 t rad3 t rp t rdh t sd t rds t sd t 1 a 23 to a 0 as cs 3 , hwr , lwr , rd rfsh t 2 t 3 t 1 t rad2 t rad3 700 21.4.3 control signal timing control signal timing is shown as follows: reset input timing figure 21-18 shows the reset input timing. reset output timing figure 21-19 shows the reset output timing. interrupt input timing figure 21-20 shows the input timing for nmi and irq 5 to irq 0 . bus-release mode timing figure 21-21 shows the bus-release mode timing. figure 21-18 reset input timing figure 21-19 reset output timing t ress t ress t resw t mds res md2 to md0 reso t resd t resow t resd 701 figure 21-20 interrupt input timing figure 21-21 bus-release mode timing nmi irq irq e l t nmis t nmih t nmis t nmih t nmis t nmiw nmi irq j irq : edge-sensitive irq : level-sensitive irq (i = 0 to 5) e l i i irq (j = 0 to 2) breq back a 23 to a 0 , as , rd , hwr , lwr t brqs t brqs t bacd1 t bzd t bacd2 t bzd 702 21.4.4 clock timing clock timing is shown as follows: oscillator settling timing figure 21-22 shows the oscillator settling timing. figure 21-22 oscillator settling timing 21.4.5 tpc and i/o port timing figure 21-23 shows the tpc and i/o port timing. figure 21-23 tpc and i/o port input/output timing v cc stby res t osc1 t osc1 t 1 t 2 t 3 port 1 to b (read) port 1 to 6, 8 to b (write) t prs t prh t pwd 703 21.4.6 itu timing itu timing is shown as follows: itu input/output timing figure 21-24 shows the itu input/output timing. itu external clock input timing figure 21-25 shows the itu external clock input timing. figure 21-24 itu input/output timing figure 21-25 itu clock input timing output compare * 1 input capture * 2 t tocd t tics notes: 1. tioca0 to tioca4, tiocb0 to tiocb4, tocxa4, tocxb4 2. tioca0 to tioca4, tiocb0 to tiocb4 t tcks t tcks t tckwh t tckwl tclka to tclkd 704 21.4.7 sci input/output timing sci timing is shown as follows: sci input clock timing figure 21-26 shows the sck input clock timing. sci input/output timing (synchronous mode) figure 21-27 shows the sci input/output timing in synchronous mode. figure 21-26 sck input clock timing figure 21-27 sci input/output timing in synchronous mode sck0, sck1 t sckw t scyc t sckr t sckf t scyc t txd t rxs t rxh sck0, sck1 txd0, txd1 (transmit data) rxd0, rxd1 (receive data) 705 21.4.8 dmac timing dmac timing is shown as follows. dmac tend output timing for 2 state access figure 21-28 shows the dmac tend output timing for 2 state access. dmac tend output timing for 3 state access figure 21-29 shows the dmac tend output timing for 3 state access. dmac dreq input timing figure 21-30 shows dmac dreq input timing. figure 21-28 dmac tend output timing for 2 state access figure 21-29 dmac tend output timing for 3 state access t 1 t 2 t ted1 t ted2 tend t 1 t 2 t 3 t ted1 t ted2 tend 706 figure 21-30 dmac dreq input timing t drqh t drqs dreq 707 appendix a instruction set a.1 instruction list operand notation symbol description rd general destination register rs general source register rn general register erd general destination register (address register or 32-bit register) ers general source register (address register or 32-bit register) ern general register (32-bit register) (ead) destination operand (eas) source operand pc program counter sp stack pointer ccr condition code register n n (negative) flag in ccr z z (zero) flag in ccr v v (overflow) flag in ccr c c (carry) flag in ccr disp displacement ? transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from the state on the left to the state on the right + addition of the operands on both sides subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left multiplication of the operands on both sides division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right logical and of the operands on both sides logical or of the operands on both sides ? exclusive logical or of the operands on both sides ~ not (logical complement) ( ), < > contents of operand note: general registers include 8-bit registers (r0h to r7h and r0l to r7l) and 16-bit registers (r0 to r7 and e0 to e7). 709 condition code notation symbol description changed according to execution result * undetermined (no guaranteed value) 0 cleared to 0 1 set to 1 not affected by execution of the instruction d varies depending on conditions, described in notes 710 table a-1 instruction set 1. data transfer instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c mov.b #xx:8, rd b #xx:8 ? rd8 2 0 2 mov.b rs, rd b rs8 ? rd8 2 0 2 mov.b @ers, rd b @ers ? rd8 2 0 4 mov.b @(d:16, ers), b @(d:16, ers) ? rd8 4 0 6 rd mov.b @(d:24, ers), b @(d:24, ers) ? rd8 8 0 10 rd mov.b @ers+, rd b @ers ? rd8 2 0 6 ers32+1 ? ers32 mov.b @aa:8, rd b @aa:8 ? rd8 2 0 4 mov.b @aa:16, rd b @aa:16 ? rd8 4 0 6 mov.b @aa:24, rd b @aa:24 ? rd8 6 0 8 mov.b rs, @erd b rs8 ? @erd 2 0 4 mov.b rs, @(d:16, b rs8 ? @(d:16, erd) 4 0 6 erd) mov.b rs, @(d:24, b rs8 ? @(d:24, erd) 8 0 10 erd) mov.b rs, @?rd b erd32? ? erd32 2 0 6 rs8 ? @erd mov.b rs, @aa:8 b rs8 ? @aa:8 2 0 4 mov.b rs, @aa:16 b rs8 ? @aa:16 4 0 6 mov.b rs, @aa:24 b rs8 ? @aa:24 6 0 8 mov.w #xx:16, rd w #xx:16 ? rd16 4 0 4 mov.w rs, rd w rs16 ? rd16 2 0 2 mov.w @ers, rd w @ers ? rd16 2 0 4 mov.w @(d:16, ers), w @(d:16, ers) ? rd16 4 0 6 rd mov.w @(d:24, ers), w @(d:24, ers) ? rd16 8 0 10 rd mov.w @ers+, rd w @ers ? rd16 2 0 6 ers32+2 ? @erd32 mov.w @aa:16, rd w @aa:16 ? rd16 4 0 6 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 711 table a-1 instruction set (cont) condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c mov.w @aa:24, rd w @aa:24 ? rd16 6 0 8 mov.w rs, @erd w rs16 ? @erd 2 0 4 mov.w rs, @(d:16, w rs16 ? @(d:16, erd) 4 0 6 erd) mov.w rs, @(d:24, w rs16 ? @(d:24, erd) 8 0 10 erd) mov.w rs, @?rd w erd32? ? erd32 2 0 6 rs16 ? @erd mov.w rs, @aa:16 w rs16 ? @aa:16 4 0 6 mov.w rs, @aa:24 w rs16 ? @aa:24 6 0 8 mov.l #xx:32, rd l #xx:32 ? rd32 6 0 6 mov.l ers, erd l ers32 ? erd32 2 0 2 mov.l @ers, erd l @ers ? erd32 4 0 8 mov.l @(d:16, ers), l @(d:16, ers) ? erd32 6 0 10 erd mov.l @(d:24, ers), l @(d:24, ers) ? erd32 10 0 14 erd mov.l @ers+, erd l @ers ? erd32 4 0 10 ers32+4 ? ers32 mov.l @aa:16, erd l @aa:16 ? erd32 6 0 10 mov.l @aa:24, erd l @aa:24 ? erd32 8 0 12 mov.l ers, @erd l ers32 ? @erd 4 0 8 mov.l ers, @(d:16, l ers32 ? @(d:16, erd) 6 0 10 erd) mov.l ers, @(d:24, l ers32 ? @(d:24, erd) 10 0 14 erd) mov.l ers, @?rd l erd32? ? erd32 4 0 10 ers32 ? @erd mov.l ers, @aa:16 l ers32 ? @aa:16 6 0 10 mov.l ers, @aa:24 l ers32 ? @aa:24 8 0 12 pop.w rn w @sp ? rn16 2 0 6 sp+2 ? sp pop.l ern l @sp ? ern32 4 0 10 sp+4 ? sp #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 712 table a-1 instruction set (cont) condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c push.w rn w sp? ? sp 2 0 6 rn16 ? @sp push.l ern l sp? ? sp 4 0 10 ern32 ? @sp movfpe @aa:16, b cannot be used in the 4 cannot be used in the rd h8/3048 series h8/3048 series movtpe rs, b cannot be used in the 4 cannot be used in the @aa:16 h8/3048 series h8/3048 series 2. arithmetic instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c add.b #xx:8, rd b rd8+#xx:8 ? rd8 2 2 add.b rs, rd b rd8+rs8 ? rd8 2 2 add.w #xx:16, rd w rd16+#xx:16 ? rd16 4 (1) 4 add.w rs, rd w rd16+rs16 ? rd16 2 (1) 2 add.l #xx:32, erd l erd32+#xx:32 ? 6 (2) 6 erd32 add.l ers, erd l erd32+ers32 ? 2 (2) 2 erd32 addx.b #xx:8, rd b rd8+#xx:8 +c ? rd8 2 (3) 2 addx.b rs, rd b rd8+rs8 +c ? rd8 2 (3) 2 adds.l #1, erd l erd32+1 ? erd32 2 2 adds.l #2, erd l erd32+2 ? erd32 2 2 adds.l #4, erd l erd32+4 ? erd32 2 2 inc.b rd b rd8+1 ? rd8 2 ? inc.w #1, rd w rd16+1 ? rd16 2 ? inc.w #2, rd w rd16+2 ? rd16 2 ? #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 713 table a-1 instruction set (cont) condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c inc.l #1, erd l erd32+1 ? erd32 2 ? inc.l #2, erd l erd32+2 ? erd32 2 ? daa rd b rd8 decimal adjust 2 * * ? ? rd8 sub.b rs, rd b rd8?s8 ? rd8 2 2 sub.w #xx:16, rd w rd16?xx:16 ? rd16 4 (1) 4 sub.w rs, rd w rd16?s16 ? rd16 2 (1) 2 sub.l #xx:32, erd l erd32?xx:32 6 (2) 6 ? erd32 sub.l ers, erd l erd32?rs32 2 (2) 2 ? erd32 subx.b #xx:8, rd b rd8?xx:8? ? rd8 2 (3) 2 subx.b rs, rd b rd8?s8? ? rd8 2 (3) 2 subs.l #1, erd l erd32? ? erd32 2 2 subs.l #2, erd l erd32? ? erd32 2 2 subs.l #4, erd l erd32? ? erd32 2 2 dec.b rd b rd8? ? rd8 2 ? dec.w #1, rd w rd16? ? rd16 2 ? dec.w #2, rd w rd16? ? rd16 2 ? dec.l #1, erd l erd32? ? erd32 2 ? dec.l #2, erd l erd32? ? erd32 2 ? das.rd b rd8 decimal adjust 2 * * ? ? rd8 mulxu. b rs, rd b rd8 rs8 ? rd16 2 14 (unsigned multiplication) mulxu. w rs, erd w rd16 rs16 ? erd32 2 22 (unsigned multiplication) mulxs. b rs, rd b rd8 rs8 ? rd16 4 16 (signed multiplication) mulxs. w rs, erd w rd16 rs16 ? erd32 4 24 (signed multiplication) divxu. b rs, rd b rd16 ? rs8 ? rd16 2 (6) (7) 14 (rdh: remainder, rdl: quotient) (unsigned division ) #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 714 table a-1 instruction set (cont) condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c divxu. w rs, erd w erd32 ? rs16 ? erd32 2 (6) (7) 22 (ed: remainder, rd: quotient) (unsigned division) divxs. b rs, rd b rd16 ? rs8 ? rd16 4 (8) (7) 16 (rdh: remainder, rdl: quotient) (signed division) divxs. w rs, erd w erd32 ? rs16 ? erd32 4 (8) (7) 24 (ed: remainder, rd: quotient) (signed division) cmp.b #xx:8, rd b rd8?xx:8 2 2 cmp.b rs, rd b rd8?s8 2 2 cmp.w #xx:16, rd w rd16?xx:16 4 (1) 4 cmp.w rs, rd w rd16?s16 2 (1) 2 cmp.l #xx:32, erd l erd32?xx:32 6 (2) 4 cmp.l ers, erd l erd32?rs32 2 (2) 2 neg.b rd b 0?d8 ? rd8 2 2 neg.w rd w 0?d16 ? rd16 2 2 neg.l erd l 0?rd32 ? erd32 2 2 extu.w rd w 0 ? ( table a-1 instruction set (cont) 3. logic instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c and.b #xx:8, rd b rd8 #xx:8 ? rd8 2 0 2 and.b rs, rd b rd8 rs8 ? rd8 2 0 2 and.w #xx:16, rd w rd16 #xx:16 ? rd16 4 0 4 and.w rs, rd w rd16 rs16 ? rd16 2 0 2 and.l #xx:32, erd l erd32 #xx:32 ? erd32 6 0 6 and.l ers, erd l erd32 ers32 ? erd32 4 0 4 or.b #xx:8, rd b rd8 #xx:8 ? rd8 2 0 2 or.b rs, rd b rd8 rs8 ? rd8 2 0 2 or.w #xx:16, rd w rd16 #xx:16 ? rd16 4 0 4 or.w rs, rd w rd16 rs16 ? rd16 2 0 2 or.l #xx:32, erd l erd32 #xx:32 ? erd32 6 0 6 or.l ers, erd l erd32 ers32 ? erd32 4 0 4 xor.b #xx:8, rd b rd8 ? #xx:8 ? rd8 2 0 2 xor.b rs, rd b rd8 ? rs8 ? rd8 2 0 2 xor.w #xx:16, rd w rd16 ? #xx:16 ? rd16 4 0 4 xor.w rs, rd w rd16 ? rs16 ? rd16 2 0 2 xor.l #xx:32, erd l erd32 ? #xx:32 ? erd32 6 0 6 xor.l ers, erd l erd32 ? ers32 ? erd32 4 0 4 not.b rd b ~ rd8 ? rd8 2 0 2 not.w rd w ~ rd16 ? rd16 2 0 2 not.l erd l ~ rd32 ? rd32 2 0 2 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 716 table a-1 instruction set (cont) 4. shift instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c shal.b rd b 2 2 shal.w rd w 2 2 shal.l erd l 2 2 shar.b rd b 2 0 2 shar.w rd w 2 0 2 shar.l erd l 2 0 2 shll.b rd b 2 0 2 shll.w rd w 2 0 2 shll.l erd l 2 0 2 shlr.b rd b 2 0 2 shlr.w rd w 2 0 2 shlr.l erd l 2 0 2 rotxl.b rd b 2 0 2 rotxl.w rd w 2 0 2 rotxl.l erd l 2 0 2 rotxr.b rd b 2 0 2 rotxr.w rd w 2 0 2 rotxr.l erd l 2 0 2 rotl.b rd b 2 0 2 rotl.w rd w 2 0 2 rotl.l erd l 2 0 2 rotr.b rd b 2 0 2 rotr.w rd w 2 0 2 rotr.l erd l 2 0 2 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size msb lsb 0 c c msb lsb msb lsb 0 c 0c msb lsb c msb lsb c msb lsb c msb lsb c msb lsb 717 table a-1 instruction set (cont) 5. bit manipulation instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c bset #xx:3, rd b (#xx:3 of rd8) ? 1 2 2 bset #xx:3, @erd b (#xx:3 of @erd) ? 1 4 8 bset #xx:3, @aa:8 b (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? 1 4 8 bset rn, rd b (rn8 of rd8) ? 1 2 2 bset rn, @erd b (rn8 of @erd) ? 1 4 8 bset rn, @aa:8 b (rn8 of @aa:8) ? 1 4 8 bclr #xx:3, rd b (#xx:3 of rd8) ? 0 2 2 bclr #xx:3, @erd b (#xx:3 of @erd) ? 0 4 8 bclr #xx:3, @aa:8 b (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? 0 4 8 bclr rn, rd b (rn8 of rd8) ? 0 2 2 bclr rn, @erd b (rn8 of @erd) ? 0 4 8 bclr rn, @aa:8 b (rn8 of @aa:8) ? 0 4 8 bnot #xx:3, rd b (#xx:3 of rd8) ? 2 2 ~ (#xx:3 of rd8) bnot #xx:3, @erd b (#xx:3 of @erd) ? 4 8 ~ (#xx:3 of @erd) bnot #xx:3, @aa:8 b (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? 4 8 ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) bnot rn, rd b (rn8 of rd8) ? 2 2 ~ (rn8 of rd8) bnot rn, @erd b (rn8 of @erd) ? 4 8 ~ (rn8 of @erd) bnot rn, @aa:8 b (rn8 of @aa:8) ? 4 8 ~ (rn8 of @aa:8) btst #xx:3, rd b ~ (#xx:3 of rd8) ? z 2 2 btst #xx:3, @erd b ~ (#xx:3 of @erd) ? z 4 6 btst #xx:3, @aa:8 b ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? z 4 6 btst rn, rd b ~ (rn8 of @rd8) ? z 2 2 btst rn, @erd b ~ (rn8 of @erd) ? z 4 6 btst rn, @aa:8 b ~ (rn8 of @aa:8) ? z 4 6 bld #xx:3, rd b (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 718 table a-1 instruction set (cont) condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c bld #xx:3, @erd b (#xx:3 of @erd) ? c 4 6 bld #xx:3, @aa:8 b (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 bild #xx:3, rd b ~ (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 bild #xx:3, @erd b ~ (#xx:3 of @erd) ? c 4 6 bild #xx:3, @aa:8 b ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 bst #xx:3, rd b c ? (#xx:3 of rd8) 2 2 bst #xx:3, @erd b c ? (#xx:3 of @erd24) 4 8 bst #xx:3, @aa:8 b c ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 4 8 bist #xx:3, rd b ~ c ? (#xx:3 of rd8) 2 2 bist #xx:3, @erd b ~ c ? (#xx:3 of @erd24) 4 8 bist #xx:3, @aa:8 b ~ c ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 4 8 band #xx:3, rd b c (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 band #xx:3, @erd b c (#xx:3 of @erd24) ? c 4 6 band #xx:3, @aa:8 b c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 biand #xx:3, rd b c ~ (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 biand #xx:3, @erd b c ~ (#xx:3 of @erd24) ? c 4 6 biand #xx:3, @aa:8 b c ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 bor #xx:3, rd b c (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 bor #xx:3, @erd b c (#xx:3 of @erd24) ? c 4 6 bor #xx:3, @aa:8 b c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 bior #xx:3, rd b c ~ (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 bior #xx:3, @erd b c ~ (#xx:3 of @erd24) ? c 4 6 bior #xx:3, @aa:8 b c ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 bxor #xx:3, rd b c ? (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 bxor #xx:3, @erd b c ? (#xx:3 of @erd24) ? c 4 6 bxor #xx:3, @aa:8 b c ? (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 bixor #xx:3, rd b c ? ~ (#xx:3 of rd8) ? c 2 2 bixor #xx:3, @erd b c ? ~ ( #xx:3 of @erd24) ? c 4 6 bixor #xx:3, @aa:8 b c ? ~ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) ? c 4 6 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 719 table a-1 instruction set (cont) 6. branching instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c bra d:8 (bt d:8) always 2 4 bra d:16 (bt d:16) 4 6 brn d:8 (bf d:8) never 2 4 brn d:16 (bf d:16) 4 6 bhi d:8 c z = 0 2 4 bhi d:16 4 6 bls d:8 c z = 1 2 4 bls d:16 4 6 bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) c = 0 2 4 bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) 4 6 bcs d:8 (blo d:8) c = 1 2 4 bcs d:16 (blo d:16) 4 6 bne d:8 z = 0 2 4 bne d:16 4 6 beq d:8 z = 1 2 4 beq d:16 4 6 bvc d:8 v = 0 2 4 bvc d:16 4 6 bvs d:8 v = 1 2 4 bvs d:16 4 6 bpl d:8 n = 0 2 4 bpl d:16 4 6 bmi d:8 n = 1 2 4 bmi d:16 4 6 bge d:8 n ? v = 0 2 4 bge d:16 4 6 blt d:8 n ? v = 1 2 4 blt d:16 4 6 bgt d:8 2 4 bgt d:16 4 6 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size z (n ? v) = 0 if condition is true then pc ? pc+d else next; branch condition 720 table a-1 instruction set (cont) condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c ble d:8 2 4 ble d:16 4 6 jmp @ern pc ? ern 2 4 jmp @aa:24 pc ? aa:24 4 6 jmp @@aa:8 pc ? @aa:8 2 8 10 bsr d:8 pc ? @?p 2 6 8 pc ? pc+d:8 bsr d:16 pc ? @?p 4 8 10 pc ? pc+d:16 jsr @ern pc ? @?p 2 6 8 pc ? @ern jsr @aa:24 pc ? @?p 4 8 10 pc ? @aa:24 jsr @@aa:8 pc ? @?p 2 8 12 pc ? @aa:8 rts pc ? @sp+ 2 8 10 z (n ? v) = 1 #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size if condition is true then pc ? pc+d else next; branch condition 721 table a-1 instruction set (cont) 7. system control instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c trapa #x:2 pc ? @?p 2 1 14 16 ccr ? @?p table a-1 instruction set (cont) 8. block transfer instructions condition code mnemonic operation i h n z v c eepmov. b if r4l 0 then 4 8+ repeat @r5 ? @r6 4n * 2 r5+1 ? r5 r6+1 ? r6 r4l? ? r4l until r4l=0 else next eepmov. w if r4 0 then 4 8+ repeat @r5 ? @r6 4n * 2 r5+1 ? r5 r6+1 ? r6 r4? ? r4 until r4=0 else next notes: 1. the number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory. for other cases see section a.3, number of states required for execution. 2. n is the value set in register r4l or r4. (1) set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. (2) set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. (3) retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (4) set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value. (5) the number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in synchronization with the e clock is variable. (6) set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. (7) set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (8) set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal no. of states * 1 advanced operand size 723 a.2 operation code map ah al 0123456789abcdef 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f nop bra mulxu bset brn divxu bnot stc bhi mulxu bclr ldc bls divxu btst orc or.b bcc rts or xorc xor.b bcs bsr xor bor bior bxor bixor band biand andc and.b bne rte and ldc beq trapa bld bild bst bist bvc mov bpl jmp bmi eepmov addx subx bgt jsr ble mov add addx cmp subx or xor and mov table a-2 operation code map (1) instruction when most significant bit of bh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of bh is 1. instruction code: table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) bvs blt bge bsr table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (2) table a-2 (3) 1st byte 2nd byte ah bh al bl add sub mov cmp mov.b 724 ah al bh 0123456789abcdef 01 0a 0b 0f 10 11 12 13 17 1a 1b 1f 58 79 7a mov inc adds daa dec subs das bra mov mov bhi cmp cmp ldc/stc bcc or or bpl bgt table a-2 operation code map (2) instruction code: bvs sleep bvc bge table a-2 (3) table a-2 (3) table a-2 (3) add mov sub cmp bne and and inc extu dec beq inc extu dec bcs xor xor shll shlr rotxl rotxr not bls sub sub brn add add inc exts dec blt inc exts dec ble shal shar rotl rotr neg bmi 1st byte 2nd byte ah bh al bl sub adds shll shlr rotxl rotxr not shal shar rotl rotr neg 725 ah albh blch cl 0123456789abcdef 01406 01c05 01d05 01f06 7cr06 7cr07 7dr06 7dr07 7eaa6 7eaa7 7faa6 7faa7 mulxs bset bset bset bset divxs bnot bnot bnot bnot mulxs bclr bclr bclr bclr divxs btst btst btst btst or xor bor bior bxor bixor band biand and bld bild bst bist table a-2 operation code map (3) instruction when most significant bit of dh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of dh is 1. instruction code: * * * * * * * * 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 bor bior bxor bixor band biand bld bild bst bist notes: 1. 2. r is the register designation field. aa is the absolute address field. 1st byte 2nd byte ah bh al bl 3rd byte ch dh cl dl 4th byte ldc stc ldc ldc ldc stc stc stc 726 a.3 number of states required for execution the tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution by the h8/300h cpu. table a-4 indicates the number of instruction fetch, data read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction. table a-3 indicates the number of states required per cycle according to the bus size. the number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: number of states = i s i + j s j + k s k + l s l + m s m + n s n examples of calculation of number of states required for execution examples: advanced mode, stack located in external address space, on-chip supporting modules accessed with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and 16-bit bus width. bset #0, @ffffc7:8 from table a-4, i = l = 2 and j = k = m = n = 0 from table a-3, s i = 4 and s l = 3 number of states = 2 4 + 2 3 = 14 jsr @@30 from table a-4, i = j = k = 2 and l = m = n = 0 from table a-3, s i = s j = s k = 4 number of states = 2 4 + 2 4 + 2 4 = 24 727 table a-3 number of states per cycle access conditions external device 8-bit bus 16-bit bus on-chip 8-bit 16-bit 2-state 3-state 2-state 3-state cycle memory bus bus access access access access instruction fetch s i 2 6346 + 2m23 + m branch address read s j stack operation s k byte data access s l 3 2 3 + m word data access s m 6 4 6 + 2m internal operation s n 1 legend m: number of wait states inserted into external device access on-chip sup- porting module 728 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n add add.b #xx:8, rd 1 add.b rs, rd 1 add.w #xx:16, rd 2 add.w rs, rd 1 add.l #xx:32, erd 3 add.l ers, erd 1 adds adds #1/2/4, erd 1 addx addx #xx:8, rd 1 addx rs, rd 1 and and.b #xx:8, rd 1 and.b rs, rd 1 and.w #xx:16, rd 2 and.w rs, rd 1 and.l #xx:32, erd 3 and.l ers, erd 2 andc andc #xx:8, ccr 1 band band #xx:3, rd 1 band #xx:3, @erd 2 1 band #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 bcc bra d:8 (bt d:8) 2 brn d:8 (bf d:8) 2 bhi d:8 2 bls d:8 2 bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) 2 bcs d:8 (blo d:8) 2 bne d:8 2 beq d:8 2 bvc d:8 2 bvs d:8 2 bpl d:8 2 bmi d:8 2 bge d:8 2 blt d:8 2 bgt d:8 2 ble d:8 2 729 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n bcc bra d:16 (bt d:16) 2 2 brn d:16 (bf d:16) 2 2 bhi d:16 2 2 bls d:16 2 2 bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) 2 2 bcs d:16 (blo d:16) 2 2 bne d:16 2 2 beq d:16 2 2 bvc d:16 2 2 bvs d:16 2 2 bpl d:16 2 2 bmi d:16 2 2 bge d:16 2 2 blt d:16 2 2 bgt d:16 2 2 ble d:16 2 2 bclr bclr #xx:3, rd 1 bclr #xx:3, @erd 2 2 bclr #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2 bclr rn, rd 1 bclr rn, @erd 2 2 bclr rn, @aa:8 2 2 biand biand #xx:3, rd 1 biand #xx:3, @erd 2 1 biand #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 bild bild #xx:3, rd 1 bild #xx:3, @erd 2 1 bild #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 bior bior #xx:8, rd 1 bior #xx:8, @erd 2 1 bior #xx:8, @aa:8 2 1 bist bist #xx:3, rd 1 bist #xx:3, @erd 2 2 bist #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2 bixor bixor #xx:3, rd 1 bixor #xx:3, @erd 2 1 bixor #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 bld bld #xx:3, rd 1 bld #xx:3, @erd 2 1 bld #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 730 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n bnot bnot #xx:3, rd 1 bnot #xx:3, @erd 2 2 bnot #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2 bnot rn, rd 1 bnot rn, @erd 2 2 bnot rn, @aa:8 2 2 bor bor #xx:3, rd 1 bor #xx:3, @erd 2 1 bor #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 bset bset #xx:3, rd 1 bset #xx:3, @erd 2 2 bset #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2 bset rn, rd 1 bset rn, @erd 2 2 bset rn, @aa:8 2 2 bsr bsr d:8 normal * 21 advanced 2 2 bsr d:16 normal * 21 2 advanced 2 2 2 bst bst #xx:3, rd 1 bst #xx:3, @erd 2 2 bst #xx:3, @aa:8 2 2 btst btst #xx:3, rd 1 btst #xx:3, @erd 2 1 btst #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 btst rn, rd 1 btst rn, @erd 2 1 btst rn, @aa:8 2 1 bxor bxor #xx:3, rd 1 bxor #xx:3, @erd 2 1 bxor #xx:3, @aa:8 2 1 cmp cmp.b #xx:8, rd 1 cmp.b rs, rd 1 cmp.w #xx:16, rd 2 cmp.w rs, rd 1 cmp.l #xx:32, erd 3 cmp.l ers, erd 1 daa daa rd 1 das das rd 1 note: * not available in the h8/3048 series. 731 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n dec dec.b rd 1 dec.w #1/2, rd 1 dec.l #1/2, erd 1 divxs divxs.b rs, rd 2 12 divxs.w rs, erd 2 20 divxu divxu.b rs, rd 1 12 divxu.w rs, erd 1 20 eepmov eepmov.b 2 2n + 2 * 2 eepmov.w 2 2n + 2 * 2 exts exts.w rd 1 exts.l erd 1 extu extu.w rd 1 extu.l erd 1 inc inc.b rd 1 inc.w #1/2, rd 1 inc.l #1/2, erd 1 jmp jmp @ern 2 jmp @aa:24 2 2 jmp @@aa:8 normal * 1 21 2 advanced 2 2 2 jsr jsr @ern normal * 1 21 advanced 2 2 jsr @aa:24 normal * 1 21 2 advanced 2 2 2 jsr @@aa:8 normal * 1 21 1 advanced 2 2 2 ldc ldc #xx:8, ccr 1 ldc rs, ccr 1 ldc @ers, ccr 2 1 ldc @(d:16, ers), ccr 3 1 ldc @(d:24, ers), ccr 5 1 ldc @ers+, ccr 2 1 2 ldc @aa:16, ccr 3 1 ldc @aa:24, ccr 4 1 notes: 1. not available in the h8/3048 series. 2. n is the value set in register r4l or r4. the source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each. 732 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n mov mov.b #xx:8, rd 1 mov.b rs, rd 1 mov.b @ers, rd 1 1 mov.b @(d:16, ers), rd 21 mov.b @(d:24, ers), rd 41 mov.b @ers+, rd 1 1 2 mov.b @aa:8, rd 1 1 mov.b @aa:16, rd 2 1 mov.b @aa:24, rd 3 1 mov.b rs, @erd 1 1 mov.b rs, @(d:16, erd) 21 mov.b rs, @(d:24, erd) 41 mov.b rs, @?rd 1 1 2 mov.b rs, @aa:8 1 1 mov.b rs, @aa:16 2 1 mov.b rs, @aa:24 3 1 mov.w #xx:16, rd 2 mov.w rs, rd 1 mov.w @ers, rd 1 1 mov.w @(d:16, ers), rd 21 mov.w @(d:24, ers), rd 41 mov.w @ers+, rd 1 1 2 mov.w @aa:16, rd 2 1 mov.w @aa:24, rd 3 1 mov.w rs, @erd 1 1 mov.w rs, @(d:16, erd) 21 mov.w rs, @(d:24, erd) 41 mov.w rs, @?rd 1 1 2 mov.w rs, @aa:16 2 1 mov.w rs, @aa:24 3 1 mov.l #xx:32, erd 3 mov.l ers, erd 1 mov.l @ers, erd 2 2 mov.l @(d:16, ers), erd 32 mov.l @(d:24, ers), erd 52 mov.l @ers+, erd 2 2 2 mov.l @aa:16, erd 3 2 mov.l @aa:24, erd 4 2 mov.l ers, @erd 2 2 mov.l ers, @(d:16, erd) 32 mov.l ers, @(d:24, erd) 52 mov.l ers, @?rd 2 2 2 mov.l ers, @aa:16 3 2 mov.l ers, @aa:24 4 2 733 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n movfpe movfpe @aa:16, rd * 21 movtpe movtpe rs, @aa:16 * 21 mulxs mulxs.b rs, rd 2 12 mulxs.w rs, erd 2 20 mulxu mulxu.b rs, rd 1 12 mulxu.w rs, erd 1 20 neg neg.b rd 1 neg.w rd 1 neg.l erd 1 nop nop 1 not not.b rd 1 not.w rd 1 not.l erd 1 or or.b #xx:8, rd 1 or.b rs, rd 1 or.w #xx:16, rd 2 or.w rs, rd 1 or.l #xx:32, erd 3 or.l ers, erd 2 orc orc #xx:8, ccr 1 pop pop.w rn 1 1 2 pop.l ern 2 2 2 push push.w rn 1 1 2 push.l ern 2 2 2 rotl rotl.b rd 1 rotl.w rd 1 rotl.l erd 1 rotr rotr.b rd 1 rotr.w rd 1 rotr.l erd 1 rotxl rotxl.b rd 1 rotxl.w rd 1 rotxl.l erd 1 rotxr rotxr.b rd 1 rotxr.w rd 1 rotxr.l erd 1 rte rte 2 2 2 note: * not available in the h8/3048 series. 734 table a-4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction branch stack byte data word data internal fetch addr. read operation access access operation instruction mnemonic i j k l m n rts rts normal * 21 2 advanced 2 2 2 shal shal.b rd 1 shal.w rd 1 shal.l erd 1 shar shar.b rd 1 shar.w rd 1 shar.l erd 1 shll shll.b rd 1 shll.w rd 1 shll.l erd 1 shlr shlr.b rd 1 shlr.w rd 1 shlr.l erd 1 sleep sleep 1 stc stc ccr, rd 1 stc ccr, @erd 2 1 stc ccr, @(d:16, erd) 3 1 stc ccr, @(d:24, erd) 5 1 stc ccr, @?rd 2 1 2 stc ccr, @aa:16 3 1 stc ccr, @aa:24 4 1 sub sub.b rs, rd 1 sub.w #xx:16, rd 2 sub.w rs, rd 1 sub.l #xx:32, erd 3 sub.l ers, erd 1 subs subs #1/2/4, erd 1 subx subx #xx:8, rd 1 subx rs, rd 1 trapa trapa #x:2 normal * 21 2 4 advanced 2 2 2 4 xor xor.b #xx:8, rd 1 xor.b rs, rd 1 xor.w #xx:16, rd 2 xor.w rs, rd 1 xor.l #xx:32, erd 3 xor.l ers, erd 2 xorc xorc #xx:8, ccr 1 note: * not available in the h8/3048 series. 735 appendix b internal i/o register b.1 addresses data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'1c h'1d h'1e h'1f h'20 mar0ar 8 h'21 mar0ae 8 h'22 mar0ah 8 h'23 mar0al 8 h'24 etcr0ah 8 h'25 etcr0al 8 h'26 ioar0a 8 h'27 dtcr0a 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dte dtsz said saide dtie dts2a dts1a dts0a full address mode h'28 mar0br 8 h'29 mar0be 8 h'2a mar0bh 8 h'2b mar0bl 8 h'2c etcr0bh 8 h'2d etcr0bl 8 h'2e ioar0b 8 h'2f dtcr0b 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dtme daid daide tms dts2b dts1b dts0b full address mode legend dmac: dma controller (continued on next page) dmac channel 0a dmac channel 0b bit names 736 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'30 mar1ar 8 h'31 mar1ae 8 h'32 mar1ah 8 h'33 mar1al 8 h'34 etcr1ah 8 h'35 etcr1al 8 h'36 ioar1a 8 h'37 dtcr1a 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dte dtsz said saide dtie dts2a dts1a dts0a full address mode h'38 mar1br 8 h'39 mar1be 8 h'3a mar1bh 8 h'3b mar1bl 8 h'3c etcr1bh 8 h'3d etcr1bl 8 h'3e ioar1b 8 h'3f dtcr1b 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dtme daid daide tms dts2b dts1b dts0b full address mode h'40 flmcr 8 v pp v pp e ev pv e p flash h'41 memory h'42 ebr1 8 lb7 lb6 lb5 lb4 lb3 lb2 lb1 lb0 h'43 ebr2 8 sb7 sb6 sb5 sb4 sb3 sb2 sb1 sb0 h'44 h'45 h'46 h'47 h'48 ramcr 8 fler rams ram2 ram1 ram0 h'49 h'4a h'4b legend dmac: dma controller (continued on next page) bit names dmac channel 1a dmac channel 1b 737 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'4c h'4d h'4e h'4f h'50 h'51 h'52 h'53 h'54 h'55 h'56 h'57 h'58 h'59 h'5a h'5b h'5c dastcr 8 daste h'5d divcr 8 div1 div0 h'5e mstcr 8 pstop mstop5 mstop4 mstop3 mstop2 mstop1 mstop0 h'5f cscr 8 cs7e cs6e cs5e cs4e bus controller h'60 tstr 8 str4 str3 str2 str1 str0 h'61 tsnc 8 sync4 sync3 sync2 sync1 sync0 h'62 tmdr 8 mdf fdir pwm4 pwm3 pwm2 pwm1 pwm0 h'63 tfcr 8 cmd1 cmd0 bfb4 bfa4 bfb3 bfa3 h'64 tcr0 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 h'65 tior0 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'66 tier0 8 ovie imieb imiea h'67 tsr0 8 ?vf imfb imfa h'68 tcnt0h 16 h'69 tcnt0l h'6a gra0h 16 h'6b gra0l h'6c grb0h 16 h'6d grb0l h'6e tcr1 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 h'6f tior1 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 legend itu: 16-bit integrated timer unit (continued on next page) bit names itu (all channels) d/a converter system control itu channel 0 itu channel 1 738 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'70 tier1 8 ovie imieb imiea h'71 tsr1 8 ?vf imfb imfa h'72 tcnt1h 16 h'73 tcnt1l h'74 gra1h 16 h'75 gra1l h'76 grb1h 16 h'77 grb1l h'78 tcr2 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 h'79 tior2 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'7a tier2 8 ovie imieb imiea h'7b tsr2 8 ?vf imfb imfa h'7c tcnt2h 16 h'7d tcnt2l h'7e gra2h 16 h'7f gra2l h'80 grb2h 16 h'81 grb2l h'82 tcr3 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 h'83 tior3 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 h'84 tier3 8 ovie imieb imiea h'85 tsr3 8 ?vf imfb imfa h'86 tcnt3h 16 h'87 tcnt3l h'88 gra3h 16 h'89 gra3l h'8a grb3h 16 h'8b grb3l h'8c bra3h 16 h'8d bra3l h'8e brb3h 16 h'8f brb3l h'90 toer 8 exb4 exa4 eb3 eb4 ea4 ea3 h'91 tocr 8 xtgd ols4 ols3 h'92 tcr4 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 h'93 tior4 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 legend itu: 16-bit integrated timer unit (continued on next page) bit names itu channel 2 itu channel 1 itu channel 3 itu (all channels) itu channel 4 739 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'94 tier4 8 ovie imieb imiea h'95 tsr4 8 ?vf imfb imfa h'96 tcnt4h 16 h'97 tcnt4l h'98 gra4h 16 h'99 gra4l h'9a grb4h 16 h'9b grb4l h'9c bra4h 16 h'9d bra4l h'9e brb4h 16 h'9f brb4l h'a0 tpmr 8 g3nov g2nov g1nov g0nov tpc h'a1 tpcr 8 g3cms1 g3cms0 g2cms1 g2cms0 g1cms1 g1cms0 g0cms1 g0cms0 h'a2 nderb 8 nder15 nder14 nder13 nder12 nder11 nder10 nder9 nder8 h'a3 ndera 8 nder7 nder6 nder5 nder4 nder3 nder2 nder1 nder0 h'a4 ndrb * 1 8 ndr15 ndr14 ndr13 ndr12 ndr11 ndr10 ndr9 ndr8 8 ndr15 ndr14 ndr13 ndr12 h'a5 ndra * 1 8 ndr7 ndr6 ndr5 ndr4 ndr3 ndr2 ndr1 ndr0 8 ndr7 ndr6 ndr5 ndr4 h'a6 ndrb * 1 8 8 ndr11 ndr10 ndr9 ndr8 h'a7 ndra * 1 8 8 ndr3 ndr2 ndr1 ndr0 h'a8 tcsr * 2 8 ovf wt/ it tme cks2 cks1 cks0 wdt h'a9 tcnt * 2 8 h'aa h'ab rstcsr * 3 8 wrst rstoe h'ac rfshcr 8 srfmd psrame drame cas/ we m9/ m8 rfshe rcyce h'ad rtmcsr 8 cmf cmie cks2 cks1 cks0 h'ae rtcnt 8 h'af rtcor 8 notes: 1. the address depends on the output trigger setting. 2. for write access to tcsr and tcnt, see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. 3. for write access to rstcsr, see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. legend itu: 16-bit integrated timer unit tpc: programmable timing pattern controller wdt: watchdog timer (continued on next page) bit names itu channel 4 refresh controller 740 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'b0 smr 8 c/ a /gm chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 sci channel 0 h'b1 brr 8 h'b2 scr 8 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h'b3 tdr 8 h'b4 ssr 8 tdre rdrf orer fer/ers per tend mpb mpbt h'b5 rdr 8 h'b6 scmr 8 sdir sinv smif h'b7 h'b8 smr 8 c/ a chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 sci channel 1 h'b9 brr 8 h'ba scr 8 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h'bb tdr 8 h'bc ssr 8 tdre rdrf orer fer per tend mpb mpbt h'bd rdr 8 h'be h'bf h'c0 p1ddr 8 p1 7 ddr p1 6 ddr p1 5 ddr p1 4 ddr p1 3 ddr p1 2 ddr p1 1 ddr p1 0 ddr port 1 h'c1 p2ddr 8 p2 7 ddr p2 6 ddr p2 5 ddr p2 4 ddr p2 3 ddr p2 2 ddr p2 1 ddr p2 0 ddr port 2 h'c2 p1dr 8 p1 7 p1 6 p1 5 p1 4 p1 3 p1 2 p1 1 p1 0 port 1 h'c3 p2dr 8 p2 7 p2 6 p2 5 p2 4 p2 3 p2 2 p2 1 p2 0 port 2 h'c4 p3ddr 8 p3 7 ddr p3 6 ddr p3 5 ddr p3 4 ddr p3 3 ddr p3 2 ddr p3 1 ddr p3 0 ddr port 3 h'c5 p4ddr 8 p4 7 ddr p4 6 ddr p4 5 ddr p4 4 ddr p4 3 ddr p4 2 ddr p4 1 ddr p4 0 ddr port 4 h'c6 p3dr 8 p3 7 p3 6 p3 5 p3 4 p3 3 p3 2 p3 1 p3 0 port 3 h'c7 p4dr 8 p4 7 p4 6 p4 5 p4 4 p4 3 p4 2 p4 1 p4 0 port 4 h'c8 p5ddr 8 p5 3 ddr p5 2 ddr p5 1 ddr p5 0 ddr port 5 h'c9 p6ddr 8 p6 6 ddr p6 5 ddr p6 4 ddr p6 3 ddr p6 2 ddr p6 1 ddr p6 0 ddr port 6 h'ca p5dr 8 p5 3 p5 2 p5 1 p5 0 port 5 h'cb p6dr 8 p6 6 p6 5 p6 4 p6 3 p6 2 p6 1 p6 0 port 6 h'cc h'cd p8ddr 8 ?8 4 ddr p8 3 ddr p8 2 ddr p8 1 ddr p8 0 ddr port 8 h'ce p7dr 8 p7 7 p7 6 p7 5 p7 4 p7 3 p7 2 p7 1 p7 0 port 7 h'cf p8dr 8 ?8 4 p8 3 p8 2 p8 1 p8 0 port 8 h'd0 p9ddr 8 p9 5 ddr p9 4 ddr p9 3 ddr p9 2 ddr p9 1 ddr p9 0 ddr port 9 h'd1 paddr 8 pa 7 ddr pa 6 ddr pa 5 ddr pa 4 ddr pa 3 ddr pa 2 ddr pa 1 ddr pa 0 ddr port a h'd2 p9dr 8 p9 5 p9 4 p9 3 p9 2 p9 1 p9 0 port 9 h'd3 padr 8 pa 7 pa 6 pa 5 pa 4 pa 3 pa 2 pa 1 pa 0 port a legend sci: serial communication interface (continued on next page) bit names 741 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'd4 pbddr 8 pb 7 ddr pb 6 ddr pb 5 ddr pb 4 ddr pb 3 ddr pb 2 ddr pb 1 ddr pb 0 ddr port b h'd5 h'd6 pbdr 8 pb 7 pb 6 pb 5 pb 4 pb 3 pb 2 pb 1 pb 0 port b h'd7 h'd8 p2pcr p2 7 pcr p2 6 pcr p2 5 pcr p2 4 pcr p2 3 pcr p2 2 pcr p2 1 pcr p2 0 pcr port 2 h'd9 h'da p4pcr 8 p4 7 pcr p4 6 pcr p4 5 pcr p4 4 pcr p4 3 pcr p4 2 pcr p4 1 pcr p4 0 pcr port 4 h'db p5pcr 8 p5 3 pcr p5 2 pcr p5 1 pcr p5 0 pcr port 5 h'dc dadr0 8 d/a converter h'dd dadr1 8 h'de dacr 8 daoe1 daoe0 dae h'df h'e0 addrah 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 a/d converter h'e1 addral 8 ad1 ad0 h'e2 addrbh 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h'e3 addrbl 8 ad1 ad0 h'e4 addrch 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h'e5 addrcl 8 ad1 ad0 h'e6 addrdh 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h'e7 addrdl 8 ad1 ad0 h'e8 adcsr 8 adf adie adst scan cks ch2 ch1 ch0 h'e9 adcr 8 trge h'ea h'eb h'ec abwcr 8 abw7 abw6 abw5 abw4 abw3 abw2 abw1 abw0 bus controller h'ed astcr 8 ast7 ast6 ast5 ast4 ast3 ast2 ast1 ast0 h'ee wcr 8 wms1 wms0 wc1 wc0 h'ef wcer 8 wce7 wce6 wce5 wce4 wce3 wce2 wce1 wce0 h'f0 h'f1 mdcr 8 mds2 mds1 mds0 system control h'f2 syscr 8 ssby sts2 sts1 sts0 ue nmieg rame h'f3 brcr 8 a23e a22e a21e brle bus controller h'f4 iscr 8 irq5sc irq4sc irq3sc irq2sc irq1sc irq0sc h'f5 ier 8 irq5e irq4e irq3e irq2e irq1e irq0e h'f6 isr 8 irq5f irq4f irq3f irq2f irq1f irq0f h'f7 h'f8 ipra 8 ipra7 ipra6 ipra5 ipra4 ipra3 ipra2 ipra1 ipra0 h'f9 iprb 8 iprb7 iprb6 iprb5 iprb3 iprb2 iprb1 (continued on next page) bit names interrupt controller 742 (continued from preceding page) data address register bus (low) name width bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h'fa h'fb h'fc h'fd h'fe h'ff bit names 743 b.2 function tstr timer start register h'60 itu (all channels) register name address to which the register is mapped name of on-chip supporting module register acronym bit numbers initial bit values names of the bits. dashes (? indicate reserved bits. full name of bit descriptions of bit settings read only write only read and write r w r/w possible types of access bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 str4 0 r/w 3 str3 0 r/w 0 str0 0 r/w 2 str2 0 r/w 1 str1 0 r/w counter start 0 0 tcnt0 is halted 1 tcnt0 is counting counter start 3 0 tcnt3 is halted 1 tcnt3 is counting counter start 1 0 tcnt1 is halted 1 tcnt1 is counting counter start 2 0 tcnt2 is halted 1 tcnt2 is counting counter start 4 0 tcnt4 is halted 1 tcnt4 is counting 744 mar0a r/e/h/l?emory address register 0a r/e/h/l h'20, h'21, dmac0 h'22, h'23 bit initial value read/write 30 1 28 1 26 1 24 1 22 r/w 16 r/w 20 r/w 18 r/w 31 1 29 1 27 1 25 1 23 r/w 17 r/w 21 r/w 19 r/w mar0ar source or destination address mar0ae bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w mar0ah mar0al undetermined undetermined undetermined 745 etcr0a h/l?xecute transfer count register 0a h/l h'24, h'25 dmac0 short address mode i/o mode and idle mode repeat mode bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined transfer counter etcr0ah bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial count etcr0al bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w 746 etcr0a h/l?xecute transfer count register 0a h/l h'24, h'25 dmac0 (cont) full address mode normal mode block transfer mode bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined block size counter etcr0ah bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial block size etcr0al 747 ioar0a?/o address register 0a h'26 dmac0 bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w short address mode: full address mode: undetermined source or destination address not used 748 dtcr0a?ata transfer control register 0a h'27 dmac0 short address mode bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w data transfer enable 0 data transfer is disabled 1 data transfer is enabled data transfer size 0 byte-size transfer 1 word-size transfer data transfer increment/decrement 0 incremented: 1 decremented: data transfer select dts2 data transfer interrupt enable 0 interrupt requested by dte bit is disabled 1 interrupt requested by dte bit is enabled 0 1 data transfer activation source compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 2 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 3 sci0 transmit-data-empty interrupt sci0 receive-data-full interrupt bit 2 dts1 0 1 0 1 bit 1 dts0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 bit 0 repeat enable description i/o mode repeat mode idle mode rpe 0 1 dtie 0 1 0 1 if dtsz = 0, mar is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is incremented by 2 after each transfer if dtsz = 0, mar is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is decremented by 2 after each transfer transfer in full address mode (channel a) 1 transfer in full address mode (channel a) 749 dtcr0a?ata transfer control register 0a h'27 dmac0 (cont) full address mode bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 said 0 r/w 4 saide 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0a 0 r/w 2 dts2a 0 r/w 1 dts1a 0 r/w data transfer enable 0 data transfer is disabled 1 data transfer is enabled source address increment/decrement (bit 5) source address increment/decrement enable (bit 4) data transfer interrupt enable data transfer select 0a 0 normal mode 1 block transfer mode data transfer select 2a and 1a set both bits to 1 data transfer size 0 byte-size transfer 1 word-size transfer increment/decrement enable mara is held fixed mara is held fixed decremented: 0 1 0 1 0 1 said bit 5 saide bit 4 incremented: 0 interrupt request by dte bit is disabled 1 interrupt request by dte bit is enabled if dtsz = 0, mara is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mara is decremented by 2 after each transfer if dtsz = 0, mara is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mara is incremented by 2 after each transfer 750 mar0b r/e/h/l?emory address register 0b r/e/h/l h'28, h'29, dmac0 h'2a, h'2b bit initial value read/write 30 1 28 1 26 1 24 1 22 r/w 16 r/w 20 r/w 18 r/w 31 1 29 1 27 1 25 1 23 r/w 17 r/w 21 r/w 19 r/w mar0br source or destination address mar0be bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w mar0bh mar0bl undetermined undetermined undetermined 751 etcr0b h/l?xecute transfer count register 0b h/l h'2c, h'2d dmac0 short address mode i/o mode and idle mode repeat mode bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined transfer counter etcr0bh bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial count etcr0bl 752 etcr0b h/l?xecute transfer count register 0b h/l h'2c, h'2d dmac0 (cont) full address mode normal mode block transfer mode ioar0b?/o address register 0b h'2e dmac0 bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w not used undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w block transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w short address mode: full address mode: undetermined source or destination address not used 753 dtcr0b?ata transfer control register 0b h'2f dmac0 short address mode bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w data transfer enable 0 data transfer is disabled 1 data transfer is enabled data transfer size 0 byte-size transfer 1 word-size transfer data transfer increment/decrement 0 incremented: 1 decremented: data transfer select dts2 data transfer interrupt enable 0 interrupt requested by dte bit is disabled 1 interrupt requested by dte bit is enabled an interrupt request is issued to the cpu when the dte bit = 0 0 1 data transfer activation source compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 2 compare match/input capture a interrupt from itu channel 3 sci0 transmit-data-empty interrupt sci0 receive-data-full interrupt falling edge of input bit 2 dts1 0 1 0 1 bit 1 dts0 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit 0 repeat enable description i/o mode repeat mode idle mode rpe 0 1 dtie 0 1 0 1 0 low level of input 1 dreq dreq if dtsz = 0, mar is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is incremented by 2 after each transfer if dtsz = 0, mar is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is decremented by 2 after each transfer 754 dtcr0b?ata transfer control register 0b h'2f dmac0 cont full address mode bit initial value read/write 7 dtme 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 daid 0 r/w 4 daide 0 r/w 3 tms 0 r/w 0 dts0b 0 r/w 2 dts2b 0 r/w 1 dts1b 0 r/w data transfer master enable 0 data transfer is disabled 1 data transfer is enabled destination address increment/decrement (bit 5) destination address increment/decrement enable (bit 4) increment/decrement enable marb is held fixed marb is held fixed decremented: 0 1 0 1 0 1 daid bit 5 daide bit 4 incremented: transfer mode select 0 destination is the block area in block transfer mode 1 source is the block area in block transfer mode data transfer select 2b to 0b dts2b 0 1 normal mode auto-request (burst mode) not available auto-request (cycle-steal mode) not available not available not available falling edge of bit 2 dts1b 0 1 0 1 bit 1 dts0b 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit 0 0 low level input at 1 data transfer activation source block transfer mode compare match/input capture a from itu channel 0 compare match/input capture a from itu channel 1 compare match/input capture a from itu channel 2 compare match/input capture a from itu channel 3 not available not available falling edge of not available dreq dreq dreq if dtsz = 0, marb is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, marb is incremented by 2 after each transfer if dtsz = 0, marb is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, marb is decremented by 2 after each transfer 755 mar1a r/e/h/l?emory address register 1a r/e/h/l h'30, h'31, dmac1 h'32, h'33 bit initial value read/write 30 1 28 1 26 1 24 1 22 r/w 16 r/w 20 r/w 18 r/w 31 1 29 1 27 1 25 1 23 r/w 17 r/w 21 r/w 19 r/w mar1ar mar1ae bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w mar1ah mar1al undetermined undetermined undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. 756 etcr1a h/l?xecute transfer count register 1a h/l h'34, h'35 dmac1 ioar1a?/o address register 1a h'36 dmac1 bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. undetermined bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined etcr1ah etcr1al bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. 757 dtcr1a?ata transfer control register 1a h'37 dmac1 short address mode full address mode mar1b r/e/h/l?emory address register 1b r/e/h/l h'38, h'39, dmac1 h'3a, h'3b bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 said 0 r/w 4 saide 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0a 0 r/w 2 dts2a 0 r/w 1 dts1a 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. bit initial value read/write 30 1 28 1 26 1 24 1 22 r/w 16 r/w 20 r/w 18 r/w 31 1 29 1 27 1 25 1 23 r/w 17 r/w 21 r/w 19 r/w mar1br mar1be bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w mar1bh mar1bl undetermined undetermined undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. 758 etcr1b h/l?xecute transfer count register 1b h/l h'3c, h'3d dmac1 ioar1b?/o address register 1b h'3e dmac1 bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. undetermined bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined etcr1bh etcr1bl bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. 759 dtcr1b?ata transfer control register 1b h'3f dmac1 short address mode full address mode bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 dtme 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 daid 0 r/w 4 daide 0 r/w 3 tms 0 r/w 0 dts0b 0 r/w 2 dts2b 0 r/w 1 dts1b 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. 760 flmcr?lash memory control register h'40 flash memory 761 bit initial value r/w 7 0 v pp ev 6543210 0000000 r r/w r/w r/w r/w v e pv e p program mode **** * 0 1 r/w exit from program mode (initial value) transition to program mode erase mode 0 1 exit from erase mode (initial value) transition to erase mode program-verify mode 0 1 exit from program-verify mode (initial value) transition to program-verify mode erase-verify mode 0 1 exit from erase-verify mode (initial value) transition to erase-verify mode 0 1 v pp pin 12 v power supply is disabled (initial value) v pp pin 12 v power supply is enabled v enable pp programming power 0 1 cleared when 12 v is not applied to v (initial value) set when 12 v is applied to v pp pp pp note: * the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. ebr1?rase block register 1 h'42 flash memory ebr2?rase block register 2 h'43 flash memory 762 bit initial value r/w 7 0 lb7 6543210 0 0000 r/w r/w r/w r/w * 00 lb6 lb5 lb4 lb3 lb2 lb1 lb0 **** r/w r/w r/w ** * r/w * large block 7 to 0 0 1 block lb7 to lb0 is not selected (initial value) block lb7 to lb0 is selected note: * the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6 and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. bit initial value r/w 7 0 sb7 6543210 0 0000 r/w r/w r/w r/w * 00 sb6 sb5 sb4 sb3 sb2 sb1 sb0 **** r/w r/w r/w ** * r/w * small block 7 to 0 0 1 block sb7 to sb0 is not selected (initial value) block sb7 to sb0 is selected note: * the initial value is h'00 in modes 5, 6 and 7 (on-chip flash memory enabled). in modes 1, 2, 3, and 4 (on-chip flash memory disabled), this register cannot be modified and is always read as h'ff. ramcr?am control register h'48 flash memory 763 bit initial value r/w 7 0 fler 6543210 10000 r r/w r/w r/w r/w * rams ram2 ram1 ram0 11 ram select, ram 2 to ram 0 bit 3 rams 0 ram area bit 2 ram 2 1/0 bit 1 ram 1 1/0 bit 0 ram 0 1/0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 h'fff000 to h'fff1ff h'01f000 to h'01f1ff h'01f200 to h'01f3ff h'01f400 to h'01f5ff h'01f600 to h'01f7ff h'01f800 to h'01f9ff h'01fa00 to h'01fbff h'01fc00 to h'01fdff h'01fe00 to h'01ffff 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 flash memory error 0 1 flash memory is not write/erase-protected (initial value) (is not in error protect mode) flash memory is write/erase-protected (is in error protect mode) dastcr?/a standby control register h'5c system control divcr?ivision control register h'5d system control bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 daste 0 r/w 2 1 1 1 d/a standby enable 0 d/a output is disabled in software standby mode 1 d/a output is enabled in software standby mode bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 3 1 0 div0 0 r/w 2 1 1 div1 0 r/w divide 1 and 0 div1 frequency division ratio div0 bit 0 bit 1 0 1 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 0 0 1 1 7 1 764 mstcr?odule standby control register h'5e system control bit initial value read/write 7 pstop 0 r/w 6 1 5 mstop5 0 r/w 4 mstop4 0 r/w 3 mstop3 0 r/w 0 mstop0 0 r/w 2 mstop2 0 r/w 1 mstop1 0 r/w module standby 0 0 a/d converter operates normally (initial value) 1 a/d converter is in standby state module standby 3 0 sci1 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci1 is in standby state module standby 1 0 refresh controller operates normally (initial value) 1 refresh controller is in standby state module standby 2 0 dmac operates normally (initial value) 1 dmac is in standby state module standby 4 0 sci0 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci0 is in standby state module standby 5 0 itu operates normally (initial value) 1 itu is in standby state ?clock stop 0 clock output is enabled (initial value) 1 clock output is disabled 765 cscr?hip select control register h'5f system control bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 str4 0 r/w 3 str3 0 r/w 0 str0 0 r/w 2 str2 0 r/w 1 str1 0 r/w counter start 0 0 tcnt0 is halted 1 tcnt0 is counting counter start 3 0 tcnt3 is halted 1 tcnt3 is counting counter start 1 0 tcnt1 is halted 1 tcnt1 is counting counter start 2 0 tcnt2 is halted 1 tcnt2 is counting counter start 4 0 tcnt4 is halted 1 tcnt4 is counting bit initial value read/write 7 cs7e 0 r/w 6 cs6e 0 r/w 5 cs5e 0 r/w 4 cs4e 0 r/w 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 chip select 7 to 4 enable (n = 7 to 4) output of chip select signal csn is disabled (initial value) output of chip select signal csn is enabled bit n 0 1 description csne 766 tstr?imer start register h'60 itu (all channels) tsnc?imer synchro register h'61 itu (all channels) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 sync4 0 r/w 3 sync3 0 r/w 0 sync0 0 r/w 2 sync2 0 r/w 1 sync1 0 r/w timer sync 0 0 tcnt0 operates independently 1 tcnt0 is synchronized timer sync 3 0 tcnt3 operates independently 1 tcnt3 is synchronized timer sync 1 0 tcnt1 operates independently 1 tcnt1 is synchronized timer sync 2 0 tcnt2 operates independently 1 tcnt2 is synchronized timer sync 4 0 tcnt4 operates independently 1 tcnt4 is synchronized 767 tmdr?imer mode register h'62 itu (all channels) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 mdf 0 r/w 5 fdir 0 r/w 4 pwm4 0 r/w 3 pwm3 0 r/w 0 pwm0 0 r/w 2 pwm2 0 r/w 1 pwm1 0 r/w pwm mode 0 0 channel 0 operates normally 1 channel 0 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 3 0 channel 3 operates normally 1 channel 3 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 1 0 channel 1 operates normally 1 channel 1 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 2 0 channel 2 operates normally 1 channel 2 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 4 0 channel 4 operates normally 1 channel 4 operates in pwm mode flag direction 0 ovf is set to 1 in tsr2 when tcnt2 overflows or underflows 1 ovf is set to 1 in tsr2 when tcnt2 overflows phase counting mode flag 0 channel 2 operates normally 1 channel 2 operates in phase counting mode 768 tfcr?imer function control register h'63 itu (all channels) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 cmd1 0 r/w 4 cmd0 0 r/w 3 bfb4 0 r/w 0 bfa3 0 r/w 2 bfa4 0 r/w 1 bfb3 0 r/w buffer mode a3 0 gra3 operates normally 1 gra3 is buffered by bra3 buffer mode b4 0 grb4 operates normally 1 grb4 is buffered by brb4 buffer mode b3 0 grb3 operates normally 1 grb3 is buffered by brb3 buffer mode a4 0 gra4 operates normally 1 gra4 is buffered by bra4 combination mode 1 and 0 channels 3 and 4 operate normally channels 3 and 4 operate together in complementary pwm mode channels 3 and 4 operate together in reset-synchronized pwm mode bit 5 0 1 bit 4 0 1 0 1 operating mode of channels 3 and 4 cmd1 cmd0 769 tcr0?imer control register 0 h'64 itu0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w timer prescaler 2 to 0 clock edge 1 and 0 counter clear 1 and 0 tcnt is not cleared tcnt is cleared by grb compare match or input capture synchronous clear: tcnt is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers bit 6 0 1 bit 5 0 0 1 tcnt clear source cclr1 cclr0 tcnt is cleared by gra compare match or input capture 1 rising edges counted both edges counted bit 4 0 1 bit 3 0 counted edges of external clock ckeg1 ckeg0 falling edges counted 1 tpsc2 1 tcnt clock source internal clock: internal clock: ?2 internal clock: ?4 internal clock: ?8 external clock a: tclka input external clock b: tclkb input external clock c: tclkc input bit 2 tpsc1 0 1 0 1 bit 1 tpsc0 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit 0 0 external clock d: tclkd input 1 0 770 tior0?imer i/o control register 0 h'65 itu0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w i/o control a2 to a0 ioa2 1 gra function gra is an output compare register gra is an input capture register ioa1 0 1 0 1 bit 1 ioa0 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit 0 0 1 0 bit 2 no output at compare match 0 output at gra compare match 1 output at gra compare match output toggles at gra compare match gra captures rising edge of input gra captures falling edge of input gra captures both edges of input i/o control b2 to b0 iob2 1 grb function grb is an output compare register grb is an input capture register iob1 0 1 0 1 bit 5 iob0 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit 4 0 1 0 bit 6 no output at compare match 0 output at grb compare match 1 output at grb compare match output toggles at grb compare match grb captures rising edge of input grb captures falling edge of input grb captures both edges of input 771 tier0?imer interrupt enable register 0 h'66 itu0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imiea 0 r/w 2 ovie 0 r/w 1 imieb 0 r/w input capture/compare match interrupt enable a 0 imia interrupt requested by imfa flag is disabled 1 imia interrupt requested by imfa flag is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable b 0 imib interrupt requested by imfb flag is disabled 1 imib interrupt requested by imfb flag is enabled overflow interrupt enable 0 ovi interrupt requested by ovf flag is disabled 1 ovi interrupt requested by ovf flag is enabled 772 tsr0?imer status register 0 h'67 itu0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imfa 0 r/(w) 2 ovf 0 r/(w) 1 imfb 0 r/(w) input capture/compare match flag a 0 [clearing condition] overflow flag *** read imfa when imfa = 1, then write 0 in imfa 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = gra when gra functions as an output compare register. tcnt value is transferred to gra by an input capture signal, when gra functions as an input capture register. input capture/compare match flag b 0 [clearing condition] read imfb when imfb = 1, then write 0 in imfb 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = grb when grb functions as an output compare register. tcnt value is transferred to grb by an input capture signal, when grb functions as an input capture register. 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000 or underflowed from h'0000 to h'ffff note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * 773 tcnt0 h/l?imer counter 0 h/l h'68, h'69 itu0 gra0 h/l?eneral register a0 h/l h'6a, h'6b itu0 grb0 h/l?eneral register b0 h/l h'6c, h'6d itu0 tcr1?imer control register 1 h'6e itu1 bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w up-counter 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w output compare or input capture register 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w output compare or input capture register 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. 774 tior1?imer i/o control register 1 h'6f itu1 tier1?imer interrupt enable register 1 h'70 itu1 tsr1?imer status register 1 h'71 itu1 tcnt1 h/l?imer counter 1 h/l h'72, h'73 itu1 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imiea 0 r/w 2 ovie 0 r/w 1 imieb 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imfa 0 r/(w) 2 ovf 0 r/(w) 1 imfb 0 r/(w) notes: *** * bit functions are the same as for itu0. only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. 775 gra1 h/l?eneral register a1 h/l h'74, h'75 itu1 grb1 h/l?eneral register b1 h/l h'76, h'77 itu1 tcr2?imer control register 2 h'78 itu2 bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w notes: bit functions are the same as for itu0. when channel 2 is used in phase counting mode, the counter clock source selection by bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 is ignored. 1. 2. 776 tior2?imer i/o control register 2 h'79 itu2 tier2?imer interrupt enable register 2 h'7a itu2 tsr2?imer status register 2 h'7b itu2 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. 777 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imiea 0 r/w 2 ovie 0 r/w 1 imieb 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imfa 0 r/(w) 2 ovf 0 r/(w) 1 imfb 0 r/(w) *** note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bit functions are the same as for itu0. * overflow flag [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf. [setting condition] the tcnt value overflows (from h'ffff to h'0000) or underflows (from h'0000 to h'ffff) 0 1 the function is the same as itu0. tcnt2 h/l?imer counter 2 h/l h'7c, h'7d itu2 gra2 h/l?eneral register a2 h/l h'7e, h'7f itu2 grb2 h/l?eneral register b2 h/l h'80, h'81 itu2 bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w phase counting mode: other modes: 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w up/down counter up-counter 778 bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. tcr3?imer control register 3 h'82 itu3 tior3?imer i/o control register 3 h'83 itu3 tier3?imer interrupt enable register 3 h'84 itu3 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. 779 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imiea 0 r/w 2 ovie 0 r/w 1 imieb 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. tsr3?imer status register 3 h'85 itu3 tcnt3 h/l?imer counter 3 h/l h'86, h'87 itu3 gra3 h/l?eneral register a3 h/l h'88, h'89 itu3 bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w complementary pwm mode: other modes: 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w up/down counter up-counter 780 bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w output compare or input capture register (can be buffered) 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imfa 0 r/(w) 2 ovf 0 r/(w) 1 imfb 0 r/(w) *** overflow flag 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 1 in ovf 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000 or underflowed from h'0000 to h'ffff bit functions are the same as for itu0 note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * grb3 h/l?eneral register b3 h/l h'8a, h'8b itu3 bra3 h/l?uffer register a3 h/l h'8c, h'8d itu3 brb3 h/l?uffer register b3 h/l h'8e, h'8f itu3 bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w used to buffer grb 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 781 bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w output compare or input capture register (can be buffered) 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w used to buffer gra 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w toer?imer output enable register h'90 itu (all channels) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 exb4 1 r/w 4 exa4 1 r/w 3 eb3 1 r/w 0 ea3 1 r/w 2 eb4 1 r/w 1 ea4 1 r/w master enable tioca3 0 tioca output is disabled regardless of tior3, tmdr, and tfcr settings 1 tioca is enabled for output according to tior3, tmdr, and tfcr settings master enable tiocb3 0 tiocb output is disabled regardless of tior3 and tfcr settings 1 tiocb is enabled for output according to tior3 and tfcr settings master enable tioca4 0 tioca output is disabled regardless of tior4, tmdr, and tfcr settings 1 tioca is enabled for output according to tior4, tmdr, and tfcr settings master enable tiocb4 0 tiocb output is disabled regardless of tior4 and tfcr settings 1 tiocb is enabled for output according to tior4 and tfcr settings master enable tocxa4 0 tocxa output is disabled regardless of tfcr settings 1 tocxa is enabled for output according to tfcr settings master enable tocxb4 0 tocxb output is disabled regardless of tfcr settings 1 tocxb is enabled for output according to tfcr settings 4 4 4 4 3 3 4 4 4 4 3 3 782 tocr?imer output control register h'91 itu (all channels) bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 r/w 3 1 0 ols3 1 r/w 2 1 1 ols4 1 r/w output level select 3 0 tiocb , tocxa , and tocxb outputs are inverted 1 tiocb , tocxa , and tocxb outputs are not inverted output level select 4 0 tioca , tioca , and tiocb outputs are inverted 1 tioca , tioca , and tiocb outputs are not inverted external trigger disable 0 input capture a in channel 1 is used as an external trigger signal in reset-synchronized pwm mode and complementary pwm mode 1 external triggering is disabled xtgd note: * when an external trigger occurs, bits 5 to 0 in toer are cleared to 0, disabling itu output. 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 * 783 tcr4?imer control register 4 h'92 itu4 tior4?imer i/o control register 4 h'93 itu4 tier4?imer interrupt enable register 4 h'94 itu4 tsr4?imer status register 4 h'95 itu4 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imiea 0 r/w 2 ovie 0 r/w 1 imieb 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu0. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 imfa 0 r/(w) 2 ovf 0 r/(w) 1 imfb 0 r/(w) *** notes: * bit functions are the same as for itu0. only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 784 tcnt4 h/l?imer counter 4 h/l h'96, h'97 itu4 gra4 h/l?eneral register a4 h/l h'98, h'99 itu4 grb4 h/l?eneral register b4 h/l h'9a, h'9b itu4 bra4 h/l?uffer register a4 h/l h'9c, h'9d itu4 bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu3. bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu3. bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu3. bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu3. 785 brb4 h/l?uffer register b4 h/l h'9e, h'9f itu4 tpmr?pc output mode register h'a0 tpc bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for itu3. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 g3nov 0 r/w 0 g0nov 0 r/w 2 g2nov 0 r/w 1 g1nov 0 r/w group 3 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 3 output values change at compare match a in the selected itu channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 3, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected itu channel group 2 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 2 output values change at compare match a in the selected itu channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 2, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected itu channel group 1 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 1 output values change at compare match a in the selected itu channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 1, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected itu channel group 0 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 0 output values change at compare match a in the selected itu channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 0, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected itu channel 786 tpcr?pc output control register h'a1 tpc bit initial value read/write 7 g3cms1 1 r/w 6 g3cms0 1 r/w 5 g2cms1 1 r/w 4 g2cms0 1 r/w 3 g1cms1 1 r/w 0 g0cms0 1 r/w 2 g1cms0 1 r/w 1 g0cms1 1 r/w group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 tpc output group 3 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 tpc output group 3 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 tpc output group 3 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 3 bit 7 0 1 bit 6 0 0 1 itu channel selected as output trigger g3cms1 g3cms0 tpc output group 3 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 15 15 15 15 12 12 12 12 group 2 compare match select 1 and 0 tpc output group 2 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 tpc output group 2 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 tpc output group 2 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 3 bit 5 0 1 bit 4 0 0 1 itu channel selected as output trigger g2cms1 g2cms0 tpc output group 2 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 11 11 11 11 8 8 8 8 group 1 compare match select 1 and 0 tpc output group 1 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 tpc output group 1 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 tpc output group 1 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 3 bit 3 0 1 bit 2 0 0 1 itu channel selected as output trigger g1cms1 g1cms0 tpc output group 1 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 7 7 7 7 4 4 4 4 group 0 compare match select 1 and 0 tpc output group 0 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 0 tpc output group 0 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 2 tpc output group 0 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 3 bit 1 0 1 bit 0 0 0 1 itu channel selected as output trigger g0cms1 g0cms0 tpc output group 0 (tp to tp ) is triggered by compare match in itu channel 1 1 3 3 3 3 0 0 0 0 787 nderb?ext data enable register b h'a2 tpc ndera?ext data enable register a h'a3 tpc bit initial value read/write 7 nder15 0 r/w 6 nder14 0 r/w 5 nder13 0 r/w 4 nder12 0 r/w 3 nder11 0 r/w 0 nder8 0 r/w 2 nder10 0 r/w 1 nder9 0 r/w next data enable 15 to 8 tpc outputs tp to tp are disabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are not transferred to pb to pb ) tpc outputs tp to tp are enabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are transferred to pb to pb ) bits 7 to 0 0 1 description nder15 to nder8 15 15 8 8 7 7 0 0 bit initial value read/write 7 nder7 0 r/w 6 nder6 0 r/w 5 nder5 0 r/w 4 nder4 0 r/w 3 nder3 0 r/w 0 nder0 0 r/w 2 nder2 0 r/w 1 nder1 0 r/w next data enable 7 to 0 tpc outputs tp to tp are disabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are not transferred to pa to pa ) tpc outputs tp to tp are enabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are transferred to pa to pa ) bits 7 to 0 0 1 description nder7 to nder0 7 7 0 0 7 7 0 0 788 ndrb?ext data register b h'a4/h'a6 tpc same trigger for tpc output groups 2 and 3 address h'ffa4 address h'ffa6 different triggers for tpc output groups 2 and 3 address h'ffa4 address h'ffa6 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 3 ndr11 0 r/w 0 ndr8 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w store the next output data for tpc output group 3 store the next output data for tpc output group 2 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 store the next output data for tpc output group 3 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 ndr11 0 r/w 0 ndr8 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w store the next output data for tpc output group 2 789 ndra?ext data register a h'a5/h'a7 tpc same trigger for tpc output groups 0 and 1 address h'ffa5 address h'ffa7 different triggers for tpc output groups 0 and 1 address h'ffa5 address h'ffa7 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr7 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 4 ndr4 0 r/w 3 ndr3 0 r/w 0 ndr0 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w store the next output data for tpc output group 1 store the next output data for tpc output group 0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 bit initial value read/write 7 ndr7 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 4 ndr4 0 r/w 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 store the next output data for tpc output group 1 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 ndr3 0 r/w 0 ndr0 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w store the next output data for tpc output group 0 790 tcsr?imer control/status register h'a8 wdt bit initial value read/write 7 ovf 0 r/(w) 6 wt/ 0 r/w 5 tme 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w overflow flag timer mode select it 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf 1 [setting condition] tcnt changes from h'ff to h'00 0 interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts 1 watchdog timer: generates a reset signal clock select 2 to 0 0 1 ?2 ?32 ?64 ?128 ?256 ?512 ?2048 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ?4096 1 timer enable 0 timer disabled 1 timer enabled tcnt is initialized to h'00 and halted tcnt is counting cpu interrupt requests are enabled note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * * 791 tcnt?imer counter h'a9 (read), wdt h'a8 (write) rstcsr?eset control/status register h'ab (read), wdt h'aa (write) bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w count value bit initial value read/write 7 wrst 0 r/(w) 6 rstoe 0 r/w 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 reset output enable 0 external output of reset signal is disabled 1 external output of reset signal is enabled watchdog timer reset 0 [clearing condition] ?reset signal input at res pin ?when wrst= "1", write "0" after reading wrst flag 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflow generates a reset signal note: only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. * * 792 rfshcr?efresh control register h'ac refresh controller bit initial value read/write 7 srfmd 0 r/w 6 psrame 0 r/w 5 drame 0 r/w 4 cas/ 0 r/w 3 m9/ 0 r/w 0 rcyce 0 r/w 2 rfshe 0 r/w 1 1 self-refresh mode 0 dram or psram self-refresh is disabled in software standby mode 1 dram or psram self-refresh is enabled in software standby mode refresh cycle enable refresh pin enable psram enable, dram enable 0 refresh cycles are disabled 1 refresh cycles are enabled for area 3 address multiplex mode select 0 8-bit column mode 1 9-bit column mode we m8 strobe mode select 0 1 0 2 mode 1 2 mode can be used as an interval timer (dram and psram cannot be directly connected) psram can be directly connected illegal setting bit 6 0 1 bit 5 0 0 1 ram interface psrame drame dram can be directly connected 1 refresh signal output at the pin is disabled refresh signal output at the pin is enabled rfsh rfsh we cas 793 rtmcsr?efresh timer control/status register h'ad refresh controller bit initial value read/write 7 cmf 0 r/(w) 6 cmie 0 r/w 5 cks2 0 r/w 4 cks1 0 r/w 3 cks0 0 r/w 0 1 2 1 1 1 compare match flag compare match interrupt enable 0 [clearing condition] read cmf when cmf = 1, then write 0 in cmf 1 [setting condition] rtcnt = rtcor note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * 0 the cmi interrupt requested by cmf is disabled 1 the cmi interrupt requested by cmf is enabled clock select 2 to 0 cks2 counter clock source cks1 bit 4 cks0 bit 3 bit 5 0 1 clock input is disabled ?2 ?8 ?32 ?128 ?512 ?2048 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 ?4096 1 * 794 rtcnt?efresh timer counter h'ae refresh controller rtcor?efresh time constant register h'af refresh controller bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w count value bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w interval at which rtcnt and compare match are set 795 smr?erial mode register h'b0 sci0 bit initial value read/write 7 c/a gm 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w parity enable clock select 1 and 0 cks1 clock source cks0 bit 0 bit 1 0 1 ?clock ?4 clock ?16 clock ?64 clock 0 0 1 1 7 o/ 0 r/w e 0 parity bit is not added or checked 1 parity bit is added and checked parity mode 0 even parity 1 odd parity stop bit length multiprocessor mode 0 multiprocessor function disabled 1 multiprocessor format selected 0 one stop bit 1 two stop bits character length 0 8-bit data 1 7-bit data communication mode (when using a serial communication interface) 0 asynchronous mode 1 synchronous mode gsm mode (when using a smart card interface) 0 regular smart card interface operation 1 gsm mode smart card interface operation 796 brr?it rate register h'b1 sci0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w serial communication bit rate setting 797 scr?erial control register h'b2 sci0 bit initial value read/write 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w transmit interrupt enable 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is disabled 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is enabled receive interrupt enable 0 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are disabled 1 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are enabled transmit enable clock enable 1 and 0 cke1 multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 clock selection and output asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode bit 1 cke0 0 1 0 1 bit 0 receive enable synchronous mode 0 multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) 1 multiprocessor interrupts are enabled 0 receiving is disabled 1 receiving is enabled transmit-end interrupt enable 0 transmitting is disabled 1 transmitting is enabled 0 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are disabled 1 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are enabled internal clock, sck pin available for generic i/o internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output internal clock, sck pin used for clock output internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output external clock, sck pin used for clock input external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input external clock, sck pin used for clock input external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input 798 tdr?ransmit data register h'b3 sci0 bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w serial transmit data 799 ssr?erial status register h'b4 sci0 bit initial value read/write 7 tdre 1 r/(w) 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) 5 orer 0 r/(w) 4 fer/ers 0 r/(w) 3 per 0 r/(w) 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r ***** multiprocessor bit transfer transmit end 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting conditions] reset or transition to standby mode. te is cleared to 0 in scr and fer/ers is cleared to 0. tdre is 1 when last bit of 1-byte serial character is transmitted. read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre. the dmac writes data in tdr. multiprocessor bit parity error 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting condition] parity error: (parity of receive data does not match parity setting o/e bit in smr) reset or transition to standby mode. read per when per = 1, then write 0 in per. framing error (for sci0) 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting condition] framing error (stop bit is 0) reset or transition to standby mode. read fer when fer = 1, then write 0 in fer. error signal status (for smart card interface) 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting condition] a low error signal is received. reset or transition to standby mode. read ers when ers = 1, then write 0 in ers. overrun error 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting condition] overrun error (reception of next serial data ends when rdrf = 1) reset or transition to standby mode. read orer when orer = 1, then write 0 in orer. receive data register full 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting condition] serial data is received normally and transferred from rsr to rdr reset or transition to standby mode. read rdrf when rdrf = 1, then write 0 in rdrf. the dmac reads data from rdr. transmit data register empty 0 [clearing conditions] 1 [setting conditions] reset or transition to standby mode. te is 0 in scr data is transferred from tdr to tsr, enabling new data to be written in tdr. read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre. the dmac writes data in tdr. 0 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0 1 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 0 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 1 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * 800 rdr?eceive data register h'b5 sci0 scmr?mart card mode register h'b6 sci0 bit initial value read/write 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 0 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r serial receive data bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 1 smart card interface mode select 0 smart card interface function is disabled (initial value) 1 smart card interface function is enabled smart card data invert 0 unmodified tdr contents are transmitted (initial value) received data is stored unmodified in rdr 1 inverted tdr contents are transmitted received data are inverted before storage in rdr smart card data transfer direction 0 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first (initial value) received data is stored lsb-first in rdr 1 tdr contents are transmitted msb-first received data is stored msb-first in rdr 801 smr?erial mode register h'b8 sci1 brr?it rate register h'b9 sci1 scr?erial control register h'ba sci1 bit initial value read/write 7 c/ 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. ae bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. bit initial value read/write 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 802 tdr?ransmit data register h'bb sci1 ssr?erial status register h'bc sci1 rdr?eceive data register h'bd sci1 bit initial value read/write 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. bit initial value read/write 7 tdre 1 r/(w) 6 rdrf 0 r/(w) 5 orer 0 r/(w) 4 fer 0 r/(w) 3 per 0 r/(w) 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r ***** notes: * bit functions are the same as for sci0. only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bit initial value read/write 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 0 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 803 p1ddr?ort 1 data direction register h'c0 port 1 p2ddr?ort 2 data direction register h'c1 port 2 p1dr?ort 1 data register h'c2 port 1 bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 p1 ddr 1 0 w 7 6 p1 ddr 1 0 w 6 5 p1 ddr 1 0 w 5 4 p1 ddr 1 0 w 4 3 p1 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p1 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p1 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p1 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 1 input/output select 0 generic input pin 1 generic output pin bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 p2 ddr 1 0 w 7 6 p2 ddr 1 0 w 6 5 p2 ddr 1 0 w 5 4 p2 ddr 1 0 w 4 3 p2 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p2 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p2 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p2 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 2 input/output select 0 generic input pin 1 generic output pin bit initial value read/write 7 p1 0 r/w 7 6 p1 0 r/w 6 5 p1 0 r/w 5 4 p1 0 r/w 4 3 p1 0 r/w 3 2 p1 0 r/w 2 1 p1 0 r/w 1 0 p1 0 r/w 0 data for port 1 pins 804 p2dr?ort 2 data register h'c3 port 2 p3ddr?ort 3 data direction register h'c4 port 3 p4ddr?ort 4 data direction register h'c5 port 4 bit initial value read/write 7 p2 0 r/w 7 6 p2 0 r/w 6 5 p2 0 r/w 5 4 p2 0 r/w 4 3 p2 0 r/w 3 2 p2 0 r/w 2 1 p2 0 r/w 1 0 p2 0 r/w 0 data for port 2 pins bit initial value read/write 7 p3 ddr 0 w 7 6 p3 ddr 0 w 6 5 p3 ddr 0 w 5 4 p3 ddr 0 w 4 3 p3 ddr 0 w 3 2 p3 ddr 0 w 2 1 p3 ddr 0 w 1 0 p3 ddr 0 w 0 port 3 input/output select 0 generic input pin 1 generic output pin bit initial value read/write 7 p4 ddr 0 w 7 6 p4 ddr 0 w 6 5 p4 ddr 0 w 5 4 p4 ddr 0 w 4 3 p4 ddr 0 w 3 2 p4 ddr 0 w 2 1 p4 ddr 0 w 1 0 p4 ddr 0 w 0 port 4 input/output select 0 generic input pin 1 generic output pin 805 p3dr?ort 3 data register h'c6 port 3 p4dr?ort 4 data register h'c7 port 4 p5ddr?ort 5 data direction register h'c8 port 5 bit initial value read/write 7 p3 0 r/w 7 6 p3 0 r/w 6 5 p3 0 r/w 5 4 p3 0 r/w 4 3 p3 0 r/w 3 2 p3 0 r/w 2 1 p3 0 r/w 1 0 p3 0 r/w 0 data for port 3 pins bit initial value read/write 7 p4 0 r/w 7 6 p4 0 r/w 6 5 p4 0 r/w 5 4 p4 0 r/w 4 3 p4 0 r/w 3 2 p4 0 r/w 2 1 p4 0 r/w 1 0 p4 0 r/w 0 data for port 4 pins bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 p5 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p5 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p5 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p5 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 5 input/output select 0 generic input 1 generic output 806 p6ddr?ort 6 data direction register h'c9 port 6 p5dr?ort 5 data register h'ca port 5 p6dr?ort 6 data register h'cb port 6 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 p6 ddr 0 w 6 5 p6 ddr 0 w 5 4 p6 ddr 0 w 4 3 p6 ddr 0 w 3 2 p6 ddr 0 w 2 1 p6 ddr 0 w 1 0 p6 ddr 0 w 0 port 6 input/output select 0 generic input 1 generic output bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 p5 0 r/w 3 2 p5 0 r/w 2 1 p5 0 r/w 1 0 p5 0 r/w 0 data for port 5 pins bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 p6 0 r/w 6 5 p6 0 r/w 5 4 p6 0 r/w 4 3 p6 0 r/w 3 2 p6 0 r/w 2 1 p6 0 r/w 1 0 p6 0 r/w 0 data for port 6 pins 807 p8ddr?ort 8 data direction register h'cd port 8 p7dr?ort 7 data register h'ce port 7 p8dr?ort 8 data register h'cf port 8 bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 3 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 3 2 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 2 1 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 1 0 p8 dd 0 w 0 w 0 4 p8 ddr 1 w 0 w 4 port 8 input/output se port 8 input/output select 0 generic input 1 generic output 0 generic input 1 output cs bit initial value read/write 0 p7 ? r * note: determined by pins p7 to p7 . * 0 1 p7 ? r * 1 2 p7 ? r * 2 3 p7 ? r * 3 4 p7 ? r * 4 5 p7 ? r * 5 6 p7 ? r * 6 7 p7 ? r * 7 read the pin levels for port 7 70 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 p8 0 r/w 4 3 p8 0 r/w 3 2 p8 0 r/w 2 1 p8 0 r/w 1 0 p8 0 r/w 0 data for port 8 pins 808 p9ddr?ort 9 data direction register h'd0 port 9 paddr?ort a data direction register h'd1 port a p9dr?ort 9 data register h'd2 port 9 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 p9 ddr 0 w 5 4 p9 ddr 0 w 4 3 p9 ddr 0 w 3 2 p9 ddr 0 w 2 1 p9 ddr 0 w 1 0 p9 ddr 0 w 0 port 9 input/output select 0 generic input 1 generic output bit modes 3, 4, 6 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 1, 2, 5, 7 32 10 4 7 pa ddr 1 0 w 7 6 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 6 5 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 5 4 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 4 3 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 3 2 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 2 1 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 1 0 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 0 port a input/output select 0 generic input 1 generic output bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 p9 0 r/w 4 p9 0 r/w 4 3 p9 0 r/w 3 2 p9 0 r/w 2 1 p9 0 r/w 1 0 p9 0 r/w 0 data for port 9 pins 5 809 padr?ort a data register h'd3 port a pbddr?ort b data direction register h'd4 port b pbdr?ort b data register h'd6 port b bit initial value read/write 0 pa 0 r/w 0 1 pa 0 r/w 1 2 pa 0 r/w 2 3 pa 0 r/w 3 4 pa 0 r/w 4 5 pa 0 r/w 5 6 pa 0 r/w 6 7 pa 0 r/w 7 data for port a pins bit initial value read/write 7 pb ddr 0 w 7 6 pb ddr 0 w 6 5 pb ddr 0 w 5 4 pb ddr 0 w 4 3 pb ddr 0 w 3 2 pb ddr 0 w 2 1 pb ddr 0 w 1 0 pb ddr 0 w 0 port b input/output select 0 generic input 1 generic output bit initial value read/write 0 pb 0 r/w 0 1 pb 0 r/w 1 2 pb 0 r/w 2 3 pb 0 r/w 3 4 pb 0 r/w 4 5 pb 0 r/w 5 6 pb 0 r/w 6 7 pb 0 r/w 7 data for port b pins 810 p2pcr?ort 2 input pull-up mos control register h'd8 port 2 p4pcr?ort 4 input pull-up mos control register h'da port 4 bit initial value read/write 7 p2 pcr 0 r/w 7 6 p2 pcr 0 r/w 6 5 p2 pcr 0 r/w 5 4 p2 pcr 0 r/w 4 3 p2 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p2 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p2 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p2 pcr 0 r/w 0 port 2 input pull-up mos control 7 to 0 0 input pull-up transistor is off 1 input pull-up transistor is on note: valid when the corresponding p2ddr bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). bit initial value read/write 7 p4 pcr 0 r/w 7 6 p4 pcr 0 r/w 6 5 p4 pcr 0 r/w 5 4 p4 pcr 0 r/w 4 3 p4 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p4 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p4 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p4 pcr 0 r/w 0 port 4 input pull-up mos control 7 to 0 0 input pull-up transistor is off 1 input pull-up transistor is on note: valid when the corresponding p4ddr bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). 811 p5pcr?ort 5 input pull-up mos control register h'db port 5 dadr0?/a data register 0 h'dc d/a dadr1?/a data register 1 h'dd d/a bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 p5 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p5 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p5 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p5 pcr 0 r/w 0 port 5 input pull-up mos control 3 to 0 0 input pull-up transistor is off 1 input pull-up transistor is on note: valid when the corresponding p5ddr bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w d/a conversion data bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w d/a conversion data 812 dacr?/a control register h'de d/a addra h/l?/d data register a h/l h'e0, h'e1 a/d bit initial value read/write 7 daoe1 0 r/w 6 daoe0 0 r/w 5 dae 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 d/a output enable 1 0da 1 analog output is disabled 1 channel-1 d/a conversion and da 1 analog output are enabled d/a output enable 0 0da 0 analog output is disabled 1 channel-0 d/a conversion and da 0 analog output are enabled d/a enable daoe1 0 1 description d/a conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 bit 7 daoe0 0 0 1 bit 6 dae 0 1 bit 5 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 1 1 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 1 bit initial value read/write 14 ad8 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 0 0 r 4 0 r 2 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 1 0 r 5 0 r 3 0 r a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result addrah addral 813 addrb h/l?/d data register b h/l h'e2, h'e3 a/d addrc h/l?/d data register c h/l h'e4, h'e5 a/d addrd h/l?/d data register d h/l h'e6, h'e7 a/d bit initial value read/write 14 ad8 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 0 0 r 4 0 r 2 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 1 0 r 5 0 r 3 0 r addrbh addrbl a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result bit initial value read/write 14 ad8 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 0 0 r 4 0 r 2 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 1 0 r 5 0 r 3 0 r addrch addrcl a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result bit initial value read/write 14 ad8 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 0 0 r 4 0 r 2 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 1 0 r 5 0 r 3 0 r addrdh addrdl a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result 814 adcr?/d control register h'e9 a/d bit initial value read/write 7 trge 0 r/w 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 trigger enable 0 a/d conversion cannot be externally triggered 1 a/d conversion starts at the fall of the external trigger signal ( ) adtrg 815 adcsr?/d control/status register h'e8 a/d bit initial value read/write 7 adf 0 r/(w) 6 adie 0 r/w 5 adst 0 r/w 4 scan 0 r/w 3 cks 0 r/w 0 ch0 0 r/w 2 ch2 0 r/w 1 ch1 0 r/w * note: only 0 can be written, to clear flag. * channel select 2 to 0 ch2 1 single mode an an an an an an an ch1 0 1 0 1 channel selection ch0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 an 7 scan mode an an , an an to an an to an an an , an an to an 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 an to an 4 1 5 2 3 6 7 description group selection a/d end flag a/d interrupt enable a/d start clock select scan mode 0 [clearing condition] read adf while adf = 1, then write 0 in adf 1 [setting conditions] single mode: scan mode: 0 a/d end interrupt request is disabled 1 a/d end interrupt request is enabled 0 a/d conversion is stopped 1 single mode: scan mode: 0 single mode 1 scan mode 0 conversion time = 266 states (maximum) 1 conversion time = 134 states (maximum) a/d conversion ends a/d conversion ends in all selected channels a/d conversion starts; adst is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends a/d conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels, until adst is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode 816 abwcr?us width control register h'ec bus controller astcr?ccess state control register h'ed bus controller bit read/write 7 abw7 1 0 r/w 6 abw6 1 0 r/w 5 abw5 1 0 r/w 4 abw4 1 0 r/w 3 abw3 1 0 r/w 0 abw0 1 0 r/w 2 abw2 1 0 r/w 1 abw1 1 0 r/w initial value mode 1, 3, 5, 6 mode 2, 4, 7 area 7 to 0 bus width control areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas bits 7 to 0 0 1 bus width of access area abw7 to abw0 bit initial value read/write 7 ast7 1 r/w 6 ast6 1 r/w 5 ast5 1 r/w 4 ast4 1 r/w 3 ast3 1 r/w 0 ast0 1 r/w 2 ast2 1 r/w 1 ast1 1 r/w area 7 to 0 access state control areas 7 to 0 are two-state access areas areas 7 to 0 are three-state access areas bits 7 to 0 0 1 number of states in access cycle ast7 to ast0 817 wcr?ait control register h'ee bus controller wcer?ait-state controller enable register h'ef bus controller bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 wms1 0 r/w 0 wc0 1 r/w 2 wms0 0 r/w 1 wc1 1 r/w wait count 1 and 0 wc1 number of wait states wc0 bit 0 bit 1 0 1 no wait states inserted by wait-state controller 1 state inserted 2 states inserted 3 states inserted 0 0 1 1 wait mode select 1 and 0 wms1 wait mode wms0 bit 2 bit 3 0 1 programmable wait mode no wait states inserted by wait-state controller pin wait mode 1 pin auto-wait mode 0 0 1 1 bit initial value read/write 7 wce7 1 r/w 6 wce6 1 r/w 5 wce5 1 r/w 4 wce4 1 r/w 3 wce3 1 r/w 0 wce0 1 r/w 2 wce2 1 r/w 1 wce1 1 r/w wait-state controller enable 7 to 0 0 wait-state control is disabled (pin wait mode 0) 1 wait-state control is enabled 818 mdcr?ode control register h'f1 system control bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 0 4 0 3 0 0 mds0 ? r * 2 mds2 ? r 1 mds1 ? r ** note: determined by the state of the mode pins (md to md ). * mode select 2 to 0 20 md 2 0 operating mode mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 bit 2 md 1 0 1 bit 1 md 0 0 1 0 1 bit 0 1 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 0 1 0 1 0 1 819 syscr?ystem control register h'f2 system control bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 1 software standby 0 sleep instruction causes transition to sleep mode 1 sleep instruction causes transition to software standby mode standby timer select 2 to 0 sts2 0 1 standby timer waiting time = 8,192 states waiting time = 16,384 states waiting time = 32,768 states waiting time = 65,536 states waiting time = 131,072 states waiting time = 1,024 states bit 6 sts1 0 1 0 bit 5 sts0 0 1 0 1 1 illegal setting 1 bit 4 ram enable 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled nmi edge select 0 an interrupt is requested at the falling edge of nmi 1 an interrupt is requested at the rising edge of nmi user bit enable 0 ccr bit 6 (ui) is used as an interrupt mask bit 1 ccr bit 6 (ui) is used as a user bit 0 820 brcr?us release control register h'f3 bus controller iscr?rq sense control register h'f4 interrupt controller ier?rq enable register h'f5 interrupt controller bit modes 1, 2, 5, 7 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 3, 4, 6 7 a23e 1 1 r/w 6 a22e 1 1 r/w 5 a21e 1 1 r/w 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 brle 0 r/w 0 r/w 4 1 1 bus release enable address 23 to 21 enable 0 the bus cannot be released to an external device 1 the bus can be released to an external device 0 address output 1 other input/output bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 irq5sc 0 r/w 4 irq4sc 0 r/w 3 irq3sc 0 r/w 2 irq2sc 0 r/w 1 irq1sc 0 r/w 0 irq0sc 0 r/w irq to irq sense control 0 interrupts are requested when irq to irq inputs are low 1 interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at irq to irq 50 5 5 0 0 bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/(w) 6 0 r/(w) 5 irq5e 0 r/(w) 4 irq4e 0 r/(w) 3 irq3e 0 r/(w) 2 irq2e 0 r/(w) 1 irq1e 0 r/(w) 0 irq0e 0 r/(w) irq to irq enable 0 irq to irq interrupts are disabled 1 irq to irq interrupts are enabled 50 5 5 0 0 821 isr?rq status register h'f6 interrupt controller bit initial value read/write 7 0 6 0 5 irq5f 0 r/(w) * 4 irq4f 0 r/(w) * 3 irq3f 0 r/(w) * 2 irq2f 0 r/(w) * 1 irq1f 0 r/(w) * 0 irq0f 0 r/(w) * irq to irq flags bits 5 to 0 0 1 setting and clearing conditions irq5f to irq0f [clearing conditions] read irqnf when irqnf = 1, then write 0 in irqnf. irqnsc = 0, input is high, and interrupt exception handling is carried out. irqnsc = 1 and irqn interrupt exception handling is carried out. [setting conditions] irqnsc = 0 and irqn input is low. irqnsc = 1 and a falling edge is generated in the irqn input. (n = 5 to 0) irqn 50 note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * 822 ipra?nterrupt priority register a h'f8 interrupt controller interrupt sources controlled by each bit bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 ipra7 ipra6 ipra5 ipra4 ipra3 ipra2 ipra1 ipra0 interrupt irq 0 irq 1 irq 2 , irq 4 , wdt, itu itu itu source irq 3 irq 5 refresh chan- chan- chan- con- nel 0 nel 1 nel 2 troller iprb?nterrupt priority register b h'f9 interrupt controller interrupt sources controlled by each bit bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 iprb7 iprb6 iprb5 iprb3 iprb2 iprb1 interrupt itu itu dmac sci sci a/d source chan- chan- chan- chan- con- nel 3 nel 4 nel 0 nel 1 verter bit initial value read/write 7 ipra7 0 r/w 6 ipra6 0 r/w 5 ipra5 0 r/w 4 ipra4 0 r/w 3 ipra3 0 r/w 0 ipra0 0 r/w 2 ipra2 0 r/w 1 ipra1 0 r/w priority level a7 to a0 0 priority level 0 (low priority) 1 priority level 1 (high priority) bit initial value read/write 7 iprb7 0 r/w 6 iprb6 0 r/w 5 iprb5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 iprb3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 iprb2 0 r/w 1 iprb1 0 r/w priority level b7 to b5, b3 to b 1 0 priority level 0 (low priority) 1 priority level 1 (high priority) 823 appendix c i/o port block diagrams c.1 port 1 block diagram figure c-1 port 1 block diagram reset r p1 ddr n mode 1 to 4 wp1d q d c reset r p1 dr n wp1 qd c rp1 mode 7 mode 1 to 6 internal data bus (upper) internal address bus wp1d: wp1: rp1: n = 0 to 7 write to p1ddr write to port 1 read port 1 p1 n external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 7 824 c.2 port 2 block diagram figure c-2 port 2 block diagram reset r p2 dr n wp2 qd c reset r p2 ddr n wp2d qd c reset r p2 pcr n wp2p qd c mode 7 mode 1 to 6 internal data bus (upper) internal address bus p2 n rp2p rp2 wp2p: rp2p: wp2d: wp2: rp2: n = 0 to 7 write to p2pcr read p2pcr write to p2ddr write to port 2 read port 2 external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 7 mode 1 to 4 825 c.3 port 3 block diagram figure c-3 port 3 block diagram p3 n reset r p3 ddr n wp3d qd c reset r p3 dr n wp3 qd c rp3 mode 1 to 6 internal data bus (upper) wp3d: wp3: rp3: n = 0 to 7 write to p3ddr write to port 3 read port 3 mode 7 write to external address mode 7 hardware standby external bus released read external address internal data bus (lower) 826 c.4 port 4 block diagram figure c-4 port 4 block diagram p4 n rp4p rp4 wp4 wp4d wp4p reset reset reset qd r c p4 pcr n qd r c p4 ddr n qd r c p4 dr n wp4p: rp4p: wp4d: wp4: rp4: n = 0 to 7 write to p4pcr read p4pcr write to p4ddr write to port 4 read port 4 write to external address read external address internal data bus (upper) internal data bus (lower) 8-bit bus mode mode 7 mode 1 to 6 16-bit bus mode 827 c.5 port 5 block diagram figure c-5 port 5 block diagram p5 n rp5p rp5 wp5 wp5d wp5p reset reset reset qd r c p5 pcr n qd r c p5 ddr n qd r c p5 dr n wp5p: rp5p: wp5d: wp5: rp5: n = 0 to 3 write to p5pcr read p5pcr write to p5ddr write to port 5 read port 5 mode 7 mode 1 to 6 internal data bus (upper) internal address bus external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 7 mode 1 to 4 828 c.6 port 6 block diagrams figure c-6 (a) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 0 ) wp6d: wp6: rp6: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 rp6 input wp6d reset qd r c p6 ddr 0 wp6 reset qd r c p6 dr 0 p6 0 internal data bus bus controller wait input enable bus controller wait mode 7 829 figure c-6 (b) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 1 ) p6 1 wp6d: wp6: rp6: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 wp6d reset qd r c p6 ddr 1 wp6 reset qd r c p6 dr 1 rp6 internal data bus bus controller bus release enable breq input mode 7 830 figure c-6 (c) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 2 ) wp6d reset qd r c p6 ddr 2 wp6 reset qd r c p6 dr 2 rp6 p6 2 wp6d: wp6: rp6: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 internal data bus bus controller bus release enable back output mode 7 831 figure c-6 (d) port 6 block diagram (pins p6 6 to p6 3 ) p6 n reset r p6 ddr n wp6d qd c reset r p6 dr n wp6 qd c rp6 mode 1 to 6 internal data bus wp6d: wp6: rp6: n = 6 to 3 write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 mode 7 as output rd output hwr output lwr output external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 7 mode 7 832 c.7 port 7 block diagrams figure c-7 (a) port 7 block diagram (pins p7 0 to p7 5 ) figure c-7 (b) port 7 block diagram (pins p7 6 and p7 7 ) p7 n rp7 rp7: read port 7 n = 0 to 5 internal data bus a/d converter analog input input enable p7 n rp7 rp7: read port 7 n = 6 and 7 internal data bus a/d converter analog input d/a converter analog output output enable input enable 833 c.8 port 8 block diagrams figure c-8 (a) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 0 ) p8 0 rp8 wp8d reset qd r c p8 ddr 0 wp8 reset qd r c p8 dr 0 wp8d: wp8: rp8: write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 internal data bus refresh controller output enable output interrupt controller input rfsh irq 0 mode 7 834 figure c-8 (b) port 8 block diagram (pins p8 1 , p8 2 , p8 3 ) p8 n wp8 reset qd r c p8 ddr n wp8 reset qd r c p8 dr n rp8 wp8d wp8: rp8: n = 1 to 3 write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 internal data bus bus controller output interrupt controller irq irq irq cs cs cs 1 2 3 1 2 3 input mode 7 mode 1 to 6 835 figure c-8 (c) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 4 ) p8 4 wp8d qd s c p8 ddr 4 wp8 reset reset mode 1 to 4 qd r c p8 dr 4 rp8 wp8d: wp8: rp8: write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 internal data bus bus controller output 0 cs mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 r 836 c.9 port 9 block diagrams figure c-9 (a) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 0 ) wp9d: wp9: rp9: write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 p9 0 rp9 wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr 0 wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr 0 internal data bus sci0 output enable serial transmit data guard time 837 figure c-9 (b) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 1 ) wp9d: wp9: rp9: write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 p9 1 rp9 wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr 1 wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr 1 internal data bus sci1 output enable serial transmit data 838 figure c-9 (c) port 9 block diagram (pins p9 2 , p9 3 ) wp9d: wp9: rp9: n = 2 and 3 write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 p9 n wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr n wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr n rp9 internal data bus input enable serial receive data sci 839 figure c-9 (d) port 9 block diagram (pins p9 4 , p9 5 ) wp9d: wp9: rp9: n = 4 and 5 write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr n wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr n rp9 p9 n internal data bus sci clock input enable clock output enable clock output clock input interrupt controller or input irq 4 irq 5 840 c.10 port a block diagrams figure c-10 (a) port a block diagram (pins pa 0 , pa 1 ) wpad: wpa: rpa: n = 0 and 1 write to paddr write to port a read port a pa n wpad reset qd r c pa ddr n reset qd r c pa dr n rpa wpa internal data bus tpc output enable tpc next data output trigger output enable transfer end output dma controller counter clock input itu 841 figure c-10 (b) port a block diagram (pins pa 2 , pa 3 ) wpad: wpa: rpa: n = 2 and 3 write to paddr write to port a read port a pa n rpa wpa wpad reset qd r c pa ddr n reset qd r c pa dr n internal data bus tpc output enable tpc next data output trigger output enable compare match output input capture counter clock input itu 842 figure c-10 (c) port a block diagram (pins pa 4 to pa 6 ) wpad: wpa: rpa: n = 4 to 6 write to paddr write to port a read port a pa n wpad hardware standby software standby external bus released reset pra wpa qd r c pa n ddr reset qd r c pa n dr internal address bus internal data bus bus controller tpc itu chip select enable tpc output enable next data output trigger output enable compare match output input capture address output enable cs 4 cs 5 cs 6 output 843 figure c-10 (d) port a block diagram (pin pa 7 ) wpad: wpa: rpa: write to paddr write to port a read port a pa 7 wpad hardware standby software standby external bus released reset pra wpa qd r c pa 7 ddr reset qd r c pa 7 dr internal address bus internal data bus bus controller tpc itu tpc output enable next data output trigger output enable compare match output input capture address output enable 844 c.11 port b block diagrams figure c-11 (a) port b block diagram (pins pb 0 to pb 3 ) pb n wpbd: wpb: rpb: n = 0 to 3 write to pbddr write to port b read port b reset qd r c pb ddr n wpbd reset qd r c pb dr n wpb rpb internal data bus tpc output enable tpc next data output trigger output enable compare match output input capture itu 845 figure c-11 (b) port b block diagram (pins pb 4 , pb 5 ) pb n wpbd: wpb: rpb: n = 4 and 5 write to pbddr write to port b read port b wpb rpb reset qd r c pb ddr n wpbd reset qd r c pb dr n internal data bus tpc output enable next data output trigger output enable compare match output tpc itu 846 figure c-11 (c) port b block diagram (pin pb 6 ) wpbd reset reset qd r c pb ddr qd r c pb dr 6 rpb wpb dmac dreq0 input tpc bus controller wpbd: wpb: rpb: write to pbddr write to port b read port b tpc output enable next data output trigger chip select enable cs 7 outpu internal data bus 6 pb 6 847 figure c-11 (d) port b block diagram (pin pb 7 ) pb 7 wpbd reset reset qd r c pb ddr qd r c pb dr 7 rpb wpb dmac tpc wpbd: wpb: rpb: write to pbddr write to port b read port b tpc output enable next data output trigger internal data bus 7 adtrg input a/d converter dreq1 input 848 appendix d pin states d.1 port states in each mode table d-1 port states hardware software bus- program pin standby standby released execution, name mode reset mode mode mode sleep mode clock output t h clock output clock output reso ?t * tt t reso p1 7 to p1 0 1 to 4 l t t t a 7 to a 0 5, 6 t t keep t input port (ddr = 0) tt a 7 to a 0 (ddr = 1) 7 t t keep ? i/o port p2 7 to p2 0 1 to 4 l t t t a 15 to a 8 5, 6 t t keep t input port (ddr = 0) tt a 15 to a 8 (ddr = 1) 7 t t keep ? i/o port p3 7 to p3 0 1 to 6 t t t t d 15 to d 8 7 t t keep ? i/o port p4 7 to p4 0 1 to 6 8-bit bus t t keep keep i/o port 16-bit bus t t t t d 7 to d 0 7 t t keep ? i/o port legend h: high l: low t: high-impedance state keep: input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. ddr: data direction register bit note: * low output only when wdt overflow causes a reset. 849 table d-1 port states (cont) hardware software bus- program pin standby standby released execution, name mode reset mode mode mode sleep mode p5 3 to p5 0 1 to 4 l t t t a 19 to a 16 5, 6 t t keep t input port (ddr = 0) tta 19 to a 16 (ddr = 1) 7 t t keep i/o port p6 0 1 to 6 t t keep keep i/o port wait 7 t t keep ? i/o port p6 1 1 to 6 t t keep t i/o port (brle = 0) breq t (brle = 1) 7 t t keep ? i/o port p6 2 1 to 6 t t keep l i/o port (brle = 0) (brle = 0) h or back (brle = 1) (brle = 1) 7 t t keep ? i/o port p6 6 to p6 3 1 to 6 h * 3 tt t as , rd , hwr , lwr 7 t t keep ? i/o port p7 7 to p7 0 1 to 7 t t t t * input port p8 0 1 to 6 t t keep keep i/o port (rfshe = 0) (rfshe = 0) (rfshe = 0) rfsh h or rfsh (rfshe = 1) (rfshe = 1) (rfshe = 1) 7 t t keep ? i/o port legend h: high l: low t: high-impedance state keep: input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. ddr: data direction register bit note: * the bus cannot be released in mode 7. 850 table d-1 port states (cont) hardware software bus- program pin standby standby released execution, name mode reset mode mode mode sleep mode p8 3 to p8 1 1 to 6 t t t keep input port (ddr = 0) (ddr = 0) (ddr = 0) or hhcs 3 to cs 1 (ddr = 1) (ddr = 1) (ddr = 1) 7 t t keep i/o port p8 4 1 to 6 l t t keep input port (ddr = 0) (ddr = 0) (ddr = 0) l h or cs 0 (ddr = 1) (ddr = 1) (ddr = 1) 7 t t keep i/o port p9 6 to p9 0 1 to 7 t t keep keep * 1 i/o port pa 3 to pa 0 1 to 7 t t keep keep * 1 i/o port pa 6 to pa 4 3, 4, 6 t * 4 th h cs6 to cs4 (cs output) (cs output) (cs output) t (address t (address a23 to a21 output) output) (address keep keep output) (otherwise) (otherwise) i/o port (otherwise) 1, 2, 5, 7 t * 4 t keep keep * 1 i/o port pa 7 3, 4, 6 l * 4 tt t a 20 1, 2, 5, 7 t t keep keep * 1 i/o port pb 7 , pb 5 to 1 to 7 t t keep keep * 1 i/o port pb 0 pb 6 3, 4, 6 t t h h cs7 (cs output) (cs output) (cs output) keep keep i/o port (otherwise) (otherwise) (otherwise) 1, 2, 5, 7 t t keep keep * 1 i/o port legend h: high l: low t: high-impedance state keep: input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. ddr: data direction register bit notes: 1. the bus cannot be released in mode 7. 2. output is low only for reset by wdt overflow. 3. during direct power supply, oscillation damping time is ??or ?? 4. during direct power supply, oscillation damping time differs between ?? ??and ?? 851 d.2 pin states at reset reset in t1 state: figure d-1 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during the t1 state of an external memory access cycle. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. as , rd , hwr , and lwr go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance state. the address bus is initialized to the low output level 0.5 state after the low level of res is sampled. sampling of res takes place at the fall of the system clock (?. figure d-1 reset during memory access (reset during t1 state) access to external address address bus cs 0 as rd (read access) hwr, lwr data bus i/o port res (write access) (write access) h'000000 high impedance high impedance high impedance high high high internal reset signal t1 t2 t3 cs 7 to cs 1 852 reset in t2 state: figure d-2 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during the t2 state of an external memory access cycle. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. as , rd , hwr , and lwr go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance state. the address bus is initialized to the low output level 0.5 state after the low level of res is sampled. the same timing applies when a reset occurs during a wait state (t w ). figure d-2 reset during memory access (reset during t2 state) address bus cs 0 rd (read access) hwr, lwr data bus i/o port res as h'000000 high impedance high impedance high impedance internal reset signal access to external address t1 t2 t3 (write access) (write access) cs 7 to cs 1 853 reset in t3 state: figure d-3 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during the t3 state of an external memory access cycle. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. as , rd , hwr , and lwr go high, and the data bus goes to the high-impedance state. the address bus outputs are held during the t3 state.the same timing applies when a reset occurs in the t2 state of an access cycle to a two-state-access area. figure d-3 reset during memory access (reset during t3 state) address bus cs 0 rd (read access) hwr, lwr data bus i/o port res as high impedance high impedance high impedance internal reset signal access to external address t1 t2 t3 (write access) (write access) h'000000 cs 7 to cs 1 854 appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode timing of transition to hardware standby mode (1) to retain ram contents with the rame bit set to 1 in syscr, drive the res signal low 10 system clock cycles before the stby signal goes low, as shown below. res must remain low until stby goes low (minimum delay from stby low to res high: 0 ns). (2) to retain ram contents with the rame bit cleared to 0 in syscr, or when ram contents do not need to be retained, res does not have to be driven low as in (1). timing of recovery from hardware standby mode: drive the res signal low approximately 100 ns before stby goes high. 855 t 1 3 10t cyc t 2 3 0 ns stby res stby res t 3 100 ns t osc appendix f product code lineup table f-1 h8/3048 series product code lineup package (hitachi product type product code mark code package code) h8/3048 prom 5 v hd6473048tf hd6473048tf 100-pin tqfp version version (tfp-100b) (ztat) hd6473048f hd6473048f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 3 v hd6473048vtf hd6473048vtf 100-pin tqfp version (tfp-100b) hd6473048vf hd6473048vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) mask 5 v hd6433048tf hd6433048( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp rom version (tfp-100b) version hd6433048f hd6433048( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 3 v hd6433048vtf hd6433048( *** )vtf 100-pin tqfp version (tfp-100b) hd6433048vf hd6433048( *** )vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) flash 5 v hd64f3048tf hd64f3048tf 100-pin tqfp memory version (tfp-100b) version hd64f3048f hd64f3048f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 3 v hd64f3048vtf hd64f3048vtf 100-pin tqfp version (tfp-100b) hd64f3048vf hd64f3048vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) h8/3047 mask 5 v hd6433047tf hd6433047( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp rom version (tfp-100b) version hd6433047f hd6433047( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 3 v hd6433047vtf hd6433047( *** )vtf 100-pin tqfp version (tfp-100b) hd6433047vf hd6433047( *** )vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 856 table f-1 h8/3048 series product code lineup (cont) package (hitachi product type product code mark code package code) h8/3045 mask 5 v hd6433045tf hd6433045( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp rom version (tfp-100b) version hd6433045f hd6433045( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 3 v hd6433045vtf hd6433045( *** )vtf 100-pin tqfp version (tfp-100b) hd6433045vf hd6433045( *** )vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) h8/3044 mask 5 v hd6433044tf hd6433044( *** )tf 100-pin tqfp rom version (tfp-100b) version hd6433044f hd6433044( *** )f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 3 v hd6433044vtf hd6433044( *** )vtf 100-pin tqfp version (tfp-100b) hd6433044vf hd6433044( *** )vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) note: ( *** ) in mask rom versions is the rom code. 857 appendix g package dimensions figure g-1 shows the fp-100b package dimensions of the h8/3048 series. figure g-2 shows the tfp-100b package dimensions. unit: mm figure g-1 package dimensions (fp-100b) 858 0.10 16.0 0.3 1.0 0.5 0.2 16.0 0.3 3.05 max 75 51 50 26 1 25 76 100 14 0 ?8 0.5 0.08 m 0.22 0.05 2.70 0.17 0.05 0.12 +0.13 ?.12 1.0 0.20 0.04 0.15 0.04 dimension including the plating thickness base material dimension unit: mm figure g-2 package dimensions (tfp-100b) 859 16.0 0.2 14 0.08 0.10 0.5 0.1 16.0 0.2 0.5 0.10 0.10 1.20 max 0.17 0.05 0 ?8 75 51 125 76 100 26 50 m 0.22 0.05 1.0 1.00 1.0 0.20 0.04 0.15 0.04 dimension including the plating thickness base material dimension h8/3048 series, h8/3048f-ztat tm hardware manual publication date: 1st edition, january 1995 3nd edition, october 1997 published by: semiconductor and ic div. hitachi, ltd. edited by: technical documentation center hitachi microcomputer system ltd. copyright hitachi, ltd., 1995. all rights reserved. printed in japan. |
Price & Availability of H83044
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |